Home

Model Q2AS(H)CPU(S1)User`s Manual

1. APPENDICES LED display data Head I O number for replacement RS422 transmission speed LED display data Head I O No for module replacement RS422 transmission speed Table App 3 4 Special register Explanation e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here e Stores the upper two digits of the head I O number of an I O module that is removed replaced in the online status with power on Default value 100H b15 to b8 b7 to bO 15th character from the right 16th character from the right 13th character from the right 14th character from the right 11th character from the right 12th character from the right 9th character from the right 7th character from the right 10th character from the right 8th character from the right 5th character from the right 6th character from the right 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right e Stores transmission speed of RS422 0 9600bps 1 19 2kbps 2 38 4kbps App 82 Corres ponding ACPU D9000 Set by When Set S When changed S When changed MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Corres Explanation Set by ponding Corresponding P When Set ACPU CPU D9000 SD254 NUMESE Of Indica
2. When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE mode the bit corresponding to the station number in the register becomes 1 Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode b6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when SD1212 is monitored its value is 64 40H Stores the local station numbers which are in error Device number b14 b13 b12 D1216 L16 L15 L14 L13 D1217 L32 L31 L30 L29 D1218 L48 L47 L46 L45 D1219 L64 L63 L62 L61 If a local station detects an error the bit corresponding to the station number becomes 1 Example When station 6 and 12 detect an error b5 and 11 in SD1216 become 1 and when SD1216 is monitored its value is 2080 820H L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 IL51 L50 L49 102 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA APPENDICES ACPU Special Register D9220 D9221 D9222 D9223 D9224 D9225 D9226 D9227 D9228 D9229 D9230 D9231 Special Register after Conversion D1220 D1221 D1222 D1223 D1224 D1225 D1226 D1227 D1228 D1229 D1230 D1231 Special Register for Modification Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O assignment error Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O assi
3. Dust proof cover To remove the dustproof cover from the I O module insert the tip of a flat head screwdriver into the hole as shown in the figure then pry the tab of the cover out from the hole using the screwdriver 19 14 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms E Si 19 7 Wiring 19 7 1 Wiring instructions Instructions for wiring of power cables or I O cables are given in this section 1 Wiring the power supply a When voltage fluctuates outside the specified value range connect a constant voltage transformer Constant Programmable voltage controller transformer b Use a power supply which generates minimal noise between wires and between the programmable controller and ground If excessive noise is generated connect an isolating transformer Alg o S S equipment Insulation Insulation transformer transformer Q gC Programmable i controller c When using a power transformer or an isolating transformer to reduce the voltage from 200VAC to 100VAC its capacity must be equal to or greater than the corresponding value shown in the following table Power Supply Transformer Module Capacity A1S61PN HOVAR n Stands for the number of power supply modules A1S62PN 110VAx n d Separate the programmable controller s power supply line from the lines for I O devices and power devices as shown below When there is much noise connect an isolating tran
4. MINI link master module Bits which correspond to faulty Bits which correspond to the signals of QnA errors made at parameters AJ71PT32 S3 are turned on AJ71PT32 S3 shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on Hardware error X0 X20 MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 Stores setting status Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded AJ71PT32 S3 D9004 D1004 is stored e When the AC power supply module is used 1 is added at D9005 D1005 occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when the power supply AC DOWN Number of times for is switched from OFF to ON counter AC DOWN e When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when the power supply is switched from OFF to ON Self diaghostic Self diaghostic error e When error is found as a result of self diagnosis error number is QnA error number stored in BIN code QnA QnA D9008 SD1008 App 95 APPENDICES Table App 3 11 Special register Special ACPU oe Special Register Special Register for after ET Register Modification Conversion F number at which external failure has occurred D9009 SD1009 SD62 Annunciator detection Operating nee Poe eae status of CP
5. ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 22 Keyword Registration ccceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 9 12 L Latch clear operation ccccseccseeeeeeeeaeeeaees 15 5 LACA FUNCION eer eee ene cee eee 10 5 Latch relay L ccccccseeceecceeceeesseeeeeeeesaees 4 2 Latch power failure compensation range 4 3 LED When the RUN LED is flashing 22 5 Flow chart used when ERROR LED is ON or WLS OA N pane A cub eacenes sande 22 6 Flow for actions when the BAT ARM LED is TUPMEG OWN csscedennsascectosbaceaeseseevantdsdedesetexaetens 22 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is TUNIC OFF oeenn ein ea 22 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned ORE e E E E A 22 4 LED Name sat risen citi aateicnieisatumda dene merateaieddaenodes 16 5 When the USER LED is ON 22 7 LED INdICAUON cc crntrarccersevacdsetcesecvudssiezcsedt aceendss 9 15 Lightning Surge abSorbet cccseceeeeeees 19 16 LINK direct AEVICE ccccccsecceeeceseeseeseeeeeeens 4 2 Link register W cccccccsecseecsseeseeesseeseeeess 4 2 Link relay B ccccsccceccceesseeceecseseeeseeseeees 4 2 Local device Data clear of local device cccee 12 27 Monitor test of local device function version B or EE A E E E E O TE 8 12 Use of local device Function version B or later A AEE A E A A A E EE App 151 Local pointer ccccsecceseeceeeseeeeeeeeceeesaeees 12
6. 1 Set the trace devices and trace conditions with GPP function a Setting the trace devices Set the devices at Trace Device Setting on the Program Trace screen Trace Device Setting x8 lt Do Not gt i1872 lt Do gt lt Do Mot gt J2 B166 lt Do gt o lt Do Not gt lemi ki e eni i ed e ed l l d ld SpacezSelect Esc Close 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A b Setting the trace conditions Set the trace conditions at Trace Condition Setting on the Program Trace screen Trace Condition Setting 1 Total Counts 1824 Times 2 Post Trigger Counts SO1 Times 2 Trace Point 1 Branch Instruction 2 Every Interruption 3 at Instruction Execution 3 Trigger Point fit Instruction Execution At Request of PDT Specify Detail Condition Execute c Y gt Cance 1 lt N gt Space Select Esc Close The following is an explanation of the screen above One of the following three settings can be made for the trace condition 1 Trace Counts 2 Trace Point or 3 Trigger Point 1 Trace Counts For the total count set the number of program traces executed from the trace start to the trace end For the count after the trigger set the number of program traces executed from execution of the trigger to the trace end The following shows the formula that sets range for these counts Count after trigger Stotal count 8192 2 Trace Point Set the po
7. 6 CC Link module a Be sure to ground the shield of the cable that is connected to a CC Link module close to the exit of the control panel or to any of CC Link stations within 30cm 11 81inch from the module or stations The CC Link dedicated cables are shielded cables As shown in the illustration below remove a part of the outer sheath and ground it to the widest possible area E dedicated cable Shield b Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable c Connect the CC Link module and each CC Link station to the FG line inside the control panel with the FG terminals as shown below Simplified diagram Master module Remote module Local module Blue DA DA DA TA we pA a Terminal DG Yellow resistor H LDG SLD SLD DG Terminal SLL CC Link resistor FG dedicated FG dedicated i cable cable Each power line connecting to the external power supply terminal or module power supply terminal must be 30m 98 43 ft or less Install a noise filter to the external power supply Use a noise filter with an attenuation characteristic equivalent to that of the MA1206 TDK Lambda Corporation Note that a noise filter is not required when the module is used in Zone A defined in EN61131 2 Keep the length of signal cables connected to the analog input terminals of the following modules to 30m or less Wire cables connected to the external power supp
8. E ay OUT Y11 Break point x002 a H m RST 0 Start step W O O a N OD _ Fig 8 4 Partial execution Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures to perform partial execution All operations are performed on Monitor test screen in the ladder mode debugging 1 Designate the execution start step break condition and execution operation with GPP function a Setting the execution start step Designate the step at which partial execution is started at 1 Partial Run on the Partial Run screen Partial Run ERREI T gt From Current Step 2 gt Start Step Pointer 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION b Setting the break condition Set the device status and break point at 2 Break Cond on the Partial Run screen Partial Run Bririereeeitny 1 gt From Current Step 2 gt Start Step Pointer 8 2 Break Cond 1 1 Device Device Current Value 1 4 gt Word Devicel 1 LK 2 gt Bit Device L l lt fT gt Break Point Step Pointer Step Pointer I Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer c 2L Always gt Always gt Always gt Always gt Always gt Always gt Always gt Always gt 1iTimes 3 i ee ee L tou ud O i ud l S N A AA A A a A Step Pointer Step Pointer an Time 1 Real time m p p pg pg pg g lmi bmd bl k kd el eh baal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 kl mma m gt Speci
9. SW2 OFF OFF OFF SW1 System protectProhibition of all writing and control directions to the CPU module ON System protection enabled OFF System protection disabled Settings required to operate the CPU module are made All switches are set to OFF before shipping System setting switch 2 SW2 Not used Fixed to OFF Peripheral protocol Select the type of the peripheral device connected to the peripheral interface of the CPU module When accessing an ACPU on another station from a peripheral device for ACPU set this switch to ON The setting becomes valid immediately after switching Peripheral device for ACPU 14 RS 422 connector Connector for connecting to a peripheral device 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES mms ELS EC A 15 3 Relationship between Switch Operations and LEDs LED Display 1 Writing programs with the CPU module in STOP state To write a program to the CPU module while it is in the STOP state use the following procedure 1 Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP RUN LED OFF 2 Set the RUN STOP key switch to RESET RUN LED OFF ee CPU module in RESET state 3 Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP gt RUN __ CPU module in RUN state RUN LED ON POINT 1 For the Q2ASCPU after writing a program except for writing to PLC during RUN set the CPU module to RESET and then to RUN 2 If the key switch is set to RUN without resetting the CPU module will remain in STOP state displayi
10. 1 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E Content dC tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4421 4422 EXTEND INST ERR The designation of an AD57 AD58 control instruction was wrong WCollateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed SFCP CODE ERROR No SFCP or SFCPEND instruction in SFC program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN CAN T SET BL The block number designated by the SFC program exceeds the range Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN CAN T SET BL Block number designations overlap in SFC program Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN CAN T SET S A step number designated in an SFC program exceeds the range Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN CAN T SET S Total number of steps in all SFC programs exceed the maximum Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information
11. 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 1 2 Abbreviations and Generic Terms Used in this Manual The following abbreviations and generic terms are used in this manual 1 Q2ASCPU cccecccccscessessesteseeeeeeees 2 Network module cccee 3 Ethernet module 00 4 Serial communication module 5 COCHIN iescesinepsivesncccnnedeadecscdteceus 6 GPP function cece eee 7 Personal computet 005 8 Peripheral device capable of GPP functions 9 Q6PU cceccccccsscccsecsessestssessesessee 11 Built in RAM 12 Memory Card cccccccseeeeeeees 13 ACPU cccccccscescssesseesesesseseseseeeees Abbreviation for Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU and Q2ZASHCPU S1 type CPU modules Abbreviation of A1SJ71QLP21 and A1SJ71QBR11 type MELSECNET 10 network modules Abbreviation of A1SJ71QE 71N B2 and A1SJ71QE 71N B5T type Ethernet interface modules Abbreviation of A1SJ71QC24 N A1SJ71QC24 N R2 type serial communication module Abbreviation of Control amp Communication Link Abbreviations for the SW IVD GPPQ type GPP function software package GX Developer IBM s PC AT or completely compatible computers Generic term for a peripheral device capable of running the GPP function software for example an IBM PC AT Abbreviation for Q6PU programming unit Generic term for a device that is connected to a QnACPU and can be used to operat
12. 13 E 11 feat Viewed with the front cover open Indicates the operating status of the CPU module ON Operating with the RUN STOP key switch set to RUN or STEP RUN OFF Stopped with the RUN STOP key switch set to STOP PAUSE or STEP RUN RUN LED Or an error that stops operation was detected Flickering The RUN STOP key switch was shifted from STOP to RUN after writing a program in the STOP state The CPU module is not in the RUN state To actually put the CPU module in the RUN state either move the switch one more time from RUN STOP RUN or use the RUN STOP key switch to perform reset operation Alternatively reset it with the RUN STOP key switch ON A self diagnostics error that does not stop operation other than a battery error has been detected ERROR LED When the parameter setting is made for operation to continue when an error occurs OFF Normal Flickering An error that stops operation has been detected ON An error has been detected by the CHK instruction or an annunciator F has come ON USER LED OFF Normal Flickering When latch clear is performed BAT ALARM LED A battery error occurred due to low battery voltage in the CPU module or memory card Normal BOOT LED Execution of me boot operation is completed No boot operation has been executed RUN STOP Starts stops sequence program operation L CLR Clears all data in the latch area to OFF or 0 which is set with parameters
13. No loosening There is an appropriate distance No loosening at connectors The LED is ON Faulty if it is OFF The LED is ON Faulty if it is OFF OFF Faulty if it is ON or flickering OFF Faulty if it is ON The LED is ON when input is ON and OFF when input is OFF Faulty other than the above The LED is ON when output is ON and OFF when output is OFF Faulty other than the above Retighten the terminal screw Correct the distance Retighten the connector fixing screw Refer to Section 22 2 2 Section 22 2 3 Refer to Section 22 2 4 Refer to Section 22 2 5 Refer to Section 22 2 7 Refer to Section 22 2 8 Refer to Section 22 2 8 21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 21 2 Periodic Inspection Inspection on items shown below should be conducted once or twice every six months to a year Conduct the inspection when the equipment is moved or modified or wiring is changed Table 21 2 Periodic inspection Check item Content of inspection Judgement Corrective action Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C Measure with i i d humidit When used in a panel Ambient humidity S PRAE SAEY 110 to S0 RH temperature inside gauge KI f the panel is the easure presence o i i Atmosphere j es There is no corrosive ambient temperature orrosive gases gas present 100 200VAC Change the power Line voltage check Measure voltage across 85 to 264VAC iil u 100 200VAC terminals PPly Retigh
14. ccccceeeeeeeeeees 22 11 22 2 11 Flow chart used when the CPU module is not Started Up cece ceeccseeceeeeseeeeaeeeaeees 22 13 22 3 Eror Code LIS sci es es eee ree es ae ce T 22 15 22l ENOC OdOS me ER on itp IC ne a 22 16 22 3 2 Procedure to read an error COG c cccccsccceeeceeeceeecceeecaeccaeecceeecaeecaeeeseeesaeesaeesseesenesaaeess 22 16 223 9 Emor cod list 1000 10 1999 mrasa a ieebesseveen es 22 17 2234 Enot code list 2000 10 2999 jasin sa e A 22 22 2299 Enor COGENISL SO0U 10 3999 sei E a ieceomaeee 22 28 22 3 0 Errorcode list 4000 16 4999 rnar A EEE 22 32 22 3 f Error code list 5000 T0 5999 aree a e pa E a a 22 41 2230 Emorcode list 6000 106999 arasen a a i 22 42 22 39 Eror code Sr 7000 16 T0000 J ren a a a e a 22 44 229 0 Canc lNO ENO S an a a a r ae a a that suid 22 45 ZO RESENO ENO ricsina a E E a a AR 22 46 22 5 Fault Examples with 1 OcMOGUICS oiied cndircac eciedycnsuus svadecsursdeSeedeeeate lt asendvaydenweveey lt des cacusncseclesdcetoncuee 22 47 22 5 1 Faults with the input circuit and the Corrective ACtIONS ccceccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeaeeees 22 47 229 2 FPAUIRS AN ING OULDUL CIFCUIE ozia0coecececosensiul ues aquuskseacenaaistedaesgusachasseesuchaetsaas 22 49 APPENDIX T INSTRUC HON EIS Teirra A E cea App 1 Appendix 1 1 Sequence Instructions cccccccceecceeecceeeceeceueecueeceeecueeaueesaueceueesueesseeseeeeaeess App 1 Appendix 1 2 Basic Instruc
15. 3 Remote reset field in the PLC system has to be set to Allow in parameter mode 4 The operation status can be RESET if the CPU module is stopped by remote operation When the RUN STOP key switch is set to RUN and multiple remote operation requests are received the CPU module first performs the operation with the highest priority The order of priority increases from 4 to 1 10 20 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 7 Terminal Operation This function sets the Q6PU programming unit in the terminal mode and performs the data communications shown below by using the instructions for peripheral devices of theQ2ASCPU 1 Display of messages from the Q2ASCPU on the display of the Q6PU 2 Storage of the Q6PU key input data in the devices of the Q2ASCPU In this way the Q6PU can be used as a terminal of the Q2ASCPU These functions are explained from the next section However for details on the instructions for peripheral devices refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 7 1 Operation for message display Specified character strings can be displayed on the Q6PU using the MSG instruction for peripheral devices Furthermore character strings can be displayed with GPP function by using the CPU messages of the Display menu in the PLC diagnostics mode Example Program to display TOSOU LINE READY as a message No 1 on the Q6PU when XO is turned ON AD List H MSG TOSOU LINE READY H OLD
16. 3 1 2 Configuration of peripheral devices capable of Q2ASCPU To RS 422 interface Q2ASCPU AC30R4 PUS cable Q6PU AC20R4 A8PU cable programming unit 2 RS 422 cable ere eae RS 232C cable IBM PC AT compatible software package used GX Developer SWUIIVD GPPQ Mounted to the base unit A1SJ71QC24 serial communication module To option board slot IC memory card j reader writer Option board Dedicated cable Q1MEM 000 memory card To RS 422 interface RS 232C IBM PC AT compatible RS 232C cable software package used GX Developer SWOIVD GPPQ 1 For details on the IC memory card reader writer setting refer to Operating Manual for the peripheral device capable of GPP functions 2 For connection to RS 422 interface use the RS 422 lt RS 232C converter 3 When connecting the serial communication module and the peripheral devices capable of GPP function see User s Manual of the serial communication modules REMARK 1 For details on the system configuration for each peripheral device refer to the Operating Manual for each 2 Q2ASCPU can connect a peripheral device capable of ACPU only when accessing an ACPU in another station via a MELSECNET 10 or MELSECNET data link However Q2ASCPU cannot be accessed In this case set SW1 of system setting switch 2 on the CPU module ON 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms EL SECON 3 2 System Configuration Overview a Q2Z2ASC
17. LA 7NI i eee n D V S D woe ee e S1 V S2 gt D e D 1 D V S 1 S D 1 D Logical sum soe feee oR feao e S1 1 S1 V S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 51 S2 D App 17 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Re STH 60w23 l l oxor P s oH e D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D Exclusive logical sum oxor _ s1 s2 0 H 81 1 S1 S2 1 2 D 1 D _BKXOR P s1 s2 0 n e S1 S2 gt D Not exclusive logical onxR P s oH e D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D sum e S1 1 1 4 S2 1 S2 D 1 D 51 52 D ane Si 82 0 gt H SS SS a Eee App 18 APPENDICES 2 Rotation instructions b15 D l bQ SM70D ror P 0 nH Rotates n bits to the right Right rotation b0 SM7OD RCR P Rotates n bits to the right SM700 b15 D RoL P D nH Rotates n bits to the left Left rotation SM700 b15 D Rotates n bits to the left D 1 D b31 to b16b15 to bO SM700 DROR P Dn Rotates n bits to the right Right rotation D 1 D b31 to b16b15 to bO SM700 Rotates n bits to the right D 1 D SM 700 b31 to b16b15 to bO Rotates n bits to the left Left rotation SM700 b31 to b16b15 to b0 LOONDE Rotates n bits to the left App 19 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 Shift instructions srrP Jofa jH
18. S Status change S Status change S During execution APPENDICES 9 Ato QnA conversion ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to QnA special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A to Q QnA conversion These special registers are all set by the system and cannot be set by the user program To set data by the user program correct the program for use of the QnACPU special registers However some of SD1200 to SD1255 corresponding to D9200 to 9255 before conversion can be set by the user program if they could be set by the user program before conversion For details on the ACPU special registers refer to the user s manual for the corresponding CPU and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals REMARK Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for QNACPU 2 For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used 3 Device numbers for which is specified do not function for QnNACPU App 94 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 11 Special register ial ACPU pene Special Register Register for after Register f Modification Conversion D9000 SD1000 e For the remote I O station the value of module I O No 10H 1 is D9001 SD1001 stored f If I O modules of which data are di
19. To use a simulation data file with the simulation function 2 To use the sampling trace function To use the status latch function 2 To use the program trace function 7 To store the breakdown history data in a file To execute programs of the maximum number of steps available for the Q2ASCPU When a program of the maximum capacity is stored in the built in RAM the parameter files and initial device values must be stored in a memory card 10 To use the SFC trace function 7 They will be read only in programs if they are set in the ROM area of the memory card 2 Can only be set in the RAM area of the memory card 14 2 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS MELSEC QnA 14 2 Selecting Memory Card Capacity Select a memory card capacity according to the types and sizes of files to be stored in the memory card The sizes of files are calculated using the formulas presented below Approximate File Capacity Unit Bytes MELSECNET NET 10 None 330 Parameters When MELSECNET Il B set Max 4096 per module Boot file Number of files x 18 67 Sequence program Number of steps x 4 122 Total commend data size of each device 74 e Setting with GX Developer The comment data size of 1 device is as follows Device comments 2 10250 x a 40 x b 10 Quotient of No of devices 256 is substituted for a and the remainder for b e Setting with SWOIVD GPPQ Although the size varies depending
20. is selected 2 Program Trace Data File to Save 1 gt Select from List 2 File Shown Right Drive 1 File Name SAMPLE7B 3 Trace Condition 1 gt Overwrite Conditions onto CPU s 2 Use Condition in CPU Execute c gt Cance LCN gt Space Select Esc Close The following is an explanation of the screen above The following settings can be made for Execute Trace amp Display Status 1 Operation 2 Program Trace Data and 3 Trace Condition a Operation Select one of the following 1 Register Start The trace is started The trace count is started 2 Suspension The trace is suspended The trace count and the count are cleared after the trigger To restart the trace select Register Start again 3 Display Status The trace statuses are displayed on the same screen 4 Trigger Execution The count is started after the trigger The trace is ended on reaching the designated count after the trigger b Program Trace Data Select one of the following 1 Select From List Data from among the program trace files in the memory card are selected 2 File Shown Right The drive number and program trace file name are set c Trace Condition Select one of the following 1 Overwrite Conditions onto CPU s The trace condition in an existing trace file is overwritten 2 Use Condition in CPU Program trace under the condition in the trace file designated in 2 Program Trace Dat
21. 1 SRAM type memory cards Model Name Q1MEM 64S Q1MEM 128S Q1MEM 256S Q1MEM 512S Q1MEM 1MS QIMEN 2MS 2MS SRAM memory capacity before 64k bytes 128k bytes 256k bytes 512k bytes 1M bytes 2M bytes formatting SRAM memory capacity after 59k bytes 123k bytes 250 5k bytes 506k bytes 1016 5k bytes 2036k bytes formatting Number of storable files Insertion removal PO 5000 times limit External dimensions 85 6mm 3 3inch x 54mm 2 1inch x 3 3mm 0 1inch Weight 0 04kg SRAM E PROM type memory cards Model Name Item QIMEM 64SE 64SE QIMEM 128SE 128SE QIMEM 256SE 256SE QIMEM 5125E 512SE QIMEM IMSE 1MSE Memory capacity before 32k bytes 64k bytes 128k bytes 256k bytes 512k bytes 32k 32kbytes 64k bytes 128k bytes 256k bytes 512k 512kbytes Memory capacity after 28 5k bytes 58 5k bytes 122 5k bytes 250k bytes 505 5k bytes 29k 2k bytes 59k bytes 123k 123k bytes 290 5k 250 5k bytes 506k So6k bytes Number of storable A an 128 SRAM Maximum number of writes to E7PROM 10 000 times 18 1 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES MELSEC QnA 2 SRAM E2PROM type memory cards Model Name Q1MEM 64SE Q1MEM 128SE Q1MEM 256SE Q1MEM 512SE Q1MEM 1MSE Insertion removal imit limit 5000 times External dimensions 85 6mm 3 3inch x 54mm 2 1inch x 3 3mm 0 1inch Weight 0 04kg 18 2 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES mms ELS EC A 18 2 Handling Memory Cards 1 Formatting memory c
22. 10 7 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 5 Clock Function The Q2ASCPU has a clock in the CPU module Since the clock data can be read in the sequence program it can be used for time control of the user system In addition the clock data can also be used for time control to the functions performed by the CPU module such as the breakdown history Clock operation by the clock function is continued with the battery when the programmable controller power is turned OFF or a instantaneous power failure lasting longer than the allowable momentary power interruption time occurs The CPU module system uses the clock data for a breakdown history When using a CPU module be sure to set the correct time first 1 Clock data The clock data is composed of the year month day hour minute second and day of the week used by the clock element in the programmable controller CPU as shown below rr e Saturday 2 Accuracy The accuracy of the clock function depends on the ambient temperature as shown below Ambient Temperature Accuracy daily variance 10 8 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 3 Writing clock data to the clock elements a Use the following procedure to write clock data to the clock elements 1 Writing from a peripheral device When using GPP function clock data can be written to the clock elements using the Set clock of the PLC menu in PLC diagnostics mode When using the Q6PU clock data can be written to the clo
23. 33 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA e By setting positive and negative bias values for the input value specified at S3 with S1 and S2 calculates the value for S1 bias and stores it to the word device specified at D ZONE P is1 s2 s3 D When S3 0 0 gt D When S3 gt 0 3 S2 D When S3 lt 0 S3 S1 D e By setting positive and negative bias values for the input value Zone cona specified at S3 1 S3 with S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 calculates the value for S1 bias and stores it to the word device specified at D 1 D fozone e s1213 o i When S3 1 S3 gt 0 3 1 S3 S2 1 S2 D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt 0 3 1 S3 S1 1 S1 D 1 D 14 Switching instructions e Changes the block No of an extension file register to the number specified at S Block No setting QDRSET P File name e Sets the name of a file to be used as a file register QCDSET P File name H e Sets the name of a file to be used as a comment register App 34 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 15 Clock instructions Clock element 0 0 onth Day Day of the week Cea Clock element DATEWR P Day of the week Clock data read write D Second Lower level Second Upper level App 35 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 16 Instructions for peripheral devices e Stores the message specified at S to the QnACPU This message is
24. 9 3 1 9 3 2 Interruption due to error detection Q2ASCPU can execute the interrupt program which is interrupt pointer 132 to 139 at error occurrence In the case of errors for which operation can be set to continue or stop in PC RAS setting in the GPP function parameter mode this function is only executed when Resume is set lf Pause is set for the error a stop error interrupt program 132 is executed The following shows the relevant errors Interrupt pointer Corresponding error message Stop all errors 134 UNIT VERIFY ERR FUSE BREAK OFF SP UNIT ERROR I35 OPERATION ERROR When the error occurs and the SFCP OPE ERROR system can continue the drive SFCP EXE ERROR mode Or it is an error where 136 ICM OPE ERROR continues stops can be se FILE OPE ERROR lected and continues is set EXTEND INS ERR PRG TIME OVER 139 CHK instruction Annunciator detect 140 to 147 Interrupt pointers 132 to 139 are prohibited for execution when the PLC power is ON or when the CPU module is reset To use 132 to 139 make the execution allowed with IMASK instruction REMARK 1 For details on interrupt pointers refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 2 For the IMASK instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions LED inidcation due to an error When an error occurs the LED located on the front of the CPU module turns on Refer to section 9 8 for the details
25. Check and correct the designated pointer Check and correct the designated step No Insert Delete the instruction after setting the CPU module to STOP Set the CPU module to STOP and then write the program Set the CPU module to the state for performing a remote request then reissue the request APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 4090H 4091H 4092H 4093H 409DH 409EH 409FH Error Online registration error during SFC STEP RUN Error Contents Too many block break points The number of registered block break points is incorrect Message Displayed at Peripheral Device MELSEC QnA Corrective Action Setting is out of range Check and correct the set number Setting is out of range Check and correct the set number Too many step break points The number of registered step break points is incorrect An attempt was made to perform a request during block continuous processing An attempt was made to perform a request during block forced execution processing An attempt was made to perform a request during step continuous processing An attempt was made to perform a request during step forced execution processing An attempt was made to perform a request during one step continuous processing An attempt was made to perform a request during one step forced execution processing An attempt was made to perform a request during block forced e
26. Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 Memory card A OFF Unusable SM600 usable flags ON lt Use enabled ON when memory card A is ready for use by user S Status change Memory card A OFF No protect e Goes ON when memory card A protect switch is enn protect flag ON _ Protect ON FAUS Change ee QnA OFF No drive 1 SM602 SM603 SM604 SM605 SM620 SM621 SM622 SM623 SM624 SM625 SM640 SM650 SM660 SM672 SM673 Drive 1 flag Drive 2 flag Memory card A in use flag Memory card A remove insert prohibit flag Memory card B usable flags Memory card B protect flag Drive 3 flag Drive 4 flag Memory card B in use flag Memory card B remove insert prohibit flag File register use Comment use Boot operation Memory card A file register access range flag Memory card B file register access range flag ON Drive 1 present OFF No drive 2 ON Drive 2 present OFF Not used ON In use OFF Remove insert ON ON enabled Remove insert prohibited Unusable Use enabled No protect Protect No drive 3 Drive 3 present No drive 4 Drive 4 present Not used In use Remove insert enabled Remove insert prohibited OFF File register not used ON File register in use OFF File register not used ON _ File register in use OFF Intern
27. MITSUBISHI QnA SERIES Model Q2AS H CPU S1 User s Manual S eee mm MLSEC a Mitsubishi Programmable Controller SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels AN WARNING and AN CAUTION A N WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage w ES SS SS Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under AN CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING Create a safety circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure the whole system will operate safely even if an external power failure or a programmable controller failure occurs Otherwise incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident 1 When creating an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit or an interlock circuit for incompatible actions such as forward reverse rotation or for damage prevention such as the upper lower limit se
28. Other station access in host network Peripheral device Ethernet Q2ASCPU D Access allowed x Access not allowed A Ethernet module has indication of the function version B Ethernet module does not have indication of the function version 2 Precautions a With combination of Ethernet module and MELSECNET 10 maximum 7 relays can be performed b The following shows other station access with or without setting for other station access e When other station access valid module is set the set module is used for relay e When other station access valid module is not set the relay is as follows When MELSECNET 10 is available 1st of MELSECNET 10 is relayed When MELSECNET 10 is not available 1st of Ethernet is relayed c When parameters are not registered in the Ethernet module the Q2ASCPU stores the default parameters in all AJ71QE71 When multiple Ethernet modules are installed settings are made in the order of 1st station and 2nd station and so on counting from the Q2ASCPU side App 156 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA d Table 8 2 shows operation of the Q2ASCPU for online offline of the Ethernet module Table 8 2 Operation of Q2ASCPU for online offline of Ethernet module Ethernet Ethernet Module Q2ASCPUOperation Parameter Status Online Communication with external device is performed with i the specified parameter Offline The Q2ASCPU does not show an error but communication with external device
29. RUN 5 BOOT 2 ERROR 6 CARD A memory card A 3 USER 7 CARD B memory card B 4 BAT ALARM 8 Empty e The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure b15 to A to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO l l 1 Operating status gt RUN of CPU STEP RUN Operating Operating status STOP S Every END status of CPU of CPU PAUSE processing 2 STOP PAUSE Instruction in remote operation program cause from RUN STOP switch Remote contact Remote operation from GX Developer serial communication etc Internal program instruction D9015 format QnA change D203 Note Priority is Error earliest first App 80 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 4 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU D9000 SD207 spog oy priority ranking SD209 e The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code as shown below Clock data year P15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bO Example SD210 Clock data oe 7 l July 1993 month l 9307H i_n _ Month e The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bo Example T T T T T SD211 Clock data pores aay 1 1 1 918t 10 a m S Request U D9026 QnA hour i 31104 SM A Fr Oos e The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code as shown below Cisceash b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to
30. Sample parameter setting of the GPP function for the above system configuration is shown below MELSECNET MINI Setting List Label st Batch Batch Rep Fault StaiCom Error Act 170 Refresh Refresh ly at RX Data TX Data Stop Detection Remote Bit Data Error 4 Master Unit 1 Unit lt s gt a BEUTE Cance 1 ND a a 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA The storage devices for the send received data for the present system example are as follows Address 100 111 112 113 114 115 a Storage device for received data b15 Station No 2 Station No 1 Station No 4 Station No 3 Master module Q2ASCPU b8 b7 bO Station No 6 Station No 5 Station No 8 Station No 7 Station No 10 Station No 9 Station No 11 Input area Used by the system 1 Set the device number X400 for bO of the station 1 as a received data storage device 2 The received data storage device occupies from X400 to X45F For the present system example since the total number of stations is odd it is occupied for one extra station 3 The device numbers of input modules connected are as follows Stations 1 to 4 AX41C gt X400 to X41F Stations 5and6 AJ35TB 16D gt X420 to X42F Stations 7and8 AX40Y50C X430 to X43F With respect to X440 to X45F they are simultaneously refreshed and set to OFF at any time Do not use X440 to X45F in
31. The setting range is 10ms to 2000ms in 10ms units 2 Resetting the watchdog timer The Q2ASCPU resets the watchdog timer during END processing When the Q2ASCPU is normally operating and executing the END instruction within the setting value of the watchdog timer the watchdog timer does not give time out WDT times out when the END instruction is not executed within the value set for the watchdog timer due to a Q 2ASCPU hardware error or an excessively long sequence program scan time REMARK scan time is the time taken for the execution of the sequence program starting from step 0 and ending at step 0 The scan time is not the same in every scan it differs according to the execution or non execution of the instructions used in the program Refer to Section 12 1 Sequence program Internal processing time Low speed execution type program C 0 Scan execution Scan execution type program A type program B 0 Scan time WDT reset f WDT reset NERE SCAN UNE Internal processing of a Internal processing of a programmable controller ei measured oy watengog programmable controller Fig 9 1 Resetting the watchdog timer 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 3 Processing when the watchdog timer times out When the scan time exceeds the set value of the watchdog timer a watchdog timer error occurs and the programmable controller operates as follows a All PLC outputs are turned OFF b The RUN LED on the front o
32. gt Memory card B error e In the alarm data can be held within the time specified for battery low e The error indicates the complete discharge of the battery e Same configuration as SD51 above e Turns to 0 OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter e Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC power 65 DC power of the rating during operation of the CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN code When any of X n 0 X n 20 X n 6 X n 26 X n 7 X n 27 and X n 8 X n 28 of the mounted MINI S3 turns ON the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON Turns to 1 ON when communication between the mounted MINI S3 and CPU module cannot be made b15 to b9 b8 to bO 8th 1st 8th 1st module module module module Information of 2 Information of 1 e Value stored here is the lowest station 1 O number of the module with the blown fuse The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module verification number took place App 78 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 2 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanat KPana When Set ACPU CPU D9000 SD62 Annuncia een e The first annunciator number F number to be detected is stored here gt monet D9009 QnA number number execution SD63 Mumper of es o e Stores the number of annunciators searched insine Noti D9124 QnA annunciators an
33. no C O 24V O 24G H O 5 100 240VAC o DLG Bt HS uncut SoqocopoS LO O 4100 240VAC Grounding wire Grounding wire __ gt Ground Ground 1 Use the thickest possible max 2 mm 14 AWG wires for the 100 200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connection terminals For wiring a terminal block be sure to use a solderless terminal To prevent short circuit due to loosening screws use the solderless terminals with insulation sleeves of 0 8 mm 0 03 inch or less thick The number of the solderless terminals to be connected for one terminal block are limited to 2 Terminal block Solderless terminals with insulation sleeves When connection is made between the LG and FG terminals be sure to ground the wire Failure to observe this instruction after connecting the LG and FG terminals will make the line susceptible to noise Note that each LG terminal has half the potential of the input voltage you might get an electric shock if you touch it A1S61PN and A1S62PN do not need to be switched as the are 100 to 240VAC wide range 19 18 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 19 8 Precautions When Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply Module UPS When onnecting a programmable controller system to an uninterruptible power supply UPS pay attention to the following When connecting an uninterruptible power supply UPS to the programmable control
34. the device mode of GPP function Device Initial Value Rangel First Device Last Device Comment 11 8 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 1 Program Execution Types Programs to be executed by the Q2ASCPU are stored in the built in RAM of the CPU module or in a memory card While all of the data can be stored as one program in the built in RAM or a memory card they can be also divided into several programs based on control units and stored When programming is undertaken by more than one designer all the programming process can be divided into several parts based on the processing units for each designer and all of the programming data can be stored in the built in RAM of a CPU module or a memory card Control by divided Control by one program multiple programs Program A Control contents A Program B Program data are divided by control contents l l l T Program n l I Control contents n l When dividing a program data into multiple programs set execution type for each program in program setting in the parameter mode of GPP function The Q2ASCPU executes each execution type program in order of setting There are four executions types Initial execution type Scan execution type Low speed execution type and Standby type Initial execution type Program executed only once when a program
35. 1 Make the settings on the simulation setting screen shown below 1 gt Simulation Settin 1 Input Refresh lt Yes gt 2 Output Refresh lt Yes gt 3 Link Memory 1 Access Unit Buffer Memory 2 gt Ignore 3 gt Depend on Simulation Data File Drive 0 File I 2 Simulation Range Confirmation Execute cY gt Cance L N gt Space Select Esc Close e The following shows details on the settings that can be made for each item Select whether inputs from external sources are input Input Refresh Yes No to the CPU module or not Select whether the operation results in the CPU module are output to external destinations or not Output Refresh Yes No Access Unit Link Memory Ignore Buffer Memory Depend on Simulation Data File Select the method of accessing each module 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A If Depend on Simulation Data File is selected for Link Memory Buffer Memory the access range for each module can be checked by checking the simulation range settings Simulation Rangel nD OD A GOT pi Gl D ak First Device Last Device Connent IILI N m mmmnmnmmnmnmnmmamnmmam E T ME E NE ME ME ME NE M kmi id d bad towed b al e ad d ered ani 6l G1 A A 41 6 Hl Ol G1 6 H m m m m m ee NOTE 1 Simulation can be performed only for STEP RUN 2 A memory card is required to carry out link memory buffer memory simulation using a simulation data file Set the
36. 118 APPENDICES b Devices that are outside the Q2ASCPU range are converted to SM1255 if they are bit devices and to SD1255 if they are word devices App 119 APPENDICES Appendix 4 3 Parameters The following parameter settings only are converted to Q2ASCPU use Latch range setting Converted to the latch clear key valid range The latch clear key invalid range is made blank no setting MELSECNET Il 10 setting For the MELSECNET setting when the ACPU is an AnN or AnA the number of modules are stored after conversion but the network refresh parameters are not converted I O assignment Only the head I O No is made blank all other items are converted MELSECNET MINI auto refresh setting If only I O assignment was set in the parameters and MELSECNET MINI auto refresh settings have not been made the MELSECNET MINI data link operates with the default values The following items are set for the Q2ZASCPU default If settings have been made make the settings again RUN PAUSE contacts No setting Output at STOP RUN Before operation Interrupt counter No No setting WDT setting 200ms Operation mode when STOP All items there is an error App 120 APPENDICES Appendix 4 4 Timer and Interrupt Counter Operations 1 Timer a The ACPU turns timer coils ON OFF on execution of the OUT instruction and updates timer current values and turns contacts ON OFF on execution of the END instruction In co
37. 2 quotient D D e Associates the character string specified at S to the character string er specified at D and stores the result to devices starting from D Character string data addition e Associates the character string specified at S2 to the character P S1 S2 D string specified at S1 and stores the result to devices starting from D pace e 0 BIN block addition e Adds n points of data from S1 and n points of data from S2 ina subtraction batch and stores the result to devices starting from D BIN data increment BNE BH 1 0 1 0 DEC D BIN data decrement App 11 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 Data conversion instructions BCD conversion recor sH am 0 L_ BIN 0 to 9999 BCD conversion BCD conversion 1 noo coe spo H FH ee BIN 0 to 99999999 BIN conversion ene TSTH BCD 0 to 999 BIN conversion BIN conversion COMODO Ses 1 0 BCD 0 to 99999999 _ BIN conversion oo D NP sjo L Real number 32768 to 32767 Floating point BIN conversion 41 8 BIN conversion D PNKP S 0 E Real number 2147483648 to 2147483647 Floating decimal point conversion rine s oH Ea PRN BIN Real number 32768 to 32767 floating point conversion 0 41 8 Floating decimal point conversion D441 D DFLT P S dD SD aE L Real number 2 147483648 to 2147483647 Conversion to 32 bit data e
38. AnS series and the AGSIM X64Y64 PROFIBUS A1SJ71PB92D PROFIBUS DPmaster module Special 32 points Interface TYP 0 3 64 inputs When all 64 outputs points ON Simulation A6SIM module X64Y64 DeviceNet Interface A1SJ71DN91_ Device Net master module Module Special 32 points A1SJ71UC24 MODBUS R2 S2 Interface Module A1SJ71UC24 R4 S2 RS 232Ctype MODBUS interface module Special 32 points RS 422 485type MODBUS interface module Special 32 points 64 64 Module A1SJ71PB96F PROFIBUS FMSinterface module Special 32 points 1 Discontinued model 2 This module can access devices within the device range of the AnNACPU cannot access file register Refer to Section 3 3 2 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current consumption Points points 5VDC 24VDC Remark A A Product Name Model Name Description I O Assignment Module Type Large size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 800 x 600 dots high intensity A985GOT Large size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots high intensity A975GOT Large size graphic operation terminal 16 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots high intensity 16 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots wide viewing angle 8 colors STN color 640 x 480 dots 2 colors STN monochrome 640 x 480 dots 32 Special 32 points A970GOT When bus 0 22 connected Large size graphic operation t
39. Before operation Before operation After 1 scan Section 10 4 No setting PO to P4095 QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 16 STB points 0 point to 64 points in 16 point units Section 5 3 No CO to C65535 I28 100ms I29 40ms QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals Sms to 1000ms in 5ms units QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals I30 20ms 1I31 10ms e Not used Not used e Use the same file name as the program QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals e Use the following file e Not used Not used e Use the same file name as the program Section 11 5 e Use the following file e Not used Use the same file name as the e Use the same file name as the program QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals program is e Use the following file e Not used Not used ee QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals e Use the following file 13 2 13 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC QnA Set the number of points latch range etc for each device 2000H Set the number of device points used C perne WDT setting Initial execution WDT setup monitoring time 3000H Set the watchdog timer for the CPU module Low speed execution monitoring time 3001H Set whether to detect the specified errors or not Set the operation mode in which the CPU module enters when an Operating mode when there is an error 3002H error is detected Display F No Annunciator Set the display mode that is activated
40. CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 22 17 RUN Off ERR Flicker QnA CPU Status Stop 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E Content dC tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status RAM ERROR The system RAM in the CPU module is faulty Collateral informationmmon 1105 Common Information e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset OPE CIRCUIT ERR The operation circuit for index modification in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationmmon 1200 e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset OPE CIRCUIT ERR The hardware logic in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationnmmon 1201 e Common Information e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset OPE CIRCUIT ERR The operation circuit for sequence processing in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationmmon 1202 e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset OPE CIRCUIT ERR The operation circuit for index modification in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationmmon 1203 e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed OPE CIRCUIT ERR Th
41. Computer link function 300 to 19 200bps ee et RS 232C 1 channel RS 422 485 1 channel A1SJ71QC24 Computer link amp printer function R2 RS 232C 2 channel 300 to 19 200bps A1SJ71QC24 Computer link function 300 to 115 200bps A1SJ71QC24 RS 232C 1 channel RS 422 485 1 channel N1 A1SJ71QC24 N R2 Description Temperature control module Computer link module Computer link amp printer function A1SJ71QC24 RS 232C 2 channel 300 to 115 200bps N1 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R22 Computer link function RC 232C 1 channel A1SJ71UC24 PRF 2 Computer link amp printer function RS 232C 1 channel A1SJ71UC24 R42 Computer link function multidrop link function RS 422 RS 485 1 channel A1SJ71E71N3 T2 10 BASE T Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71N Bo 10 BASE2 A1SJ71E71N B52 10BASE5 MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Points points Current consumption Remark I O Assignment SVDC 24VDC Module Type A A 0 33 32 Special 32 points 0 19 oe When the temperature conversion function of unused channels are not used in the heating cooling 0 39 Special 32 points 4 25y ee Special 32 points 0 24 Special 32 points 0 155 e Dedicated to QnACPU Special 32 points oy Special 32 points oy Special 32 points Special 32 points Special 32 points Special 32 points Special 32 points o o F x Special 32 points 0 57 3
42. D 1 D e Tan S 1 S D 1 D ATAN P S D e S 1 S D 1 D Degree gt radian conversion RAD P S D0 Degree radian e S 1 S D 1 D DEC P S BL Radian degree conversion SaR Js oH le Se S D 1 D conversion Exponent operation eSti S D 1 D Natural logarithm tOc P S D Log e S 1 S gt D 1 D resar P S D v S D 0 Integer part 1 Fraction part Square root Integer part Bosa so H WS 1 S5 D 0 1 App 31 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA asin slo H Integer part Fraction part BCOS P S ae J Integer part 2 Fraction part tan 9 gt 0 0 au 1 Integer part 2 Fraction part Integer part 2 Fraction part Gos 6 gt D 0 1 Integer part 2 Fraction part Integer part Fraction part Trigonometric function e Tan S 3 D 0 aane s0 1 2 App 32 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 13 Data control instructions e Processes the value specified at S3 to a data in the range defined by the upper and lower limits set at S1 and S2 and stores it to the word device specified at D When S3 lt S1 The value at S1 is stored to D When 1 lt S3 lt S2 The value at S3 is stored to D When S2 lt S3 The value at S2 is stored to D we SEIS e Processes the value specified at S3 1 S3 to a data in the range defined by the upp
43. JO Y JO B JO SB BLOM Max 50 points 2 Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JO W JO SW E EEE E Max 50 points c The program trace file stores the trace condition data and trace execution data to execute a program trace After a trace is started in a peripheral device capable of GPP functions it is continued until the set number of traces is completed d The trace results show the program name step No device status etc for each trace No Branchins TimeCms gt DA END lt FEND Stat S Step ENDCFEND gt Stat S Step END lt FEND gt Stat S 6 Step ENDCFEND Stat S 6 Step ENDCFEND gt Stat D O Te D O Oo O o D D o a i 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 Basic operation The following shows the basic operation for program trace The statuses during execution of the program trace function can be confirmed by monitoring special relays SM810 to SM815 and SM828 e Without suspension of the trace PTRA instruction exe l Trace start or cuted trigger executed Trace ended on completing SM811 is ON or SM813 is ON trace count after trigger TT l Trace count after trigger Morao i Total number of traces l l I SM810 Program trace preparation SM811 Start program trace SM812 Program trace execution under way SM813 Program trace trigger SM814 After program trac
44. N CAUTION Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions Wire the module correctly after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout Connecting a power supply of a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel The power supply modules may be heated resulting in a fire or failure Press crimp or properly solder the connector for external connection with the specified tool Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range If the screw is too loose it may cause a short circuit fire or malfunctions If too tight it may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a short circuit or malfunctions Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Failure to do so may cause a fire failure or malfunctions Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a distribution terminal block Furthermore the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection For the wiring methods refer to Section 19 7 START AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIO
45. OFF 1 scan L Set CPU module to RUN If the hardware error signal X n 0 or X n 20 or ROM error signal X n 8 or X n 28 of a master module for which auto refresh has been set comes ON the Q2ASCPU does not perform auto refresh processing When making the settings ensure that there is no duplication between receive data refresh devices and send data refresh devices 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 1 Parameter setting items setting ranges and contents of auto refresh as well as the buffer memory address of the master module which is used for exchanging data with the Q2ASCPU are shown below Set the parameters for the number of the master modules used I O signal from a master Buffer memory address ofa Item Setting range Description Default value master module Number of master 0 1 to 8 module s modules e Sets the total number of the master modules used Set 0 if auto refresh is not to be used Number of I O points of CPU e Sets the head I O number where the master module module is installed Follow the settings made in the I O Assign in the parameter Start I O No Model e MINI classification In I O mode occupies 32 points of MINI MINI MINI or MINI S3 MINI S3 S3 In expansion mode occupies 48 points 3 mode e Set only when MINI is set e In MINI S3 since the number of master module s initial ROMs becomes valid the setting is not necessary When the setting is executed
46. Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 CPU Status Continue RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E Content dC tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4630 4631 4632 4633 STEP EXE ERROR Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was already started up WECollateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed STEP EXE ERROR e Startup was attempted at the step that does not exist in the SFC program Or the step that does not exist in the SFC program was specified for end e Forced transition was executed based on the transition condition that does not exit in the SFC program Or the transition condition for forced transition that does not exit in the SFC program was canceled Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed STEP EXE ERROR There were too many simultaneous active steps in blocks that can be designated by the SFC program Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed STEP EXE ERROR There were too many simultaneous acti
47. Possible to set in the parameters Possible to setup one contact poin for each of RUN PAUSE from X0 to X1FFF Remote RUN PAUSE contact Year month day hour minute second day of the week automatic detection of the leap year Clock Function Accuracy 1 7 to 4 9s TYP 1 7s d at 0 C Accuracy 1 0 to 5 2s TYP 2 2s d at 25 C Accuracy 7 3 to 2 5s TYP 1 9s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period External dimensions 130 x 54 5 x 110 5 12 x 2 15 x 4 33 Depends on the power supply modules See Section Section 16 1 REMARK Indicates current consumption of the Q2ASCPU with function version B 9707B The following shows the current consumption values of theQ2ASCPU without the function version e Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 0 3A e Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 0 7A 5 IO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT A ELS EC A 5 VO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT This section explains the method for I O number assignment using the Q2ASCPU to enable data communications with a I O modules and a special function module 5 1 I O Numbers The I O number is used in the sequence program to input data from a input module and to output data to an output module The I O number is expressed as three digit hexadecimal numbers The I O numbers when all the I O modules are occupied in 16 points are indicated below x ofS x Oo e ISI ea 7 o 5 T O O 5 2D n oH D O O a x oTe LE x EITE x eY eY eA
48. Sold separately Type QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual Describes MELSECNET 10 overview specifications part names and settings Sold separately Type MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual Describes MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B overview specifications part names and settings Sold separately GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Describes the online functions of GX Developer including the programming procedure printing out procedure and debugging procedure Included with product Type SW2IVD GPPQ GPP Software package OPERATING MANUAL Offline Describes SW2IVD GPPQ s offline functions such as program creation printout method and file maintenance Included with product Manual No Type code IB 66606 13JF10 IB 66614 13JF46 SH 080810ENG 13JW11 IB 66616 13JF48 IB 66617 13JF49 SH 080040 13JF59 SH 080041 13JF60 IB 66541 13JE81 IB 66620 13JF77 IB 66350 13JF70 SH 080373 13JU41 IB 66774 134921 Manual No Manual Name Type code Type SW2IVD GPPQ GPP Software package OPERATING MANUAL Online IB 66775 Describes SW2IVD GPPQ s online functions such as monitoring and debugging methods 13922 Included with product Type SW2IVD GPPQ GPP Software package OPERATING MANUAL SFC Describes MWLSAP 3 system components performamce specifications functions system start up IB 66776 procedure SFC program editing
49. TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 22 2 4 When the RUN LED is flashing Flashing of the RUN LED of a CPU module is described below With the Q2ASCPU when the RUN STOP key switch is turned from STOP to RUN after writing a program in the STOP state the RUN LED flashes Then no CPU module error occurs but the operation stops To set the CPU module to RUN either turn the RUN STOP key switch to STOP then RUN again or reset the CPU module using the key switch The RUN LED turns ON 22 5 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 22 2 5 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ON flashing The flow when the programmable controller power is ON when the operation is started or when the ERROR LED of the CPU module is ON blinking during operation is described ERROR LED ON or flickering Check the error details at a peripheral device See Section 22 3 Hardware fault Consult Mitsubishi repre macs Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP Remedy the error See Section 22 3 Reset the CPU with the RUN STOP key switch Set the RUN STOP key switch to RUN Does the ERROR LED turn OFF NO YES Completed 22 6 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 6 When the USER LED is turned ON This section describes the case when the USER LED of CPU module is turned on With the Q2ZASCPU the USER LED comes ON when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or when an annunciator F turns ON When
50. Timer Interval i Slow 166 ms 5 Common Pointer from 2 Fast i lms TAA AER LLLE 1 Unit try 2 RUN PAUSE Contact RUN a 7 of Free Slots lt 16 gt PAUSE amp 0 8 System Interrupt 3 Allow Remote Reset 1 4 Yes 1 ist Interrupt Counter CI J 2 gt No 2 128 Const Intervall 166I ms 3 29 Const Intervall 46 lms 4 Output at STOP gt RUN 4 136 Const Intervall 26 Ins i c Prior to Calc 5 131 Const Intervall 16 I ms 2 gt fifter one Scan Execute c gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION 1 1 For MELSECNET MINI S3 By setting link information I O storage device etc of the MELSECNET MINI S3 to the parameters the module automatically communicates with the buffer memory area for the batch refresh send received data of the type A1SJ71PT32 MELSECNET MINI S3 master module abbreviated as the MINI master module hereafter The settings are made on the MELSECNET MINI setting in the parameter mode of GPP function Sequence programs can be created using the I O devices allocated to send received by the MELSECNET MINI S3 setting The FROM TO instructions are not required 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA POINT 1 3 4 Since up to 8 master modules can be set for auto refresh by the parameter auto refresh is possible for up to 8 modules When 9 or more modules are desired use the FROM TO instruction i
51. UNIT ERROR e The module other than special function module is specified by the special function module dedicated instruction Or it is not the corresponding special function module The module model specified by the special 2112 function module dedicated instruction and that specified by the parameter I O assignment is different Collateral informationmmon Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed STOP gt RUN CPU Status Stop Continue Read the individual information of the error using a peripheral device and check the special function module dedicated instruction network instruction that corresponds to the value program error part to make modification Set the module model by PLC parameter I O assignment according to the special function module dedicated instruction setting Example Although AJ71QC24N is used actually AJ71QC24 is set CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 2 The BAT ALM LED turns on at BATTERY ERROR 22 24 4 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action a SP UNIT ERROR 2113 2210 2300 2301 2302 2400 Data of special function module to be simulated is not set in the simulation date Collateral informationmmon e Common Information FFFFH fixed e In
52. WDT ERROR occurs and the Q2ASCPU stops its operation The WDT measurement error is 0 to 10ms Because of this when WDT t is set to 10ms a WDT ERROR may not occur even if the scan time exceeds the limit within the range of 10ms lt t lt 20ms 12 8 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 1 3 Low speed execution type program 1 Definition a The low speed execution type program is a program that is executed only in the surplus time of constant scan operation or in the preset low speed execution program execution time e When using a fixed scan time to give priority to control accuracy set the constant scan time in PLC RAS in the GPP function s parameter mode Setting range 5 to 2000ms Unit 5ms To ensure the execution time for low speed execution type programs in each scan and to make these programs operate properly set the low speed program execution time in PLC RAS in the parameter mode Setting range 1 to 2000ms Unit ims e In order to execute low speed execution type programs either the constant scan time or the low speed program execution time must be set b Set Slow as the execution type in program setting in the parameter mode c This execution type is used for programs that do not have to be executed every scan such as a program for printer output Execution of multiple low speed execution type programs If there are more than one low speed execution type program they are execute
53. YES 3 Can program be written NO Format the built in RAM Can program be written NO Consult Mitsubishi repre sentative 2 Check if the in out switch of the memory card is ON Check if the write protect switch is OFF Check if the memory is formatted Check the designation for the write destination Can program be written 22 10 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 10 Flow for actions when booting from a memory card is not possible The flow when the CPU module cannot be booted from a memory card is described Not able to perform boot operation ls there CPU error NO NO Is memory card eject insert switch on YES NO Is the system setup switch 1 SW5 on YES system setup switch NO 1 SWe2 to SW4 specifying ihe drive that stores the parameter file YES YES Remove the cause of the error NO YES Is it able to perform boot operation Turn the memory card eject insert switch on Is it able to perform boot operation Turn the system setup switch 1 SW5 boot setup on Is it able to perform boot operation NO YES NO YES Set the system setup switch 1 SW2 to SW4 to the drive in which the parameter file is stored NO YES Is it able to perform boot operation 22 11 22 TROUBLESHOOTING Is a file set with NO parameter boot file setup YES Is a file set with
54. ber to set the maximum simul taneous ON current of loads to within the specifications Check the rush current when the load is the maximum number of simultaneously ON points For problems when the input signal does not turn off or ourput load does not turn off perform troubleshooting by referring to the fault examples for the I O modules in Section 22 5 22 8 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 9 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written The flow when a program cannot be written to the CPU module is described Program cannot be written RUN STOP key switch set to RUN or STOP AMAN Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP STOP n vee _ Can program be written Is SW1 of system ON TurnOFF SW1 system protect setting switch 1 OFF or of the system setting switch 1 ON YES Orr NO Can program be written YES Cancel the password registra tion Is a password registered NO YES NO Can program be written YES Change the file attribute from writing prohibited Is the file attribute writing prohibited YES Can program be written Memory card 2 Which memory is used 3 Built in RAM Completed 1 22 9 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 1 e Sort files e Check the free capacity of the memory e Check the designation for the write destination
55. conversion Modify this OUT SM1255 to the PSCAN instruction which converts another sequence program to an scan execution type program Next add the GOEND instruction that executes a jump to the END instruction to the following step Next add the PSTOP instruction which converts another sequence program to a standby execution type program to the first step of the sequence program This enables execution of the subsequence program from the main sequence program and disables execution of the main sequence program when the subsequence program is executed e Main sequence program Before modification After modification PSCAN SUB SUB is the subsequence program file name MAIN is the main sequence program GOEND SET ssh file name e Subsequence program HI Before modification After modification SET 5m1255 PSCAN MAIN aMAIN is the main ji sequence program file name SUB is the subsequence program file name STOP SUB GOEND App 122 APPENDICES b To execute the main sequence program and subsequence program serially as one program modify the parameters and program as follows 1 Modification of parameters Set the file names in the order of main sequence program and subsequence program in program setting in Auxiliary setting in the parameter mode Select scan execution as the execution type for both
56. for settings Remote register RWr Word data Remote register RWw Word data 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 1 Settings for auto refresh The Table 7 1 shows the setting items for auto refresh parameters of the Q2ASCPU Table 7 1 List of auto refresh settings Setting station station Item Description Setting range han Number fmedues of modules The number of OC Link modulosisset number of CC Link modules is set ws ojojo Module head I O number The head I O number of a CC Link module is set 00004 to OFEOH ofofo eM Master station e L Local station e T Stand by station The loaded CC Link module type Master station local station stand by station Module t ala a is set e The device that stores the batch refresh received data from the remote station is set e When the head device number is set the points corresponding to the specified X M L B T ST C D number of stations Total number of stations are obtained to refresh all areas W R ZR The output module area is also refreshed e The settings are made in units of 16 points Receiving data batch refresh bit device Input data e The device that stores the batch refresh send data to the remote station is set Transmission data batch e When the head device number is set the points corresponding to the specified refresh bit device number of stations Total number of stations are obtained to refresh all areas Output d
57. ignore it Storage e X e Sets the devices to store the received send data for device for e M L B T ST C D W R ZR batch refresh X1000 to received data none e Specify the head number of the device X11FF 4 Bit device multiples of 16 e The total number of remote I O stations set starting from the first device number is occupied as a auto y refresh area Send data 8 points station x 64 stations 512 points Bit ne M L B T 8T C D w R zR fe P Y1000 to is none device Y11FF device Bit device multiples of 16 e Use of X Y remote I O range is recommended for devices e Sets the number of retries upon the communication N f umber O diosa tines errors occurrence S 5 times retries e Error is not output when the communication is restored within the number of the retries set 1 Link priority e Link access by MINI S3 has the priority During the link access FROM TO is caused to wait e Possible to read out the received data refreshed at the same timing Link priority CPU priority e The maximum wait me 0 3ms 0 2ms x number FROM TO Priority selection of access of separate refresh stations for the FROM TO Ea response instruction may be generated CPU priority Feat to the master module swop Baas specification buffer memory CPU priority Total number of remote I O 0 to 64 stations stations e The FROM TO instructions from a CPU module are given access priority Even during the link access it interrupts
58. in 1 ms Stores the minimum value of the scan time except that of an initial S Every END Point T PE units execution type program into SD524 and SD525 Measurement is made processing change in 100 ys units QnA Eem une alee aes SD524 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 S Every END a US SD525 Stores the ys place Storage range 0 to 900 processing Maximum scan D9019 SD526 time in 1 ms Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of an initial format ion t into SD52 D527 M ti Maximum scan units ne oo into SD526 and SD527 Measurement is made S Every END change a amg Maxim mscan SD526 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 procesaina SD527 es 100 us SD527 Stores the ys place units SD528 Ginetecan Current scan time Stores the current scan time of a low speed execution type program into in 1 ms units SD528 and SD529 time for low S Every END eGaaexceduen Measurement is made in 100 ws units rocessing QnA SD529 W Ni Current scan time SD528 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 i g YPE Poems in 100 us units SD529 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Minimum scan SD532 Wimm scan time in 1 ms Stores the EE value of the scan time of a low speed execution ime for leuk units type program into SD532 and SD533 S Every END Measurement is made in 100 ys units QnA eae Minimum scan SD532 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 pigcessing SD533 pe prog a
59. is provided on the following page 22 47 22 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC QnA Table 22 2 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions a Situation Cause Countermeasure e Use only one power supply e Connect revolving path preventive diode e Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies i figure below DC input Example The input signal does DC input not turn off Input module Input module lt Sample calculation for Example 4 gt When a switch with LED indicator giving leaking current of 3mA at maximum when 24VDC power is supplied to the A1SX40 A1SX40 Leakage current 3mA Input module 24VDC 1 1mA or less OFF current of the A1SX40 is not satisfied Hence connect a resistor as shown below A1SX40 g a Iz 1mA i Input impedance i 3 3kQ eee 24VDC 2 Calculate the resistance value R as shown below To satisfy 1mA or less OFF current of the A1SX40 connect a resistor which flows 2mA or more IR 1z Z Input impedance R Iz R lt Ta Z Input impedance ox 3 3 1 65 kQ Supposing that the resistance R is 1 5kQ the power capacity W of resistor R is W Input voltage R 26 47 1500 0 465 W 3 Connect a resistor of 1 5 k and 2 to 3 W to a terminal which may cause an error since the power capacity of a resistor is selected so that it will be 3 to 5 times greater than the actual power consumption 4 Also OFF voltage
60. long AC50TE 5 m 16 4 ft long AC100TE 10 m 32 8 ft long Terminal block cover for A1S I O module and special module A1STEC S and special module Slim type terminal block cover for A1S I O module A6TBX36 E For source type input module standard type A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 A6TBY36 E For source type output module standard type A1SY81 A1SY82 A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 A1SY81 A1SY82 A1SX71 A1SX82 S1 A1SX81 S2 A6TBXY36 A6TBXY54 A6TBX70 A6TBX36 E A6TBY36 E A6TBX54 E A6TBY54 E A6TBX70 E A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY42 A1SH42 S1 A6TE2 16SRN All terminal block connector type modules 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 5mm AWG20 IDC terminal block 2 erminal Dock Aqs ra32 3 DU terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 3mm 4415X41 51 S2 A1SX71 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY71 adapter AWG22 7 5 2 A1S TA32 7 IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0 75mm AWG18 Terminal block For 32 points ion into E t t inal f ee A1S TB32 es points conversion Into Europe type termina A1SX41 1 S2 A1SX71 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY71 A1S TA32 A6CON1 Soldering type straight out A6CON2 Solderless type straight out 40 pin connector Sink type 40p FCN A6CON3 Press fit type flat cable A6CON4 Soldering type straight diagonal out A6CON1E Soldering type straight out 3 pin D sub A6CON2E Solderless type straight out S t 37p D sub A6CON3
61. se o H a a bis gt bO SM700 O to Of n bit shift b15 bn bO e on BSFR P ssFr P 0 9H 1 bit shift T DH 1 word shift osu o nH App 20 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 4 Bit processing instructions D BSET P D n H Bit set reset Bew PH Te Ee Bit test Des Ee Bit designated at S2 S S OFF OFF Bit device batch reset jae a OFF OFF App 21 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 5 Data processing instructions Sre Je ie ee E Coinciding position D 1 Coinciding quantity Data search 32 bits S2 SM S1 ose Eo D Coinciding position D 1 Coinciding quantity sume so Bit check m i i 8 256 decode D Decode DECO 5 0 a S Decode 1 T R l 2 bits n 256 gt 8 decode Encode Encode D b to bO 7 segment decode 7SEG App 22 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA e Dissociates the 16 bit data specified at S into 4 bit units and stores fos P S 0 these data in the least significant four bits of n devices starting with the one specified at D n lt 4 e Associates the least significant 4 bit data of n devices starting from FUN P S1D a the one specified at S and stores this data in the device specified at D nS4 e Dissociates data of the devices
62. us 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 3 Write During RUN This is a function that writes a program to the CPU while the CPU module is in the RUN A CAUTION Read the manual carefully and confirm safety before changing the program during operation An operation error of write during run may result in damage to the machine or accident Application This function is used to change a program without stopping program execution Function Description 1 Write during RUN is possible from multiple peripheral devices capable of GPP functions with respect to one file In order for this designate the pointer for the programs to be written from the peripheral devices capable of GPP functions in advance This enables write safely during RUN using peripheral devices capable of GPP functions 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA The example below shows a case where peripheral device capable of GPP functions A performs write during RUN from PO and peripheral device capable of GPP functions B performs write during RUN from P1 The program enclosed in the frame __ is the program subject to write during RUN The machining program from P1 onward is obtained by write during RUN XO X2 The machining program from PO onward is obtained by write during RUN Serial communi cation module A1SJ71QC24 X3 X4 4 SET M10H X5 ENDH Peripheral device Peripheral device capable of GPP capa
63. 0 Otherwise internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to the external I O section CAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines or bring them close to each other Keep a distance of 100mm 3 94inch or more between them Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise if having read register R outside the allowable range with the MOV instruction the file register data will be FFFFH Using this as it is may cause malfunctions Pay attention not to use any out of range file register when designing sequence programs For instruction details refer to the programming manual When an output module is used to control the lamp load heater solenoid valve etc a large current ten times larger than the normal one may flow at the time that the output status changes from OFF to ON Take some preventive measures such as replacing the output module with the one of a suitable current rating Time from when the CPU module is powered on or is reset to when it enters in RUN status depends on the system configuration parameter settings and program size Design the program so that the entire system will always operate safely regardless of the time INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the user s manual Oth
64. 10 2 actual program scan time Retains the device data when resetting the CPU module Latch function Section 10 3 while the programmable controller power is OFF Sets the output Y status when the CPU module is Setting of the output status when switched from STOP to RUN Re outputting the outputs switching from STOP to RUN before STOP Outputting the outputs after performing operation Relationship between remote Explains the relationship between the CPU module operation and CPU module RUN RUN STOP key switch setting and operation when Section 10 6 6 STOP key switch performing remote operation Uses the Q6PU programming unit s indicator and key Terminal setting npu Section 10 7 input Section 10 4 Message display Displays messages on the indicator of the Q6PU Section 10 7 1 Key input operation Reads key input from the Q6PU Section 10 7 2 Monitors the access time intervals The time between l the acceptance of one CPU module access and the Reading module access time ni acceptance of the next CPU module access for special Section 10 8 intervals function modules network modules and peripheral devices For details of GPP function operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or the Type SWLIIVD GPPQ GPP Software package Operating Manual Online For details of the Q6PU operation refer to the Q6PU Operating Manual 10 1 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 2 Constant Scan 1 Constant scan I
65. 100 us SD533 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Maximum scan SD534 Maximum scan time in 1 ms Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of the first scan en ae units of a low speed execution type program into SD534 and SD535 S Every END Measurement is made in 100 ys units QnA speed execution Maximum scan SD534 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing SD535 type programs ae 7 100 us SD535 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 units END processing Stores the time from the end of a scan execution type program to the SD540 time in 1 ms start of the next scan into SD540 and SD541 END processing units Measurement is made in 100 us units S Every END QnA time END processing SD540 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing SD541 time in 100 us SD541 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Storage range 0 units to 900 Constant scan Stores the wait time for constant scan setting into SD542 and SD543 SD542 wait time in 1 ms Measurement is made in 100 ys units For the Universal model QCPU Constant scan units in 1s units S Every END Hnn wait time Constant scan SD542 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing SD543 wait time in 100 SD543 Stores the Ls place Storage range 0 to 900 For the Universal us units model QCPU storage range is 0 to 999 App 86 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 6 Special register
66. 10Vrms 50Hz 60Hz 30A m e Apply at 0 0 5 cycles and zero cross point e 0 250 300 cycles 50 60Hz e 40 10 12 cycles 50 60Hz e 70 25 30 cycles 50 60Hz Programmable controllers are open type devices devices designed to be housed inside other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel 20 2 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si A 20 1 2 Installation inside the control panel The programmable controller is open equipment and must be installed within a control panel for use This is effective not only for ensuring safety but also for shielding electromagnetic noise generated from the programmable controller 1 2 Each network remote station also needs to be installed inside the control panel However waterproof type remote stations can be installed outside the control panel Control panel a b Use a conductive control panel When attaching the control panel s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the panel and the bolt To ensure an electrical contact with the control panel mask the bolt areas of the inner plates when painting to allow conductivity over the widest possible area Ground the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance can be ensured even at high frequencies Ho
67. 12 1 7 END processing This is a post process to finish one cycle of operation processing of the sequence program and to return the execution of the sequence program to step 0 a b Self diagnostic checks are performed for fuse blown module verify or low battery Refer to Section 9 3 When data read write is requested from a peripheral device or an intelligent special function module computer link module serial communication module Ethernet module etc data are exchanged between the programmable controller CPU and the peripheral device or intelligent special function module Refresh processing is performed when a refresh request is issued from a network module or a link module When the trace point for sampling trace is set to each scan after execution of END instruction the status of the set device is stopred into the sampling trace area Refresh processing based on the MELSECNET MINI S3 automatic refresh function is performed Refer to Chapter 7 1 If the constant scan function see Section 10 2 is set the END processing time result is retained during the period between completion of END processing and start of the next scan 2 If a low speed execution type program see Section 12 1 3 is executed low speed END processing is performed separately from normal END processing In low speed END processing the special relays and special registers for low speed execution programs are set 12 23 12 OV
68. 127 PONEN F ressas a aA AEREN 4 2 Reinforced insulation 0 ccccccececeeeeeceeeees 20 16 Common pointer P ccsccceeees 12 17 13 1 Relationship between remote operation and CPU Interrupt pointer l 08 4 2 9 8 12 18 module RUN STOP key switch 0 10 20 Local pointer P c cccccsseeesseeeneseees 12 17 Relationship between Switch Operations and LEDs POWER SUPPEY MODULE O O Oaea TAE aaO aTa 15 4 External dimensions of power supply module Relevant Models aeree App 162 ade E E abaubntancauietents App 141 App 142 Remote latch clear cceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 10 19 Parts NAMES siitcsinasivroctasdaindenieciavwencanceinataneund 16 5 Remote operation 0cccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeesneees 10 12 Power supply module selection 16 3 Remote PAUSE ccc ccccecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 16 Precautions Remote RESET cccccccseeceeeseeeteeeeeeeees 10 18 CPU module handling precautions 16 4 Remote RUN PAUSE contacts 0000 4 3 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS eeen A 1 Remote RUIN ST OP ceecee 10 12 DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS osasin A 7 Remote STEP RUN onre 10 15 Installation precautions eee 19 9 Retentive timer ST cccccccccccsssseeeeessneeees 4 2 Precautions for using coaxial cables 20 5 RUN status operation processing 12 24 PRECAUTIONS FOR UTILIZING THE EXISTING MELSEC A SERIES
69. 16 bit multiplication division e S1 S2 quotient D remainder D 1 e S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D BIN 32 bit multiplication division e S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 quotient D 1 D remainder D 3 D 2 App 9 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA B P S DH D S gt D BHP BTH 81 82 0 BCD 4 digit addition subtraction s s o a STEH J 1 82 0 e D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D Dere _ SiS H 81 81 S241 2 D D BCD 8 digit addition subtraction DB P S DF D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D DB P 1 S2 D H S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D ate S 5H 1 x 62 gt 0 1 D BCD 4 digit multiplication division B P 81 2 D H S1 S2 quotient D remainder D 1 DB P S1 S2 D H S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 D 3 D 2 D 1 D BCD 8 digit multiplication division DB P S1 S2 D H S1 1 1 S2 1 S2 quotient D 1 D remainder D 3 D 2 PE P S DH e D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D Ere _ SH S2 DH 81 1 241 2 041 D Floating point data addition subtraction E P S DH e D 1 D S 1 S D D E P s1 s2 D H S1 1 1 S2 1 2 D 1 D App 10 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA E P S1 S2 D H S1 1 S1 x S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D Floating point data multiplication division Eze _ S1 S2 0H S1 1 1 S2 1
70. 17 LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVEG 20 1 20 13 low speed END procesSIng cceeeeees 12 14 Low speed execution type program 12 9 Low speed execution monitoring time 12 15 Low speed SCAN time cece cece aeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 14 Low speed timers T ccccecceeeeeeeeees 4 2 13 1 M Main Base Unlt cc ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeenes App 143 Main base unit for high speed access A38HB sete sia ee nionseeioetiy see E E A 17 2 Maximum number of extension stages 3 3 3 4 Memory capacity cccceeceeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneees 4 1 Memory card Handling Memory Cards ccccseeeeeeees 18 3 Installing the batterie to the memory card 18 7 Installing Removing A Memory Card 18 8 Memory card battery specifications 18 4 Memory Card Specifications 08 18 1 Part Names of Memory Card 000008 18 6 Microcomputer program cceeeeeeeees App 124 delete INStAN ATION cece ceecceececeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaes 19 1 1 PREIMOV Al viacescocsdecassctesece san dssiadwandtocdannedacde 19 12 Monitor Monitor function ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaees 8 2 Monitoring condition setting cccceeeeees 8 2 N Network module cccceccseeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeneees 1 2 NETWORK RELAY FROM ETHERNET MODULE FUNCTION VERSION B OR LATER App 155 Noise filter 0 ccc
71. 5 Monitor Target Setting under the ladder mode Option menu 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 6 Real numbers and character strings can be monitored The following shows an example of this type of monitoring ni a l SMOU ABCD DR J 5 FLT Hi23 Dis 16 TEND 1 biG lt 123 BHBRGSHOBR gt 8ms2CInterval 115ms gt Status gt CTarget CPU DC 7 The following shows the devices that can be monitored a Bit devices X FX DX Y FY DY M L F SM V B SB T Contact T Coil ST Contact ST Coil C Contact C Coil JO X JON JO B JO SB BLO S b Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JOW JO SW 8 The following shows the setting device under the detailed condition a Bit device X FX Y FY M L F SM V B SB T Contact ST Contact C Contact JO X JO Y JO B JO SB BLO S b Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JOW JO SW The following qualifications are possible with respect to the devices listed above e Digit designation for bit devices e Bit number designation for word devices 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA NOTE 1 When a monitoring is performed with a monitor condition set the file displayed at the device running GPP function is monitored Make sure that the file name used with GPP function is the same as the file name when monitoring
72. 59th character 61st character 63rd character App 91 S During execution APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 7 Debug Table App 3 9 Special register Corres Explanation Set by ponding Corresponding When Set ACPU CPU D9000 SD806 e Stores file name with extension from point in time when status latch was conducted as ASCII code b15 to b8 b7 to bO SD806 2nd character 1st character SD808 SD807 4th character 3rd character Status latch file Status latch file SD808 6th character 5th character S During QnA SD809 ti S0808 bii en SD809 8th character 7th character ee SD810 1st character of 2EH the extension SD811 SD811 3rd character of 2nd character of the extension the extension Stores step number from point in time when status latch was conducted SD812 SD812 Pattern 1 SD813 Block No SD813 SD814 Step No transition condition No SD815 Sequence step No L SD816 Sequence step No H SD814 D9055 pone Status latch Status latch step 1 Contents of pattern data S During format QnA step execution 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bitnumber change SD815 0 0 to ojol x Xu J Not used SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present SD816 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 App 92 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 8 Latch area Table App 3 10 Special register
73. A1SJHCPU S8 Make sure to short and ground the LG and FG terminals Filter attachment to the power cable is not required for the A1S63P product with the version F and later However use the 24VDC panel power equipment that conforms to the CE 2 Make sure to attach two ferrite cores to the power line Attach them as close to the power supply module as possible Use a ferrite core whose damping characteristic is equivalent to that of the RFC H13 produced by Kitagawa Industries Company LTD The following table lists the base units that can be used for compliance with the EMC directives Model Name Applicability A1S38HBEU Applicable Main Base Unit Extension Base Unit A1S5U1B A1S6 OB Applicable 20 9 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 20 1 6 Ferrite core Use of ferrite cores is effective in reducing conduction noise in the band of about 10MHz and radiated noise of 30 to 100MHz It is recommended to attach ferrite cores when the shield of the shielded cable coming out of the control panel does not work effectively or when emission of the conduction noise from the power line has to be suppressed We tested using ferrite cores from TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 and ZCAT2032 0930 and RFC H13 from Kitagawa Industries Company LTD Make sure to attach a ferrite core to a cable right before the cable is pulled out of the control panel If attached to an improper position the ferrite core does not wor
74. Appendix 4 8 Constant Scan Function Error Check Function ccccccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees App 126 Appendix 4 9 I O control MOU Ceziccis cts aco ads ccctaictdacoaetsias ice iolact enh Tadtad ead ate ice coal App 127 Appendix 4 10 Data Link SySteM cccccccccccseeceeeceeeeceeeceeeceeeeseeeceecceesseeceueeeueesseeseeeseeeeses App 128 Appendix 4 11 Index Register Processing cccccccscccseecceecceeeseeeceueceueecueeseuceeaeecseessuesaaeenas App 129 Appendix 4 12 CHK Instruction IX INStruCtiOn ccccccccccccecceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeesseeeseeeseeesseesaeeeees App 130 Appendix 4 13 Accessing File Register R with Instructions cccccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeees App 131 APPENDIX 5 ERROR CODES RETURNED TO THE REQUEST SOURCE IN GENERAL DATA PROCESSING ice sce es st thaceaecech scoaseas ersstacseocbestastesiwntaducngspeecasssounmes a App 132 Appendix o1 Eror COGCS sariei e a a a a ei acct a sete ake App 132 Appendix 5 2 Error Contents of Error Codes Detected by the CPU Module 4000H to 4FFFH AA EE EA EEA TA AE E SAE AASE E E E Moni E E E A A T App 133 APPENDIX 6 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS iccossecsiccaic vis eect iil A ce cmon Siew App 141 Appendix 6 1 Q2AS HICPU S1T module sesei e a i App 141 Appendix 6 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules ccccceeee ees App 142 APPENA O 3 Mal BaSe Ul baicccrs isscceresicibatennidulaceiae docenm Sinewras die wee tad enie
75. B Set within END s u Now processing Reset at user program App 55 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 6 Instruction Related Special Relays Table App 2 7 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 SM700 Carry flag 7a T e Carry flag used in application instruction M9012 SM701 Siiteiino ie numberct e Used for the PR PRC BINDA DBINDA BINHA Number of output uti oars andihe DBINHA BCDDA DBCDDA or COMRD instruction M9049 characters selection P e For details refer to the QOPU Q Mode QnACPU output pattern Programming Manual Common Instructions SM702 Searcimeithod Search next e Designates method to be used by search instruction 2 part search e Data must be arranged for 2 part search GES Asenin e The sort instruction is used to designate whether SM703 Sort order i g data should be sorted in ascending order or in U New QnA ON Descending order n descending order SM704 Blocleesmnancon OFF Non match found e Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for S Instruction New P ON All match the BKCMP instruction execution QnA SM707 f e When SM707 is OFF real number instructions are selection Or TSAI OFF Speed oriented processed at high speed ee e ON Accuracy oriented e When it is ON real number instructions are ss New AAR processing type nee processed with high accuracy SM710 CHK instruction a Conditions priority e
76. BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The heading descriptions in the following special register lists are shown in Table App 3 1 Table App 3 1 Special register oe Triton oto e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Set by Indicated only for registers set by system When set Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc System switching Set when system switching is executed e Indicat di ial register in ACPU Corresponding ACPU ndicates corresponding special register in M9000 When the contents are changed the special register is represented D90 O O format change e New indicates the special register newly added to the QnACPU Indicates the relevant CPU module Corresponding CPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g Q4AR Q2AS For details on the following items r
77. Battery low e Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter M9008 SM1008 Self diagnosis OFF No error e Tumed on when error is found as a result of self QnA error ON Error diagnosis Anninasta OFF NaF aumber detected e Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is ee one detection ON F number detected SEA amA f e Switched off when SD1124 data is cleared to zero App 59 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Corresponding CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when operation error occurs during execution Operation error OFF No error of application instruction meet ae SMOD flag ON Error e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter OFF Carry OFF ae eee l M9012 SM1012 SM700 Carry flag ON Carry ON Carry flag used in application instruction O om Datamemory lear OFF Ignored e Clears the data memory including the latch range other M9016 SM1016 x fla ON lt Outout claered than special relays and special registers in remote run g P mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on Datamemory clear OFF Ignored e Clears the unlatched data memory other than special M9017 SM1017 x relays and special egisters in remote run mode from flag ON Output claered computer etc when SM1017 is on User timing clock meted ue oe e Relay which repeats on off at intervals o
78. C Program A Program B Program C OVER DO ove Ka D0 prove KS D9 Hove KB Jos Hovey Ke o9 The local device data of program B is Device is set to the local displayed device monitor and program B is monitored i EX When DO to D10 are local devices D0 4 for X10 ON and D9 8 for X11 ON are displayed GX Developer or SWw2U GPPQ is installed 1 Peripheral device To perform monitor test of the local devices the following GPP function software packages are required e Personal computer GX Developer SW2IVD GPPQ type GPP function software package 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 2 Monitoring procedures of local device The following shows the procedures to be monitored local devices Connect the CPU module to peripheral devices Display the ladder in the ladder mode Change a mode to a monitor mode Press the ALT GRPH key Select 6 Monitor test Display the ALT GRPH menu Select H Local device _ Display the local device compatibility setting setting screen Set the local device compatibility Es to Execute Monitor the local device of the displayed program Set the local device monitor CO 1 3 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 3 Operation for CPU module and GPP function versions Table 8 1 shows the operation when the local devices are set to DO to D99 and when 3 programs with the program names of A B and C are performed in
79. DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 2 MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET 10 modules a Use double shielded coaxial cables MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD 5C 2V CCY for the MELSECNET modules such as A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71QLR21 A1SJ71QBR11 which uses coaxial cables Noise in the range of 30 MHz or higher in radiated noise can be suppressed by the use of double shielded coaxial cables Ground the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield Earth this section Refer to 1 for the grounding of the shield Always attach a ferrite core to the double shielded coaxial cable connected to the MELSECNET module In addition position the ferrite core on each cable near the outlet of the control panel The ferrite core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 is recommended Ethernet module Precautions to be followed when AUI cables 1 twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are used are described below a Be sure to ground the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type as shown in the figure below partly remove the outer sheath and ground the exposed shield section to the widest possible surface f AUI cable Shield Refer to 1 for the grounding of the shield Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the 10BASE T connectors Partly strip the outer sheath of the shielded twisted pair cable and ground
80. EA 14 2 14 2 Selecting Memory Card Capacity cccccccscccsscccscecseeceececscecaeeceueeceecaeecsueesueesseessueesueesseessaeess 14 3 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES 15 1to15 6 AOA SPECIFICATIONS orrera A NO EN 15 1 19 2 TP ALGINGING Sih ete saastetesat lated a a tide a bwetclneactiucaulellel 15 2 15 3 Relationship between Switch Operations and LEDs LED Display cc cccceecseeeeeeeeeeeees 15 4 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 16 1t0 16 6 16 1 SPOCINCAUONS aean o dnctuubondsleveds tan eai 16 1 16 1 1 Power supply module specifications ccc cceccccececececeeeceececeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesaaes 16 1 16 1 2 Power supply module Sel Ction cccccccssccceseccesececsececseeeceueeseueeseueeseseeseesenseeesseeeseseeenes 16 3 19 2 Precautions TOM Handing asese a a aa a A aa a a e aaa sees 16 4 Gc Part NAMES orena a a a etal Sone 16 5 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 17 1to1 7 9 17 1 BASE Unit SPECICATION SS wsssseccheecs sus sake cbs aa a a a a aaea 17 1 17 1 1 Main base unit for high speed access A1838HB A1838HBEU n nnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnnnnnnas 17 2 17 2 Extension Cable Specification LiStsiiccicccliieici ned eke oe I 17 3 17 3 Application Standards of Extension Base Unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B POO POG BD ersin a N aende te temer Nh aocy a a tation nei ee alne deca UN leDa Mics ees 17 4 174 Handing Precautions sacri Gets eriectanalattiiiei tana
81. ETE Nen QAR SM1736 completion flag ON Transfer completed SM1736 Block 25 of the corresponding data is SM1737 SM1737 Block 26 Completed SM1738 SM1738 Block 27 SM1739 SM1739 Block 28 SM1740 SM1740 Block 29 SM1741 SM1741 Block 30 SM1742 SM1742 Block 31 SM1743 SM1743 Block 32 SM1744 SM1744 Block 33 SM1745 SM1745 Block 34 SM1746 SM1746 Block 35 SM1747 SM1747 Block 36 SM1748 SM1748 Block 37 SM1749 SM1749 Block 38 SM1750 SM1750 Block 39 SM1751 SM1751 Block 40 SM1752 SM1752 Block 41 SM1753 SM1753 Block 42 SM1754 SM1754 Block 43 SM1755 SM1755 Block 44 SM1756 SM1756 Block 45 SM1757 SM1757 Block 46 SM1758 SM1758 Block 47 SM1759 SM1759 Block 48 App 70 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 14 Special relay Corres Explanation Set by ponding Corresponding When Set ACPU CPU M9000 a Turns ON only during one Transmission trigger or a scan when the transmission S status change end flag ON ee ena of the corresponding data is g App 71 APPENDICES mms NEL SEC n A APPENDIX 3 Special Register List The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the PLC For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules and remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as
82. Error common Error common on that slot information information e The I O slot 0 slot on the right side of the CPU slot of the main base unit is defined as the slot of Slot No 0 e The slot Nos are consecutively assigned to the slots of the base units in order of the main base unit and extension base units 1 to 7 e When the number of base unit slots has been set in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box the slot Nos are assigned for only the number of set slots When OFFFFH is stored into SD6 I O No the I O No cannot be identified due to overlapping I O No etc in the I O assignment setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Therefore identify the error location using SD5 2 File name Drive name Number Meaning Example File name SD5 ABCDEFGH IJK Li b15 to b8 b7 to bO File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 3 2EH ASCII code 3 characters Empty App 74 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 2 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanat A PUATAI When Set ACPU CPU 3 Time value set Meaning SD5 Time 14s units 0 to 9994s Time 1ms units 0 to 65535ms SD6 4 Program error location SD7 Number Meaning SD5 SD6 File name SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD8 SD9 Ext
83. Execution ypes eerie 12 1 Skip FUNCTION ceeeeeeeeeeeeceseceseesecereeseeereeeeeees 8 47 Program monitor list ccccccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeees 8 19 Low speed program execution time 13 3 Program Setting eee eeeeeeee eee eeee eee 12 1 Special Direct Devices cccececseesseteeeeeereerees 6 3 Program Trace FUNCTION cccceeeeeeeeeeees 8 48 Special Function Module Instructions App 42 Programming language seese 4 1 Special link register SW c cceccceccceseeresereees 4 2 Special link relay SB cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Q QnAS H CPU S1 Processing Time App 158 Index 4 Special module Processing for Data Communication Requests from a Special Function Module 6 5 Special Function Module Instructions App 42 Special register SD cccccccssecseeeeeeeeees 4 2 Special relay SM ccccccccseesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 SPECIFICATIONS wiscoeetesinscesseectcastetiecueiqeseaeds 15 1 Specifications Battery Specifications CPU Module and Memory Card BatterieS ccccccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 18 4 Extension cable specifications 0 17 3 Memory card battery specifications 18 4 Memory Card Specifications 06 18 1 Performance Specifications cccccceees 4 1 SPECIFICATIONS cccccsecessseeeeeeeeeees 15 1 Standards LOW VOL
84. GPP function the I O assignment setting takes priority regardless of the loaded module e Ifa number of points fewer than the that of the loaded I O module is set the actual number of points of the loaded I O module is reduced For example if the loaded module is a 32 point input module but I O assignment is set for a 16 point input module using GPP function the latter 16 points for the input module cannot be used e If a number of points is greater than the that of the loaded I O module is set the number of points in excess of the actual number of points is occupied with dummy points e If the slot where an I O module is loaded is set as a empty slot the I O module will be unusable 3 The slots for which Il Oassignment is not performed using GPP function are assigned with the number of points of the loaded module 4 The slots for which I O assignment is not performed using GPP function are assigned I O numbers that are consecutive to those of modules for which I O assignment has been performed 3 Precautions a If there is a disparity between the I O assignment made in the parameter settings and the actually loaded I O modules the input and output is not normally performed Loaded module I O assignment Input Output CPU module error Input Output CPU module error 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT mms ELS EC A b The I O assignment of a slot to which a special function module is loaded has to be the same setting with the modul
85. HDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed SP UNIT LAY ERR In PLC parameter I O allocation settings a special function module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module Or the opposite has happened Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR 13 or more special function modules not counting the A1SI61 capable of sending an interrupt to the CPU module have been installed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR Seven or more serial communication modules excludes A 1S J71QC24 have been installed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR Two or more A 1S 161 interrupt modules have been mounted Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and check and or change the module that corresponds to the numerical value module number there e Alternatively monitor the special registers SD1400 to SD1431 at a peripheral device and change the fuse at the output mo
86. L R sp1201 0 QnA The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes mam Example When local station 3 and remote I O station 14 have an error b2 and b13 of SD1228 become 1 and when D1228 is monitored its value is 8196 2004H 103 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 12 Special register Special ACPU a Special Register ne Register for Register Modification Conversion D9240 D1240 D9241 D1241 D9242 D1242 D9243 D1243 D9244 D1244 D9245 D1245 C di Special orresponding CPU Local station and remote I O Stores conditions for station loop up to numbers 1 to 8 error Stores the local or remote station number at which a forward or Local station reverse loop error has occurred and remote I O Stores conditions for Di station loop up to numbers 9 to 16 number error SD1232 Local station B and remote I O Stores conditions for j up to numbers 17 to SD1233 station loop 24 SD1234 Local station Stores conditions for and remote I O D1235 up to numbers 25 to station loop error 32 SD1236 QnA Local station and remote I O station loop error Stores conditions for SD1237 up to numbers 33 to 40 SD1238 Local station Stores conditions for SD1239 and remote I O pees up to numbers 41 to station loop o et 48 F in the above table indicates a forw
87. MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN CAN T SET S Step number designations overlap in SFC program Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Write the program to the CPU module again using GX Developer CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 37 RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4500 4501 4502 4503 4504 4600 SFCP FORMAT ERR The numbers of BLOCK and BEND instructions in an SFC program are not equal Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP FORMAT ERR The configuration of the STEP to TRAN to TSET to SEND instructions in the SFC program is incorrect Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP FORMAT ERR The structure of the SFC program is illegal e STEPI instruction does n
88. NO parameter program setup YES Is boot operation NO file stored in the memory card YES Contact the nearest service center dealer or our office explain the error symptom and get advice Set a file to boot file setup NO Set a file to program setup Is it able to perform Is it able to perform YES boot operation boot operation Write a file to the memory card NO 22 12 Is it able to perform YES boot operation End 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 22 2 11 Flow chart used when the CPU module is not started up The following shows the flow when the CPU module is not started up The CPU module is not started up See Flowchart for actions when the POWER LED is turned OFF Is the power supply NO module LED ON Refer to Section 22 2 2 YES Are all the power of the power supply modules ON Is the power suppl NO Review the wiring and turn ON all the module wired correctly Power SUPPY NO YES YES Is CPU module started up Try to connect the peripheral device Is it available to communicate with the peripheral device YES Make the PLC diagnosis and execute the troubleshooting according to the result Connect the extension cable NO YES Is CPU module started up at RESET switch of the CPU eae RUN STOP key switch module at RESET Not at RESET ne Is CPU module started up S
89. Operating Manual Online e GX Developer Operating Manual POINT 1 Make sure to back up each memory contents before storing the programmable controller When a programmable controller power supply is ON or CPU module reset is cancelled a CPU module reviews the status of data below and initializes all the data if detecting an error RAM data in built in RAM Breakdown history Latch data Latch relay L latch setting range device set in a parameter special relay SM900 to SM999 special register SD900 to SD999 Sampling trace data 21 15 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION mms ELS EC A 21 5 When a programmable controller is Reoperated After Stored with the Battery Over the Battery Life If a battery exceeded its guaranteed life is stored and reoperated the memory contents of CPU module and memory card may be undefined Therefore when resuming the operation clear the CPU module memory and format the memory in the CPU module by peripheral device Afeter doing so write the memory contents backed up before saving to each memory The relationship between the backed up memory and the batteries is explained below Battery Memory AGBAT installed in a CPU module Battery incorporates a memory card CPU module pew ff S type 2 E PROM Battery back up is not required Battery is backed up x Battey is not backed up Memory card SRAM E2PROM As for device memory also clear the latch range
90. Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset At writing to progurammable controller Read the individual information of the error using a peripheral device and check the special function module special function module dedicated instruction network instruction that corresponds to the value program error part to make modification Check and correct the valid parameter drive settings made by the DIP switches Set the boot file to the drive specified by the parameter drive DIP switches e Remove memory card after placing the memory card in out switch OFF e Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a memory card e Format memory card e Reformat memory card e Format memory card e Reformat memory card e Check memory card e Read the individual information of the error using peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter number and correct e Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 25 Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop 1 Continue RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop LED Status Corresponding CPU Status CPU RUN QnA 22 TROUBLE S
91. Remains as originally set when OFF Instruction priority ranking flag Pattern priority e CHK priorities updated when ON ae ett SM711 OFF Other than durin g e In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when screen is Divided transmission divided processing S Instruction split for transfer and goes OFF when split M9065 status ON During divided M execution processing is completed processing SM712 Transmission OFF Batch processing e In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when canvas S Instruction M9066 processing selection ON _ Divided processing screen is divided for transfer execution QnA SM714 OFF Communication request to remote Communication TEMNA module e Used to determine whether communications enabled S Instruction request registration E requests to remote terminal modules connected to M9081 QnA ON Communication execution area BUSY signal the AJ71PT32 S3 can be executed or not request to remote terminal module disabled SM715 El flag patel a ON when EIl instruction is being executed nsmucion During El po SM736 SM737 SM738 SM774 SM775 SM776 SM777 SM780 PKEY instruction OFF Instruction not e ON when PKEY instruction is being executed execution in progress executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character unistetion QnA scien flag ON _ Instruction execution string reaches 32 characters K input Keyboard input Sybo a Goes ON when keyboard i
92. Remote register RWr monitor RDMON App 46 APPENDICES 1 axis positioning start PSTART Interpolation positioning start PHOSTA OPR start PZPR Current value change request PADCH Forward JOG start stop PJOG Reverse JOG start stop PJOG Manual pulse generator operation enable PMPG disable Speed change request PSPCH Axis error reset PERRST AD75 contorol instruction Basic parameter setting PBPSET Detail parameter setting PEPSET OPR data setting POPSET Positioning data setting PPOSET Positioning start data setting PSDSET Positioning special start data setting PSPSET Condition data setting PCTSET Error warning number read PEWR Monitor data read PMDRD Positioning data I F setting PIFSET Parameter setting EPRSET READ SREAD Other station device read WRITE SWRITE Other station device QnA compatible write transmission Data send SEND receiving instruction AJ71QE71 control instruction Data receive RECV Other station transient REQ request Other station device ZNRD A compatible send read receive instruction Other station device ZNWR write App 47 APPENDICES APPENDIX 2 Special Relay List Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to con
93. S1 lt S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 2 S2 1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 2 S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA m Conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 Le F e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 Real number data comparison e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 1 gt S2 1 S2 m Conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 ST aNoncondicive status when S44 4 S2 G2 S2 App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA e Compares character strings S1 and S2 character by character Condition for match Character string in which all characters match Condition for larger character string Character string that includes characters with larger character codes or the longer character string Condition for smaller character string Character string that includes characters with smaller character codes or the shorter character string e Conductive status when character string S1 character string S2 e Non conductive status when character string S1 character string S2 _ Conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 a E e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1
94. SM412 Lilacs CPU module Output module ai a 2 Since YBO turns ON and OFF alternatively at 0 5 second intervals use a contactless output module a transistor is used in the above example 3 Ifan off delay timer especially miniature timer is not available construct a fail safe circuit using an on delay timer shown on the next page 19 4 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA When constructing a fail safe circuit using on delay timers only On delay timer Internal program SM412 L CPU module output module T1 M2 OA we 4 Use a solid state relay for the M1 relay 19 5 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 19 2 Installation Environment Avoid the following environment when installing a programmable controller system 1 The ambient temperature may fall outside the range of 0 to 55 C 2 The ambient humidity may fall outside the range of 10 to 9O RH 3 Condensation may occur due to drastic changes in temperature 4 Corrosive gas or flammable gas exists 5 A lot of conductive powdery substance such as dust or iron powder oil mist salt or organic solvent exists 6 A location exposed to direct sunlight 7 Strong electric or magnetic fields may be generated 8 Vibrations and shocks are transmitted directly to the system 19 6 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms ELS EC A 19 3 Calculation of Heat Generated by the programmable controller The operating ambient temperature in the panel
95. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current Current consumption Points points Product Name Model Name Description 1 0 fey ae n a Remark Module Type A1SJ71QE71N Dedicated to 10 BASE2 ial 32 point e Maximum 4 Ethernet A1SJ71QE71N modules can interface B5 be used for module one CPU module 10 BASE T Special 32 points Refer to Section 3 3 2 10BASE5 Special 32 points A1SJ71QE71N 3 T Intelligent Interpreter BASIC Compiler BASIC communication A1SD51S 2 RS 232C 2 channel Special 32 points module RS 422 485 1 channel 1 axis positioning control speed control and speed aan First half positioning control one analog voltage output for speed positioning control 0 P A PPNS l 9 j p p g Second half to 10V special32 points Used for positioning control Pulse output 2 axes i t A1sD75P2 83 Independent DOON DORS dual axis simultaneous linear interpolation circular interpolation Used for positioning control Pulse output 3 axes Positionin independent Differential 9 atsp75p3 s3 linderende ee Special 32 points ae module triple axis simultaneous dual axis linear interpolation driver is dual axis circular interpolation connected 0 78 Used for positioning control Digital output A1SD75M1 S 32 t soran For MR H B MR J B MR J2 B Pesan Poll Used for positioning control Digital output For MR H B MR J B MR J2 B A1SD75M2 a y Special 32 poi
96. Uehara aliedat ellen ledtemidsliluinn iittala Dials 17 6 Pe We ARG UNAM Oop ol cece hacncted a gentnetad tat ascent ate aiacstna E teens ne eienee Macca 17 7 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES 18 1to0 18 9 18 1 Memory Card Specificati NS sees vuweseuinuanuysewiedanntertnatcuencnbeldebtudiveliedaasalobe wintiennmeedaderteceudeedeaiactuncteee 18 1 18 2 Handing Memory GANGS x6 ices akc gence ee deeb haan a E on Aa A 18 3 18 3 Battery Specifications CPU Module and Memory Card BatterieS cc eccecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 18 4 TOA Handing PRECAUOMS sich Sieie sae an eet recs acct bactensie dace dese hae a a san ccabdcciotn 18 5 18 5 Part Names of Memory Gard sec c cickieercdicdseacydncelievielaaldeaeealenieendsudardec ceed asiacveeniesecd eerily ital 18 6 18 6 Installing Batteries CPU Module and Memory Card Batteries ce ecececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 18 7 18 7 Installing Removing A Memory Calrd ccccccccceccceeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeesaeeeseeesaeesaeeeas 18 8 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 19 1to 19 19 IO Faksai Circuit COMCC Dl iste acre ine beet a a a aE nied sane deh aA E dense 19 1 19 2 WASTANATIONM ENVINOMIMG ING sessy r a e a anie 19 6 19 3 Calculation of Heat Generated by the programmable controller ccccccecceseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 19 7 19 4 INStallING tne Base WANS ossssseerre ed E aa 19 9 19 4 1 Installation precautions o oannonnnannnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrennnnrr
97. We 6 E 7 re S58B Extension cable connector Connects an extension cable using a signal communication connector for the extension base module Connect the extension cable after removing the connector cover EJ Base cover Protective cover for the extension cable connector Module connector Connector to load power supply module CPU module I O module and specialfunction module To prevent dust accumulation load the attached connector cover blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 to reserved space connector not loaded a module 2 Module mounting screw Screws to attach the module to the bases Screw size for M4 screw Base mounting hole Mounting hole to attach the base module to the panel of the control panels etc For M5 screw 17 8 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC QnA 6 DIN rail hook Attachment hook for DIN rail One piece each for A1S52B A1S55B A1S52B S1 and A1S55B S1 Two pieces each for A1S65B A1S68B A1S58B A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 and A1S58B S1 FG terminal The grounding terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board 17 9 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES mms ELS EC A 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES This section describes the specifications and handling of the memory cards and batteries that can be used with the Q2ASCPU 18 1 Memory Card Specifications The specifications of the memory cards that can be used with Q2ASCPU conform to JEIDA Ver 4 0
98. Whether the memory is usable e Whether the designated drive memory correctly installed Do not write data to the designated file Or change the file attribute Check the designated drive memory Or replace the target drive memory and then rewrite the data Check the designated drive memory Or replace the target drive memory and then delete the data again APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 4060H 4061H 4062H 4063H 4064H 4065H 4066H 4067H 4068H 4069H 406AH 4070H Error Online registration error Ladder verification Error Contents The CPU module system area for registering monitor conditions is being used by another device Message Displayed at Peripheral Device Alert 1 is displayed MELSEC QnA Corrective Action When monitoring of the other device has completed perform the monitoring again Or increase the system area of the buil in RAM using a format with an option Communications failed Not registered Re perform communications Another device is monitoring using the detailed condition for monitoring The number of registrations for file lock is greater than 16 Alert 1 is displayed Cannot access files Do not use the detailed condition for monitoring from the designated device Or cancel the monitoring detailed condition for other device and perform the monitoring again Reduce the number of registrations to 16 or
99. a PO ef Fa en i i PERRET RTC ERA RAR TERRE ORR ee TTITITITITITILILTITLLIT LLL LLL LLL LL status for each sampling period ON OFF _ 8 Current Value gt lt 16 Bit gt Present values of word DO 16961 16961 devices for each sampling peat a ee period 6 6 STEP CONTE OTi Timel NOTE While the CPU module is STOP trace is stopped The trace result cannot be read 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 Basic operation The basic operation for sampling trace is shown below The statuses during execution of the sampling trace function can be confirmed by monitoring special relays SM800 to SM805 and SM826 e Trace execution STRA instruction exe l Trace start or cuted trigger executed Trace ended on completing SM801 is ON or SM803 is ON trace count after trigger j f Trace count after trigger E ne l l Total number of traces l SM800 Sampling trace preparation SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 Sampling trace execution in progress SM803 Sampling trace trigger SM804 After sampling trace trigger SM805 Sampling trace completed SM800 comes ON automatically when preparation for sampling trace is completed 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION e Suspending the trace Trigger SM801 SM801 Trigger Trace execution OFF ON execution end f l l Trace count i 1 Trace count Trace count cleared after trigger after trigger l e a t l l l l l l S
100. a reverse loop test underway M9251 SM1251 M9252 SM1252 M9253 SM1253 M9254 SM1254 M9255 SM1255 Loop test status RUN or STEP RUN Master station status Control is performed depending on whether the master operation status STOP or PAUSE station is in the STOP or PAUSE mode status RUN or STEP RUN status Control is performed depending on whether a local station STOP or PAUSE other than the host is in the STOP or PAUSE mode status Local station other than host station operation status Local station other than host station error OFF Normal Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host Abnormal is in error App 65 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 10 Process control instructions Table App 2 11 Special relay Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value SM1500 Hold mode i when a range over occurs for the S IN instruction ON Hold range check OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held SM1501 Hold mode ON l Hold when a range over occurs for the S OUT instruction f range check 11 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems All off for standalone systems Table App 2 12 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanation p When Set ACPU CPU OFF Redundant system Q4
101. a teat deaceae App 143 Appendix 6 4 Extension Base UNiit cc ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeee esse eeseeeeseeeseeesseeaeeeseeeeseeeseeenes App 145 APPENDIX 7 USE OF LOCAL DEVICE FOR SUBROUTINE INTERRUPT PROGRAM STORAGE FILE FUNCTION VERSION B OR LATER sciiiciscecitacteiohcctiliddahaucienidesnicel App 151 APPENDIX 8 NETWORK RELAY FROM ETHERNET MODULE FUNCTION VERSION BOR LATER ssi cnccscoeieusies yates seertercsebidietets tarde T App 155 APPENDIX9 Q2AS H CPU S1 PROCESSING TIME nissai a a App 158 Appendix 9 1 Overview of the Q2AS H CPU S1 Scan Time cccccccccccseeeceeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeees App 158 Appendix 9 2 Causes of Increasing SCAN TIME cece ceccceeceeeeeseeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeesaeeeaeeetes App 159 APPENDIX 10 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS ccc ccccseccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaees App 162 Appendix 10 1 Relevant Models ccccccccsccceeccsseceueeceeeceucceuceceeceueceueeceessuseeeeesaeessuesaaeenas App 162 Appendix 10 2 Transportation Guidelines cccccsecccsceceseceececececeueceuceceecaueceueeseeessueseaeenas App 163 APPENDIX 11 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Countries App 164 Appendix 11 1 Disposal PrE CAUTIONS waciecece weve cacteeet ost hacedeesech indexeneede sh bender etbande el eeeeeee App 164 Appendix 11 2 Exportation precautions sci sino ia ceteSde ceed Vand le celendd wid shed eeventnd go ee Mhaieeedol
102. and accesses e Depending on the timing received data in the midst of I O refresh may be read e No wait time for the FROM TO instruction Data clear e Retention specification Retains the received data for batch and separate for Retention clear received data refresh Clear communication e Clear faulty station Sets all points to OFF T AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION I O signal Faulty station detection Error No Line error check setting Line error Operation at CPU STOP 1 2 3 4 MELSEC QnA ana Buffer memory raster address of a Item Setting range Description Default value master module module M L B T ST C D W R ZR e Sets the head device to store the faulty stations none detected data No setting Bit device multiples of 16 e MINI occupies 4 words MINI S3 occupies 5 words e Sets the head device to store the error code at the error occurrence T ST C D W R ZR No settin e MINI occupies 1 word MINI S3 occupies 1 me Number of remote terminal modules words e Test message sending Test e OFF data sending OFF e Immediate data transmission Retention e Sets data sending method for verification of faulty area when the line errors occur before line errors Retention e Sets the operating status when the CPU module is t t t slop Centnve in the STOP state n is determined by the installation location of the master modules When the total number of rem
103. backup RAM data Locks the battery holder to the memory card Locked in LOCK position 3 Battery holder locking switch Enables or disables writing to the memory Factory set to OFF 4 Write protect switch ON Data writing disabled OFF Data writing enabled i Must be set before writing a program and starting operation 18 6 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES ems ELS EC A 18 6 Installing Batteries CPU Module and Memory Card Batteries 1 Since the CPU module battery is shipped with its battery connector disconnected connect the connector according to the procedure indicated below Open the cover of the Q2ASHCPU Q2ASH cpu STOP L CLR RUN RESET RESET Confirm that the battery is loaded cerrectly Insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case Be sure that the insertion direction is correci Completion 2 Since the memory card battery is removed from the battery holder before shipping set it in the battery holder before use of the RAM Remove the battery holder from the memory card Set the battery onto the battery holder with the plus face up iinsert the battery holder with batteries installed firmly into the memory card Set the battery holder mounting switch in the LOCK position using a flat head screwdriver etc Set it in this direction Firmly push the battery connector all the way in to the connector pin 18 7 18 MEMORY
104. base A1S5L1B S1 A1S6 At least 30mm At least 80mm 1 18 inch Extension base A5CIB A6LIB 3 15 inch Duct maximum height 50mm 1 97 inch At least 30mm 1 18 inch oe oe LEI a F amp F At least 80mm 3 15 inch Looe ELH FF LH GF Fig 19 2 Series Installation Panel etc Programmable controller Contactor relay etc 100mm 3 94 inch or more Fig 19 3 Distance from Front Device Fig 19 4 Vertical Mounting not allowed Fig 19 5 Horizontal Mounting not allowed 19 10 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms E Si 1 19 5 Installation and Removal of Modules This section explains how to install or remove the power supply module CPU module I O module and special function module etc to or from the base unit Module installation screw Base unit Module 1 Module installation The procedure for mounting a module is described below Base unit aA Module Insert the module fixing projection Seale of the module into the module fixing hole Install the module to the base unit by pushing it in the direction of the ea 7 arrow Projection for fixing the module Confirm that the module is firmly inserted to the base unit then fix it with the module fixed screw Complete 19 11 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA 2 Removing a module The procedure
105. base of transistor Tr1in the next stage and output YO turns ON for about 500 ys External supply power 24V when SW is turned ON 10 ms or less lt lt ___ _ Output of YO About 500 us 500 us About 800 n 22 52 1 After checking the external supply power takes at least 10ms to start up when turned it ON OFF set the switch SW1 at the primary side of the external supply power Primary side Secondary side External supply ower SW1 PLC 2 If setting the switch at the secondary side of the external supply power is required connect a capacitor and resistor so that the start up of the power is slowly performed Longer than 10ms R1 Number Q 4 Power capacity External supply power current x Resistive value x 3 to 5 C1 Several hundreds of u F 50 mV For the current consumption of the external supply power refer to the manual attached to the module to be used Select the resistance for power capacity in the range of between 3 and 5 times higher than the actual power consumption Example R1 40Q C1 300 uF Calculate the time constant as follows C1xR1 300x106 x 40 12x 10S 12ms 22 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC QnA Table22 3 Faults in the output circuit a Situation Cause Countermeasure The load 2 which was turned OFF may be To prevent the generation of the back turned ON due to back electromotive force at the electromotive force connect diode in parallel
106. before performing the reset operation The remote RESET Enable Disable setting is made in the PLC system in the parameter mode of GPP function b When the parameter is set to Allow in the Remote reset and written to the CPU module resetting is performed with remote operation e When using GPP function perform the reset in the PLC menu in any mode e When using a serial communication module perform the reset with dedicated protocol commands For details on serial communication module control refer to the Serial Communication Module User s Manual 10 18 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA 10 6 5 Remote latch clear Remote latch clear is a function for resetting the latched device data of the Q2ASCPU while the CPU module is in STOP by using such as a GPP function 1 Remote latch clear cannot be performed when the CPU module is in RUN Application of remote latch clear Remote latch clear is useful for latch clear operation when the CPU module is at the locations below In this case the function is used in combination with the remote RUN STOP function e When the CPU module is installed in an inaccessible location e When performing latch clear to the CPU module in a control panel from an external source Methods for remote latch clear Remote latch clear can only be performed by operation from GPP function or a serial communication module e The operation using GPP function can be performed in the Remote o
107. by the program is incorrect aa e The dedicated instruction specified by the Read the common information of the error using a program cannot be executed by the specified peripheral device check error step corresponding Flicker QnA 3002 module to its numerical value program error location and WECollateral informationmmon correct the problem e Common Information Program error location CPU Status e Individual Information Stop WEDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN When instruction executed INSTRCT CODE ERR The number of devices for the dedicated instruction specified by the program is incorrect Collateral informationmmon 4003 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN When instruction executed INSTRCT CODE ERR The device which cannot be used by the dedicated instruction specified by the program is specified Collateral informationmmon 4004 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN When instruction executed 22 32 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status MISSING END INS There is no END FEND instruction in the program Collateral informationmmon 4010 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDi
108. by type This type of program consists entirely of a subroutine program or interrupt program 4 The SFC language MELSAP3 has been supplied With enhancement of step attributes and SFC control instructions MELSAP3 makes SFC programming even easier 5 A software development environment that improves program productivity has been realized a In order to enable the design of structured programs a file format has been adopted for programs What would conventionally have been a single continuous program can now be handled in a structured way as a number of files This allows for design work to be shared by several designers and allows management of programs in accordance with functions processes or designers etc Unloading T Programs for separate functions Programs for separate processes Programs for different designers 2 OVERVIEW MELSEC QnA b The user can standardize and simplify programs by creating and using macro instructions corresponding to functions roo Macro definition gt vpo vD1 H Mov vDo vD2 ae gt M MAX lt vpo vD1 H mov voi vo2 se eae cpieel MLMAX RO R1 R2 4 Macro expansion gt Ro R iw Ro R2 lt Ro Rt H vov R1 R2 c Devices can be used without restrictions 1 Word device bit operations are possible 2 Differential contacts can be used 3 Buffer memories of special function modules can be accessed
109. card removal ROM capacity e The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Simulation data QDS Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD sopas Memon cam A Memory card Device comments QCD SFC trace QTR PAAS use conditions use conditions gf es change Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File register QDR Not used Sampling trace QTD Not used Status latch QTL Not used Program trace QTP Not used e Indicates memory card B type installed b15 to b8 b7 to b4b3 to bO 0 Memory card B Memory card B Drive 3 0 Does not exist Initial Card SD620 fee WDS RAM 1 SRAM installation and yP yP removal Drive 4 0 Does not exist 3 Flash ROM Aa e Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units a uals E SD622 Standard RAM Drive 3 capacity pasia S i installation and canai Empty capacity after format is stored removal Q4A pacity Q4AR Drive 4 ae S Initial Card SD623 Standard ROM Drive 4 capacity pee a ese evi installation and Empty capacity after format is stored Capacity removal e The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Simulation data QDS Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Q2A S1 SD624 peor eae nay ap Device c
110. condition GETING sesser Eeee iN 8 2 8 2 2 Monitor test of local device function version B or later ccccecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeens 8 12 O20 Wie D ring RUN crearon clear a a tls ciate lcuasee de a eehiee 8 15 8 4 Execution Time MEA SUreMeN cccccccscccseeceeeccseeceeeccueccueecaeeceusceueecseecauecaueeceeecsueceaeeseeessaaes 8 19 SA Program Montor ISU science iret cee hacen ial ei eld a 8 19 8 4 2 Interrupt program monitor NG lai scc5ih cee lic ca eee ht sclem alo ance ned eae amo anions cendoldeccavehdaenes 8 22 8 4 3 Scan time measurement ccccccceecceseecseeceeeceseeceeeseeeceuecsueeceucceuecsseecauseeuecseeesaeesueesaeessass 8 23 S9 DAMPING Trace FUNGHOM anciosa a A E r a aa a aA 8 25 86 Saws Lat MFUNGUO ssk a a 8 35 oF SOPOP O a a E E E ae ee ee eee 8 41 2 oY fee Mc 2 8 1076 11 ON cnie R T A R S 8 42 Oe PaMlal OXCCULOM seccescsc ses an2s eccmeceaasceteareadeetoasanecrenstcaveneagag aa iE EES 8 44 lo SKD TUM CUON sees hte eee Cie deat dat contain be oeesnc tht nat seh donde tl eaten tel eae irae 8 47 SO Program Lace FUNGUO monarsi Sect s a o a a ate iaued uencebeinccioe 8 48 6 9 SIMUAUON FUNC UO ya tts eh ecaste a e e a e a a d astlutiyde te 8 57 6 10 Debugging DY Several People nssisrigosnreeaan a a A aA 8 61 8 10 1 Simultaneous monitoring by several people ccccccccecceececeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeses 8 62 8 10 2 Simultaneous execution of writ
111. contact e TTMR ON time x n gt D Teaching timer T n 0 1 n 0 10 n 2 100 e Four bit devices starting with the bit device specified at D perform the following operations in accordance with the ON OFF status of the STMR instruction Special timer D 0 Off delay timer output D 1 One shot timer output after OFF D 2 One shot timer output after ON D 3 On delay timer e Rotates a rotary table that is partitioned into n1 from the position at Shortest path control which it is stopped to the position specified by S 1 in the direction that gives the shortest path e Changes the device data specified at D1 in the range of n1 to n2 in Ramp signal n3 scans Pulse densit e Counts the pulse input of the device specified at S for the time i specified at n and stores the result in the device specifid at D e n1 Hz D Pulse output Outputs n2 times Pulse width modulation e Consecutively reads the data of n rows of 16 devices starting from Matrix input the device specified at S1 and stores it in devices starting from the device specified at D2 App 16 APPENDICES Appendix 1 3 Application Instructions 1 MELSEC QnA Logical operation instructions wane STO D A S D S1 A S2 D moe ST OH CURSAN Logical product Banoe eeo D 1 D A S 1 S D 1 D e S1 1 S1 A S2 1 S2 gt D 1 D 52 D 51
112. designation H Hexadecimal number For decimal double word designation K Decimal number L For hexadecimal double word H Hexadecimal number Space L designation For real number designation E Real number When 2 Bit Device is designated The monitor stop timing is such that monitoring stops when the execution status of the designated bit device becomes the designated status The following shows the possible designations for execution status At leading edge lt gt At trailing edge lt gt 3 In the case of devices for which index qualifications have been made the index qualified value is monitored The following shows an example of this type of monitoring DGZ1 z D2 Sms gt CInterval 12 ms gt Status RUN gt lt Target CPU 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 4 The ON status of comparison instructions can be monitored The following shows an example of this type of monitoring ag m MOU KiG De J 3 EMOU K16 Di aGF 6 M DA D H A 2F gt 11 END 1 Sms gt CInterval 12ims gt lt Status gt CTarget CPU z De 5 The devices of special function modules can be monitored The following shows an example of this type of monitoring Uds LMOU K4 GH Uas MOU Gi DO CEND 4 G4 U4 Gi8 DG 4 4 3 Scan 8ms gt lt Interval t27ms gt CStatus gt CTarget CPU C REMARK To monitor devices of special function modules set 2 Buffer Memory 1 Monitor for
113. detected the numbers of those I O modules are entered in bit pattern If the I O numbers are set by parameter the parameter set numbers are stored e Also detects I O module information b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 bi bO SD1400 SD1401 D1431 Indicates an I O module verify error For a module whose number of I O points exceeds 16 points all bits corresponding to I O module numbers within the number of I O points occupied by the module in increments of 16 points turn on Example When a 64 point module is mounted on the slot 0 bO to b3 turn on when an error is detected e Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation 13 Process control instructions SD1500 i l SD1501 Basic period tome Process control Process control D1502 instruction detail instruction detail error code error code Process control Process control instruction instruction generated error generated error location location SD1503 Table App 3 15 Special register Corres Set by ponding eager When Set ACPU e Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process control instruction using floating point data Floating point data D1501 SD1500 e Shows the detailed error contents for the error that occurred in the process control instruction e Shows the error process block that occu
114. directly from a program as devices 4 The link data of network modules can be accessed directly from a program as devices d Ease of operation for GPP function program editing has been improved 1 Up to four programs data etc can be edited simultaneously Programs and data can be cut and pasted between edited objects 2 Ladder editing is possible while the ladder is displayed with comments 3 Familiar operations can be performed with pull down menus and dialog boxes e The debugging function at start up has been perfected 1 Ladder modification while performing monitoring is possible 2 Coil ON OFF causes can be searched for 3 The timing for monitoring can be set using a step number or device status allowing debugging to be conducted under the optimum conditions 4 Devices for which index qualifications have been set can be monitored f The GPP function document creation function has been strengthened 1 Since comments can now comprise 32 characters they can be more detailed than before 2 Comments can now be set for all devices 3 The statements and notes appended to programs can now be managed as an integral part of the program which makes program modifications and utilization easier 4 Printout data can be stored in a file 2 OVERVIEW g A powerful array of support software packages is available for program creation 1 Data conversion package Comment data device data etc which is created
115. displayed at the peripheral device Input output to peripheral device e Stores the data input from a peripheral device to the device specified at D 17 Program instructions e Sets the specified program in the standby status e Turns OFF the coil of the specified program s OUT instruction and sets the program to the standby status Program execution status switch PSCAN P e Registers the specified program as a scan execution type program e Registers the specified program as a low speed execution type program LWE App 36 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 18 Other instructions WDT reset e Resets the WDT in a sequence program D _ a Timing clock Duwy mifa o i p Scan ni alk Scan n2 SM42D to SM424 5M430 to SM434 Lower 8 bits ZRO Upper 8 bits Lower 8 bits ZRT ZRRDB P n D Upper 8 bits i I 8bis D Direct read write in 1 byte unit Lower 8 bits Upper 8 bits ZRWRB P Upper 8 bits O I indirect address of specified device Indirect address set ADRSET P aa Device name e Fetches ASCII data to the input module specified at S for 8 points Numeral key input in converts the data to hexadecimal values and stores them in the from keyboard i devices starting with the one specified at D1 App 37 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Appendix 1 4 Data Link Instructions 1 Link refresh instructions e Performs l
116. dropped to or below 85 of the rated voltage Gheckine suppi volage orhe power sunoiy This can be detected from the control system of 1510 module If the voltage is abnormal then replace the the redundant system power supply module Collateral informationmmon Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e Always DC DOWN 5V The voltage 100 to 240VAC of the power supply module on the extension base unit dropped to or RUN below 85 of the rated voltage Off This can be detected from the control system of Check the supply voltage of the power supply ERR Q4AR 1520 the stand alone system or redundant system module If the voltage is abnormal then replace the Flicker CPU Status Continue Collateral informationmmon power supply module e Common Information CPU Status e Individual Information Stop EDiagnostic Timing e Always DC DOWN 24V The 24 VDC power supplied to the system management module AS92R has dropped below 90 of the rated voltage aana an aar T _ heortne avoe poner suptesto essen i management module AS92R Collateral informationmmon e Common Information CPU Status e Individual Information Continue Diagnostic Timing e Always BATTERY ERROR e The battery voltage in the CPU module has dropped below stipulated level The lead connector of the CPU module battery is Change the battery 4600 not connected e If the battery is for progra
117. error check Supplementary settings Program setting Boot file setting Perform various settings required when multiple programs are used 7000H Set programs to be executed among multiple programs Set the file for boot operation and other settings SFC program start mode 8002H Start condition 8003H Output mode when the block is stopped 8005H Acknowledge XY assignment Perform various settings required for SFC programs Allows confirmation of the settings made in I O assignment This setting does not affect CPU module operation N means the number of the master module counting from the first N 1 to 8 13 7 13 PARAMETER LIST Setting Reference Section Reference Manual Default value Setting range No setting Number of I O points of CPU module MINIS3 MINIS3 MINI stations X M L B T ST C D W R ZR none Bit device multiples of 16 X1000 to 200H Y M L B T ST C D W R ZR none Bit device multiples of 16 Y1000 to 200H 5 times 0 to 32 times Chapter 7 CPU CPU Link Clear Clear Hold No setting M L B T ST C D W R ZR none No setting D W T ST C R ZR Stop Continue Stop Latch data Test message OFF data Latch data No setting Program name Scan Low speed Initial Standby QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals File name Type Transfer source drive No settin J Transfer destination drive QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming QCPU Q m
118. execution No lt H 3 Alert 2 The file PARAMNCParameter gt already exists Do you want to overwrite it No lt N gt App 140 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A APPENDIX 6 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS Appendix 6 1 Q2AS H CPU S1 module Q2ASHcpPu STOP RUN c ERROR L CLR RUN Juser RESET RESET BAT ALM lt 5 BOOT MITSUBISHI 130 5 12 V 6 5 0 26 110 4 33 54 5 2 15 Unit mm inch App 141 APPENDICES Appendix 6 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules ECA 1s61PN POWER MITSUBISHI O INPUT OUTPUT AC 85 132V DC 5V 5A AC170 264V 50 60Hz 130 5 11 93 6 3 68 l 54 5 2 14 i Unit mm inch App 142 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Appendix 6 3 Main Base Unit 1 A1S32B main base unit 4 mounting screws 200 7 87 16 4 220 8 66 2 A1S33B main base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 110 4 33 130 5 11 ITSUBISHI ELECTR ORP TION A1S33B D ae 64 255 10 03 ee 7 tee App 143 APPENDICES 3 A1S35B main base unit mao A A2 A A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION BD626E680G52 E 4 mounting screws MADE IN JAPAN e ole 8 325 12 79
119. for removing a module is explained here Base unit Remove the module installation screw then pull out the top of the module while using the bottom of Ze gt the module as the fulcrum S Module l connector While lifting the module upward disengage the module fixing L C projection from the module fixing om hole a Module Complete To dismount the module be sure to disengage the hook from the module fixing hole and then remove the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole f the module is forcibly removed the hook or module fixing projection will be damaged 19 12 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms EL Si 1 19 6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover When using the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 attach the dustproof cover supplied with the extention base unit to the I O module on the left end If no dustproof cover is attached foreign matter will enter the I O module causing a failure Procedures for installing and removing the dustproof cover are described below 1 Installation I O module Dust proof cover Insert the dustproof cover into the connector or terminal side groove of the I O module first as shown in the figure and then push the dustproof cover 19 13 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA 2 Removal I O module lt ji dui ji nn Hole for removal
120. from link to CPU module B W etc U New QnA ON _ Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module OFF Writes e For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc U New ON _ Does not write designate whether to write to the link module OFF Operative network etc cand a ane y Reivers If no designation has been made concerning active S Initial New ON Standby network aoe or standby active is assumed OFF Reads e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc U New QnA ON _ Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module OFF Writes e For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc U New ON _ Does not write designate whether to write to the link module e Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed CC Link module Remains ON if the S Error New QnA condition is restored to normal thereafter OFF Normal ON Error App 51 APPENDICES rtm te _ Table App 2 3 Special relay MELSEC QnA Corres ponding ACPU M90 00 Set by When Set Corresponding CPU Presence absence of OFF SFC program absent e Turns ON when an SFC program is registered a SMSEN SFC program ON SFC program present OFF when an SFC program is not registered a hitia mee an Start stop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absence of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop S
121. ic gmat cu senate nace talad O E ieeceaeaaceaceoe 10 12 100 1 Remore RUN STOP apa ala hele le alannsinleee aise a e e GedelecesS alate 10 12 1062 Remote STEP RUN iaia naa a a E N a E 10 15 OO REMOTE A E oases ee ast de aise seco ase ease va ices cede eee et ae 10 16 10 04 Remote RESE Us sai sessiea aga naen a a aeaaaebes atasratiancaneaee 10 18 10625 Remote laten CIE AN nekeen a N A His aes antes 10 19 10 6 6 Relationship between remote operation and CPU module RUN STOP key switch 10 20 107 Temna operatorini e inthe a e DE utc date dele 10 21 10 71 Operation for message display reissen annis a esate Uh E Aaa 10 21 107 2 Key input operatio M ssis ae e eE 10 22 10 8 Reading Module Access Time Intervals ccccccccsscceececseeceeeceueecueeceeeseeesaueesaeeseeeesueeseeesaees 10 23 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU 11 1to11 8 1T FUNCTION IS tanen a Stal at hil anc ately tinte a ratte 11 1 WM te PEC MAI NMS setae sheer acaremee E T beste aeu en eae 11 2 MMe EDTA E a ua eiecin rate ott aanainy aa tie devo aes ciaryapeda se caida ue ohana on aaeaa tun ueak peas eet 11 3 TA IG VS earen a a a mare teres e Me eeeae en ieee 11 4 VAD Device COMIC I aerei ae sieveve snes BEaierea ants vievessioastecee cs ctu oe ve pastes baw dues tab ea teua A 11 5 1G STALEIME MS NOLO S ai redncutenitennstcttoaa anand a onda a i ata a a a aaa oat 11 7 11 7 Initial Device Value Comment dis valent cduwadutinessiensstede n
122. if the network module had detected a SM1590 ON Switching He S Error ocurrs New Q4AR the network module network fault and issued a switching request to the unsuccessful host CPU module App 68 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A 12 For redundant system Other system CPU information 1 SM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode so they cannot be refreshed during the separate mode Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699 SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for stand alone system Table App 2 13 Special relay Corresp Set b onding C di et by orresponding Explanati Host a When Set CPU aes o o Nicea e Turns on if a error occurs in the diagnosis results SM1600 Diagnosis error Including external diagnosis j sean END Q4AR en e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter OFF No self diagnosis e Turns on when an error occurs in the self diagnosis SM1601 Self diagnosis error error results S Each END SM1 Q4AR Self diagnosis error e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter OFF No error common Error common information e Turns on when there is error common information ete information ON Error common and the SM1600 is on EAN END SMG AAIR information OFF No error individual Error individual information e Turns on when there is error individual information SMISE Iiinn ON Error individual and the SM1600 is on pede END SMIG GNR inform
123. in February 1996 or later and products marked C corresponding to A3H can be used e AJ71LP21 G AJ71BR11 AJ71LR21 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71LR21 MELSECNET 10 network modules c When using a special function module with Q2ASCPU the device range to be used is depending on models of special function modules Access range Device range equivalent to the A3HCPU Device range equivalent to the AnACPU A1SD51S A1SJ71UC24 R2 PRF R4 A1SJ71E71N 3 Device A1SJ71AP21 S3 2 A1SJ71AR21 2 A1SJ71E71N3 ees A1SJ71AT21B 2 AD51H S3 AD51FD S3 AJ71C23 S3 AJ71C24 S6 S8 AJ71UC24 AJ71AP21 S3 AJ71AR21 Q2AS H Q2AS H S1 AJ71AT21B 2 AJ71ME81 X YO t X YOt I O device X Y X Y0 to X Y7FF X Y0 to X Y7FF oA Gs a ed Reading Writing of file registers programs etc are not possible r Only I O devices X Y link relay B and link register W are available 3 Even when L or S is specified the device becomes M Example Even when L10 is specified the device becomes M10 AJ71E71 S3 AJ71E71N 3 T AD51 S3 AJ71C24 S3 AJ71E71N B5T B2 B5 AJ71P41 3 20 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION d When a QnACPU is mounted on a main base unit for A1S38HB A1S38HBEU high speed access the Q2ASCPU can access special function modules intelligent special function modules and link modules to write read at greater speeds QnACPU cannot input output to the I O module at greater spped e The following shows how to conne
124. ladders For a it is XO and X1 both ON and for b it is X1 ON regardless of ON OFF status of X0 If a step part way through an AND OR block is designated for a monitor condition the monitor data collection timing is such that data is collected when the status immediately before execution of the step designated from the LD instruction in the block becomes the designated status Ladder mode List mode yo 2nd step LD XO a xi x2 0 X1 E eS Y20 y LD X1 AND X2 OR X3 ANB 5 OUT Y20 b XO X1 X2 XS 0 1 2 3 p Eae 0 LD xO 2 3 4 2 If the ladder block head other than 0 step is specified to the step number as detailed conditions the monitor data is collected when the instruction execution status immediately before execution is the specified status When Step 2 lt ON gt is specified in the ladder below the monitor data is collected for OUT Y10 ON Ladder mode List mode XO 0 XO o H assasi Y10 Y10 X2 2H 111 Y11 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 A monitor stop condition can be set All operations are performed on the monitor test screen window in the ladder mode The following shows an example of the setting for a monitor stop condition Monitor Seon Condition i gt Without Monitor Stop 2 Condition Device Current Value 1 Device 1 gt Word Device L 2 03 Bit Device 71 2 Calculation State lt Always gt Execute lt Y gt Cance 1 N g
125. less Incorrect setting contents Setting is incorrect Check the set contents Device I O information differs from parameters A keyword that differs from the one set for the designated drive memory was specified The designated monitor file has not been secured The designated command cannot be registered or cancelled since it is in execution Condition has already satisfied at device Drive other than No 1 to 3 has been designated The program before modification differs from the registered program Does not match the parameter Keyword doesn t match File capacity is not enough Unable to execute due to on going process Setting is incorrect Drive specification is incorrect Program does not match App 136 Check the parameters Or check the data Check the designated keyword Secure the monitor file then perform monitoring Re perform the command after requests from other devices has been completed Check the monitor condition Or perform monitor registration again and then monitor Check the designated drive and specifies a correct drive Check the registered program and match the program to it APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 4080H 4081H 4082H 4083H 4084H 4085H 4086H 4087H 4088H 4089H 408AH 408BH Error Other error Error Contents Data error The searched target cannot be detected The designated comman
126. no more than 1k step Accordingly a maximum of 15 monitor files can be set Since the built in RAM program file area is in the same area as the monitor file for other stations the program file area is reduced for the area of the other station monitor file 2 After setting the built in RAM is formatted NOTE 1 The detailed conditions for monitoring can be set from one site only 2 Monitoring from other stations is possible without setting monitor files for other stations but in this case high speed monitoring is not possible 3 When simultaneous monitoring from multiple persons is desired perform this operation before writing the parameter file or the program file in the built in RAM If this operation is performed after writing the file in the built in RAM all files are erased 4 The number of locations for simultaneous access to one CPU is up to 16 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 10 2 Simultaneous execution of write during RUN by several people The Q2ASCPU allows simultaneous write during RUN to one file or another file by several people Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures for simultaneous write during RUN executed by several people 1 With 4 Write amp Conversion Setting in 8 Option menu of the ladder mode 4 Write During RUN Setting and 7 Write Method at Write During RUN are set The following shows setting examples Write amp Conversion Setting 4 Write Duri
127. of GPP functions This function is used to set monitoring conditions for monitoring the operating statuses of the programmable controller in accordance with a precise timing There are three Monitoring Condition as follows e Executing a monitoring at END processing e Setting the step number to be monitored and the step conducting status e Setting the device status This function is used to retain the monitoring screen by setting Monitor stop condition setup in accordance with a precise timing When monitoring the CPU module marked Function version B using a peripheral device capable of GPP function local device monitor test is executed by setting local device monitor 8 2 1 Monitoring condition setting Function Description 1 This function allows setting of the monitoring condition All operations are performed using Monitor test menu in the ladder mode The following shows an example of setting a monitor condition Monitoring Condition 2 4 Condition Device Current Value 1 Device 1 gt Word Device L 2 gt Bit Device YB l lt fT gt 2 Step il lt ft gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esec Close The following shows an explanation of the screen above The monitoring condition can be select either 1 Monitor Always or 2 Condition a When 1 Monitor Always is set The collection timing for monitor data is every scan after END processing at the CPU module
128. of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one For A3N ASHCPU it can be performed by use of INDICATOR RESET switch on front of CPU module When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151F210 LEDR App 100 QnA APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 10 Special register list dedicated for QnA Table App 3 12 Special register Special ACPU ee Special Register Corresponding Special Register for P after g Register Modification Conversion Normal end ZNRD Stores the execution result of the ZNRD word device read ZNRD instruction instruction instruction setting fault e ZNRD instruction setting faultFaulty setting of the ZNRD instruction D9200 SD1200 processing Error at constant source and or destination QnA result relevant station Corresponding station errorOne of the stations is not LRDP for Relevant communicating ACPU station ZNRD e ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station execution The specified station is a remote I O station disabled Normal end ZNWR Stores the execution result of the ZNWR word device write ZNWR instruction instruction instruction setting fault e ZNWR instruction setting faultFaulty setting of the ZNWR D9201 SD1201 processing Error at instruction constant source and or destinatio
129. of hazardous Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 Us voltage area 150VAC or less 2500V 300VAC or less 4000V 20 16 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION In order to use the programmable controller always in good condition conducting daily and periodical maintenance inspection on the following items are strongly recommended 21 1 Daily Inspection Dairy inspection items recommended are shown in Table 21 1 Installation condition of the base unit Installation condition of the I O modules Connection conditions LEDs on the main module POWER SUPPLY MODULE POWER LED CPU module RUN LED CPU module ERROR LED CPU module BAT ARM LED Input module LED Output module LED Table 21 1 Dairy Inspection Check item Content of inspection Judgement Confirm if installation screws are not loose or cover is not detached Check if the module is not disengaged and if the hook is securely engaged Loosening of terminal screw Proximity of solderless terminals Connector areas of extension cable Confirm it is ON Confirm it is ON in the RUN state Check that the LED is OFF Check that the LED is OFF Confirm if it correctly turns on and off Confirm if it correctly turns on and off 21 1 It is installed securely The hook should be Retighten the screw securely engaged and the Securely engage the module should be positively mounted
130. of the files can be figured out File titles are set in file setting performed when starting GPP function or in PLC writing from the PLC menu in any mode Up to 32 characters can be used C C GPPQ USR 2 System SYSTEMi 1 Title System No 1 3 Machine TRANSFER Title Transfer Line 4 File CLINE1 Title Line No 1 Program Execute gt Cance 1 CN gt Fsc Close Ctrl L List Ctrl D Dir Space Select File titles are stored in the corresponding created files Note that they are not stored in any files for file registers 11 4 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU 11 5 Device Comment The device comment function displays comments assigned to respective devices so that programs can be read easily In addition by setting Xtype for the CPU type with GPP function programs can be created using labels instead of devices Device comment Error 1 Error 2 Error detection Vere i ee Y POP EE 0 DE m Y10 3 yi X11 A memory card is required to create device comments and store a device comment file in a CPU module 1 Device comments are set in the documentation mode of GPP function Up to 32 characters are used for each comment and up to 10 characters for each label device label name 1 File 2 PC 3 Find S Edit Window 8 Option Document Device CPU Q3A C S STEM2 SAMPLE Device Comment 123456 7898123456 7890123456 789012 Alt Menu Fi2 Help Devi
131. on EMS capacity it is equivalent to or less than the size obtained in the above DX Developer case Initial device value Number of device points x 2 device types x 44 66 File register Number of points for file registers x 2 bytes 72 6 x No of Setting range 2 x No of word devices No of bit devices 8 x No of program files used Round up Simulation data Number of word device points x 2 number of bit device points 16 x 2 device ranges 2 x44 66 Rounded up 362 No of word device points No of bit device points x 12 N1 N2 N3 No of word device points x 2 No of bit device points 16 x 2 x trace count total count e According to the items set in the added trace information on the trace device setting screen the following values are added forN1 to N3 Refer to Section 8 5 2 b N1 When setting time 4 is added N2 When setting step No 10 is added N3 When setting the program name 8 is added Sampling trace data For all devices 58576 For detailed devices Number of word device points X 2 number of bit device points 16 x 2 device types x 8 352 Status latch data Rounded up Program Trace Data Same as sampling trace Breakdown history data 54 x number of faults stored 72 bytes SFC trace data Max 48k in 1 kbyte units Device types represents the number of registered device names For example if D W and T are regist
132. operation the contents before going down are retained up to numbers 17 to Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed QnA 32 If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid Stores conditions for APPENDICES ACPU Special Register D9204 D9205 D9206 D9210 D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 D9215 D9216 D9217 D9218 D9219 Special Register after Conversion SD1204 SD1205 SD1206 SD1210 SD1211 SD1212 SD1213 SD1214 SD1215 SD1216 D1217 D1218 D1219 Special Register for Modification Link status Station implementing loopback Station implementing loopback Number of retries Number of times loop selected Local station operation status Local station operation status Local station operation status Local station operation status Local station error detect status Local station error detect status Local station error detect status Local station error detect status Table App 3 12 Special register Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions Loopback implemented only in forward direction Loopback implemented only in reverse direction Data link disabled Station that implemented forward loopback Station that implemented reverse loopback Stored as cumu
133. operation is stopped 2 When turning the remote PAUSE contact OFF or turning SM206 OFF with GPP function the PAUSE status is reset and the sequence program operation is again performed from step 0 Remote PAUSE _ OFF contact SM206 SM204 e An when PAUSE RUN foondit is satisfied RUN PAUSE status PAUSE status Fig 10 6 Time chart for PAUSE with remote PAUSE contact REMARK When the remote RUN contact is made same as the remote PAUSE contact the remote PAUSE contact will be invalid 10 16 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A b Methods using GPP function or a serial communication module The remote PAUSE operation can be performed from GPP function or from a serial communication module The operation using GPP function can be performed in the Remote operation of the PLC menu in any mode The control using a serial communication module is performed with the commands in the dedicated protocol For details on serial communication module control refer to the Serial Communication Module User s Manual 1 When the END processing of the scan in which the remote PAUSE command has received from GPP function is performed the PAUSE status contact SM204 turns ON When performing up to the END instruction of the scan following the scan in which the PAUSE status contact turned ON the PAUSE status is established and the operation is stopped 2 When the remote RUN command is received from GPP function the sequenc
134. operations will be impossible Keep a record of the password e g on paper and store it ina safe place 3 When a keyword is registered memory for 1 file is occupied When a keyword is registered in the built in RAM 4k bytes are occupied 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 7 System Display The following items can be checked by connecting a peripheral device capable of GPP functions to the Q2ASCPU 1 The following information relating to the modules actually mounted on the base unit a Type b No of Occupied Points c Head X Y number 2 The following module information set in the parameters a Type b No of Occupied Points c Type Name 3 The following information relating to the CPU module a Status of the RUN STOP key switch b Status of the system setting switches c LED statuses These items can be checked using the detail HELP display and CPU module panel items in the display menu of the GPP function PLC diagnositics mode 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 8 LED indication The Q2ASCPU module has LEDs on its front face that indicate the operating status of the CPU module The following shows the meanings of the LED and LED indications 9 8 1 LED indication 1 The following shows the meanings of the indications of each of the LEDs are given LED Name Indication Detail Indicates the operating status of the CPU module ON OFF Operating with the RUN STOP key switch set to RUN or STEP RUN Operat
135. or later When both the CC Link module and the master station module for MELSECNET MINI S3 are loaded and auto refresh is not set the default parameter is set to the master station module for MELSECNET MINI S3 The COM instruction or the G P ZCOM instruction allows auto refresh to the CC Link module while performing the sequence program However auto refresh to the CC Link module cannot be performed with the J P ZCOM instruction Error code 4102 The network number designated with the dedicated network instruction does not exist appears Refresh operation for the mixture of MELSECNET 10 Il and MELSECNET MINI S3 e Refresh is performed in the order of MELSECNET 10 II CC Link and MELSECNET MINI S3 Therefore the input data specifying the same range is afterward overwritten with the executed data e The output data is output to the MELSECNET 10 II CC Link and MELSECNET MINI S3 The operation of the Q2ASCPU when the CC Link module is in the online offline mode is shown in the table below Parameter settings CC Link module Operation of the Q2ASCPU for auto refresh status The communications with the remote station is Online performed with the specified parameter for auto refresh Set The Q2ASCPU does not generate an error Offline but does not communicate with the remote station Onli The communications with the remote station is nline performed by the FROM TO instruction Not set The Q2ASCPU does not generate a
136. other station via many Ethernet or MELSECNET 10 To perform the network relay from the Ethernet module the Ethernet module with function version B or later is required 1 Access range Table 8 1 shows the access range of the network relay ftom the computer peripheral device with the system Computer Q2ASCPU A A1SJ71QE71 A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QE71 oO fe E D Q S 5 D D z O A Peripheral device GX Developer SWO VD GPPQ MELSECNET 10 Q2ASCPU D A1SJ71QE71 5 o gt Q Q 53 D D z A Ethernet A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QE71 Power supply module Q2ASCPU B Ethernet co gt 3 ii ir a3 g m p N lt L ep T o x O App 155 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table 8 1 Comparison table of access range from Ethernet module ay Q2ASCPU Access to Route with ay Version without Function Version Hostaccess access Computer Q2ASCPUIA Q2ASCPU A ne station access in host network C t Q2ASCPU B MELSECNET 10 ji Other station access of other network c t Q2ASCPU C From MELSECNET 10 to Ethernet a i i i Other station access in host network Computer Q2ASCPU D Ethernet Peripheral device Host access Q2ASCPU A Other station access in host network _ Peripheral device MELSECNET 10 Q2ASCPU B Other station access of other network Peripheral device From MELSECNET 10 to Ethernet Q2ASCPU C
137. parameter mode 3 END processing When all the scan execution type programs have been executed END processing is performed and then the first scan execution type program is executed again By inserting a COM instruction at the end of a scan execution type program END processing general data processing link refresh can be executed for each program STOP RUN Power ON RESET RUN p 1st scan T 2nd scan T 3rd scan T 4th scan END processing Initial execution type programs 0 EN Scan execution type program A D i END p END y Scan execution type program B 0 END 0 END Scan execution type program C Scan time 4 When constant scan time is set When constant scan is set the scan execution type program is executed once for every preset constant scan time REMARK 4 Constant scan is a function whereby a scan execution type program is repeatedly executed at fixed intervals See Section 10 2 1 For the index register processing in the case where an interrupt program is executed during execution of a scan execution type program refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 12 7 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 5 Scan time e The scan time is a total of the scan execution type program execution time the END processing time and either the low speed program execution time or the constant scan waiting time When more than one scan executio
138. power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery Doing so may damage the battery resulting in electrolyte spillage inside the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it Do not install remove the terminal block more than 50 times after the first use of the product IEC 61131 2 compliant Before handling modules touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product treat it as an industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to Appendix 11 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations Refer to Appendix 10 for details of the relevant models CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are syste
139. set for error check error detection is not performed for these items which shortens the processing time for the END instruction Even if Yes for error check is set in the parameter 1 thorugh 3 above error check can be canceled by turning on the special relay SM 1084 However if No is set in the parameter turning off SM1084 is ineffective to execute the error check 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Self diagnostics list Status of the CPU LED Status ee Fuse blown When executing END instruction Diagnosis item Diagnosis timing Stop Continue OFF ON 4 9 Flickering ON Default stop Default check executed I O interrupt error When interruption occurs e At power ON or RESET ial functi t OFF Flick Sper eae e When executing FROM TO instruction ee e At power ON or RESET Control b St OFF Flick hg aera e When executing FROM TO instruction oe Occurrence of momentary Continue ON OFF power interruption Always Low battery 3 Continue ON OFF Default check executed I O module verification When executing END instruction Hardware error Stop Continue OFF ON Flickering ON Default stop Default check executed Special functi dul aan han ett Sven PONET IE ON O RESE OFF Flickers P e When switching from STOP to RUN allocation error Special function module access error When executing FROM TO instruction Stop Continue Default stop Memory card ope
140. simulation data file to the RAM area of the memory card 3 It is possible to carry out simulation from another station in the network or from a serial communication module However simulation cannot be executed from several sites at the same time With the Q2ASCPU sampling trace can only be executed from one site at a time 4 Simulation is performed by connecting the Q2ASCPU and the peripheral devices capable of GPP function 5 Note the following points when executing simulation e If direct inputs DX and direct outputs DY are used to handle inputs outputs directly the device memory is accessed rather than the actual inputs outputs e No processing is performed for any special function module instruction e When a SP UNIT ERROR occurs FFFFH is displayed in the module number area of the common information e If Ignore is set for the buffer memory access method FFFFH is set for access by instruction and the monitor results 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 10 Debugging by Several People This function allows simultaneous debugging from several peripheral devices capable of GPP functions Application This function is used to simultaneously debug different files from more than one peripheral device capable of GPP functions Function Description The following shows the combinations of debugging functions that can be used simultaneously by different operators Debug function from other stations Debug functio
141. speed SD547 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 SD547 execution type Stored every scan execution time in Stored every scan 100 us units Service interval SD550 measurement Unit module No Sets I O number for module that measures service interval module Module service eas ee SD551 inisial Stores the service interval for the module specified in SD550 into SD551 ee in 1 ms units and SD552 when SM551 is turned ON service interval l Measurement is made in 100 ys units S Request time Module service SD551 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 SD552 interval l SD552 Stores the ys place Storage range 0 to 900 in 100 ys units App 87 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 5 Drive information Table App 3 7 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU e Indicates the type of memory card A installed b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b0 0 Drive 1 0 Does not exist a Memory card A Memory card A o l S Initial and SD600 typs typs SAMIDE Een card removal 0 Does not exist Drive 2 ROM type 2 E PROM yYPe 3 Flash ROM Drive 1 Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units S Initial and alae Memory cara envenl cape e Empt ak after format is oa card removal RAM capacity P Sane f Drive 2 S Initial and SD603 Memory card Drive 2 capacity e Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 k byte units
142. starting with the one specified at S1 NDIS P S1 D S2 into the specified bits starting with the one specified by S2 and stores this data in sequence starting at the device specified at D Dissociation Association e Associates each of the data starting from the one specified at S1 to the data of the devices starting from the one specified by S2 and stores the data to the devices in equence starting at the device specified at D e Dissociates the 16 bit data that starts from the device specified at S WTOB P S D n into 8 bit units and stores the n points of data to the devices in sequence starting from the one specified at D e Associates the lower 8 bits of 16 bit data for n points starting from the one specified at S to give 16 bit data and stores the data to the devices in sequence starting from the one specified at D e Searches the n points of data starting from the device specified at S in 16 bit units and stores the maximum value to the device specified at D e Searches the n points of data starting from the device specified at S in 16 bit units and stores the minimum value to the device specified at D Search e Searches the 2 x n points of data starting from the device specified at DMAX P S D nq S in 32 bit units and stores the maximum value to the device specified at D e Searches the 2 x n points of data starting from the device specified at omin P S 0 a
143. stored e The error individual information type can be judged by the individual SD16 information category code in SD4 The values of the individual information category code stored in SD4 correspond to following 1 to 7 1 Empty 2 File name Drive name Example File name SD17 Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK i b15 to b8 b7 to bO File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 3 2EH SD18 ASCII code 3 characters Empty SD26 Time value actually measured SD19 Number Meaning SD16 Time 14s units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1ms units 0 to 65535ms SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD20 SD22 SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Program error location SD21 Meanin Error common Error common g S Error New QnA information information File name ASCII code 8 characters Extension 3 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern 6 Block No Step No transition No Sequence step No L Sequence step No H 6 Contents of pattern data SD23 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0e Bit number 0 0 to O O Not used SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SD24 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 5 Parameter No 6 Annunciator number 7 CHK instruction malfunction number SD25 Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 7 SD16 No SD17 SD17 SD18 SD18 SD19 SD19 SD20 SD20 SD21 SD21 SD22 SD22 SD23 SD23 SD24 SD24 SD26 SD25 SD25 SD26 SD26 7 For details of the parameter No re
144. the CPU module 00014 Set a comment for the CPU module Timer limit setting Low speed timer High speed timer RUN PAUSE contacts Remote reset Output at STOP RUN Common pointer No General data processing Points occupied by empty slot Interrupt counter System interrupt Fixed scan interval File register Comment file used in a command Initial device value File for local device Make various settings that are required for the CPU module system 1000H Set the number of modules that are processed in one general data Set the low speed or high speed timer limit 1006H processing 1007H Set the number of points occupied by empty slots Set the first interrupt counter number and the fixed scan interval for 1008H the interrupt pointer Set various kinds of files used by the CPU module 1100H Set a file register file to be used 1101H Set a comment file used in an instruction 1102H Set a file for initial device values to be used 1103H Set a file for local devices to be used 13 1 13 PARAMETER LIST Setting Reference Section Reference Manual Defaultvaue value Settingrange Settingrange Section 11 2 No setting Up to 10 characters No setting Up to 64 characters o t00ms 10ms to 1000ms in 10ms 10ms to 1000ms in 10ms units No setting XO to X1FFF Section 10 6 1 Section 10 6 3 Disabled Enabled disabled Section 10 6 4
145. the devices specified at D e Stores the specified number of characters from the position specified Character string MIDR P S1 D 52 at S2 of the character string specified at S1 to the devices processing specified at D e Stores the character string specified at S1 for the specified number miow P s1 p s2 of characters to the position specified at S2 of the devices specified at D e Searches for the character string specified at S1 from the nth INSTR P s1 52 D nH character of the character string specified at S2 and stores the position where a match is found to D Floating point data e Converts the floating point data specified at S1 to a BCD data with EMOD P Si S2 0 the number of fraction part digits specified at S2 and stores this BCD resolution data to the devices specified at D App 29 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA e Converts the BCD data specified at S1 to a floating point data with EREXP P S1 S2 D the number of fraction part digits specified at S2 and stores this Floating point data data to the devices specified at D App 30 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 12 Special function instructions rs s 0H Sin S 1 S gt 041 D Cos P 15 e Cos S 1 S D 1 D Trigonometric function floating point data ane s oH Tan S 1 S D 1 D e Sin S 1 S D 1 D ASIN P ISD acos P _ 5 DH Cos S 1 S
146. the error history storage memory of the CPU module and in the error history file of the memory card 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 9 5 System protect Q2ASCPU features a number of functions that protect against program changes system protect by restricting general data processing access processing from GPP functions serial communication modules etc by third parties other than designers The following system protect functions are available Target Protection Valid File for Protection Method Valid Timing Turn ON SW1 of system Batch prohibition of write control to setting switch 1 on the main Valid for the CPU module CPU module devices See Section 15 2 Whole of CPU module All files T N th Establishes write protect for the Hit SRE eM OnE ANS Memory card units All files write protect switch a memory card and prohibits writing p Refer to Section 18 5 Registers entry codes for the following settings in relation to a specific drive Example Built in Register password RAM Refer to Section 9 6 1 Prohibiting read write display 2 Prohibiting writing Drive units Parameter Program Ch tributes file fi h fil aides AHIRUES IE TOL EACS Change file attributes by as follows File units All files ven bees ash password registration 1 Prohibit d write displ pee alia teenie ay Refer to Section 9 6 2 Prohibiting writing Control direction read write display and writing in the tab
147. the exposed shield section to the widest possible area as shown below i Shielded twisted pair cables Shield Refer to 1 for the grounding of the shield 4 Make sure to attach a ferrite core to the cable The ferrite core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT2032 0930 is recommended 20 5 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 1 c Always use double shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables connected to the 10BASE2 connectors Ground the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield Earth this section Refer to 1 for the grounding of the shield 2 Make sure to attach a ferrite core to the cable The ferrite core manufactured by TDK Corporation ZCAT3035 1330 is recommended Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX Co LTD 4 I O signal cables and other communication cables Always ground the I O signal lines including common line and other communication cables RS 232 RS 422 etc in the same manner as described in 1 if they are brought out of the control panel 5 Positioning modules Precautions for configuring machinery compliant with the EMC Directives using the A1SD 75P L1 S3 are described below a When using a cable of 2m 6 56ft or less e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with a cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 S3 external wiring connector e Connect the external wiring
148. the main sequence program and the subsequence program 2 Modification of the sequence program e The CHG instruction that switches between main sequence and subsequence programs is converted to OUT SM1255 after A QnA conversion Delete it as it is not required for Q2ASCPU e If the same interrupt program or pointer is used for the main sequence program or subsequence program use only one interrupt program or pointer REMARK AnACPU executes END processing on switching from execution of the main sequence program to execution of the subsequence program and also executes END processing after execution of the subsequence program Note that END processing is executed only after execution of the second program when a Q2ASCPU executes two programs consecutively Statements and notes are entered in the sequence program file after A QnA conversion No modification is required after conversion App 123 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix 4 6 Microcomputer programs Microcomputer programs and utility software packages cannot be converted as the Q2ASCPU has no microcomputer mode When a microcomputer program or utility software package is used with the ACPU a SUB instruction microcomputer program call instruction is written in the sequence program to execute it The SUB instruction is converted to OUT SM1255 after A QnA conversion delete it as it is not necessary In the case of user created microcomputer programs convert process
149. the network parameters and mounting status If any network parameter has been corrected write it to the CPU module e Confirm the setting of the number of extension stages of the extension base units e Check the connection status of the extension base units and extension cables When the GOT is bus connected to the main base unit and extension base units also check their connection status If the error occurs after the above checks the cause is a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative explaining a detailed description of the problem e Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 22 29 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status LINK PARA ERROR e Although the number of modules has been set to one or greater number in the Ethernet network parameter setting the number of actually mounted module is zero e The start I O No of the Ethernet network parameter differs from the I O No of the actually mounted module Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR e AJ71QE71 does not exist in the pos
150. the program is executed data chaneges from to external sources are isolated by setting so that data refreshes for input output modules are not executed 2 Isolation from special function module operations is achieved by setting Ignore or Depend on Simulation Data File with respect to the buffer memory of the special function module 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures to perform simulation _ indicates a GPP function operation and lt indicates an operation at the CPU module Set the Simulation Range in the device mode Using the PLC menu write the set simulation range as a simulation file Switch to the ladder mode Select Monitor Target Setting in the Option menu and set 1 Monitor for 2 Buffer Memory Link Memory Switch to the debug mode F2 Switch to STEP RUN Refer to Section 8 7 Select E Simulation in the Monitor test menu Select 3 Depend on Simulation Data File for 3 Link Memory Buffer Memory and set the drive name to be used and file name Select 9 Device Test from the Monitor test menu and set the device status Perform step execution or partial execution The operation results are stored in the memory card Data read and written to the memory card is monitored at peripheral device for GPP function Refer to Section 8 7 Described in this section 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION
151. time of power off 1 if an inductive load is used with load where the back electromotive force has been generated Output module ombined module 3 Source output nen si i Source output 3 _ Back electromotive _ force fot The load which was Sink output turned OFF is turned ON 3 Example for a moment at power 9 off Back electromotive _ force Output module Real ombined module 3 gt Back electromotive _ force Transistor output Sink output 22 53 APPENDICES APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 INSTRUCTION LIST For details on SFC related instructions refer to the QnNACPU Programming Manual SFC Appendix 1 1 Sequence Instructions 1 Contact instructions e Logical operation start N O contact logical operation start LD e Logical NOT operation start N C contact logical operation start LDI a e Logical product N O contact series connection AND a e Logical product NOT N C contact series connection NI brl e Logical sum N O contact parallel connection OR e Logical sum NOT N C contact parallel connection OR Contact e Rising edge pulse operation start LDP e Falling edge pulse operation start LDF in e Rising edge pulse series connection ANDP Hs e Falling edge pulse series connection ANDF e Rising edge pulse parallel connection ORP e Falling edge pulse parallel connection ORF App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 2 Association
152. time of the sequence program is longer than the set value for constant scan time the Q2ASCPU detects an error code SDO 5010 and the sequence program is performed in the own scan time ignoring the constant scan time setting Make sure that the constant scan time setting is shorter than the set time for WDT Watchdog timer If it is longer than the set time for WDT the Q2ASCPU detects a WDT error and the program execution is stopped Set the constant scan time within the following range Setting time for WDT gt Setting time for constant scan gt Maximum scan time of sequence program Constant scan setting 0 10 20 30 40 10 20 50 40 Constant 4 scan 9 END 0 END 0 0 D Sequence a _ mmr H program 35 ms 5 ms 38 ms 34 ms 6 ms n alll Scan in which constant scan is abnormal Fig 10 2 Operation when scan time is longer than constant scan setting time c Sequence program processing is suspended in the wait time between the END processing of the sequence program and the start of the next scan However if an interrupt factor occurs after the execution of END processing or if there is a low speed execution type program the interrupt program or the low speed execution type program is performed 10 3 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS d Constant scan time error If there is a low speed execution type program when performing the constant scan the constant scan time may be shifted by the time shown below
153. to the following procedure when life of the battery is over Even when the battery is removed memory is backed up by the capacitor for a while However if replacement takes longer than the guaranteed value shown in the following table the content of the memory may be erased so replace the battery quickly 21 11 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION mms ELS EC A Table 21 7 Period backed up by the capacitor Period backed up by the capacitor min Replacing batteries Back up the program data Turn off the programmable controller power supply Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct orien tation and connect lead wires to the connector Close the Q2ASHCPU cover Turn on the programmable controller power supply Monitor SM51 and check ON OFF status OFF ON Monitor SD52 Bit other than bit 0 ON and check which bit is ON Bit 0 ON Memory card battery failure Refer to Section 21 3 2 2 Completed CPU main module battery failure 21 12 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC QnA After replacing a battery write the date for next battery replacement on the sticker on the back side of the front cover Write the proper date by checking the battery life Refer to Section 21 3 1 Q2ASH cpu STOP L CLR RUN RESET RESET CPURRRED CHES Precautions INIT D FAIZDUYT Battery change Bit O3HlS3 AAMT FAL Change the bat
154. type program A 10 ms e Execution time for low speed execution type program B 30 ms 2 e END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy e Low speed END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing 0 40 115 185 255 335 ms 1 l f i i 1 1 l l l Scan execution type program a 45ms 40ms A 50ms i l l ay F a or Low speed execution type program A t l il ans 7 tome Ri 30ms Low speed execution type program B l i i l l l i f i Moet a ee ea A aH tn eta eee TETEE 12 12 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU as 2 For synchronous method 1 When Constant scanning is set The operation when a low speed execution program is executed under the following conditions is shown below e Constant scan time 60 ms Total for scan execution type programs 40 ms to 50 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program A 10 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program B 30 ms END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy e Low speed END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation E T E ee ee E EEEE E easy END END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing processing 0 i 60 120 i 180 240 300 ms I a a i Scan execution type program Le S
155. x0 1 MSG TOSOU LINE READY AL TOSOU LINE LEADY Q6PU UUU UUU JU U UU JUUUU 10 21 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 7 2 Key input operation Character string data input at the Q6PU can be stored as ASCII data without change in specified devices by using the PKEY instruction for peripheral device Data input ends when a CR code is input or when the 32nd character is input Example Program to input TOSOU LINE READY on the Q6PU when XO is turned ON x0 List PKEY DO OLD XO 1 PKEY DO Data registers XO PKEY start instruction SM736 s 4 D1 PKEY instruction execution in progress flag SM737 JUUUUU UU UU UU UU U8 Keyboard input reception flag for PKEY instruction t Data input from the Q6PU TOsOU LI NEw READ YCR l l l 54 53 55H 17 lt Number of key input data 7 H Data is input in this way 10 22 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 8 Reading Module Access Time Intervals The Q2ASCPU can monitor the access interval time The time between one access reception and the next access reception for intelligent special function modules network modules data link modules or GPP function This enables to grasp the frequency of accesses to the CPU module from external sources The operation for reading the module access interval time involves the following special relay and special regi
156. years 1 220 hours 0 1 years 1 720 hours 0 2 years 43 800 hours 5 years 8 800 hours 1years 12 570 hours 1 4 years 17 600 hours 2 years 43 800 hours 5 years 7 600 hours 0 9 years 10 860 hours 1 2 years 15 200 hours 1 7 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 40 000 hours 4 6 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 1 The power time ratio indicates the percentage of power on time per day 24 hours The power on time ratio is 50 when the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours 2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of 20 to 75 C operating ambient temperature of O to 55 C 3 The actual service value reference value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperatures of 40 C and 25 C This value is intended for refe rence only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 4 The guaranteed time after power off is 10 minutes w
157. 0 16 4 0 65 q 28 M 1 10 Unit mm inch 7 A1S68B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 3 130 5 12 OR aad l MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION mo I 400 15 75 16 40 65 lt lt 420 16 54 T H e e 4 4 oe a App 148 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 8 A1S52B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 OUT 110 4 33 130 5 12 mA A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION NZ NZ LL 563 4 16 4 0 65 28 1 10 App 149 APPENDICES 9 A1S55B S1 extension base unit 110 4 33 1 0 o 1 0 fl E MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 1 30 5 1 2 240 9 45 gt 16 4 0 65 260 10 24 28 1 10 10 A1S58B S1 extension base unit WAON 0 KLON 1 WON 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION a 16 4 0 65 lt ir 345 13 58 365 14 37 rm 28 1 10 Unit mm inch App 150 APPENDICES APPENDIX 7 USE OF LOCAL DEVICE FOR SUBROUTINE INTERRUPT PROGRAM STORAGE FILE FUNCTION VERSION B OR LATER When the subroutine interrupt program is executed the local device for the subroutine interrupt program storage files can be used To use the local device in the storage destination file for the subroutine interrupt program set the special relaies below e Subroutine program SM776 e Interrupt program SM777 1 Switching of local device with special relay ON OFF oe i Operation is performed at the local device of Opera
158. 1 Special register Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 Step or time during sampling trace Block number of extension file register Error code generated by SFC program Block number where error occurred Step number where error occurred Transition condition number where error occurred Sequence step number where error occurred Status latch step Software version of internal software Data check of serial communication module Number of empty blocks in communications request registration area Corresponding CPU e Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below la b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO SD207 Priority 4 l Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 QnA For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Programming manual Fundamentals Turned on off with a peripheral device When or is executed the value stored in SD1044 is used as the sampling trace condition At scanning At time Time 10 msec unit The value is stored into SD1044 in BIN code Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if
159. 1 relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan S Every END SM402 Scan only execution type program in the first scan after RUN processing QnA ON T Initial 1 scan of scan execution execution type type program program e After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only e When an initial execution type program is used this relay turns OFF at the END processing of the scan SM403 After RUN OFF for 1 execution type program in the first scan after RUN S Every END QnA scan only processing ON T Initial 1 scan of scan execution execution type type program program Low speed execution e After RUN ON for 1 scan only S Every END SM404 type programON for 1 e This connection can be used for low speed execution y QnA processing scan only after RUN type programs only POW SpSEd OXGRUNDN After RUN OFF for 1 scan only type programAfter S Every END SM405 This connection can be used for low speed execution QnA RUN OFF for 1 scan processing type programs only only SM410 0 1 second clock i QnA Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each SM411 0 2 Acie designated time interval ARERO When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU QnA module reset is performed goes from OFF to start S Status change Note that the ON OFF status changes when the SM412 1 second clock sua fiseconsooo designated time has elapsed during the execution of GNA the program SM413 2 second
160. 124v x 24 W The total of the power consumption values obtained for each block is power consumption of the entire programmable controller system W Wpw W5v W24v WouT WIN WsS W Using this value W calculate the amount of heat generation and temperature rise inside the panel The calculation formula to obtain the temperature rise inside a panel is shown as W jo W Power consumption of the entire programmable controller system the value obtained above Surface area inside the panel m U When temperature inside panel is kept constant by a fan etc 6 When air inside panel is not Circulated on anoanonnonnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnne 4 If the temperature inside the panel can exceed the specified range it is recommended to install a heat exchanger to the panel to lower the inside temperature If a ordinary ventilation fan is used it sucks dust together with the outside air and it may affect the performance of the programmable controller 19 8 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms EL Si 19 4 Installing the Base Units Precautions on installation of the main base unit and extension base unit are described here 19 4 1 Installation precautions Precautions for installing a programmable controller to a panel etc are explained below 1 To improve the ventilation and to facilitate the exchange of the module provide at least 30mm 1 18in of distance between the top part of the mo
161. 131 2 147m s 3 times in each of 3 directions XYZ Operation ambiance No corrosive gasses Operating elevation 2000m 6562 ft or less Installation location Control panel Overvoltage category Il or lower Pollution degree 2 or lower Equipment category Class This indicates that the equipment is assumed to be connected to which power distributer in the area from the public electrical power distribution network to machinery in the premises Category Il applies to equipment to which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300V is 2500V 2 This index indicates the degree of conductive material generation in the environment where the equipment is used In Pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs Occasionally however temporary conductivity caused by condensation can be expected 3 Do not use or store the programmable controller in the environment where the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure at sea level Otherwise malfunction may result To use the programmable controller in high pressure environment please contact your local Mitsubishi representative 15 1 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES mms ELS EC A 15 2 Part Names The names of module parts and their settings are described here Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ASHcPu 1 6 2 3 4 5 7 9 12 l 10 14
162. 14x n 1 1 1ms Condition loca device setting 1 k point n number of program files 7 Multiple program execution Overhead time of each program execution when the Q2AS H CPU S1 performs multiple programs The processing time is added when several programs are executed Q2ASHCPU S1 Condition n number of program files App 160 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A 8 File register Processing time when the file register is used The processing time is added when the file register is used Q2ASCPU S1 0 87 x n 1 0 74ms Q2ASHCPU S1 0 32 x n 1 0 28ms Condition n number of program files App 161 APPENDICES APPENDIX 10 TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations Appendix 10 1 Relevant Models The batteries used for Q2ASCPU are classified as shown in the table below Product Name Model Name Handled as QnA series battery A6BAT Lithium battery alone QiMEM 128S Q1iMEM 128SE Q1iMEM 1MS Q1iMEM 1MSE aaa Packed with lithium Non dangerous goods QnA series memory card Q1MEM 256SE Q1iMEM 2MS Q1iMEM 512S Q1iMEM 512SE Q1iMEM 64S Q1MEM 64SE coin battery BR2325 App 162 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix 10 2 Transportation Guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to
163. 16 input 16 input 16 input 16 output 16 output points points points points points Concept of I O numbers REMARK When programming with a peripheral device for GPP function I O numbers can be input in 2 digits I O numbers Input with a peripheral device X010 X10 YO20 Y20 5 VO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 5 2 I O Number Assignment Concept When the programmable controller power is ON or the CPU module is reset the I O assignment described below is performed In the sequence program designate the I O numbers assigned in accordance with the following 1 I O numbers are sequentially assigned from left to right taking slot O The slot to the right of the CPU module of the main base unit to be 0 2 The I O modules and special function modules mounted to the main base unit occupy the I O numbers corresponding to the number of I O points for each module 3 16 points are assigned to the empty slots where no I O module or special function module is mounted Main base unit s Slot 0 Input input Allocation direction allocation from left to right from stot 0 Empty CPU module 4 6 7 _ _ Slot number 3 5 16 32 points points ate Ka pinsons EON 2 x000 X010 ca 040 x050 YO70 5 4 XOOF ae ae 04F XO6F lt Inputs X and outputs A are E o slot occupies 32 points allocated with serial numbers An empty slot occupies 16 points Power supply module 4 If an extens
164. 2 2 Goto Section 22 2 2 Flow for actions when the POVVER LED is turned OFF Goto Section 22 2 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFF Go toSection 22 2 3 When the RUN LED is flashing Go to Section 22 2 5 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ONfflashing Goto Section 22 2 6 When the USER LED is turned ON Go to Section 22 2 7 Flow for actions when the BAT ARM LED is turned ON Goto Section 22 2 8 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON Goto Section 22 2 9 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written Goto Section 22 2 10 Flow for actions when booting from a memory card is not possible Go to Section 22 2 11 Flow chart used when the CPU module is not started up 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 2 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is turned OFF The flow when the programmable controller power is ON or when the POWER LED of the power supply module is ON during operation is described POWER LED is turned off Is there a power NO supply Supply power Can POWER YES LED be turned Is the 5 supply voltage is N reaching 85 to 132VAC The supply voltage should or 170 to 264VAC be within the rated range YES Can POWER LED be turned NO Properly fix the power supply unit Can POWER LED be turned Is the power supply unit fixed 1 Check the electric cur
165. 2B A55B or A58B extension base unit is used A1S30B Voltage drop of the extension base units can be Voltage drop of the main and the extension base units can be ignored ignored 17 5 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms ELS EC A 17 4 Handling Precautions The handling precautions to be taken from unpacking to mounting a base unit are described below The terminal connectors and pin connectors of the base unit are made of resin Do not drop them or apply heavy impact to them A CAUTION Do not remove the printed circuit board from the base unit Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire Use caution to prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the base unit during wiring Failure to do so may cause a failure malfunction or fire 17 6 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms Si 7 17 5 Part Names Part names of the base unit are shown here 1 Main base module A1S32B A1S533B A1S35B A1538B A1S38HB A1S38HBEU Remove with a tool such as a nipper Connects an extension cable using a signal communication connector for the Extension cab
166. 4 2 Step relay S eee eee 4 2 TMEr T ioneina a 4 2 Device COMMENL cccccecceeceeeceeeeeeeeneeaeeees 11 5 Initial device value comment ccceeee eee 11 8 Device points cccecceccceeeseeceeeeeeeceesaeesenenens 4 2 BE E E A E N A 13 3 Drive title ccc ceccceeceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeees 11 3 E Edge relay V cccccceccseceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 2 END proCeSSINg ccccccecseeceeceeeeeeseeeeeees 12 23 Equipment configuration in an independent system ee ee ee A eee 3 1 Error Interruption due to error detection 9 8 LED inidcation due to an error 0668 9 8 Operation mode when there is an error EEE eee E eee ete aeeeeees 9 15 13 3 Resetting error ccccccecccseeeeeceeeseeeneesaeees 9 9 Resetting errors ccccccecceeceeeseeeeeeesaees 22 46 Error Code Error Code LISt cccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 15 Error COdGS ccsccceeeceeeeeeeeees 22 16 App 132 Error Contents of Error Codes Detected by the CPU Module 4000H to 4FFFH App 133 Procedure to read an error code 22 16 ERROR CODES RETURNED TO THE REQUEST SOURCE IN GENERAL DATA PROCESSING P T AE EN EA AE E A E E NE App 132 Emor NISTOTY ooissreraricnsiossinsnnonnnidin nnrir enea 9 10 Execution time measurement cc00e 8 19 Execution Types ccccceccseeceeceeeeeeeceeenenees 12 1 Extension Extension Ba
167. 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 48 hours 2 0 days 48 hours 2 0 days 48 hours 2 0 days 48 hours 2 0 days 2 hours 1 0 days 2 hours 1 0 days 2 hours 1 0 days 2 hours 1 0 days The power time ratio indicates the percentage of power on time per day 24 hours The power on time ratio is 50 when the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambient temperature range of 20 to 75 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C The actual service value reference value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperatures of 40 C and 25 C This value is intended for refe rence only as it varies with characteristics of the memory The guaranteed time after power off is 10 minutes when The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead wire is broken The battery duration maximum life is 5 years 43 800 hours 21 5 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows 1 Replace the battery in four to five years even when it has not been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table 2 Replace the battery when it has been used exceeding t
168. 45ms 40ms 4oms 50ms 40ms 10ms 10ms Low speed execution type program A or 15ms 10ms 10ms 10ms Low speed execution type program B c I J i Warma crrcanelantecan Low speed scan time 165ms Low speed scan time 185ms l l Execution of low speed Execution of low speed END processing END processing 2 V When a low speed program execution time is set The operation when a low speed execution program is executed under the following conditions is shown below Low speed program execution time 30 ms Total for scan execution type programs 40 ms to 50 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program A 10 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program B 30 ms END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy ow speed END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing 0 40 115 165 235 295 ms l t i i 1 i 1 1 45ms Scan execution type program So eu 40ms 50ms _ 1oms 10ms er Low speed execution type program l l l l t f I 2 10ms an 10ms an Low speed execution type program B Low speed scan time 125ms Low speed scan time 120ms Execution of low speed Execution of low speed END processing END processing PoP eS SSS SSS 2 Set Se Se Se a eS ee E 12 13 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED
169. 48 points Default 0 point Can be set by the parameter Data register D Default 12288 points DO to 12287 Link register W Default 8192 points WO to 1FFF Annunciator F Default 2048 points FO to 2047 Edge relay V Default 2048 points VO to 2047 32768 points RO to 32767 Up to 1042432 points can be used by block switching Retentive timer ST File register R 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 Block switching is not necessary 16 points ZO to 15 4096 points PO to 4095 Pointer P Possible to set Ranges for pointers in files and common pointers by the parameter 48 points 10 to 47 Interrupt pointer I The fixed cycle interval for system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 is set by the parameter Sms to 1000ms in 5ms units 5 points FDO to 4 Devices that access link devices directly Dedicated to MELSECNET 10Designation format JO O 0 O MELSEC QnA Remark Possible to set the number of points to be used by the parameter Possible to set the number of points to be used by the parameter The number of device points is fixed 4 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC QnA Model Name Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Devices that directly access the buffer memories of special function Special function module direct device modules Designation format UO O GO O Latch power failure compensation LO to L8191 Default range Latch ranges can be set for B F V T ST C D W devices
170. 4VDC Remark Module Type A A D A converter module Analog I O module Temperature digital converter module Temperature control module MELSEC QnA Current consumption 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V A1S62DA Special 32 point paso Analog output 2 channels Special 32 points 10 to 10V input l l A1 DAV S 32 t 0 65 Analog output 8 channels Special 32 points 4 to 20mA input l l A1 DAI S 32 t 0 85 Analog output 8 channels Special 32 points Analog input Two channels Controllable simplified A1S63ADA loop Special 32 points Analog output 1 channel Analog input Four channels Controllable simplified A1S66ADA loop 64 outputs 0 16 Analog output 2 channels F ting Pt 100 3 wire type A1S62RD3 eae le ce Special 32 points Temperature input 2 channels F ting Pt 100 4 wire t A1S62RD4 Oe A lee Special 32 points Temperature input 2 channels A1S68TD Temperature input 8 channels 32 Special 32 points 0 32 Transistor output temperature input ical 2 channels module 32 Special 32 points PID control ON OFF pulse Transistor output temperature input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse heater wire breakage detection function Transistor output platinum RTD Resistance input A1S62TCRT Temperature Detector inpu Special 32 points 0 19 S2 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse Transistor output platinum RTD input 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse heater wire bre
171. 5 Station information setting the Station information setting screen appears When pressing the key the screen returns to the CC Link setting screen of c Station information setting Label name Number of Reserved Intelligent buffer specification word Intelligent buffer specification word specification word pg Station type occupied invalid stations station Send Receive Auto 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 ANAANANAAAAAAAN VVVVVVVVVV V ANANANANAAANAAAAAN ANAANANAAAAAAAA VVVVVVVVVV VV Spase Select Esc Close 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 1 DEBUGGING FUNCTION Function List Q2ASCPU has a variety of convenient functions when debugging The following shows the debugging functions Function that reads CPU programs device statuses from a Monitor function i Section 8 2 peripheral device capable of GPP functions Function that writes a program while the CPU module is Write during RUN Section 8 3 running o Functions that displays the processing time of a program Execution time measurement Section 8 4 being execute oo Functions that displays the processing time of a program Program monitor list Section 8 4 1 being executed oe Function that displays the number of executions of an Interrupt program monitor list Section 8 4 2 interrupt program Function that measures the execution time of section of a Scan time measurement Section 8 4 3 program i unaii Function that continually col
172. 6 3 Step operation STEP RUN operation processing a STEP operation is an operation mode in which operation processing of a sequence program can be paused continued by each instruction using GPP function Refer to Section 8 7 b Since an operation processing is paused while retaining the output and data memories the execution condition can be confirmed 12 24 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU RUN STOP state RUN gt STOP STOP gt RUN MELSEC QnA 5 Operation processing of Q2ASCPU when RUN STOP key switch is operated Q2ASCPU Operation Processing Operation processing of Data memory External output Remark Retains the condition OS saves the output OS saves the output Executes up to the END immediately before l status and sets all the i status and sets all the instruction then stops entering the STOP i output points to OFF sialis output points to OFF us Depends onthe ars oporarons from output mode set by eee output mode set by immediately before the parameter for the parameter for entering the STOP STOP RUN STOP gt RUN status Depends on the Starts from step 0 The Q2ASCPU executes the following processing in any of RUN state STOP state or PAUSE status e Refresh processing of I O modules e Data communication with peripheral devices computer link modules and or serial communication modules e Link refresh processing Thus even in the STOP st
173. 6 D5000 OUT T512 D5256 OUT T768 D5512 RCL instruction Program example RCL K8 RCR instruction Program example RCR K8 ROL instruction Program example ROL K8 App 114 DSUM D10 SD718 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO SET DY10 FLT D10 D100 OUT TO K10 OUTH T200 K10 OUT ST225 K10 OUT T256 D5000 OUTH T512 D5256 OUT ST768 D5512 RCL SD718 K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO RCR SD718 K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO ROL SD718 K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO APPENDICES AnLICPU Instruction Instruction after A QnA Conversion ROR instruction Program example ROR K8 SADD instruction Program example LEDA SADD LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDC D200 LEDR SER instruction Program example SER D10 D100 K5 SMOV instruction Program example LEDA SMOV LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDR SUM instruction Program example SUM D10 ZRRDB instruction Program example DMOV K8000 D9036 LEDA ZRRDB ZRWRB instruction Program example DMOV K8000 D9036 LEDA ZRWRB App 115 ROR SD718 K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO D10 D100 D200 SER D10 D100 SD718 K5 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO MOV D10 D100 SUM D10 SD718 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DMOV K8000 SD1036 ZRRDB SD103
174. 6 SD718 SD1036 is the device resulting from converting the special register D9036 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DMOV K8000 SD1036 ZRWRB SD1036 SD718 SD1036 is the device resulting from converting the special register D9036 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO APPENDICES mms ELS EC A An OCPU Instruction Instruction after A QnA Conversion AnA AnUCPU dedicated instruction _LEDA LEDB instruction name SUB LEDC device 1 SUB LEDC device n LEDR Program example 1 SIN instruction LEDA SIN LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDR Program example 2 DSER instruction LEDA DSER LEDC D10 LEDC D100 SUB K5 LEDR AnA AnUCPU special function module dedicated instruction LEDA LEDB instruction name SUB LEDC device 1 SUB LEDC device n LEDR Program example LEDA SVWR1 SUB H2 LEDC D10 LEDR AnA AnUCPU data link dedicated instruction _LEDA LEDB instruction name SUB LEDC device 1 SUB LEDC device n LEDR Program example LEDA LRDP SUB K12 LEDC D10 LEDC D100 SUB K5 LEDC MO LEDR App 116 Instruction name device 1 device n SIN D10 D100 DSER D10 D100 SD718 K5 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO Enter G before the instruction G instruction name device Un device n G SVWR1 U2 D10 Enter J before the instruction J instruction name JO device 1 device n t Network for using MELSECNET II OUT SM1255 J ZNRD
175. 7 SH NA 3599 F Section 3 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 2 17 1 19 7 1 19 7 2 20 1 3 20 2 7 22 5 1 22 5 2 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 6 3 Section 20 1 8 Sep 2008 A 3599 G Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 5 2 5 4 8 2 8 2 1 8 5 9 2 9 3 10 1 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 1 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 7 12 2 12 3 12 4 Chapter 13 Section 15 1 15 3 16 1 1 16 2 19 1 19 2 19 3 19 4 1 19 4 2 19 7 1 19 8 20 1 20 1 2 20 1 3 20 2 20 2 1 20 2 2 20 2 3 20 2 4 20 2 6 20 2 7 Chapter 21 Section 21 3 1 21 3 2 21 4 21 5 22 1 22 2 2 22 2 5 22 3 22 5 1 Appendix 2 Addition Appendix 11 Appendix 11 1 Appendix 11 2 Aug 2009 A 3599 H Partial correction Section 15 1 18 3 18 6 Chapter 20 Section 21 3 1 21 3 2 22 3 3 22 5 1 Appendix 2 3 Nov 2009 A 3599 Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 3 3 1 21 3 1 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Mar 2010 A 3599 J Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 3 3 1 3 3 2 19 1 19 7 1 21 2 21 3 2 22 3 7 Appendix 2 Jan 2011 A 3599 K Partial correction Section 3 2 Section 15 1 Section 19 1 Section 20 1 1 Section 20 1 8 Addition Section 20 1 9 Japanese Manual Version SH 3587 N This manual does not imply guarantee or implementation right for industrial ownership or implementation of other rights Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is not responsible for industrial ownership problems caused by use of the contents of this ma
176. 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION b When 2 Condition is set 1 Device and 2 Step can be set 1 When only 2 Step is set The monitor data collection timing is the moment when a QnACPU shows designated status immediately before executing the designated step The following shows the possible designations to execute When switching from OFF to ON lt f gt When switching from ON to OFF z S All the time only during ON lt ON gt All the time only during OFF lt OFF gt All the time in any statuses lt Always gt 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA REMARK 1 2 OO When Step 0 is designated the execution condition must be set as Always When 1 Device only is specified when 2 Step is not specified the monitor data collection timing is every scan after END processing of the programmable controller CPU When the data is changed in the same scan it cannot be detected Including the low speed program When only 1 Device is set either 1 Word Device or 2 Bit Device can be designated When 1 Word Device is designated The collection timing of the monitor data is the scan END processing when the current value of the specified word device becomes the specified value The following shows the method for designating the current value Decimal designation K Hexadecimal designation H Hexadecimal number When 2 Bit De
177. 809 Status latch clear SM806 comes ON automatically when preparation for status latch is completed 3 The following shows the operation at error occurrence When an error occurs during status latch SM827 comes ON and at the same time SM808 completed is turned ON To turn SM827 OFF either turn SM809 ON or execute the SLTR instruction 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Operation Procedures The following shows procedures for status latch All operations are performed on the Status Latch screen of the trace menu in the online mode 1 Setting the status latch condition Set the status latch condition at 2 Status Latch Condition Setting on the Status Latch screen Status Latch Condition Setting 1 gt All Internal Dev lt Yes gt Device Setting File RE 2 Specify Detail Range 2 Trigger Point 1 gt At Instruction Execution 2 gt fit Request of PDT 3 gt Specify Detail Condition Execute c gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close The following shows an explanation of the screen above Either 1 Status Latch Device Setting or 2 Trigger Point can be set for the status latch condition setting a Status Latch Device Setting Set the devices to execute the status latch Select one of the following 1 All Internal Dev Whether or not QnACPU latches all built in devices is set 2 Specify Detail Range The device types and numbers of points are set The followin
178. A 22 4 Resetting Errors The CPU module allows error resetting only for the errors that does not block the CPU module operation The procedure for resetting an error is as follows 1 Eliminate the cause of the error 2 Store the error code to be reset to special register SD50 3 Switch special relay SM50 from OFF to ON 4 The error is reset If the CPU module is returned with the error reset the special relay and special register relating to the error and the LED LED indicator return to their state before the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the error has been reset it is recorded in breakdown history again To reset multiple detected annunciators only the first detected F number is reset When storing the error code to be reset in SD50 at error reset the lower one digit of the code number is ignored Example When error codes 2100 and 2101 occurred resetting of error code 2100 results in also resetting of error code 2101 When error codes 2100 and 2111 occurred resetting of error code 2100 does not result in resetting of error code 2111 22 46 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms E St 17 22 5 Fault Examples with I O Modules Examples of faults concerning I O circuits and the corrective actions are explained 22 5 1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions The following is an input circuit fault example and its corrective action Table 22 2 Faults with the input circuit an
179. AM 60k steps Q2ASHCPU Number of I O points 1024 built in RAM 60k steps S1 Q1MEM 1MS_ SRAM 1M bytes Q1MEM 2MS SRAM 2M bytes Memory card Q1MEM 64SE SRAM 32k bytes E2PROM 32k bytes Q1MEM 2 128SE SRAM 64k bytes EPROM 64k bytes Q1MEM 2 256SE SRAM 128k bytes EPROM 128k bytes Q1MEM 512SE Q1MEM 1MSE SRAM 512k bytes E2PROM 512k bytes A1S61PN 5VDC 5A Power suppl Oe NS Mpu supply slots of PPY A1S62PN 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A PPly module main base and A1S63P 5VDC 5A 24VDC input extension bage SRAM 256k bytes E PROM 256k bytes 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current consumption POR Points points Product Name Model Name Description i Assignment BVDC 24VDC Remark Module Type A A poe formeren fe o fom rors emimemivctermae fe or om f fom emmareanvcrenmae fe emf om jae lnareamvcrerme orm om jo oreraa remeron fe von om poe orerar fw ef om rat rmmawocimamin fi orm om roma orasan i eres fom jou feewawecmaman fe oem fom rat paromanan fae oem om poe aroaren oem om poes rosanero fo ees oe jones aroser fo wes om jor pessar fe oe oom joer aconsonneermn fo orm om f json maoconmrnmeneie fe or om jon rmawoconiermeneie fo orm om joe femranconionneerman romeo om jo femwocsamrmeneie fe oem om owes pmmocoumrmennie fe ore ve 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current Curr
180. AR backup mode stand Q4AR e Turns on when the operating mode is redundant S Each END system separate SM1510 Operation mode alone system ON Redundant system separate mode Sia modewien OFF System A fixed mode Turns on when the start mode for a redundant SM1511 ON Previous control system when the power is turned on is the previous S Initial ower supply is on p ppy system latch mode control system latch mode e Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is hot start when the redundant system is actually start S Initial up Turns on when the operation is hot start when the Operation mode at OFF Initial start 8 oi CPU module change ON Hotsiart ea operation is switched for a redundant S Initial OFF Output reset e Turns on when the output mode during a stop error is SM1515 Output hold mode ON Output hold output hold S Each END Operation system OFF Control system e Turns on when the CPU module operation system SMIS ON _ Standby system status is the standby system stalls change Now 1 The information of the host CPU module is stored Operation status when OFF Initial start SM1513 GPU is started ON Hot start Q4AR Q4AR Q4AR SM1514 App 66 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 12 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl enon When Set ACPU OFF Power supply on CPU module startup startup status ON Operation system switch s
181. BY THE Q2ASCPU 4 END processing When all of the low speed execution type program has been completed low speed END processing is executed The following processing is performed in low speed END processing e Setting of special relays special registers for the low speed execution type program e Writing the low speed execution type program during RUN e Measurement of the low speed scan time e Resetting the watchdog timer for the low speed execution type program When low speed END processing is completed the low speed execution type program is executed again from the beginning In execution of a low speed execution type program the constant scan time may be extended by a time equivalent to the maximum processing time for the instructions executed plus the low speed END processing time 5 Low speed scan time a The low speed scan time is a total time of the time required for completion of the low speed execution program and the low speed END processing time If multiple low speed execution type programs are to be executed it is the total time of the time required for completion of all low speed execution type programs and the low speed END processing time b The Q2ASCPU measures the low speed scan time and stores it in special registers SD528 to SD535 The low speed execution scan time can be checked by monitoring these registers Present value initial value Minimum value Maximum value Stores scan time values of 1ms or les
182. Before resuming the operation clear format the memory for which a battery is backed up in the table above with a peripheral device For memory clear format operations refer to the following manuals e Type SWO IVD GPPQ GPP Software package Operating Manual Online e GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Make sure to back up each memory contents before storing a programmable controller 2 When a programmable controller power supply is ON or CPU module reset is cancelled a CPU module reviews the status of data below and initializes all the data if detecting an error RAM data in built in RAM Breakdown history Latch data Latch relay L latch setting range device set in a parameter special relay SM900 to SM999 special register SD900 to SD999 Sampling trace data 21 16 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 TROUBLESHOOTING The description cause determination and corrective actions of each error which may occur during system usage are described 22 1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting Besides using obviously highly reliable devices to increase system reliability it is an important point to quickly start up the system again when an error occurs In order to quickly start up the system find the cause of the problem and resolve it There are the following three basic points to be aware of when performing troubleshooting 1 Visual confirmation Confirm the following points 1 Machine operation stop status and operation sta
183. C ABCDEFGH D10 MOV ABCDEFGH D10 Note Since the MOV instruction has 00H appended at the end 5 data register words for 9 characters must be secured DFLOAT instruction Program example LEDA DFLOAT DFLT D10 D100 LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDR DOUT instruction Program example LEDA DOUT OUT DY10 LEDC Y10 LEDR DRCL instruction Program example DRCL SD718 K8 DRCL K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DRCR instruction Program example DRCR SD718 K8 DRCR K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DROL instruction Program example DROL SD718 K8 DROL K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DROR instruction Program example DROR SD718 K8 DROR K8 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO DRST instruction Program example LEDA DRST RST DY10 LEDC Y10 LEDR App 113 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A An OCPU Instruction Instruction after A QnA Conversion DSUM instruction Program example DSUM D10 DSET instruction Program example LEDA DSET LEDC Y10 LEDR FLOAT instruction Program example LEDA FLOAT LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDR OUT instruction Program example Set head numbers with parameters Low speed 0 High speed 200 Retentive 224 Extension timer Low speed 256 High speed 512 Retentive 768 Setting val stored dev start D5000 OUT TO K10 OUT T200 K10 OUT T225 K10 OUT T25
184. CARDS AND BATTERIES mms ELS EC A 18 7 Installing Removing A Memory Card 1 Installing a memory card When installing a memory card into the CPU module with its power ON make sure that the orientation of the memory card is correct then insert it fully until it s edge is flush with the face of the EJECT button After installing it set the memory card in out switch to ON The memory card is operable after the LED on the memory card in out switch turns ON Memory card EJECT button CPU main Memory card module l Insert it in Precartions this direction on this side A CAUTION Insert the memory card and fully press it to the memory card connector After that check for incomplete insertion Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions 2 Removing the memory card Before removing the memory card from the CPU module with its power ON set the memory card in out switch to OFF Verify that the LED on the switch has gone OFF Then press the memory card EJECT button and remove the memory card Memory card EJECT button C Push CPU main Memory card module Remove the card in this direction POINT 1 When a memory card is installed the scan time will increase by 10ms at maximum The scan time increases only in 1 scan during which the Q2ASCPU performs mount processing 2 If the memory card in out switch is turned OFF while the system or a program is using the memory card it may take a whi
185. CC Link dedicated instruction Message storage SD738 SD739 SD740 SD741 SD742 SD743 SD744 SD745 16th character SD746 SD747 SD748 SD749 SD750 SD751 SD752 30th character 32nd character 34th character SD753 SD754 SD755 SD756 SD757 SD758 SD759 SD760 SD762 SD763 SD764 SD765 SD766 SD767 SD768 62nd character SD769 e Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC Link dedicated instructions 2nd character 4th character 6th character 1st character 3rd character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 18th character 13th character 15th character 17th character 20th character 19th character 22nd character 21st character 24th character 23rd character 26th character 25th character 28th character 27th character 29th character 31st character 36th character 33rd character 35th character 38th character 37th character 40th character 39th character 42nd character 41st character 43rd character 44th character 46th character SD761 48th character 50th character 45th character 47th character 49th character 52nd character 51st character 54th character 53rd character 56th character 55th character 58th character 57th character 60th character 64th character
186. Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl A pignaton When Set ACPU CPU Cumulative execution time for SD544 low speed Cunaulanve execution type e Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed execution type ascona eo program into SD544 and SD545 in 1 ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units S Every END for low speed Cumulative SD544 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing execution type ee execution time for SD545 Stores the ws place Storage range 0 to 900 ae Prog low speed Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan execution type programs in 100 ws units Execution time for low speed SD546 execution type Stores the execution time of a low speed execution type program during Execution time Programs one scan into SD546 and SD547 for low speed in 1 ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units S Every END programs in 100 ws units Scan execution SD548 type program Stores the execution time of a scan execution type program during one F execution time in scan into SD548 and SD549 can execution 4 ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units S Every END type program Scan execution SD548 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing execution time anus type program SD549 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 execution type Execution time for SD546 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing programs low
187. D58 is done by divided processing ie A8UPU OFF Read time not e Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8SUPU M9070 SM1070 x A8PUJrequired shortened A8PUJ search time 2 ON _ Read time shortened In this case the scan time is extended by 10 OFF Empty spaces in communication ies Ha regis fanon Indication of communication enable disable to remote M9081 SM1081 SM714 a f terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 A2C or QnA registration area ON No empty spaces in a ee A52G BUSY signal communication request registration area It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the END OFF Error check executed instruction processing time eee ees i Emot eneck No error check e Check for fuse blown e Check of battery e Collation check of I O module e Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is Operation error OFF No error stored into SD1091 mee SMI a details flag Error Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter The I O module can be changed online with power on when SM251 is turned ON after the head I O number of the I O module is set to SD251 One module only is allowed to be changed by one setting OFF Exchanged To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test een SM09A SMAI VOexchangetad SN sNidt exchanged mode to change the module during CPU RUN To be aia switched on in peripheral device test
188. DC power supply for output module s internal consumption Current consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON RN Not applicable to a system where 24VDC is supplied externally and a power supply module with no 24VDC output is used 2 Total power consumption of 5VDC logic circuits of modules The 5VDC output circuit power of the power supply module is regarded as the power consumption of each module W5v l5v x5 W 19 7 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms ELS EC A 3 Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON The average 24VDC output circuit power of the power supply module is regarded as the total power consumption of each module W24v l24v x 24 W Average power consumption due to output voltage drop of the output modules power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON WouT louT x Vdrop x Output points x that are simultaneously ON W louT Output current actual operating current A Vdrop Voltage dropped across each output load V Average input power consumption of the input modules power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON WIN IIN xE x Input points x that are simultaneously ON W IIN Input current effective value for AC A E Input voltage actual operating voltage V Power consumption of the external power supply part of the special function module WS I 15V x 15 1 15V x 154
189. E i m 1 10 Unit mm inch 4 A1S38B A1S38HB main base units 4 mounting screws M5 x25 410 16 14 16 4 430 16 93 28 0 64 1 10 Pe SS eee Unit mm inch App 144 MELSEC QnA APPENDICES Appendix 6 4 Extension Base Unit 1 A1S65B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 110 4 33 130 5 11 295 11 61 m 16 4 315 12 40 28 0 64 1 10 2 A1S68B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 o oo B w Ws Ws Me AE 2 OIO MADE IN JAPAN E S D 400 15 74 164 420 16 53 28 0 64 1 10 Unit mm inch App 145 APPENDICES 3 A1S52B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M525 mo oO D 1e mao A olg 663 Jooo 16 4 oo 155610 28 0 64 1 10 10 4 A1S55B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 oO 8 wa We ez A We li oe MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION D 240 9 44 T 16 4 260 10 23 98 0 64 lt gt 1 10 App 146 APPENDICES 5 A1S58B extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5x25 ae x oO s LO oo m l wes wel esl ec We olo f Za a E Z 345 13 58 365 14 37 a a m a Unit mm inch App 147 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 6 A1S65B S1 extension base unit 4 mounting screws M5 x25 110 14 33 130 15 12 S 1 0 POWER MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 295 11 61 315 12 4
190. E Press fit type flat cable REMARK Toa Electric Industrial CO LTD provides I O cables with connectors which can connect to 40 pin connector A1SX41 A1SX42 A1SY41 A1SY41P A1SY42 etc or 37 pin D sub connector A1SX81 A1SY81 of I O modules Contact TOA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL CO LTD 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA 2 Peripheral device Connected to the CPU module by an RS 422 cable AC30R4 PUS AC20R4 A8PU for program writing and reading 5VDC 0 4A Programming unit AC30R4 PUS Cable for connection between CPU module and Q6PU 3 m 9 84 ft long RS 422 cable Cable for connection between CPU module and Q6PU AC20R4 A8P mee en 2m 78 74 in long 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 3 2 Precautions when configuring the system The following shows the hardware and software packages which can be used for Q2ASCPU 1 Hardware a The number of modules that can be mounted is restricted depending on the module type Applicable Module For Q2ASCPU only For AnSCPU Including GOT A900 Series Only when the bus No limit Total 6 modules connection is used and GOT1000 Series Only when the bus Intelligent special function module connection is used Total 4 Ethernet module for Total 2 for network network total of 4 units for data link use Ethernet and Link module Ethernet module data link use REMARK The modules described above are categorized as follows 1 I O module Standa
191. ENT mms ELS EC A 2 Replacing a 16 point input module with a 32 point input module When replacing the 16 point input module with a 32 point input module without changing the all I O number assignment in a system to which a 16 point input module is designedTo achieve this operation perform I O assignment as follows a Loading status and I O numbers before the replacement A1S38B Power supply module CPU module Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points X00 X10 X20 X30 Y40 Y50 Y60 Y70 to to to to to to to to XOF X1F X2F X3F Y4F Y5F Y6F Y7F SSS Bo These I O numbers are unchanged This module is replaced with 32 point module Change I O numbers into X80 9F b I O numbers when I O assignment is performed using GPP function 1 I O assignment example LO atlacahen cme ame ee tee 0 0 0 0j A1SX40 1 Basic 1 0 1 80 A1Sx41 A1S38B 2 0 2 20 A1SX40 Power Supply 3 0 3 1 A1S61P 4 0 4 Extension Cable 5 0 5 6 0 6 7 0 7 8 1 0 9 1 1 10 1 2 11 1 3 12 1 4 13 1 5 14 1 6 15 1 7 PaUp Prev Extention 1 Power Supply Extension Cable VVY Y V YV YV W YW A A A A A A A A A A OA The example of I O assignment with GPP function 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC Q
192. EP RUN Local station status Control is performed depending on whether a local station is Maaga eee operation status ON STOP or PAUSE in the STOP or PAUSE mode Onn status M9233 SM1233 Local station error OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an QnA detect status ON Error detection error in another station App 64 OFF Normal Control is performed depending on whether the link card ON Abnormal hardware is faulty or not APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special Correspondin Special Relay after Relay for ponaing f on CPU Relay Conversion Modification M9235 SM1235 M9236 SM1236 M9237 SM1237 M9238 SM1238 M9240 SM1240 M9241 SM1241 M9242 SM1242 a a E Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal Ea OFF Loopback not being M9243 SM1243 Loopback conducted Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the local Oni implementation ON Loopback station implementation Ea ES Local station remote I O station parameter error detect status OFF No errors Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I O station Error detection has detected any link parameter error in the master station Local station remote I O station initial communications OFF No communications Depends on the results of initial communication between a Commu
193. ERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU c When grouping several interrupt programs into one 1 Create interrupt programs in order starting from step O in the standby type program An END instruction is required at the end of the interrupt programs 2 Since there are no restrictions on the order of creation of interrupt programs there is no need to arrange pointers in ascending order of pointer numbers when creating multiple interrupt programs Program A Q2ASCPU IC Memory card internal RAM Main routine program Write Program A Program B standby type program Program B Write Interrupt program Use an interrupt pointer Pointers do not have to be set in ascending order REMARK For details on interrupt pointers refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 12 18 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 3 Set up of programs a Programs corresponding to all of the systems can be created in advance and thereby necessary programs only can be executed Programs set as the standby type with parameters can be changed to the scan type programs in the sequence program for execution Use the following instructions to change the execution type in the Q2ASCPU 1 PSCAN instruction Changes the program type from the standby type to the scan execution type 2 PLOW instruction Changes the program type from the standby type to the low speed execution type 3 PSTOP instruction Changes th
194. ERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 2 Operation Processing of RUN STOP PAUSE and STEP RUN The Q2ASCPU has four kinds of operation statuses RUN STOP PAUSE and step operation STEP RUN statuses Operation processing of programmable controller CPU in each operation status is explained here 1 4 RUN status operation processing a The RUN status represents a status in which sequence program operation is repeated in the order from step 0 END FEND instruction step 0 b When entering the RUN status the CPU outputs the output status data saved in STOP status according to the output mode setting parameter for STOP RUN c Processing time from switching STOP RUN to the start of the sequence program operation is usually one to three seconds although it may vary depending on the system configuration Note that it may be longer than this depending on the conditions STOP status operation processing a The STOP status is a status in which sequence program operation is stopped by the RUN STOP key switch or due to remote STOP see Section 10 6 1 b When entering the STOP status the CPU saves the output status data and turns all output points to OFF Data memories except for output Y are retained PAUSE status operation processing a The PAUSE status represents a status in which operation of sequence program is suspended with the output and data memory statuses retained Refer to Section 10
195. ETER LIST MELSEC QnA Item Parameter No Description Set the mounting status of each module Classification Number of points Slot setting 4000H Set the module type number of points head I O No etc Start XY Model Name Set model names of a power supply module and or extension Base setting 4001H cables Extension cable This setting does not affect CPU module operation MELSECNET Ethernet setting Unit count 5000H Valid module for 5001H access to other station Inter device transfer 5002H parameters Routing parameter 5003H Set link parameters for the MELSECNET II data link system network parameters for the MELSECNET 10 network system or Ethernet parameters Network setting SNMOH MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET 10 network setting Network refresh 5NM1H parameter Station inherent SNM3H parameter I O assignment 5NM4H i QNOOH a IP address 13 PARAMETER LIST Setting Reference Section Reference Manual Default value Setting range No setting Empty Input Output Special No setting 0 to 64 points in 16 point units Section 5 3 No setting O to 1FFFH in 10H units hexadecimal No setting Up to 16 characters No setting Up to 16 characters Section 5 3 For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network Reference Manual System Reference Manual MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual N and M indicate the following N
196. F Not after trigger e Goes ON if even 1 block within the step trace being executed is triggered S Status change New QnA ON eanet irar Wager e Goes OFF when step trace is commenced e Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being OFF Is not after all triggers After Step trace trigger executed are triggered S Status change New QnA ON _ Is after all triggers e Goes OFF when step trace is commenced OFF Not completed e Goes ON at step trace completion SM825 Step trace completed ON End sGoes OFF when step Iraca is commence S Status change M9180 SM826 Sampling trace error OFF Normal e Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling S Status change New QnA ON Errors trace OFF Normal e Goes ON if error occurs during execution of status SM827 Status latch error ON Errors latish S Status change QnA OFF Normal e Goes ON if error occurs during execution of program Z M O 5 gt New New New O 5 gt SM821 SM823 After step trace trigger SM824 App 57 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 8 Latch area Table App 2 9 Special relay Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 SM93900 Power off file OFF No power ol file e Goes ON if a file is present during access when S Status change New QnA ON _ Power off file present power is interrupted U OFF Keyboard input notregistered e Goes ON at registration of keyboard inpu
197. FC device clear mode Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed execution type program OFF SFC program not ON ON executed stop SFC program executed start Initial start Resume start Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective When transition is executed When no transition OFF Preserves Clear device Preserves device Hold step output turned OFF cleared Hold step output held Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode e Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present e Turn this relay from ON to OFF to stop program execution e Turn this relay from OFF to ON to resume program execution e The SFC program starting mode in the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value At initial start OFF At continued start ON Set the presence absence of continuous transition for the block where Continuous transition bit of the SFC data device has not been set e OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or during continuous transition and ON when continuous transition is not executed e Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode Select whether the coil outputs of the active steps are held or not at the time of a block stop e As the initial value the output mode at a block stop in the parameter
198. FFFH Local Module User s Manual Ethernet module COOOH to CFFFH Ethernet Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Module User s Manual MELSECNET 10 network For faire MELSECNET 10 Network FOOOH to FFFFH module System Reference Manual App 132 APPENDICES Appendix 5 2 MELSEC QnA Error Contents of Error Codes Detected by the CPU Module 4000H to 4FFFH The error contents of error codes detected by the CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH and the messages displayed on the peripheral device are indicated in the table below Error Code Hexadecimal CPU module related error CPU module mode error Error Contents Sum check error Remote request that cannot be handled is performed Command to which a global request is not allowed is performed Since the Q2ASCPUsystem is protected the request contents cannot be performed The data volume is too large for the specified request Password has not been cancelled CID is different from the Q2ASCPU data The Q2ASCPU is not BUSY Buffer is not empty The request contents cannot be performed because the Q2ASCPU is in RUN The request contents cannot be performed because the Q2ASCPU is not in STEP RUN The request contents cannot be performed because the Q2ASCPU is in STEP RUN Message Displayed at Peripheral Device Message 1 is displayed Message 1 is displayed Message 1 is displayed Execution is not allowed during system prote
199. GET VRAM data write PUT Display status read STAT App 44 APPENDICES ID controller initial setting IDINIT1 IDINIT2 Data read from ID data carrier IDRD1 IDRD2 Data write to ID data carrier IDWD1 IDWD2 Continuous read from ID data carrier IDARD1 IDARD2 Continuous write to ID data carrier IDAWD1 IDAWD2 AJ71IDO R4 control Data compare with ID data carrier IDCMP1 IDCMP2 instruction Same data batch write to ID data carrier IDFILL1 IDFILL2 Copy between ID data carriers IDCOPY1 IDCOPY2 ID data carrier clear IDCLR1 IDCLR2 ID data carrier use end IDOFF1 IDOFF2 ID data carrier use start IDON1 IDON2 Writes the user registration frame to the 5 PUTE E2PROM for the AJ71QC24N Reads the user registration frame from the E PROM for the AJ71QC24N GETE Data send with the dedicated protocol using ONDEMAND the on demand function Data send for the specified number of bytes in OUTPUT no protocol mode Data send in accordance with the send schedule table in no protocol mode Data receive in no protocol mode INPUT AJ71QC24 control instruction Data send with the bi directional protocol BIDOUT Data receive with the bi directional protocol BIDIN Communication status read SPBUSY Device read from other stations READ Device write to other stations SWRITE Data send to other stations SEND Data receive from other stations RECV Transient transmission request to other REQ stations a The AJ71
200. H to BFFFH CC Link System Master Local Module User s Manual communicating with the CPU module Ethernet module COOOH to CFFFH Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual MELSECNET 10 network QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System FOOOH to FFFFH module Reference Manual The error codes of the CPU module are categorizes according to minor errors moderate errors and major errors Minor error Errors that CPU module such as a battery error continues the operation Error code 1300 to 10000 Moderate error Errors that CPU module such as a WDT error stops the operation Error code 1300 to 10000 Minor error Errors that CPU module such as a RAM error stops the operation Error code 1000 to 1299 The error that the QnACPU continues operation and the error that QnACPU stops operation are determined by CPU operation status of the error code list 22 3 2 Procedure to read an error code When an error occurs error codes and error messages can be read with the peripheral devices For details on the setting method for each function refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or SWU IVD GPPQ Operating Manual Offline 22 16 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 22 3 3 Error code list 1000 to 1999 1000 1010 1101 1102 1103 1104 MELSEC QnA The following shows the error messages from the error code 1000 to 1999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding E
201. HB A1S38HBEU base unit is dedicated to the Q2ASCPU and cannot be used with the AnSCPU 2 When using the simulation module A6SIM X64Y64 set its base unit specification to 1 or later If 0 is set the AGSIM X64Y64 does not operate normally When 0 is to be set for the base unit specification of the AGSIM X64Y64 replace the base unit with the A38B 17 2 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms Si 7 17 2 Extension Cable Specification List The specifications of the extension cables used for the Q2ASCPU system are shown below Resistance value of SVDC supply line 0 02Q 0 02Q 0 04Q 0 062 0 12Q 0 189 0 04Q 0 052 0 129 0 182 at 55 C een Connection between a main base and A1S50 B 1 A1S6 B S1 Connection between a main base and A50 B A6 0O B A CAUTION Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module After that check for incomplete insertion Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and or outputs When using extension cables keep them away from the main circuit cables high voltage large current 17 3 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms EL St 11 17 3 Application Standards of Extension Base Unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B A58B To the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B and A58B extension base units 5VDC is supplied from the power supply module on the main base unit Power is not supplied from any power supply
202. HE Q2ASCPU MELSEC QnA b If the low speed execution type program is not processed within surplus time of the constant scan time or within the low speed program execution time the program execution is interrupted and is resumed in the next scan 1 For the index register processing in the case where a scan execution type program is switched to a low speed execution type program refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals For the index register processing in the case where an interrupt program is executed during execution of a low speed execution type program refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals Set a proper low speed program execution time so that the value obtained by adding it to the scan time is smaller than the set WDT value The COM instruction cannot be used in the low speed program When Constant scan time and Low speed program execution time are set PRG TIME OVER Error code 5010 occurs in the case of Surplus time of constant scan lt Low speed program execution time Execute the low speed execution type program either in the constant scan time or in low speed program execution time 12 11 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU r 1 For non synchronous method 1 When Constant scanning is set The operation when a low speed execution program is executed under the following conditions is shown below e Constant scan time 60 ms e Total for scan e
203. HOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 2401 2402 2410 2411 2412 2413 FILE SET ERROR The file specified by parameters cannot be made Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset At writing to progurammable controller FILE SET ERROR Though the file register has been set in the pairing setting tracking setting the file register does not exist Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number Diagnostic Timing At power ON At reset At writing to progurammable controller FILE OPE ERROR e The specified program does not exist in the program memory This error may occur when the ECALL EFCALL PSTOP PSCAN POFF or PLOW instruction is executed e The specified file does not exist Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FILE OPE ERROR e The file is the one which cannot be specified by the sequence program such as comment file e The specified program exists in the program memory but has not been registered in the program setting of the Parameter dialog box This error may occur when the ECALL EFCALL PSTOP PSCAN or POFF inst
204. If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D9101 numbers are stored Also detects blown fuse condition at remote station output modules D9102 SD1303 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO D9103 Bit pattern in units sp1300 O of 16 points p D9104 indicating the SD1301 Y1F0 Fuse blown modules whose aa module fuses have blown D1331 0 ur SD1306 0 No blown fuse D9106 1 Blown fuse Indicates fuse blow D1307 present D9107 For a module whose number of output points exceeds 16 points all bits D1308 corresponding to output module numbers within the number of output New points occupied by the module in increments of 16 points turn on Example When a 64 point module is mounted on the slot 0 b0 to b3 turn on when the fuse has blown New e Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one D1331 This flag is cleared by error resetting operation App 105 APPENDICES 12 I 0 module verification modules with I O module verification errors verify error 0 No I O verification errors I O verification error present D1431 Table App 3 14 Special register Corres Explanation Set by ponding When Set ACPU D9000 SD1400 SD1401 SD1402 SD1403 Bit pattern in units of 16 points SD1404 indicating the e When the I O modules whose I O module information differs from that registered at power ON are
205. Instruction execution time a The processing time of each instruction used for the Q2AS H CPU S1 program For the processing time of each instruction refer to the following manual e QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b Since interrupt fixed cycle execution type program have overhead time add the overhead time to the instruction execution time 3 END processing a The Q2AS H CPU S1 common processing time except for above 1 2 b The following table shows values of the END processing time CPU module END Proc Time i App 158 APPENDICES Appendix 9 2 Causes of Increasing Scan Time The following shows the functions that increase the Q2AS H CPU S1 scan time When using the following functions add the values calculated in Appendix 9 1 to the following values MELSECNET 10 refresh MELSECNET MINI S3 refresh CC Link auto refresh Sampling trace Monitor using GX Developer Local device Multiple program execution Installation removal of memory card File register whose file name is the same as the program MELSECNET 10 refresh Refresh time between the Q2AS H CPU S1 and MELSECNET 10 network module For MELSECNET 10 refresh time refer to the following manual e QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual MELSECNET MINI S3 refresh Refresh time between the Q2AS H CPU S1 and MELSECNET MINI S3 network module For MELSECNET MINI S3 refresh time refer to
206. JO K12 D10 D100 KSMO APPENDICES AnLICPU Instruction Instruction after A QnA Conversion Index register Z Z1 to Z6 V V1 to V6 Index register double word Vn Zn Upper Lower App 117 Z ZO Z1 to Z6 Z1 to Z6 V gt ZT V1 to V6 Z8 to Z13 Zn 1 __Zn Upper Lower If an index register is used for destination of double word operation or single word multiplication division the relation of upper and lower levels may be broken causing a problem APPENDICES Appendix 4 2 Device a Only devices within the Q2ASCPU range are converted AnLICPU Device Device after A QnA Conversion XOOO Same as to left YOOO Same as to left MOOO Same as to left M L S is determined by the LOOO Same as to left parameter settings SOOO Same as to left Correct to MOOD M9000 to M9255 SM1000 to SM1255 BOOO Same as to left T low speed timer Same as to left Low speed high speed T high speed timer retentive is determined by Same as to left ok op parameter setting T retentive timer STOoOO COOO Same as to left FOOO Same as to left DOOO Same as to left D9000 to D9255 SD1000 to SD1255 WOOO Same as to left ROOO Same as to left A1 70 Z Z0 Z1 to Z6 Z1 to Z6 vo V Z7 V1 to V6 Z8 to 213 POOO Same as to left KOOO Same as to left HOOO Same as to left REMARK j When P254 is used as the CHK instruction pointer P254 can be converted to P254 as is Refer to Appendix 4 12 App
207. LINK with a total of 128 I O points and remote I O module If only a few remote I O units are used perform I O assignment with a peripheral device to decrease the number of occupied I O points to 16 32 or 48 Master module for S LINK I O total 128 points PC easier monitoring module MELSEC QnA Current consumption 5VDC 24VDC Soma A A Number of Occupied Points points I O Assignment Module Type Special 32 points i a Special 32 points 0 40 a Special 32 points 0 47 B Maximum 4 rt ha ue empty 16 points 0 40 0 17 CPU module Second half special32 points let p p Section 3 3 2 32 Special 32 points 0 80 32 Special 32 points 1 14 32 Special 32 points 0 40 I O dedicated mode 32 special 32 points 0 35 Expanded mode 48 special 48 points Output 64 points 0 115 Special 32 points 0 20 Special 32 points 0 15 Special 32 points 0 55 Output 32 points 0 08 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current consumption Points points Product Name Model Name Description ode nen BVDC 24VDC Remark Module Type A A Power Memory card consumption interface A1SD59J S2 Memory card interface module Special 32 points assumes module connection of A1SD59J MIF I O simulation module for connection to the main base Allows desk debugging without connecting I O module to the base module Use an expansion cable of the AnS series between the main base of the
208. M80000 eee E ez eee Sampling trace preparation SM801 Sampling trace start SM802 4 Sampling trace execution in progress i I SM803 Sampling trace trigger SM804 N After sampling trace trigger SM805 i Sampling trace completed When the trace is suspended from a peripheral device capable of GPP functions SM800 is turned OFF The following shows the operation at error occurrence When an error occurs during sampling trace SM826 sampling trace error comes ON and at the same time SM801 sampling trace start goes OFF Start the trace again for turning OFF SM826 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION Operation Procedures MELSEC QnA The following shows the procedures of sampling trace These operations are performed on the Sampling Trace screen of the trace menu in the online mode 1 Set the trace devices and trace conditions with GPP function a Setting the trace devices Set the devices at Trace Device Setting on the Sampling Trace screen Irace Device Setting vi J J J J I 1 I 1 I J J Do lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt lt Do gt bami kami kd bl l bd bd hoad band baad bnt kd Space Select Esc Close 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION b Setting the trace conditions Set the trace conditions at Trace Device Setting on the Sampling Trace screen Trace Condition Setting i Tot
209. MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status RUN Q4AR QnA Q4AR Q2AS QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status SP UNIT DOWN The special function module was accessed during the execution of a FROM TO instruction set but there was no response When an error is generated the program error The CPU module base unit and or the special 1402 location corresponding to the individual information function module that was accessed is experiencing is stored a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi WCollateral informationmmon representative Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e During execution of FROM TO instruction set CONTROL BUS ERR When performing a parameter I O allocation the intelligent function module special function module could not be accessed during initial communications On error occurring the head I O number of the 1411 corresponding intelligent function module special QnA function module is stored in the common RUN information Off Collateral informationmmon ERR e Common Information Module No Slot No Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the Flicker e Individual Information same error is displayed again the intelligent MDiagnostic Timing functi
210. Maximum processing time Error of one instruction in the low speed END processing time low speed execution type program Time taken to execute the END processing for a low speed execution type program The low speed execution type program is divided and performed within surplus time Therefore if one constant scan ends while performing the instruction takes long processing time the constant scan is completed after finishing the processing of the instruction during execution The time extended to complete the execution of the instruction is the constant scan error For details of the instruction processing time refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 10 4 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 3 Latch Function When the programmable controller power is turned ON the CPU module is reset using the RUN STOP key switch or a instantaneous power failure lasting longer than the allowable momentary power interruption time occurs the all device values in the Q2ASCPU are cleared and the default values are set in the devices Bit devices OFF word devices 0 The latch function retains the data in the devices when performing these operations The operations in the program are the same whether or not the latch function is used 1 Application of the latch function The latch function can be used when continuing the control to retain data such as production quantities numbers of defects addresses etc even if a
211. N STOP mode Remote RUN STOP by parameter setting Status in program Except below STOP C BLS Instruction 1 STOP execution 2 PAUSE 1 When the CPU mdoule is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off the CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode e Indicates which sequence program is run presently One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code D9018 SD1018 SD524 Seana Scan time e At every END the scan time is stored in BIN code and always 10 ms units rewritten D9019 SD1019 SD526 Sean tine Maximum scan time 10 ms units e If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code App 96 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU QnA APPENDICES Special ACPU este Special Register ne Register for Register Modification Conversion Special k o Table App 3 11 Special register MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU e Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples Constant scan time of 10 ms User sets in 10 ms 0 No setting units 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms D9021 SD1021 Sean dine Scan time e At every END the
212. NOTE 1 Set status latch files in the RAM area of the memory card 2 It is possible to execute status latch from another station in the network or from a serial communication module However sampling trace cannot be executed from more than one site at the same time With Q2ZASCPU sampling trace can be executed from only one site at a time 3 Since the status latch conditions registered in the CPU module are latched the status latch data is retained even when the power is turned OFF The data can be cleared by performing a latch clear operation using the RUN STOP key switch on the Q2ASCPU 4 Status latch is performed by connecting the Q2ASCPU with the peripheral devices capable of GPP function 5 When the monitor destination is set to the status latch set values of the timer counter are not displayed 0 is displayed for the column of the timer counter set values 6 When device is specified in the detailed condition for trigger point setting device is specified When the condition is satisfied before execution of the trigger trigger cannot be executed REMARK 1 When the monitor destination is set to device memory the set values of the timer counter are not displayed 0 is displayed in the set value column of the timer counter 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 Step Operation This function runs one step or one part of a program runs a program with a part skipped This function is used to determi
213. NS N WARNING Do not touch any terminal during power distribution Doing so may cause an electric shock Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst and or ignition Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Failure to do so may result in an electric shock If they are too loose it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions Tightening the screw excessively may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions N CAUTION When performing online operations especially program modification forced output or operating status change by connecting a peripheral device to the running CPU module read the manual carefully and ensure the safety Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents Do not disassemble or modify each of modules Doing so may cause failure malfunctions personal injuries and or a fire When using a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone keep a distance of 25cm 9 84inch or more from the programmable controller in all directions Failure to do so may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all the phases of the external
214. Number of the module counted from the first M Network type Network type Network type Network type MELSECNET 10 Default MELSECNET Local station MELSECNET 10 Multiple remote DH submaster No remote master in the host MELSECNET 10 Control station MELSECNET II mixed Local station CPU module MELSECNET 10 Normal station MELSECNET II Local station MELSECNET 10 Multiple remote EH submaster There is a remote master in the MELSECNET 10 Remote master station MELSECNET 10 Standby station host CPU module MELSECNET Master station MELSECNET 10 Multiple remote master MELSECNET 10 Parallel remote FH MELSECNET II mixed Master station MELSECNET 10 Parallel remote master submaster 6H MELSECNET II Master station 13 6 13 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC QnA Make the settings for automatic refresh of the MELSECNET MINI system 6000H Set the number of MELSECNET MINI master modules to be used MELSECNET MINI setting Number of master modules Master module head I O No Model name amp number of stations Receive data batch refresh Send data batch refresh Retry count for MELSECNET communication errors MINI detailed settings Make the detailed setting required for automatic refresh of the MELSECNET MINI system 600NH FROM TO instruction access priority Receive data clear at communication error Faulty station detection bit data MINI link operation when CPU stopped Circuit
215. O Instruction When the FROM TO instruction is performed data stored in the buffer memory of a special function module is read or data is written to the buffer memory of a special function module Q2ASCPU Special function modules Pee Writing in accordance with TO instruction Buffer a External Reading in accordance memory device with FROM instruction Data communications with a special function module When the FROM instruction is performed the data read from the buffer memory is stored in the specified device When the TO instruction is performed the data in the specified device is written to the buffer memory REMARK 1 For details on the FROM TO instructions refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 For details on the buffer memory of a special function module refer to the manual of the special function module in use When executing the FROM TO instruction for the special function module frequently in short scan time it may cause the target special function module operation error When executing the FROM TO instruction match the processing time and conversion time of the special function module using timer or constant scanning 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES ems ELS EC A 6 2 Reading Writing Data from to the Q2ASCPU Using Special Direct Devices As the FROM TO instruction the special direct device reads data stored in the buffer memory of a
216. ON when the AMENG PANSE MARSE ON PAUSE enabled PAUSE contact goes ON eee SM210 Clock data set request e When this relay goes from OFF to ON and after END OFF Ignored instruction execution of subsequent scan clock data U M9025 QnA ON lt Set request stored in SD210 to SD213 are written to the CPU module OFF No error e ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 to SMe ep cneer ON Error SD213 value and OFF if no error is detected oe eqeey meee SM212 Clock data display OFF lanored e Displays clock data as month day hour minute and a is second at the LED display at front of CPU M9027 ERAY module Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU ae SM213 Clock data read OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to M9028 request ON Read request SD213 as BCD values OFF Ignored e When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum SM251 I O change flag SM252 I O change OK SM255 MELSECNET 10 SM256 module 1 information SM257 SM260 MELSECNET 10 SM261 module 2 information SM262 SM265 MELSECNET 10 SM266 module 3 information SM267 SM270 MELSECNET 10 SM271 module 4 information SM272 SM280 CC Link error e By turning this relay ON after setting the head I O number of the replaced I O module to SD251 the I O module can be replaced online with power on Only one module can be replaced for each setting OFF No replacement e Turn this relay ON in the test mode
217. OOT ere eet nee ee een ene er ene ener ore 3 19 H High speed timer T ccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 2 I Index Register Processing c 0c00e App 129 Index register Z ccccccccseeceeceseesseeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Initial execution type program cceeeeeees 12 4 Initial execution WDT time eee eee eee 12 6 Initial processing cccceeceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeseeees 12 22 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover E E E A A E EE bese E E 19 13 Installation Environment ccccceseeeeeeeeees 19 6 Instruction List Sequence instructions ccceeeeeeeee ees App 1 Internal current CONSUMPTION ccceeeeeeeees 4 3 Internal relay M ccccccceeesseeeseeeseeeeeeeseeees 4 2 Interrupt Interrupt COUNTET ccceccceeeseeeeeeeeees App 121 Interrupt MOUIE ec eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 19 Interrupt pointer I ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Interruption due to error detection 9 8 I O assignment ccc eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 4 I O control mode cece ceeeeeeee eee ees 4 1 App 127 I O module Refresh processing of I O module 12 22 I O number Example of I O Number Assignment 5 9 I O number assignment ccccecceeeeeeeees 5 2 I O signal About I O Numbers cccecceececeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 1 K Key input Operation
218. P set by remote STOP the program will be in RUN state again and be performed from step 0 Method for performing remote RUN STOP The following two methods are available for performing remote RUN STOP a Method using a remote RUN contact The remote RUN contact is set in the PLC system in the parameter mode of GPP function The settable device range is from input XO to 1FFF Remote RUN STOP can be performed by switching the remote RUN contact ON OFF 1 When the remote RUN contact is OFF the CPU module is in RUN state 10 12 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA 2 When the remote RUN contact is ON the CPU module is in STOP state Step0 END END ON OFF Remote RUN contact 0 PLC CPU RUN STOP status STOP status Fig 10 4 Time chart for RUN STOP switching with remote RUN contact 10 13 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A b Method using GPP function serial communication module etc The CPU module can be set to RUN or STOP by remote RUN STOP operation from GPP function or a serial communication module etc The operation using GPP function can be performed in the Remote operation of the PLC menu in any mode The control using a serial communication module is performed with the commands in the dedicated protocol For details on serial communication module control refer to the Serial Communication Module User s Manual Step 0 END Step 0 END ON 0 Remote STOP STLC o Y TSI E
219. PROGRAM FOR S Oe Ct ee ee App 110 Sampling Trace Function ccccceeeseeeeeeees 8 25 Precautions when configuring the system 3 19 Scan execution type program ccceceeeeeeeeee 12 7 Precautions When Connecting Uninterruptible Scan time measurement ceccececeeecseereeereees 8 23 Power Supply Module UPS 19 19 Selecting Memory Card Capacity 006 14 3 Precautions when using the MELSEC AnS series Self diagnostics function cceceeeeeeeeeeeee 9 4 ai E A A E E ET 20 13 Sequence Programs Statements Notes STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE ei cecceseetestervessaseeseeserterttenseetereenteneenes App 122 PIRE CAUTIONS scecaudecsncosttacsee sensunsidaostendstenses A 5 Setting of the Output Y Status When Switching Transportation Precautions 0 App 162 from STOP to RUN nicec 10 7 USER PRECAUTONS iiien A 20 Setting Switch WIRING PRECAUTIONG 0 A 4 19 15 Switch setting when using a memory card 18 3 Priority setting ccceccsseeceeecseeceeeceeeeseesaees 9 17 Simulation FUNCTION cccccccccccccccccccceccccccee 8 57 Processing speed ccccseccsetecstesseteeteneeenaees 4 1 Simultaneous execution of write during RUN by Processing DIME ietegteectecntancsenyrerusnereacnte App 158 several people ooo ee ceeeseccececerecereeesecerevereeerevers 8 63 Program CAPaCILy ccecccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 4 1 Simultaneous monitoring by several people 8 62 Program
220. PU Q2ASHCPU system When the A1S6 O B S1 A1S5 0 B S1 extension When the A6 O B A5 0O B extension base is used base is used The following shows an example that the 32 point The following shows an example that the 16 point module is installed to each slot module is installed to each slot Main base module A1 38B Main base Slot No unit 4 5 6 7 SlotNo A1S38B 0 1 2 34567 pe E 20 30 40 50 60 70 to to to fo to to 2F 3 4F SF 6F 7F stage i UNIT i Extension base module A1558B 51 ti ana 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 soo 13 80 90 A0 B0 Co Do Eo Fo to to to ta to to to to 8F 9F AF BF CF DF EF FF Power supply module CPU module System configuration Extension cable Slot No Extension base module A1S55B S1 16 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 1st extensi stexension 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 e m lam OS 100 110 120 130 1401150 160 170 l t to to to to 1OF 11F 12F 13F 14F 15F 16F117Fi ef re module Extension base module ATS68B S1 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Power supply maodufe 180 1901401 B01 C01 D0 1E0 1F6 to to te to to to to 18FIISFAAFIB Power suppl ae Extension base unit for AON ADA Maximum number of 3rd extension stage 1st extension stage exten
221. PU the program must be modified after conversion An example modification is shown below Before modification After modification X2E as X2E co me o9 co j v18 p99 Ikio 18 b Interrupt counters for ANCPU and AnNCPU operate as counters used in interrupt programs To achieve the same operation as with interrupt counters for AnCPU or ANNCPU when using a Q2ASCPU the program modification is not needed after conversion When ordinary counters are used in an interrupt program with Q2ASCPU they operate in the same way as with ANNCPU App 121 APPENDICES Appendix 4 5 Sequence Programs Statements Notes After conversion by A gt QnA conversion sequence programs are stored in the set file lf a subsequence program is included the main subsequence program must be modified There are two types of modification as indicated below a When executing the main sequence program and subsequence program alternately modify the parameters and programs as follows 1 Modification of parameters Set file names of the main sequence program and subsequence program in program setting in Auxiliary setting in the parameter mode Select scan execution for the main sequence program and standby execution for the subsequence program 2 Modification of the sequence program e The CHG instruction that switches between main sequence and subsequence programs is converted to OUT SM1255 after A QnA
222. Q2ASCPU 4 The Q2ZASCPU must be connected to the peripheral device capable of GPP functions in order to execute sampling trace 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 6 Status Latch Function This function collects the data of devices at designated moment When executing status latch function a memory card is required This function is used to retain the statuses of devices used in a program at designated moment during debugging Function Description 1 Function a Status latch stores the device statuses at designated moment in a status latch file of a memory card b The status latch file stores the status latch condition and status latch execution data for status latch execution Saving the device statuses can be executed in the following case e When executing SLT instruction in a program e When specifying a status latch start at GPP functions e When the conditions of the set devices and step Nos are met c The status latch results show the bit device ON OFF statuses and word devices values at designated moment 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 2 Basic operation The following shows the basic operation for status latch The statuses during execution of the status latch function can be checked by monitoring special relays SM806 to SM809 and SM827 Status latch Status latch execution suspended l l SM806 Status latch preparation l SM807 Status latch command SM808 Status latch completion SM
223. QC24N can be used with QnA link instructions designated for use with special function modules G P App 45 APPENDICES 2 Instructions added after function version B With function version B the following instructions can be used in addition to the instructions in 1 Refer to Section 2 2 for the function version Comparison read from ID data carrier IDCRD1 IDCRD2 Comparison write to ID data carrier IDCWD1 IDCWD2 Continuous comparison read from ID data IDSRD1 IDSRD2 AJ71IDO R4 control carrier instruction Continuous comparison write to ID data carrier IDSWD1 IDSWD2 Continuous high speed read from ID data IDFRD1 IDFRD2 carrier Continuous high speed write to ID data carrier IDFWD1 IDFWD2 Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent device station Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent l RIWT device station Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent l l RISEND device station with handshake Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent RIRCV device station with handshake Read from master station buffer memory for RIFR automatic update CC Link control instruction Write to master station buffer memory for RITO automatic update Intelligent device station communication CCL CCLEND Intelligent device station communication status SPCBUSY read Intelligent device station communication ask SPCCLR processing interrupt Remote register RWr read RDGET Remote register RWw write RDPUT
224. R The execution type of the SFC program specified in the program setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is other than scan execution Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN 3 The diagnostic timing of CPU modules except for Universal QCPU can be performed only when switching the CPU modules to run 22 31 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA 22 3 6 Error code list 4000 to 4999 The following shows the error messages from the error code 4000 to 4999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status INSTRCT CODE ERR e The program contains an instruction code that cannot be decoded e An unusable instruction is included in the program 4000 Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN When instruction executed INSTRCT CODE ERR The program contains a dedicated instruction for SFC although it is not an SFC program Collateral informationmmon 4001 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN When instruction executed INSTRCT CODE ERR e The name of dedicated instruction specified
225. RUN STOP key switch i Clears sampling trace and status latch registrations RESET Resets the hardware Resets and initializes operation when an operation error occurred 15 2 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES MELSEC QnA a Battery AGBAT Backup battery for the built in RAM and the power failure compensation function Used for connection of the battery lead wire To prevent battery drain the battery lead wire is disconnected from the connector before shipment See Section 18 6 Battery connector pin Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module Refer to Section 18 7 Memory card installing Connector for installing the memory card in the CPU module connector Memory card in out switch Used to enable disable memory card installation or removal while the power is ON Factory set to OFF with built in LED ON Cannot be removed LED lit ON OFF Can be removed LED unlit La A Refer to Section 15 3 3 and 4 for installation or removal of a memory card Settings required to operate the CPU module are made All switches are set to OFF before shipping System setting switch 1 sw5 Boot file settingSetting of the memory used for operation ON Boot operation OFF Boot operation is not performed SW2 to 4 Parameter areaSetting of the memory in which parameters are written System SW2 to 4 are valid even if SW5 is OFF setting Built in BETE switch 1
226. S in 32 bit units and stores the minimum value in the device specified at D n S2 D1 D2 e Sorts n points of data starting from the device specified at S1 in 16 S2 Number of comparisons executed at one time bit units _ ae Max number of scans required n x n 1 2 scans Sort n S2 D1 D2 e Sorts 2 x n points of data starting from the device specified at S1 in e 52 Nurrber of comparisons executed atone time 32 bit units DI Device tumed ON on completion of sorting D2 For system use Max number of scans required n x n 1 2 scans App 23 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 6 Structured program instruction e Executes the program section between and NEXT n times e Forcibly ends execution of the program section between and BRENK 0 Pn i pg NEXT and causes a jump to Pn e Executes the subroutine program Pn when the input condition is met CALL P PniS1 to S S1 to Sn are arguments for the subroutine program 0 lt n lt 5 e Causes a return from the subroutine program e Executes no execution processing for the subroutine program Pn when the input condition is not met Subroutine 7 e Executes the subroutine program Pn of the specified program when rogram call a the input condition is met S1 to Sn are arguments for the subroutine Program name program 0 lt n lt 5 e Executes no execution processing for the subroutine program Pn of EFCALL P Pn St to Sn p g prog the sp
227. S2 1 S2 Character string data comparison l l e Conductive status when character string S1 gt character string S2 e Non conductive status when character string S1 lt character string S2 e Conductive status when character string S1 lt character String S2 e Non conductive status when character string S1 character string S2 ad ____ Conductive status when character string S1 character gt string S2 e Non conductive status when character string 1 lt character string S2 eee e Conductive status when character string S1 lt character string S2 e Non conductive status when character string S1 gt character string S2 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA BKCMP P S1 S2 D on CO eee Block data e Compares n points of data from S1 with n points of data from S2 in 1 word units and stores the comparison result in the n points starting comparison from the bit device specified by D CONRAN BKCMP lt PJS1 52 D n BKCMP gt P s1 52 D n App 8 APPENDICES 2 Arithmetic operation instructions P s oH S e S1 S2 D BIN 16 bit addition subtraction PH 0 0 e S1 S2 D e D 1 D S 1 S D 1 D e S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D BIN 32 bit addition subtraction e D 1 D S 1 S gt D 1 D e S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 D 1 D e S1 x S2 D 1 D BIN
228. SD900 SD906 Drive where power was interrupted File name active during power loss RKEY input Access file drive number during power loss Access file name during power loss RKEY input Explanation e Stores drive number if file was being accessed during power loss e Stores file name with extension in ASCII code if file was being accessed during power loss b15 to b8 b7 to bO SD901 2nd character 1st character SD902 Ath character 3rd character SD903 6th character 5th character SD904 SD905 8th character 1st character of the extension 7th character 2EH 3rd character of SD906 the extension 2nd character of the extension Stored in sequence that PU key code was b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2nd character 4th character entered 1st character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character 18th character 17th character 20th character 22nd character 24th character 19th character 21st character 23rd character 26th character 28th character 25th character 27th character 30th character 29th character 32nd character 31st character App 93 Corres ponding ACPU D9000 Set by When Set Corresponding CPU
229. SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Table22 3 Faults in the output circuit a Situation Cause Countermeasure e The load current is lower than the minimum e Connect a resistor to both ends of a load so load current that the load current is higher than the minimum load current A1SY22 Surge suppressor Output module The load is not turned OFF Triac output Example 3 e When the load current is lower than the minimum load current of the output module the triac does not operate since the load current flows into a phototriac as shown below When an inductive load is connected the load may not be turned OFF since surge at the time of OFF is applied to the phototriac e Leakage current due to surge suppressor for e Disconnect the surge suppressor from the load across the loads leaving only the resistance If the wire distance from the output module to the Load turns OFF with a load is great then it may have leakage current by Example line capacity It is necessary to take precautions delay A1SY22 High frequency 4 current Triac output Output module Guideline of resistance Resistance For 100VAC paag 5 to 10KQ 5 to 3W Load For 200VAC 10 to 20K 15 to 10W e Connect a resistance between the CR timer terminals A1SY22 In some timers internal circuit may be Output module half wave rectification type so the caution as to the example 1 is necessary here If the wire distance from the output When load is CR t
230. SM320 is OFF Stores error code of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error 80 SFC program parameter error 81 SFC code error 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored Stores the step number where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program in BIN value Stores 0 when error code 80 81 or 82 occurred Stores the block stating step number when error code 83 occurs Stores the transition condition number where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program in BIN value Stores 0 when error code 80 81 82 or 83 occurred Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is executed in a SFC program Block No BIN QnA Step No Upper 8 bits e Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code Stored into lower byte Undefind value in higher byte For version A for example 41H is stored Upper byte Lower byte QnA Note The software version of the init
231. Sequence program execution can be resumed by turning the RUN STOP key switch to RUN NOP e No processing for program erasure or space No processing e No processing for starting a new page during printout e No processing for managing the rest of the program as starting from step 0 of page n App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Appendix 1 2 Basic Instructions 1 Comparison operation instructions e Conductive status when S1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 gt S2 e Non conductive status when S1 lt S2 16 bit data comparison e Conductive status when S1 lt S2 e Non conductive status when S1 gt S2 e Conductive status when S1 lt S2 e Non conductive status when S1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 lt S2 e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 S2 1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 l e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 32 bit data comparison a i Conductive status when S1 1 S1 lt S2 1 S2 e Non conductive status when S1 1 S1 gt S2 1 S2 e Conductive status when S1 1
232. TAGE DIRECTIVES 20 1 20 13 Standby type program cccceeeeeeeeeeeneees 12 16 StateMents NOtES ccceceecceeeeceeeseeeeaeeeeeeees 11 7 Status Latch Function cccccecceseeeeeeeeeees 8 35 Step execution ccc ccecceccceecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes 8 42 Step operation cccccsccceeccseecaeeeeeeeeeeesaees 8 41 Step relay S eerun iE r AERA 4 2 STEP RUN status operation processing 12 24 STOP status operation processing 12 24 Structured PrOGrAMS ccceceseeceseeeseeeeeeeeaes 2 2 System area 20 eee cecc cece eeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeaeees 8 11 8 62 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ccccceceeee es 3 1 Equipment configuration in an independent SS sce caeastie eonteinctic ote na ete amp sonora demtertndecyhiteeuareiwctne 3 1 Precautions when configuring the system 3 19 Q2ASCPU memory block diagram 3 23 system Configuration Overview 06 3 3 System display ccccscccsscccseecseeceeeeeseesaees 9 14 System Equipment ccccceccseecceeeeseeeeeeeeaes 3 5 System interrupt cece seeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeens 13 1 SYSTEM PrOtect c eee ceccceeceeeceeeeeeeeeesseeeees 9 11 T Terminal Operation cccccccceeeeseeeseeeenees 10 21 Timer and Interrupt Counter Operations App 121 Timer limit setting cc ccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 13 1 Tor I rencoseceteteecasauss E 4 2 Transportati
233. U Subprogram 3 D9016 SD1016 e Program number E PROM D9017 SD1017 SD520 Scan tiie Minimum scan time 10 ms units Operating status of CPU Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 ROM Subprogram 2 ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E27PROM Subprogram 1 EPROM Subprogram 2 EPROM e When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62 When one of FO to 2047 is turned on by OUT F or SET F the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing or instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU module front to ON position If another F number has been detected clearing of SD62 stores the next F number into SD62 e The operation status of CPU as shown below are stored in SD203 b8b7 to b4b3 to b0 b15 to b12b11 to T Remote RUN STOP by computer RUN STOP PAUSE 1 CPU key switch RUN STOP PAUSE 1 3 STEP RUN Remains the same in remote RU
234. U itself diagnoses whether or not Self diagnostics function Section 9 3 there are any errors Function that stores the results of diagnosis in memory as a fault Error history Section 9 4 history Function that sets whether reading writing is enabled or disabled System protect Section 9 5 for Q2ZASCPU files Function that disables GPP function operations with respect to the Keyword Registration Section 9 6 CPU module Function that allows monitoring of the system configuration by System display Section 9 7 connecting a peripheral device capable of GPP functions oe at Function to display the CPU module operation status with the LED LED indication Section 9 8 located on the front of the CPU module LED indication Indicates whether CPU module operation is normal or abnormal Section 9 8 1 Priority setting Priority for LED indication is set depending on the error Section 9 8 2 For details of GPP function operation refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or the Type SWLIIVD GPPQ Software package Operating Manual Online 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 9 2 Watchdog Timer 1 Watchdog timer WDT The watchdog timer is an internal timer of programmable controller that detects programmable controller CPU hardware errors and sequence program errors 200ms is set as the default setting for this timer REMARK The time set for the watchdog timer can be changed using WDT in PC RAS setting in the GPP function parameter mode
235. VES mms EL Si A 20 1 8 Power line for external power supply terminal 1 Use a CE marked AC DC power supply for an external power supply of the modules and the power cable length needs to be less than 30m 98 43 ft 1 1 The power cable length for the A1SJ71QE71N B5 needs to be less than 3m 9 84 ft Use a CE marked AC DC power supply for an external power supply of the A1SJ71QLP218S Install noise filters to external supply power terminals of the I O module and the modules below Use noise filters whose damping characteristic is equivalent to that of the MA1206 produced by TDK Lambda Corporation e Analog digital converter module e Digital analog converter module e Analog I O module e Temperature input module e Temperature control module e Pulse input module e High speed counter module e Positioning module 20 1 9 Installation environment of the CC Link LT module and the AS i module 1 CC Link LT module Use the module under the environment of Zone A For the categories of the following products refer to the manual came with each product e CL1Y4 R1B1 e CL1Y4 R1B2 e CL1XY4 DR1B2 e CL1XY8 DR1B2 e CL1PSU 2A AS i module Use the module under the environment of Zone A 1 Zone defines categories according to industrial environment specified in the EMC and Low Voltage Directives EN61131 2 Zone C Factory mains isolated from public mains by dedicated transformer Zone B Dedicated
236. VTBA Extension connector attached to one on each side For RS 232C connected only 3 14 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current consumption POR Points points Product Name Model Name Description IVO Assignment Module 5VDC 24VDC Remark Type A A A1S52B 2 I O modules can be installed Does not take power supply 5 I O modules can be installed MORUS Power supplied from the main base module 8 I O modules can be installed A1S52B S1 A1S55B A1S55B S1 Extension Base oer Unit A1S58B S1 A1S65B 5 I O modules can be installed A1S65B S1 The power supply module A1S68B is required 8 I O modules can be installed A1S68B S1 For extension to A1SC01B right side A1SC03B 330mm 118 11in long Flat cable 55 mm 2 17 inch long A1SCO7B Extension base module connecting cable Extension base A1SC12B 1200 mm 47 24 inch long mee ji connecting cable Extension A1SC30B 1200 mm 47 24 inch long Cables A1SC60B 6000 mm 236 22 inch long A1SCO5NB 450 mm 17 72 inch long f Cable for A 0 N A1SCO7NB Extension base module connecting cable andADA A1SC30NB 1200 mm 47 24 inch long extension bases A1SC50NB 5000 mm 197 1 inch long 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Memory gt A2SNMCA 2 EPROM With 30k step EPROM direct connection cassette 30KE Direct writing to and reading from a peripheral device is feasibl
237. Write during RUN command of scan execution type program 2 Write during RUN execution of scan type program 3 Write during RUN command of low speed execution type program 4 Write during RUN execution of low speed execution type program Write during RUN cannot be performed on the program in step operation 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 4 Execution Time Measurement This is a function that displays the processing time of the program being executed This function is used to determine the influence of the processing time of each program on the total scan time when making system adjustments Function Description Execution time measurement provides the following three functions For explanations of each function refer to Section 8 4 1 through Section 8 4 3 e Program monitor list e Interrupt program monitor list e Scan time measurement 8 4 1 Program monitor list This is a function that displays the processing time of the program being executed Function Description The scan time execution count and processing time for each item can be displayed for each program All operations are performed using Monitor test menu in the ladder mode 1 Select Program Batch Monitor Program Batch Monitor d c Program List Monitor 2 4 gt Interrupt Program List Monitor Execute c gt Gancel N gt Space Select Esc Close 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 Select Program List Monitor The following s
238. a Empty input output special Classification Set the module type O to 64 points in 16 point No setting units Start XY Set the start number of XY devices of the module 0 to 1FFF in 16 point units Model Name Set the model name of the module Up to 16 characters Number of points Set the number of points for the module Base specification Set data for each base unit Up to 16 characters POWER SUPPLY Set the model name of the power supply module No setting MODULE Extension cable Set the model name of the extension cable Up to 16 characters The items without settings are handled as follows Type and Points In accordance with the loaded module Start XY The number following the total points obtained by adding the number of points of the modules already set If there is any duplication an error SP UNIT LAY ERROR is detected The power supply module names set in the base specification is only used for the current capacity check in the PLC diagnostics mode and not used for a CPU module Therefore even if they are not set any problem does not occur 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC QnA The CPU module performs the following processing when I O assignment is set 1 Any of the following assignment can be performed per slot of each base unit Assigned number of points Special function Empty slot Input module Output module module 2 The slots for which I O assignment has been performed with
239. a is executed 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 4 Retrieve the trace results from the CPU module and display them a Read the trace results from the CPU module by using A Read from PC Results on Program Trace screen b Display the read trace results by using 4 Trace Results Display on Program Trace screen Once the program trace has been executed the second is not executed To execute the trace again execute the PTRAR instruction to reset program trace NOTE 1 The program trace can be performed only for STEP RUN 2 Set program trace files in the RAM area of the memory card 3 It is possible to execute program trace from another station in the network or from a serial communication module However sampling trace cannot be executed from more than one site at the same time With the Q2ASCPU sampling trace can be executed from only one site at a time 4 The program trace is performed by connecting the Q2ASCPU with the peripheral device capable of GPP function 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 9 Simulation Function When the link memory and the buffer memory are simulated in the simulation data file a memory card is required This function simulates execution of a program in step execution or partial execution with the input module output module or special function module isolated from the CPU module This enables QnACPU to debug a program without any effects on other modules Function Description 1 When
240. a in the non latched range is also cleared However the devices for which the latch clear key has been set to Disable in the Parameter are not cleared by performing latch clear b For the methods of performing latch clear refer to Section 12 4 10 6 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 4 Setting of the Output Y Status When Switching from STOP to RUN When the RUN or other status is changed to the STOP status the CPU module stores the output Y in the RUN status into the programmable controller and turns all outputs Y OFF In this function whether to re output the outputs Y when switching from STOP to RUN or to output them after an operation can be set in the PC system in the parameter mode of GPP function 4 Output at STOP gt RUN 1 gt Prior to Cale 2 gt After one Scan a Re output Prior to Calc 00 The output Y status immediately before the STOP status is output and then the sequence program is calculated b Output after operation execution After one SCAN cccceseeesseeeseeeens The output is OFF status The output Y will be output after the sequence program operation is executed STOP status RUN status NO output after executing Re output the operation YES re o output Output the output Y immediately before the STOP status Sequence program operation execution Fig 10 3 Processing when a programmable controller is switched from STOP to RUN
241. able AC controller I O devices E1 Surge absorber for lightening 1 Ground the lightning surge absorber E1 and the programmable controller E2 separately from each other 2 Select a lightning surge absorber whose voltage does not exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even when line voltage reaches the maximum 19 16 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms EL Si 7 2 1 Independent grounding Wiring I O equipment a The applicable wire size for a terminal block connector is 0 75 to 2mm It is recommended to use wire of 0 75mm for easy use Run the input line and output line away from each other Separate the I O signal lines including common line at least 100mm 3 94 inch away from the main circuit line carrying high voltage and large current If it is not possible use a batch shielding cable and ground it on the programmable controller side However ground it on the opposite side in some cases PLC Shielded cable A ya Shield jacket DC When ducts are used for wiring securely ground them Separate the 24VDC I O cables from the 100VAC and 200VAC cables In a long distance wiring of 200m 656 2ft or longer leak current due to capacitance may cause failure As protective measures against lightning surges separate the AC wiring from the DC wiring and connect a lightning surge absorber as shown in 1 i Failure to do so increases the risk of I O equip
242. across input LG and output FG 10MQ or higher measures with a 500VDC Insulation resistance insulation resistance tester 10MQ or above by insulation resistance tester e Checked by noise simulator of noise voltage 1500Vp l l l l e Checked by noise p noise width 1 u and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz l simulator of noise voltage 1500Vp p noise width 1u and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz Noise durability e Checked by noise simulator of noise voltage IEC801 4 2kV 1500Vp p noise width 1 ws and noise frequency 25 to 60Hz Power LED indication light at the time of output of 5VDC Built in User cannot change 16 1 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms ELS EC A Performance specifications tem E a A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Terminal screw size M3 5xX7 Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 59 to 88N cm External dimensions 130mm x 55mm XxX 93 6mm Weight 0 60kg 0 60kg 0 50kg REMARK 1 The number of occupied slots for the A66P is 1 14 Overcurrent protection a The overcurrent proctector shuts off the 5VDC and or 24VDC circuit s and stops the system if the current exceeding the specified value flows in the circuit s As this results in voltage drop the power supply module LED turns OFF or is dimly lit When this device is activated eliminate probable causes such as insufficient current capacity or short circuit a
243. ade screwdriver Monitor SM52 and oe check ON OFF status ON Monitor SD52 Bit 0 ON and check which bit is ON Bit other than bit 0 ON Bit 1 2 ON CPU main module battery Memory card A battery failure failure Bit 3 4 ON Memory card B battery i failure Refer to Section 21 3 2 1 Compieted 21 14 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 21 4 When Reoperating a programmable controller After Storing it with a Battery Unconnected When reoperating after a battery is uncounted and the programmable controller is stored the memory contents of a CPU module and memory card may be undefined Therefore when resuming the operation clear the CPU module memory and format the memory in the CPU module by peripheral device Afeter doing so write the memory contents backed up before saving to each memory The relationship between the backed up memory and the batteries is explained below Battery Memory AGBAT installed ina CPU module Battery incorporates a memory card CPU module pei o e type E2PROM Battery back up is not required O Battery is backed up x Battey is not backed up Memory card SRAM EPROM As for device memory also clear the latch range Before resuming the operation clear format the memory for which a battery is backed up in the table above with a peripheral device For memory clear format operations refer to the following manuals e Type SWO IVD GPPQ GPP Software package
244. agnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN CAN T SET P The total number of internal file pointers used by the program exceeds the number of internal file pointers set in the parameters 4020 Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN CAN T SET P e The common pointer Nos assigned to files overlap e The local pointer Nos assigned to files overlap 4021 Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP gt RUN CAN T SET I The allocation pointer Nos assigned by files overlap Collateral informationmmon 4030 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN OPERATION ERROR The instruction cannot process the contained data Collateral informationmmon 4100 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed OPERATION ERROR e The number of setting data dealt with the instruction exceeds the applicable range e The storage data and constant of the device specified by the instruction exceeds the applicable range e When writing to the host CPU shared memory the write prohibited area is specified for the write destination address The range of storage d
245. ain module from peripheral devices Drive 1 Memory card RAM area Drive 0 Built in RAM Drive 2 Memory card ROM area Error history RO PC memory storage memory Device memory Built in RAM Error history storage memory Device memory Memory card RAM ROM area PLC memory Memory that stores parameters sequence programs etc Memory that stores error history data Memory that stores device data Memory that stores the files comments etc for parameters sequence programs sampling traces etc Indicates all the memories of drives 0 through 2 For file types stored in each memory refer to Firelypes amp Storage Destinations of Files Managed by QnACPU in the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 4 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC QnA 4 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS This section shows the performance specifications of the Q2ASCPU Model Name Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Control method Sequence program control method i Direct input output is allowed by I O control mode Refresh mode specifying direct input output DXO DYO Language dedicated to sequence control Programming language Relay symbol language logic symbolic language MELSAP 3 SFC Constant Scan Function that makes the scan time 5ms to 2000ms Possible to set in 5ms units Possible to set in the parameters constant Memory capacity Capacity of the installed memory
246. akage detection function Transistor output temperature input A1S64TCTT _ j 4 channels module Special 32 points 0 33 PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 position control Transistor output temperature input 4 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 position control Heater wire breakage detection function AISG4TCRT Transistor output temperature input S1 4 channels module Special 32 points PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 position control Transistor output temperature input A1S64TCRTB 4 channels module W S1 PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 position control O N lt o oo gt N 0 A1S62TCTTB W S2 Special 32 points 0 28 A1S62TCRTB W S2 Special 32 points A1S64TCTTB S64TC Special 32 points 0 42 W S1 Sad w oo Special 32 points 0 42 Heater wire breakage detection function 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Product Name Model Name Transistor output thermocouple input or platinum RTD input For standard contro 4 channels module A1S64TCTRT PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control For heating cooling control 2 channels module PID control ON OFF pulse Transistor output thermocouple input or platinum RTD input For standard control 4channels module A1S64TCTRT a J PID control ON OFF pulse or 2 positioning control For heating cooling control 2channels module PID control ON OFF pulse wire breakage detection function
247. al Counts 101 Times 2 Post Trigger Counts 5 Times 2 Trace Point 1 gt Every END 2 gt Every Interval lms 3 Specify Detail Condition 3 Trigger Foint 1 gt fit Instruction Execution 2 gt At Request of PDT 3 gt Specify Detail Condition 4 Added Trace Information 1 Time 2 Step i 3 Program Nam Cance1 lt N gt Space Select Esc Close Sampling the designated number of times count after trigger leads completion after the trigger point execution m Trace start _ Trigger point i Trace end Count after trigger Total count 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A The following shows an explanation of the screen above One of the following four settings can be made for the trace condition 1 Trace Counts 2 Trace Point 3 Trigger Point or 4 Added Trace Information 1 Trace Counts In the case of the total count set the number of sampling traces executed from start to end of the trace In the case of the count after the trigger set the number of sampling traces executed from the trigger execution to the trace end The following shows the formula that sets range for these counts Count after trigger lt total countS 8192 Trace Point Set the timing for collection of trace data Select one of the following a Every END Data collected at END instruction of every scan b Every Interval Data collected with each de
248. al function module that occupies other than 16 points has to be removed due to failure d The I O assignment reduces the I O number modification in a program since it enables to match with the I O numbers of the designed program and to change the I O numbers assigned to each module on the base unit per slot 2 The concept of I O assignment with GPP function The following two methods are available for I O assignment with GPP function 1 Set the number of points for the empty slots on a main base unit and extension base unit Points occupied by empty slot 2 Set the I O assignment per slot of main base unit or extenstion base unit to each module type I O assignment Parameter settings are used for both of these methods If both 1 and 2 are set the setting of 2 takes priority a Setting points occupied by empty slot Set the number of points for all slots that are empty on the base unit In the systems in which this setting is not made in the parameters 16 points are set for empty slots Make this setting in 8 Number of empty slots on the PLC system screen in the parameter mode iPC system setting 1 Slow f 100 ms 5 Common Pointer from 2 Fast I 10 ms 6 General Data Process 1 Unit try 2 RUN PAUSE Contact RUN x PAUSE x J 7 of Free Slots 3 Allow Remoto Reset 1 lt x gt Yes 2 lt gt No 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC QnA The setting is made in units of 16 point within the range of O to 64 The de
249. al memory ON execution Boot operation in progress OFF Within access range ON Outside access range OFF Within access range ON Outside access range eT N i urns ON when the mounted memory card A is 5 Status change New Gk RAM e Turns ON when the mounted memory card A is S Status change ROM e Goes ON when memory card A is in use S Status change New New e Goes ON when memory card A cannot be inserted Nave or removed ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S Initial New Q4A Q4AR Q2A S1 di Q3A Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON S Initial New Q4A Q4AR Q2A S1 ai Q3A Goes ON when drive 3 card 2 RAM area is present S Initial New Q4A Q4AR Q2A S1 zi Q3A Goes ON when drive 4 card 2 ROM area is present S Initial New Q4A Q4AR Q2A S1 8 Q3A Goes ON when memory card B is in use S Status change New Q4A Q2A S1 Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or Q3A U New removed e Goes ON when file register is in use S Status change New e Goes ON when comment file is in use S Status change New QnA Goes ON while boot operation is in process Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF tetas enange mew one Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range of file register of memory card A Set within s u New QnA END processing Reset at user program Goes ON when access is made outside the range of file register of memory card
250. another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details please consult your transportation company App 163 APPENDICES APPENDIX 11 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Countries This section describes the precautions for disposing of used batteries in EU countries and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU countries Appendix 11 1 Disposal precautions In EU countries there is a separate collection system for used batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers Symbol mark Note This symbol mark is for EU countries only The symbol mark is specified in the EU directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 AgInformation for end usersAh and Annex II The symbol mark indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes App 164 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix 11 2 Exportation precautions In accordance with the enforcement of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC the following must be required when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with builtin batteries to EU coutries e To print the symbol mark on batteries devices or their packaging e To
251. ard loop line and R a reverse loop line The bit of the device number corresponding to the station Stores conditions for Number of the local station or remote I O station that has a forward up to numbers 49 to loop line or reverse loop line error 56 Example When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error b8 of emro SD1232 become 1 and when SD1232 is monitored its Local station Me value is 256 100H Stores conditions for and remote I O up to numbers 57 to station loop 64 error Local station and remote I O station loop Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF QnA Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation Number of times Stores cumulative communications total of receive errors errors detected Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET Il e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Stores conditions for Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected up to numbers 33 to become 0 48 Device number D1202 L12 L11jL10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L caisiation SD1203 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 D1242 QnA If a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained up to numbers 49 to Con
252. ards All memory cards used with Q2ASCPU must be formatted The purchased memory card is not formatted Use the memory card after formatting with the GPP function a SRAM E PROM type memory card Format both RAM and ROM If installed with only one of them formatted the Q2ASCPU detects an error ICM OPE ERROR For information on how to format SRAM and EPROM see the following manual e GX Developer Operating Manual e Type SWOIVD GPPQ Software package Operating Manual Online 2 Installing the battery in the memory card The memory card is packaged with a RAM memory bakup battery To use the RAM memory of the memory card this battery must be installed first The battery installed in the CPU module does not back up RAM memories of memory cards Also a battery installed in a memory card does not back up the internal RAM of a CPU module 3 Switch setting when using a memory card When using a memory card turn ON the memory card in out switch which is close to the connector If it is set to OFF the memory card cannot be used 18 3 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES 18 3 Battery Specifications CPU Module and Memory Card Batteries 1 CPU module batteries Model Name Battery life when used Refer to Section 21 3 1 Item Lithium content 0 48g Application Built in RAM memory backup and power failure compensation External dimensions H 16 x 30mm 0 6 x 1 2 inch REMARK e For the battery directive in EU mem
253. ata The input module area is also refreshed e The settings are made in units of 16 points X M L B T ST C D W R ZR e The device that stores the batch refresh received data from the remote station is set e When the head device number is set the points corresponding to the specified M L B T ST C D W number of stations Total number of stations are obtained to refresh all areas R ZR The I O module area is also refreshed e The settings are made per point Receiving data batch refresh word device Remote device RWr e The device that stores the batch refresh send data to the remote station is set Transmission data batch e When the head device number is set the points corresponding to the specified refresh device number of stations Total number of stations are obtained to refresh all areas Remote device RWw The I O module area is also refreshed e The settings are made per point Receiving buffer specification l l a id J e The receive buffer capacity for transient station is set 80 to 4096 x x for transient station Transmission buffer specification for transient e The send buffer capacity for transient station is set 80 to 4096 x x station Batch refresh device for a l l l M L B T ST C D W e The destination device for special relay is set special relay R ZR Only when the file register is set to Use the designated file with the Parameter R and ZR can be used as the auto refresh
254. ata of the device specified by the instruction is duplicated e The device specified by the instruction exceeds the range of the number of device points e The interrupt pointer No specified by the instruction exceeds the applicable range Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed 4101 Read the common information of the error using a peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 33 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4102 4103 4104 4107 4108 4200 OPERATION ERROR e The network No or station No specified for the dedicated instruction is wrong e The link direct device JO g setting is incorrect e The module No network No number of character strings exceeds the range that can be specified Collateral inform
255. ate or PAUSE state I O monitoring and test operations using a peripheral device reading writing from computer link modules or serial communication modules and communication with other stations via MELSECNET can be performed 12 25 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 12 3 Operation Processing for Instantaneous Power Failure The Q2ASCPU detects a momentary power failure when the input power voltage supplied to the power supply module becomes lower than the specified range When the Q2ASCPU detects an instantaneous power failure the following operation processing is performed 1 When an instantaneous power failure shorter than the allowable momentary power failure period occurred a When an instantaneous power failure occurs the output statuses are held and the operation processing is suspended after the name of the currently accessing file and error history have been stored The timer count continues b If there is an SFC continuous operation designation system save processing is executed c When power is restored the operation processing will be continued d While the operation is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure measurement of the watchdog timer WDT continues For example if 200ms is set for the WDT parameter setting power failure of 15ms in the scan time of 190ms will cause a watchdog timer error Occurrence of instantaneous Power supply power failure recov
256. athduagnne innate dabei dentine Qenddaandeeadinndtanend daa tivhansu dees 11 8 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU12 1 to 12 28 121 PROGKalMiExXCCULION TYPES iaminn AE a tee ot bk RRs Mat B niet abt ot Noddy 12 1 12 1 1 Initial execution type programs ccccseccceeccseeceeeccaecceeceeceuecsueecueesceecaeesueeseuessueesaeesaaes 12 4 121 2 Scan EXECUTION type DIOOlAIN n ste ein ndacos eadecacowics at melas i a N a eke deine 12 7 12 1 3 Low speed execution type program cccccccsscccscccececeeeceuceceeecaueceucecacecsuecsusecseessuesaeessaes 12 9 12 1 4 Standby type PlOGl all pax ac erendeceet ocak sl Gccteneeanacn saat nacetececeicade Aaa ctoatodeaddics Sadeeedenase aos 12 16 UZ M20 HAMA DPOCCSS ING Sexaceeas even ses a A A E ne Donde 12 22 12 1 6 Refresh processing of I O MOUIEC ccccccsecccsceceeeceeeceeeecaceseeeceueesaeeseueseuseseessnssaaeess 12 22 12 7 END ADKOCCSSING secant insect seed alee etre eee a ati ie cia cen ne eeet eee leet eediatee 12 23 12 2 Operation Processing of RUN STOP PAUSE and STEP RUN cece ecceeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 24 12 3 Operation Processing for Instantaneous Power FailUre cccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeesneeneaees 12 26 124 Data Clear Processing aoina 2 ate See etna a E ceeeerint 12 27 13 PARAMETER LIST 13 1 to 13 10 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS 14 1to 14 4 141 Applications OM IViICIMOry CANS nerimarke ENER A Ala EEE AR
257. ation SM1653 STOP contact STOP status e Turns on when in the STOP status S Each END SM203 Q4AR SM1654 PAUSE contact PAUSE status e Turns on when in the PAUSE status S Each END SM204 Q4AR SM1655 STEP RUN contact STEP RUN status e Turns on when in the STEP RUN status S Each END SM205 Q4AR 1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information 2 This shows the special relay SMO O for the host system CPU App 69 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 13 For redundant system tracking Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799 All is turned off for stand alone system Table App 2 14 Special relay Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU Tracking execution APE EEICT SM1700 g possible e Turns on when tracking can be normally executed S status change New Q4AR flag ON Execution possible SM1712 Block 1 SM1713 Block 2 SM1714 Block 3 SM1715 Block 4 SM1716 Block 5 SM1717 Block 6 SM1718 Block 7 SM1719 Block 8 SM1720 Block 9 SM1721 Block 10 SM1722 Block 11 SM1723 Block 12 SM1724 Block 13 SM1725 Block 14 SM1726 Block 15 SM1727 Block 16 SM1728 Block 17 SM1729 Block 18 SM1730 Block 19 SM1731 Block 20 SM1732 Block 21 SM1733 Block 22 SM1734 Block 23 Turns ON only during one SM1735 Transfer trigger OFF Transfer uncompleted SM1735 Block 24 scan when the transmission
258. ation Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN 22 30 3103 e Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status SFC PARA ERROR The parameter setting is illegal e Though Block 0 was set to Automatic start in the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Block 0 does not exist Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFC PARA ERROR The block parameter setting is illegal Collateral informationnmon Common Information File name Individual Information Parameter number RUN MDiagnostic Timing Of STOP RUN Read the common information of the error using ERR the peripheral device check error step Flicker corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem SFC PARA ERROR The number of step relays specified in the device setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is less than CPU Status that used in the program Stop Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFC PARA ERRO
259. ation of remote STEP RUN When debugging the system for example the program can be performed while checking its execution and the contents of each device 2 Method for performing remote STEP RUN The procedure for remote STEP RUN is as follows 1 Set the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module to RUN position 2 Perform STEP RUN operation with GPP function 10 15 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 6 3 Remote PAUSE Remote PAUSE refers to the function that performs PAUSE function to the Q2ASCPU from an external source while the CPU module RUN STOP key switch is set to the RUN position The PAUSE function stops a CPU module operation while retaining the ON OFF status of all outputs Y 1 Application of remote PAUSE This function can be used to retain the output Y with ON status even if the CPU module is in STOP due to process control 2 Methods for remote PAUSE The following two methods are available for performing remote PAUSE a Method using a remote PAUSE contact The remote PAUSE contact is set in the PLC system in the parameter mode of GPP function The settable device range is from input XO to 1FFF 1 When the scan END processing is performed with both the remote PAUSE contact and the PAUSE enable flag SM206 are ON the PAUSE status contact SM204 turns ON When performing up to the END instruction of the scan following the scan in which the PAUSE status contact turned ON the PAUSE state is established and
260. ationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed OPERATION ERROR The configuration of the PID dedicated instruction is incorrect Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed OPERATION ERROR The number of settings is beyond the range Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed OPERATION ERROR Numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction are beyond 32 Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed OPERATION ERROR The CC Link parameter is not set when the CC Link instruction is executed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FOR NEXT ERROR No NEXT instruction was executed following the execution of a FOR instruction Alternatively there are fewer NEXT instructions than FOR instructions Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Read the common information of the error using the peri
261. ave the same programs RUN and parameters Off i ERR This can be detected from the standby system of Synchronise the programs and parameters ofthe 6000 the redundant system Flicker control system and standby system WCollateral informationmmon e Common Information File name CPU Status e Individual Information Stop EDiagnostic Timing e Always MODE VERIFY ERR The operational status of the control system and standby system in the redundant system is not the same CNA SEAR a a ey tele Synchronise the operation statuses of the control 6010 the redundant system i i system and standby system WECollateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e Always TRUCKINERR A CPU module tracking memory error was detected during initial Hardware fault of the CPU module Please contact This can be detected from the control system or your local nearest Mitsubishi or sales E Si standby system of ie redundant system representative explaining a detailed description of Q4AR Collateral informationmmon the problem Change the CPU modules in order of Common Information the standby system CPU module and control CPU Status e Individual Information system CPU module Continue MDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN TRUCKIN ERR The CPU module detected an error during the handshake for tracking This can be detected from the control syste
262. b4b3 b0 Example SD212 Clock data its _ 35 min 48 s minute second i i i 3548H e The day of the week is stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4 b3 to bO Example T T T Friday l l l l l l 0005H Day of the week Clock data ZS eee ee D902 A D213 Clock data day of week D 0 Sunday S Request U 9028 Qn Always set 0 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday App 81 e When error is generated the LED display flicker is made according to the error number setting priorities The Basic model QCPU supports only the annunciator error item No 7 e The Universal model QCPU sets execution non execution of LED display of the error corresponding to the each priority ranking when the error occurs e The setting areas for priorities are as follows Priorities 1 to 4 D9038 D9039 Priorities 5 to 8 b15 to b12 b11 to out to dah to bO U format QnA SD207 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 SD208 Priority 8 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 SD209 p Priority 10 Priority 9 change Default Value SD207 4321H SD208 8765H 0765H for Redundant CPU SD209 00A9H e No display is made if 0 is set Priorities 9 to 10 New D9025 D9027
263. battery periodically according to the operating condition 21 9 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION NFL SEC QnA 2 Battery life of memory card The battery life of memory card differs depending on the memory capacity The life for each memory is shown in Table 21 6 Table 21 6 Battery lives of memory cards Battery life Total power failure time hr Memory card model name Guaranteed value MIN Actual value TYP After SM51 is turned ON Q1MEM 64S Q1MEM 128S Q1MEM 256S Q1MEM 512S Q1MEM 1MS Q1MEM 2MS Q1MEM 64SE Q1MEM 128SE Q1MEM 256SE Q1MEM 512SE Q1MEM 1MSE j Actual value indicates a rough average value and guaranteed value indicates the minimum value Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows 1 Replace the battery in four to five years even when it has not been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table 2 Replace the battery when it has been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table and SM51 is on 21 10 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC QnA 21 3 2 Battery replacement procedure WARNING Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat burst and or ignition 1 CPU module battery replacement procedure Replace the battery of a CPU module according
264. ber states refer to Appendix 11 2 Memory card batteries Model Name Item BR2325 or equivalent Initial voltage 3 0VDC 18 4 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES 18 4 Handling Precautions Handling precautions on memory cards and batteries from unpacking to mounting are listed below 1 Memory card a Do not drop bend or apply any strong impact to the memory card b Do not expose the memory card to water c Do not expose the memory card to direct sunlight or leave it near a heat source b c d Be careful to prevent dust from entering the connector e Do not store the memory card in high temperature or high humidity areas f To protect the memory card from static electricity always enclose it in a plastic case before transporting or storing g Do not touch the terminals of the memory card A CAUTION Insert the memory card and fully press it to the memory card connector Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions 2 Battery a Do not short the battery b Do not disassemble the battery c Do not put it into a fire d Do not heat it e Do not apply solder to the battery poles 18 5 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES MELSEC QnA 18 5 Part Names of Memory Card Part names of the memory card are shown below 3 2 Connects the memory card to the CPU module a Battery holder Holds a lithium battery that is used to
265. bers 33 to The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or pow fwe f D9250 SD1250 48 PAUSE mode becomes 1 Example When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode b6 and Stores conditions for b14 of SD1248 become 1 and when SD1248 is D9251 SD1251 Local stanon 1 upto numbers49t6 monitored its value is 16448 4040H operation status 64 Local station operation status Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station number other than the host which is in error error conditions up to numbers 1 to 16 Device number b11 b10 b9 Stores conditions for SD1252 L12 L11 L10 Local station 7 up to numbers 17 to srroreanditions p SD1253 L29 L28 L27 L26 2 32 SD1254 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 SD1255 L60 L59 L58 QnA Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Local station error conditions The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error becomes 1 l Stores conditions for Example When local station 12 is in error b11 of SD1252 becomes Local station up to numbers 49 to 4 and when SD1252 is monitored its value is 2048 error conditions 64 800H 11 Fuse blown module Table App 3 13 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanat Rpianarlon When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are input as a D9100 bit pattern in units of 16 points
266. ble of GPP function A function B 2 Itis possible to write programs from peripheral devices capable of GPP functions that are connected to other stations in the network during the RUN Peripheral device capable Write during RUN of GPP function 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Operation Procedures To write from the GPP function peripheral devices during RUN the following two methods are available 1 After a ladder is created in the ladder mode write during RUN is performed by pressing Shift keys for conversion of the ladder 2 With 4 Write conversion setting in 8 Option menu of the ladder mode 4 Write setting during RUN and 7 Write method during RUN are set When the key is pressed for conversion of the ladder after the ladder is created write during RUN is performed The following shows the setting examples Write and conversion setting After conversion PC is written during RUN After conversion PC is written if PC is STOP After conversion PC is not written 4 Write setting during RUN 7 Write method during RUN Write during normal RUN Write during relative RUN with pointer a In 4 Write setting during RUN 1 After conversion PLC is written during RUN is set b In 7 Write method during RUN 1 Write during normal RUN or 2 Write during relative RUN with pointer is selected NOTE The following shows the p
267. cable to a drive unit or an external device in the shortest distance e Install the drive unit in the same panel A External wiring connector sp S 8 75 Cable cl Dol able clamp OD z0 2 O GE G 7 on External wiring cable within 2m 6 56ft Drive unit 20 6 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 b When connecting a cable longer than 2m 6 56ft but not exceeding 10m 32 8 1ft e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with a cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD750 S3 external wiring connector e Install a ferrite core e Connect the external wiring cable to a drive unit or an external device in the shortest distance A External wiring connector gt 3 SD l Q 75 Ferrite core Bol 2 2s Cable clamp oO a Oe O External wiring cable 2m to 10m 6 56ft to 32 81 Drive unit c Models and required quantities of the ferrite core and cable clamp e Cable clamp Model AD75CK Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric e Ferrite core Model ZCAT3035 1330 TDK ferrite core Contact TDK Corporation e Required quantity l Required quantity Cable length Optional part Within 2m 6 56ft AD75CK ope d Cable clamp position Inside control panel A1SD75 D75C ar mE 20 to 30cm aw 7 87 to 11 81inch 20 7 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si
268. can execution type e The following shows the operation that the QnACPU switches the standby type program DEF to the scan execution type and the scan execution program ABC to the standby type program when MO in program ABC turns on Before execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Scan execution type program ABC e PSCAN is the instruction to MO change the specified program DEF PSCAN DEF to the scan execution type e PSTOP is the instruction to PSTOP ABC change specified program ABC to the standby type Standby type program DEF Scan execution type program GHI PSCAN GHI PSCAN ABC PSTOP DEF PSTOP GHI When MO is ON After execution of PSCAN and PSTOP instructions Standby type program ABC MO PSCAN DEF PSTOP ABC Scan execution type program DEF Scan execution type program GHI PSCAN GHI PSCAN ABC PSTOP DEF PSTOP GHI 12 20 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU c The program execution type is changed by the PSCAN or PSTOP instruction in the END processing Therefore it is not changed during program execution END processing END processing END processing Execution program name gt GHI ABC GHI GHI DER GHI PSTOP ABC 7 DEF is changed to the scan execution executed type and ABC is changed to the standby PSCAN DEF is type program executed REMARK s The GHI and DEF programs are executed in the sequence s
269. card Max 2036k bytes a Maximum 28k Maximum 60k Maximum 28k Maximum 60k Number of steps Program step step step step capacity The number of points usable in the Number of I O device points 8192 points X Y to 1FFF 4 Peeters program 512 points 1024 points 512 points 1024 points The number of accessible points to NuUmgGr GrG pahis XIYO to 1FF XIYO to 3FF XIY0 to 7FF X YO to FFF actual YO module 4 Device points Link direct device PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Model Name Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Internal relay M Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay L Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192 points BO to 1FFF Item Default 2048 points TO to T2047 Low speed timers and high speed timers sharing Set low speed timers high speed timers switching with instructions Set low speed high speed measurement units by parameter Low speed timers 10ms to 1000ms 10ms units Default 100ms High speed timers 1ms to 100 ms 1ms units default 10 ms Timer T Default 0 points STO to 2047 Low speed timers and high speed timers sharing Set Low speed timers high speed timers switching with instructions Set low speed high speed measurement units by parameter Low speed timers 10ms to 1000ms 10ms units Default 100ms High speed timers 1ms to 100 ms 1ms units default 10 ms e Normal counter Default 1024 points CO to 1023 Counter C e Interrupt counters Max
270. casoma 10 8 Annunciator F ccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 3 20 4 2 COMMENIS cccsscceseeceeeceeeceeeeseeeseueeees App 125 Application inStructions cccccccseeeneees App 17 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Application standards of extension base modules ASOP een ee ee 11 1 PEA enh PEA E vinta AE E EEE 17 4 Common pointer 12 17 13 1 Applications of Memory Cards 0008 14 2 Constant SeAfrican aa 10 2 Auto WOM CSIs oseceniscstenctieeootecsascecsen jantuadcensavendocdase 7 1 Constant SCAN cccecccceccseeceeeeeaeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaaes 4 1 Auto Refresh Setting of CC Link 7 8 Constant Scan Function Error Check Function EAE A AE A ate E A App 126 B GONT ONC IMO snoren TE ees tonsa 4 1 Base Unit Counter O Pens aeai 4 2 Base unit allocation cccccesesseeeeeeeeeees 5 2 CPU module External dimensions of installing base unit External DimMensions ccseceeeee App 141 seine EE PNE ened esac A App 143 Installation and Removal cccceceeee 19 11 Installation and Removal of Modules 19 11 Performance specifications ccceceeeeeee 4 1 Installing the Base Units ee 19 9 Current CONSUMPTION ssrin 4 3 Parts NEINGS vaseteinusunicnnsaxtngelionwiuueticewoniawesnes 17 7 Basic instructions onnnennenneannnnnennennennnnne App 5 D Battery Dairy Inspection cccceccceeceseeeseeeeaeeeseeeeaees 21 1 Bat
271. ccurs pe Se ree b15 to b8b7 to bO ita al F number for timer t _ D9112 Enabled oni set value and time F number setting Timer time limit U QnA y over error 0 to 255 setting D9113 A SM95 1 to 255s pa rne m ot SM96 e Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an SM97 active step starts the timer and if the transition condition next to the corresponding step is not SM98 met within the timer time limit the set annunciator F turns ON D9109 D9110 D9114 New New New App 79 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 2 System information Table App 3 4 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e The CPU switch status is stored in the following format b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 3 Empty 2 1 CPU switch status Status of CPU b4 corresponds to memory card S Every END SD200 Status of switch switch 2 Memary card A and b5 corresponds to processing switch memory card B 0 OFF 1 ON b8 through b12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system 3 DIP switch setting switch 1 b14 and b15 correspond to SW1 and SW2 of system setting switch 2 respectively OFF at 0 ON at 1 e The following bit patterns store the status of the LEDs on the CPU module e Ois off 1 is on and 2 is flicker b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 _ to Se ee ee seein D201 LED status CPU LED change QnA 1
272. ce 1 lt N gt Space Select E CEI 2 Write the created status latch condition to the memory card a Set the status latch file and storage destination Set the status latch condition at 1 Exec Status Latch amp Disp Status on the Status Latch screen EExec Status Latch amp Dis 2 Sampling Trace Data File to Save 1 gt Select From List 2 gt File Shown Right Drive 11 File Name SAMPLES b Write the status latch file to the memory card Write the status latch file to the memory card using 7 Write to PC Condition on Status Latch screen Since file names are used when writing to the memory card multiple status latch files can be written 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 3 Execute the status latch Execute the status latch by using 1 Exec Status Latch amp Disp Status on Status Latch screen The following shows a setting example for 1 Execute Status Latch amp Display Status Exec Status Latch amp Dis 1 Operation 5 StsLtch State gt lt gt Register Start Displayed only aS gt Suspension when Display 4 gt Trigger execution Status is StsLtch Not Register selected 2 Status Latch File to Save 1 gt Select from List 2 4 File Shown Right Drive 1 File Name SAMPLE7B 3 Trace Gondition gt Qverwrite Conditions onto GPU s 2 Use Condition in GPU Execute t gt Cance L N gt Space gt Select eee The followi
273. ce Label 1234567890 J J 1 J 1 OG OC SE OC OC OC OS OG SC oS SS 58 OO sa Os OT poe Gd ND es mm m m rm oe rm oe Se rr e Comments and labels can be assigned to the following devices Device name X Y M L F SM B SB V T present value C present value ST present value D SD W SW R ZR P UD CGO JO X JO Y JO B JO SB JOW JO SW BLO S BLLI TR When P or comments are used as pointers for programs such as subroutine or interrupt programs they are not displayed To display these comments make them displayed as pointer statements Refer to Section 11 6 11 5 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU 2 When using comments with application instructions LEDC PRC etc if a device comment file has been written to the CPU module enable one of the options in the parameter setting for the device comment file This setting is made at 2 Comment file used in a command on the PLC file screen in the parameter mode of GPP function PC File Setting File Register 3 Device Initial Value i c Not Used 1 gt Not Used 2 Program Name is Used 2 Program Name is Used Drive Drive 3 gt Use the Following Files 3 4 gt Use the Following Files Drive Drive File J File I Capacity 1K 2 Comment File Used by Instruction 4 File for Local Device 1 gt Not Used 1 gt Not Used 2 gt Program Name is Used 2 gt Use the Following Fil
274. cecceeeceeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeees 20 1 1 Precautions Handling precautions ccceeee 17 6 18 5 Number of files cece ceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeees 4 1 Points occupied by empty slot n0nn0nnaanaannn 5 4 Number of I O device points cccceeeeeees 4 1 Number of I O points cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 1 O Operation for message display 08 10 21 Operation processing for momentary power failure PEE E EE E T E A T E T 12 26 Overview of added functions cccceeeeeee es 2 7 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY TAHE QZASCP U ene en eee asia 12 1 Overview of the Q2AS H CPU S1 Scan Time IEN E N AE O A A T App 158 Index 3 P Q2ASCPU memory block diagram 3 23 PA raMetell cccecceecceeeceeeceeseeeeees 13 1 App 120 FAN Chel XC CIN IW seursai a 8 44 R Part IN GIN CS rica netnisicsinca sw eacawacmiascaddavenineseeancases 15 2 Reading module access time intervals 10 23 Parts NAMES cccccececeececeeceeeenes 15 2 16 5 17 7 Reading Writing Data from a Q2ASCPU Using PAUSE status operation processing 12 24 FROM TO Instructions 0 cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 2 Periodic INSPECTION ccceceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21 2 Reading Writing Data from to the Q2ASCPU Using PID Control Instructions ceeeseeeeee App 41 Special Direct Devices ccce 6 3 PLOC NAMO eann a 11 1 etaan oTo TPR 4 1 App
275. ch fuse has been blown M9000 SM1000 Fise bidwi Module wilk blown e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal Gace thereafter e Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition e Turned on if the status of I O module is different form entered status when power is turned on e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal I O module verify thereafter M39 SM IRU error e I O module verification is done also to remote I O station modules e Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to D1123 are reset e Goes ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even one of NIMI link master Normal the installed AJ71PT32 S3 modules Me ween module error Error e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms Ae ONE occurs during use of the AC power supply module no e Reset when the power supply is switched OFF then ON M9005 SM1005 eerie detected i AC DOWN detected e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module e Reset when the power supply is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the Normal specified MAAR TAHY PAA ON Battery low e Turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter e Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the Normal specified ais one Panny lew areh ON _
276. circuit is exposed When a slot needs to be left open be sure to install the blank module A1SG60 When using the A1S5L1B S1 expansion base with no power supply attach the included cover to the side of the leftmost module 20 2 6 Grounding There are two kinds of ground terminals as shown below Either ground terminal must be used grounded Be sure to perform protective grounding to ensure the safety Protective grounding Ensures the safety of the programmable controller and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance 20 2 7 External wiring 1 Module power supply and external power supply For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply the 5 12 24 48VDC I O module and the special function module which requires the external power supply use the 5 12 24 48VDC circuit which is doubly insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply whose insulation is reinforced 2 External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the programmable controller use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the programmable controller is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit 3 Reinforced insulation Reinforced insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown in Table 1 Reinforced Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category Il source IEC664 Rated voltage
277. ck elements by using the clock monitor option in the monitor functions of the PLC system in the other mode For details on the operation for each peripheral device refer to the Operating Manual for each 2 Writing from a program Clock data is written to the clock elements using the clock instruction DATEWR The following shows the example of the program Write request Year 95 Month 8 Day 10 Hour 11 Minute 35 Second 24 Day Friday 5 For details on the DATEWR instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Clock data is not written to clock elements in advance Write clock data to the clock elements before using the Q2ASCPU Even if partly changing the clock data rewrite all data to the clock elements If the nonexistent time is written to the clock elements normal clock operation is impossible Setting 13 to the month 10 9 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 4 Clock data read a To read clock data to data registers use the clock data read instruction DATERD in the program An example of a program using the instruction is shown below Read Request Xi The time data is read For details on the DATERD instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions b To read the clock data to SD210 to SD213 turn SM213 ON from a sequence program or a peripheral device 5 Special relays and special registers for reading writ
278. clock QnA This relay alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time unit s specified in SD414 When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU M9034form SM414 2n second clock module reset is performed goes from OFF to start S Status change at change QnA Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program Relay repeats ON OFF switching at fixed scan intervals When PLC power supply is turned ON or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start The ON OFF intervals are set with the DUTY S Every ND QnA instruction processing SM423 User timing clock No 3 2 8 ne eoan DUTY SM420 7 7 3 n1 ON scan interval SM424 User timing clock No 4 n1 scan n2 OFF scan interval For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs sara QnA App 53 APPENDICES Low speed program execution flag Reads module service interval 4 Scan information Completed or not executed Execution under way Ignored Read Table App 2 5 Special relay Explanation e Goes ON when low speed execution type program is executed e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the module service interval designated by SD550 is read to D551 to SD552 App 54 Set by When Set S Every END processing Corres ponding ACPU MELSEC QnA Corresponding APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 5 Drive information Table App 2 6 Special relay
279. command OFF ON GPP function Remote RUN OFF eae ee ee command Serial E RUN communication module STOP o Programmable controller CPU RUN STOP status STOP status Fig 10 5 Time chart for remote RUN STOP switching with GPP function or a serial communication module 4 Precautions a Since the STOP state has a priority in the Q2ASCPU pay attention to the following points 1 In the Q2ASCPU if remote STOP is performed from any one of remote RUN contact GPP function serial communication module etc the QnACPU will be STOP 2 In order to set the Q2ASCPU to RUN again after it has been set to STOP by remote STOP all external factors which set remote STOP Remote RUN contact GPP function serial communication module etc have to be set to RUN REMARK The RUN STOP status is defined as follows RUN status Status in which the sequence program is repeatedly performed from step O to the END instruction STOP status Status in which the sequence program operation is stopped and all outputs Y are OFF 10 14 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 6 2 Remote STEP RUN Remote STEP RUN refers to the function whereby the step run of the Q2ASCPU is performed from GPP function while the RUN STOP key switch of the module is in RUN position Step run is program execution that operates by one step at a time starting from the designated step For details on step run refer to Section 8 7 1 Applic
280. commands i eo e ANDs logical blocks series connection of blocks 4 b Lif p 4 po Pot e ORs logical blocks parallel connection of blocks e Stores the operation result e Reads the operation result from MPS e Reads the operation result from MPS and clears the result e Inverts the operation result Association e Converts the operation result to a rising edge pulse y MEF e Converts the operation result to falling edge pulse K EGP e Converts the operation result to rising edge pulse stored at Vn 4 EGF e Converts the operation result to falling edge pulse stored at Vn App 2 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 Output instructions e Device output e Sets a device D Resets a device e Generates one program cycle pulse at the rising edge of an input 2 signal e Generates one program cycle pulse at the falling edge of an input El signal EO o D e Inverts device output DELTA P D H Converts a direct output to pulse i When specifying input X for the target device specify the device number out of the actual input X range 4 Shift instructions 5 Master control instructions e Master control start Master control e Master control reset App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 6 End instructions e Ends the main program Program end 7 Other instructions e Stops sequence operation when the input condition is met Stop e
281. cription and system 2 Sections 4 to 15 configuration for the Q2ZASCPU Read them to learn the features of Q2ASCPU and the modules that can be used and points to note when configuring a system These sections give the specifications and functions of Q2ASCPU They describe each Q2ASCPU function to enable you to use the Q2ASCPU effectively 3 Sections 16 to 18 These sections describe the specifications and handling of units modules other than the CPU module power supply module base units etc Read them to learn how to handle the power supply module base units memory cards etc 4 Section 19 to 20 These section describes the loading and installation EMC and low voltage directives 5 Section 21 to 22 These sections describe all aspects of maintenance from REMARK installing the Q2ZASCPU to daily inspections and troubleshooting Read them to learn how to install the Q2ASCPU so as to ensure smooth operation and how to carry out daily inspections and corrective action in the event of trouble This manual does not cover MELSECNET II data link systems MELSECNET B data link systems MELSECNET 10 networks or the SFC function For details on each function refer to the following manuals e MELSECNET II MELSECNET B Data Link MELSECNET MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manual e MELSECNET 10 Network MELSECNET 10 Network System Manual for QnA Q4AR e SFC Function QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC
282. ct graphic operation terminal units to a Q2ASCPU Connection Method Accessible Device Range Direct connection to CPU Computer link connection Access is available for all device ranges of Q2ASCPU GOT1000 series CC Link connection Refer to the GT Works2 GT Designer2 Reference Manual for MELSECNET 10 connection details Bus connection Direct connection to CPU Computer link connection Access is available for all device ranges of Q2ASCPU GOT A900 series CC Link connection Refer to the GT Works2 GT Designer2 Reference Manual for MELSECNET IlI B 10 connection details Bus connection f The accessible range for an A1SJ71UC24 computer link module comprises the CPU to which the A1SJ71UC24 is mounted the host station and the other stations in the network to which the host station is connected It is not possible to access other stations in other networks by using the MELSECNET 10 network system routing function The access range for an A1SJ71QC24N serial communication module is the host station other stations in the network connected to the host station and other stations in other networks accessed through up to 7 relay stations by using the routing function g When accessing from intelligent communication module A1SD51S to other station Q2ASCPU QnACPU on the network only Format 1 control table can be used Format 2 control table cannot be used Access to other network is not allowed on Format 1 control table h I
283. ction Cannot execute in excess of capacity Password has not been cancelled Message 1 is displayed Message 1 is displayed Cannot execute when PLC is in RUN mode Cannot execut while PLC is not in STEP RUN mode Not executed due to STEP RUN of PLC App 133 Corrective Action Check the connection between the CPU module and connection cable Check the requested remote operation Check the requested command Turn the Q2ASCPU system protect switch OFF Reduce the data volume so that it can be handled with the request Cancel the set password Check the CID Re perform the request after the elapse of an arbitrary time period Perform the request after setting the Q2ASCPU to STOP Perform the request after setting the Q2ASCPU to STEP RUN Perform the request after setting the Q2ASCPU to RUN STOP APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 4029H 402AH 4033H Error CPU module file related error CPU module device designation error Error Contents Designated drive memory does not exist or is abnormal The file with designated file name and file No does not exist The file name and file No of the designated file do not match The designated file cannot be accessed by the user The designated file is processing a request from another source The keyword set for target drive memory has to be designated The designated range exce
284. cution time in the PLC PRG TIME OVER The low speed program execution time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter exceeded the excess time of the constant scan Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Time value set e Individual Information Time value actually parameter so that the excess time of constant scan can be fully secured measured CPU Status MDiagnostic Timing Continue e Always PRG TIME OVER The scan time of the low speed execution type program exceeded the low speed execution watch time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC Read the individual information of the error using parameter dialog box the peripheral device check the numerical value 5011 Collateral informationmmon time there and shorten scan time if necessary e Common Information Time value set Change the low speed execution watch time in the e Individual Information Time value actually PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter dialog box measured MDiagnostic Timing e Always 22 41 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA 22 3 8 Error code list 6000 to 6999 The following shows the error messages from the error code 6000 to 6999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding E Content dC C tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause orrective Action CPU Status PRG VERIFY ERR The control system and standby system in the redundant system do not h
285. cution type program is different at each scan If surplus time in constant scan is less than 2ms the low speed execution type program is not executable When using a low speed execution type program set a proper constant scan time so that surplus time will be 2ms or longer 2 When the low speed program execution time is set a low speed execution type program is repeatedly executed for the set time duration Accordingly the scan time is different at each scan 3 When the constant scan time is set surplus time after completion of the low speed END processing is used as wait time When the set constant scan time is reached the scan execution type program is executed Wait time for constant scan Set constant scan time Scan time Low speed scan time Therefore the scan time for each scan is constant If surplus time in constant scan is less than 2ms the low speed execution type program is not executable When using a low speed execution type program set a proper constant scan time so that surplus time will be 2ms or longer 4 When the low speed program execution time is set operation of the scan execution type program is started ignoring the surplus time after completion of the low speed END processing Surplus time in low speed program execution time Set low speed program execution time Low speed scan time Accordingly the scan time is different at each scan 12 10 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY T
286. d at S to a 1 word BIN value and the number of fraction part digits Decimal text string and stores them to the devices specified at D1 and D2 l e Converts the character string that includes a decimal point specified at S to a 2 word BIN value and the number of fraction part digits and stores them to the devices specified at D1 and D2 Floating point l PEsTR P s1 s2 D e Converts the floating point data specified at S to a character string and stores it in the devices specified at D Character string Character string EVAL P ni e Converts the character string specified at S to a floating point data and stores it in the devices specified at D Floating decimal point Hexadecimal BIN e Converts the 1 word BIN value in the devices starting from the one pasc p S 0 a specified at S to hexadecimal ASCII data and stores them to the ASCII word devices starting from the one specified at D for n characters ASCII e Converts the hexadecimal ASCII data in the devices starting from the l AXP S D n one specified at S to BIN values for n characters and stores them Hexadecimal BIN to the devices starting from the one specified at D e Stores n characters from the final character of the character string RIGHT P S nm specified at S to the devices specified at D e Stores n characters from the initial character of the character string T P 5 EFI P sjo n specified at S to
287. d at D 16 bit data negation transfer MUP S 9 32 bit data negation transfer BeML P S 0 Data block transfer Same data block transfer 16 bit data exchange 32 bit data exchange Block data exchange bls to bBb7 ta b0 S ay b1S5to b amp b7 to b D sbits 8bits Upper lower byte i swe eTe App 14 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 5 Program branch instructions Causes a jump to Pn when the input condition is met e Causes a jump to Pn beginning with the scan after the one in which the input condition is met e Causes a jump to Pn unconditionally e Causes a jump to the END instruction when the input condition is 6 Program execution control instructions Interrupt disable e Disables execution of interrupt programs Interrupt enable e Cancels the execution disabled status for interrupt programs Interrupt disable a e Disables or enables execution of individual interrupt programs enable setting Return e Returns from the interrupt program to the sequence program 7 1O refresh instruction Classification Description I O refresh e Executes partial refresh for the specified I O part in a scan App 15 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 8 Other convenient instructions s0 SU UU UU UU UU UU UU UU UU vocni fsioleH on e o n 012345657654321 0 1 2 3 2 10 value i i m E Cn contact Up down counter vocnt S Dn Cn present value Cn
288. d cannot be performed since it is in execution An attempt was made to perform a program not registered in the parameters The designated pointer P cannot be detected Pointer P designation is not possible because the program is not registered in the parameters An attempt was made to add a pointer P that have already existed The number of pointers designated is too great The designated step No is not at the head of the instruction The END instruction was inserted deleted while the CPU module had been in RUN The file capacity has been exceeded by performing write during RUN Cannot perform a remote request App Message Displayed at Peripheral Device Data is faulty Cannot find the find target Unable to execute due to on going process Not registered Cannot find the find target Not registered Device ranges are duplicated No pointer exists Execution position is incorrect Setting is incorrect File capacity is not enough Data error 137 MELSEC QnA Corrective Action Check the requested data contents Check the data to be searched Re perform the command after requests from other devices has been completed Register the program to be performed to the parameters Check the data to be searched Register the program to be performed in the parameters then designate the pointer P I Check the pointer No to be added and change it
289. d in ascending order of the program numbers set in the parameter mode 12 9 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 3 Execution time for low speed execution type program executed in one scan a When operation of all low speed execution type programs is completed within one scan and there is surplus time the subsequent processing varies depending on the setting status of special relay SM330 and the execution condition for the low speed execution type programs e Non synchronization Operation of a low speed execution type method SM330 OFF program is continuously executed within surplus time e Synchronization method Even if there is surplus time operation of a low SM330 ON speed execution type program is not executed and another operation starts from the next scan Operation method Setting Execution condition of low speed execution type program of low speed execution status of Low speed program execution Constant scan settin type program SM330 g time setting Non synchronization Re executes low speed Re executes low speed 1 2 execution type program method execution type program Constant scan wait Starts scan execution type Synchronization method 3 DEE time occurred program operation 1 When the constant scan time is set the low speed execution type program is repeatedly executed for the surplus time of the constant scan Accordingly the execution time of the low speed exe
290. d the corrective actions m Situation Cause Countermeasure e Connect the proper resistor so that the input e Leakage current of input switch driven by modules terminal to terminal voltage is under contactless switch etc the OFF voltage value AC input Example The input signal does AC input C Input Leakage Input module current module Power supply Recommend 40 1 to 0 47uF 47 to 120 1 2W for CRs constant e Drive by limit switch with neon lamp Same as the example 1 AC input e Or provide a totally independent display circuit separately Example The input signal does 2 not turn off Leakage Input current module Power supply l e Same as the example 1 e Line capacity C of the leak current l l e However leakage current does not occur twisted pair cable due to line capacity when a power supply is on the side of input of the wiring cable is about 100PF m device as shown below Example The input signal does AC input AC input 3 not turn off l Leakage Input T current module Input a module 1 not turn off Power supply e Driven by a switch with LED indication e Connect an appropriate resistance so that voltage between the terminal of the input module and the common is lower than the OFF voltage as shown below Example The input signal does BE NpUE IN DC input tsink 4 not turn off Leakage current Resister Input gt g module An example of calculation of resistor to be connected
291. devices When Use same file name as program is set R and ZR cannot be used REMARK 1 In Setting station in the table above M refers to the master station L to the local station and T to the stand by station M L B T ST C D W R ZR 2 Inthe table above O means that the setting can be made and x means that the setting is not required 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Table 7 1 List of auto refresh settings Continued Setting station station _ _ Tr Batch refresh device for ee e The destination device for special register is set T ST C D W R ZR special register 91 0 D W K Aut date buff ag j Z The buffer capacity for automatic update is set 128 to 4096 x x specification Total number of slave The last station number of the remote station connected to the master station stations is set 1 to 100 Delay ti Th lay ti f link i t elay timer e delay time of link scan is se 0 is invalid e Not used Standby station specification The use status of the stand by master function is set Used Number of automatic return The number of automatic return stations is set to one link scan stations Operation specification for ean acai e When the CPU module has stopped continuation stop of the data link is set CPU stop e Continue e Non synchronization e Synchronization Scan mode setting e Synchronization Non synchronization is set to the CPU module scan
292. dicated in the table below olem a g Setting range Setting range Default value value Up to 10 Label Set a label for the CPU module characters No setting Up to 64 Comment Set a comment for the CPU module characters 11 2 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 11 3 Drive Title The drive title function assigns a title to a drive to allow users to easily identify what file is stored in the built in RAM or memory card Drive titles are created on the Title Statement Def screen under the PC menu in the online mode of GPP function Title Statement Def Interface RS232C 2 QnACPU Target PC Network 0 Station FF PC Type Q2A Target Memory internal RAM 1 Title Statement Cirl D Dir Esc Close A created title is displayed on the screen as shown below t File 2 PC 3 Find 4 Trace rtir 6 Test 7 Window Alt Menu On Line GPU Q3A NW sTsSt C SY STEMZNSAMPLES Interface RS232 lt gt QnACPU Target PC Network 8 Sta FF PC Type Q3A Target Mem Internal RAM Title Line Ne 1 Card i File Type Size Date Time Title PARAM Parameter 338 96 84 25 16 45 I SAMPLES QnA Seq 2188 96 84 25 10 45 Note that creating a drive title uses an area equivalent to one file in each memory 11 3 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 11 4 File Title The file title function allows file titles to be assigned to files so that the contents
293. dividual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FOR NEXT ERROR A BREAK instruction was executed although no FOR instruction has been executed prior to that Collateral informationmmon 4203 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE P The CALL instruction is executed but there is no subroutine at the specified pointer 4210 Collateral informationmmon l e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE P There was no RET instruction in the executed subroutine program 4211 WECollateral informationmmon l e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE P The RET instruction exists before the FEND instruction of the main routine program 4212 Collateral informationmmon l e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE P More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed 4213 Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program er
294. dividual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed STOP RUN BOOT ERROR There is no boot file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch even though the Boot DIP switch is ON Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Drive name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset ICM OPE ERROR e A memory card was removed without switching the memory card in out switch OFF e The memory card in out switch is turned ON although a memory card is not actually installed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Drive name e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When memory card is inserted or removed When memory card is inserted ICM OPE ERROR e The memory card has not been formatted e Memory card format status is incorrect Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Drive name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When memory card is inserted or removed When memory card is inserted ICM OPE ERROR A memory card that cannot be used with the CPU module has been installed Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Drive name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When memory card is inserted or removed FILE SET ERROR The file designated at the PLC file settings in the parameters cannot be found Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information
295. dule and any structure or part However when A52B A55B A58B A62B A65B or A68B extension base unit is used provide at least 80mm 3 15in of distance between the top of the unit and any structural part Do not install the programmable controller vertically or horizontally because it may affect the ventilation If the base unit is installed to the surface which is not flat or is distorted an excessive force is applied to the printed circuit board and it may cause a fault Be sure to install it to a flat surface Avoid sharing the same panel with any source of vibration such as a large sized magnetic contactor or no fuse breaker and install to a separate panel or away from such devices Provide wiring ducts as necessary However when the clearance from the top or bottom of the programmable controller is less than that in Fig 19 1 and Fig 19 2 pay attention to the following a When installing to the top of programmable controller to improve the ventilation keep the height of the duct to 50mm 1 97in or below In addition the distance from the top of the programmable controller should be sufficient for tightening and loosening works for the mounting screws on the top of the module The module cannot be replaced if the screws on the top of the module cannot be loosened or tightened b When placing a duct under the programmable controller take into account the use of optical fiber cables or coaxial cables as well as the mi
296. dule whose bit has a value of 1 e When a GOT is bus connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the grounding status of the GOT Reset the PLC parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual status of the special function modules Keep the number of special function modules that can initiate an interrupt with the exception of the A 1S I61 module to 12 or fewer Keep the number of serial communication modules excludes A 1S J71QU24 installed to six or fewer Install only 1 A 1S 161 module CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 22 RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop 1 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status SP UNIT LAY ERR At the MELSECNET MINI auto refresh network parameter settings the module allocation that was set is different from the actual module models at Reset the network parameter MELSECNET MINI the station numbers in the link system auto refresh unit module allocation setting so that it Collateral informationnmon conforms to the station number of the module that e Common Information Module No Slot No is actually linked e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At rese
297. e Installed in the Q2ASCPU Q2ASHCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Battery A6BAT IC RAM memory backup Q2ASHCPU S1 main module l ipui AGTBXY36 ii a and sink type outpu mogble siangarcrtype A1SX41 S1 S2 A1SX42 S1 S2 A1SY41 A1SY41P For sink type input module and sink type output ANAVAA ae A6TBXY54 module 2 wire type A6TBX70 For sink type input module 3 wire type A1SX41 S1 S2 A1SX42 S1 S2 A1SH42 S1 Connector terminal block conversion module A6TBX54 E For source type input module 2 wire type A6TBY54 E For source type input module 2 wire type A6TBX70 E For source type input module 3 wire type ACO5TB 0 5 m 1 64 ft long for sink module AC10TB 1 m 3 28 ft long for sink module AC20TB 2 m 6 56 ft long for sink module AC30TB 3 m 9 84 ft long for sink module ACS5S0TB 5 m 16 4 ft long for sink module Cable for connector terminal block conversion module AC80TB 5 m 16 4 ft long for sink module AC100TB 10 m 32 8 ft long for sink module ACO5TB E 0 5 m 1 64 ft long for source module AC10TB E 1 m 3 28 ft long for source module AC20TB E 2 m 6 56 ft long for source module AC30TB E 3 m 9 84 ft long for source module ACS50TB E 5 m 16 4 ft long for source module Relay terminal A6TE2 16SRN module For sink type output module ACO6TE 0 6 m 1 97 ft long AC10TE 0 6 m 1 97 ft long Cable for relay terminal module connection AC30TE 3 m 9 84 ft
298. e Not doing so may cause an error 1 Special 16 points 2 Special 32 points 3 Input Set number of points 4 Set Empty 16 points and Special 32 points 2 slot Vacant 16 points points Vacant 16 points Special 32 Refer to users manual for special module being used c When operating MELSECNET data link perform I O assignment as follows 1 As for a master station I O assignment has to be performed for the master station and all remote I O stations I O assignment of MELSECNET Il B to the remote I O station is invalid X YO For master VO allocation to station range For remote I O station 2 As for a local station perform I O assignment only for the local station 3 Assign the I O for the I O hybrid module e g A42XY as an output module d When the MELSECNET 10 network is established assign the I O only for the host station master station Since the I O assignment of MELSECNET 10 to the remote I O station is irrelevant the I O assignment is not allowed For I O assignment of MELSECNET 10 to the remote I O station use the I O assignment settings in the Network param REMARK As for the remote I O station of MELSECNET II B I O assignment settings in the Network param is irrelevant therefore the I O assignment is not allowed 5 IO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT E ELS EC A 5 4 Example of I O Number Assignment The following shows the example of I O number assignment when I O assig
299. e Remote I O station e Remote device Station type e The model for each remote station is set station e Intelligent device station e 1 station e 2 stations e 3 stations e 4 stations Number of occupied stations The number of occupied stations for each remote station is set Specification of reserved ae e Not reserved e Reservation for remote station is set station e Reserved Specification of invalid e Invalid j e Validity Invalidity for error detection of the remote station is set station e Valid Only when the file register is set to Use the designated file with the Parameter R and ZR can be used as the auto refresh devices When Use same file name as program is set R and ZR cannot be used REMARK 1 In Setting station in the table above M refers to the master station L to the local station and T to the stand by station 2 Inthe table above O means that the setting can be made and x means that the setting is not required 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION 2 Precautions a Auto refresh of the CC Link is available when the Q2ASCPU and the CC Link module with function version B are used When either of the Q2ASCPU or the CC Link module does not indicate function version B auto refresh of the CC Link is not available Auto refresh can be set to up to 8 CC Link modules When 9 or more CC Link modules are used handle with the FROM TO instruction of the sequence program for the 9th module
300. e and start up time differences between the programmable controller power supply and the external power supply for the control target especially DC For example if the external power supply for a DC output module is powered ON and then the programmable controller is powered ON the DC output module may generate incorrect outputs temporarily upon the programmable controller power ON To prevent this it is required to build a circuit by which the programmable controller is powered on first Also an external power failure or programmable controller failure may lead to erroneous operation In order to eliminate the possibility of an system error and to ensure fail safe operation create a circuit emergency stop circuit protection circuit interlock circuit etc outside the programmable controller for the parts whose faulty operation could cause mechanical damage and or accidents A system design circuit example based on the above is provided later 19 1 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA 1 System design circuit example AC system AC DC system Power supply Power supply o gt Transformer DC power supply Transformer TT HOU established signal 0000 j j Fuse input f ee x Start stop circuit N CPU module Ve momue canbe started pees by turning ON of supply RA1 which is the programmable M Fuse controllers s RUN l output The setting for TM TM wu is the t
301. e during RUN by several people ccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 63 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 1to9 19 Oi FunCom EIST Tiesin anos entlutaenaulalia tute outage a a aa seea eine 9 1 O22 NACO IG eea E E E eae tatace scat 9 2 9 0 SClPCIAGNOSUCS FUN CTO MN ates iedeen a E E E E EN 9 4 9 3 1 Interruption due to error CEteCtiON ccccecccescecscecececeeeceucecececeueceueecaeecsueceueesaeesseesaueeseess 9 8 93 2 LED i idcati on GUC toan Eror sorene unnn a a ea 9 8 Q3 Resentng ETON sei ienie a a e eta cancel des eae de linelend manele 9 9 gA ENORSSIN ee a a a ri a a e aA tie dtane tit Sera tee 9 10 9 5 System prote l aii id ee aa ete eed ie ee 9 11 26 Password Regis tato sarrere a O a a 9 12 Gal SVSLOMMDISDIAY oaa ote eet EE E aE E ATO 9 14 96 LED INACIO amasra a a a E a a eae 9 15 Zok EED MCa Sas 2cc i aaa2 aan tie sae oe neetnnaacetien 9 15 go TOMI SE ING hasan setae chee E e E tt cleats nana te nadtatntosmetene estate O sates 9 17 WORT FUNCIONE Sternse eA EEE ulus eatulodce ducal 10 1 8 yee OR S gt g Gr 7 eee eerste Rens Pn eee ere ee eee Ren eee oe eee Cee ae een eee ene 10 2 VOL ARC I UNCION uenea ten tele reese a a eect aui ais sulalameceliddiee thc plocee mation niceeteamis 10 5 10 4 Setting of the Output Y Status When Switching from STOP to RUN ee ceeeeeeeeeeeee es 10 7 109 GIOGK Funcom seisan edie icc eet ied hie ee eas i bee ak tas 10 8 106 Remoto ODCTAON sca iina a a hdd sea
302. e error to be canceled is canceled i ST N CU After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error the special relays special registers and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under which the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error it will be registered again in the error history When multiple enunciators F detected are canceled the first one with No F only is canceled Refer to the following manual for details of error canceling QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 1 When the error is canceled with the error code to be canceled stored in the SD50 the lower one digit of the code is neglected Example If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur and error code 2100 to cancel error code 2101 If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur error code 2111 is not canceled even if error code 2100 is canceled 2 Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not canceled even if the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 are used to cancel the error Example Since SP UNIT DOWN is the error that occurred in the base unit including the extension cable intelligent function module etc the error cause cannot be removed even if the error is canceled by the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 Refer to the error code list and remove the error cause 22 45 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC
303. e following qualifications are possible with respect to the devices listed above Digit designation for bit devices Bit number designation for word devices The trace execution time program name step and branch factor are automatically added to the trace results 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 Write the set trace device and trace condition to the memory card a Set the trace file and storage destination Set the drive number and file name at 1 Execute Trace amp Display Status on Program Trace screen LFExecute Trace amp Dispila 2 Program Trace Data File to Save 1 gt Select From List 2 File Shown Right Drive i File Name SAMPLES b Write the trace file to the memory card Write the trace file to the memory card by using 9 Write to PC Condition on Program Trace screen Since file names are used when writing to the memory card multiple trace files can be written 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 3 Execute the program trace Write the trace file to the memory card by using 9 Write to PC Condition on Program Trace screen The following shows a setting example for 1 Execute Trace amp Display Status Execute Trace amp Display Status 1 Operation ProTr mean z 1 lt gt Register Start etg urr 2 lt gt Suspension Total Ti GTi Displayed only g E AftTrig ATi Ti when Status 4 gt Trigger Execution oa j Trace Hot Register Display
304. e hardware logic in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationmmon 1204 Common Information e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed OPE CIRCUIT ERR The operation circuit for sequence processing in the CPU module does not operate normally 1205 Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed e Take noise reduction measures e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 22 18 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop Q4AR QnA QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 1206 1300 1310 1401 OPE CIRCUIT ERR The DSP operation circuit in the CPU module does not operate normally Collateral informationnmmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FUSE BREAK OFF There is an output module with a blown fuse Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No For Remote I O network Network No Station No e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e Always FUSE BREAK OFF e There is an output module with a blown fuse e External pow
305. e it for example a personal computer or Q6PU A RAM incorporated in the Q2AS CPU that stores sequence programs and other data Abbreviation for Q1MEM O0O OO type memory card Generic term for a MELSEC A series programmable controller 2 OVERVIEW 2 OVERVIEW 2 1 Features Q2ASCPU has the following features 1 Large memory capacity a Q2AS H CPU S1 has a program capacity of 60k steps which means that 60k steps can be used for a single program Q2AS H CPU 28k steps b The device memory capacity is 29k words and the user can change the number of points as required For example the default number of points for internal relays M is 8k points but this can be expanded up to 32k points c One memory card of a maximum of 2M bytes can be installed Memory cards are used to store programs comments statements and file registers Programs can be stored in the CPU module itself so a memory card is not essential to run a CPU module High speed processing a Higher operation processing speeds have been achieved for basic instructions and application instructions A2USCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU S1 Basic instructions O 2uUS 0 075us Application instructions 1 2 us 0 225uUs b The access time for expansion data memory file registers R has been conformed with the internal devices of the Q2ASCPU data registers D and link registers W c Reading writing of the buffer memories of special function modules dedicat
306. e monitor test menu in the ladder mode 1 Select Program Batch Monitor Program Batch Monitor 1 gt Program List Monitor PoC Interrupt Program List Monitor Executec gt Cante LCND gt Space Select Esc Close 2 Select Interrupt Program List Monitor The following shows an example of the display when the interrupt program monitor list function is run Lint Prog List Mon Ex Times Comment CAI61 CAL61 CAL61 Ca161 CAI61 kmi b dd bed kd bd baad d bd ET I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 KRAKKK KKK RKKKRAKK r r ra rm m ee mmr 6 1 2 3 4 gt 6 7 8 B 1 2 3 4 Esc Close The following shows an explanation of the screen above a Ex Times The number of times the program has been executed taking the point when monitoring started as 0 in the count is displayed here When reaching the maximum times of 65536 the count returns to 0 The count is cleared to zero when switching to RUN b Comment The comments set in the documentation mode are displayed here 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 4 3 Scan time measurement This function displays the processing time for section of a program Function Description This function allows measurement of the execution time of section of the program in a program file The function can also be used to measure times within subroutine programs and interrupt programs If there is an interrupt progra
307. e program e Check program configuration e Check parameters and program configuration 22 2 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 22 3 5 Error code list 3000 to 3999 MELSEC QnA The following shows the error messages from the error code 3000 to 3999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status PARAMETER ERROR The PLC parameter settings for timer time limit setting the RUN PAUSE contact the common pointer number general data processing number of empty slots system interrupt settings baud rate setting and service processing setting are outside the range that can be used by the CPU module Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN At writing to progurammable controller PARAMETER ERROR The parameter settings in the error individual information special register SD16 are illegal Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP gt RUN At writing to progurammable controller PARAMETER ERROR The parameter settings are corrupted Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Indiv
308. e program operation is again performed from step 0 Remote PAUSE command Remote RUN command a ON wa when the PAUSE condition is satisfied SM204 RUN STOP status To arrange for outputs Y to be turned ON or OFF when the PAUSE status is established provide an interlock using the PAUSE state contact SM204 In the PAUSE state the ON OFF status of Y70 is determined by the ON OFF status of M20 Output turned OFF when PAUSE status is established Output turned ON when PAUSE status is established 10 17 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 6 4 Remote RESET Remote RESET is a function for resetting the Q2ASCPU by operation from an external device while the CPU module is in STOP Resetting is also possible even when the RUN STOP key switch on the CPU module is set to the RUN position if the CPU module is stopped by an error detectable by the self diagnostics function Remote RESET cannot be performed when the CPU module is in RUN 1 Application of remote RESET Remote RESET can be used to reset the CPU module by remote operation when an error has occurred in the place from where the CPU module cannot be directly operated 2 Methods for remote RESET Remote RESETcan only be performed by operation from GPP function or a serial communication module a Regardless of whether reset is performed from GPP function or a serial communication module the setting to enable remote RESET has to be made in the Parameter
309. e program type from the scan execution low speed execution type to the standby type b The following methods are available to switch programs for execution 1 When selecting programs to be executed in a control program e Defining the scan execution type program as the control program the QnACPU switches between the standby type program and the scan execution type program according to the set conditions to control the program to be executed e The following shows how the excution types of standby programs ABC DEF GHI and JKL are changed in the control program Scan execution type program control program PSCAN is the instruction to change specified program ABC to the scan execution type PSTOP is the instruction to change specified program ABC to the standby type When MO is ON the ABC program is changed from the standby type to the scan execution type When M1 is ON the ABC program is changed from the scan execution type to the standby type Standby Standby Standby Standby type type type type program program program program ABC DEF GHI JKL 12 19 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 2 When changing the execution type of another program from the scan execution type program e In the scan execution type program in execution the type of the program to be executed next is changed from the standby type to the s
310. e setting options 1 Latch clear key enabled Used to set a latch range which can be cleared by the latch clear operation using the RUN STOP key switch 2 Latch clear key disabled Used to set a latch range which cannot be cleared by the latch clear operation using the RUN STOP key switch Devices for which the latch clear key is disabled can be cleared by an instruction or by the clear operation of GPP function 1 Clearing by an instruction Reset by RST instruction or transfer KO with MOV instruction 2 Clearing by GPP function Execute device memory all clear from the PLC menu in the online mode For details on device latch ranges refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals For details on the operation method of GPP function refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or Type SWLIIVD GPPQ Software Package Operating Manual Online Offline To clear file registers or local devices reset them with the RST instruction or transfer KO with the MOV instruction 12 27 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU MELSEC QnA MEMO 12 28 13 PARAMETER LIST 13 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC QnA The parameters set for the Q2ASCPU are listed in the table below For details on each parameter refer to the section or reference manual indicated Set labels and or comments for peripheral devices on the CPU module This setting does not affect CPU module operation 0000H Set a label for
311. e tausedtioks 3 5 3 3 2 Precautions when configuring the SYStEM ccccccecccseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeees 3 19 3 3 3 Q2ASCPU memory block digra Minerin aana ae aa Aa a a a a 3 23 5 VO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 9 1to5 13 co aol We 6 0 0 0 2 meen ete Raa re a i eo Cee a ER e eon Ee E 5 1 5 2 1O Number Assignment Con ept ss i necetacecncladive nds mastuivndseeanOverd aoeevidhatesnne neni lidies sieumealahed menor 5 2 5 3 WOPASSIGnment with GPP FUNCION sios sn oectu en ten aaeeceense e a a neal duce i 5 4 5 4 Example of I O Number Assignment wiiececcsele tists wivaibndlube vec soaued eee ses lwaceevis estanesanebvacbancayeaesecdebert 5 9 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES 6 1 to6 5 6 1 Reading Writing Data from to the Q2ASCPU Using the FROM TO Instruction eee 6 2 6 2 Reading Writing Data from to the Q2ASCPU Using Special Direct Devices cece eee 6 3 6 3 Processing for Data Communication Requests from a Special Function Module 0068 6 5 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION 7 1to 7 14 kA FO MELSECNEFMINES Beier sitchen ihe cte rostered a a eked aden etna ele 7 1 72 Auto Refresh Setting of CC Link grace screi a c ais c cusieahcosaddenteieg ats send cade ete a cahdtacateneeseauetee 7 8 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 1to 8 64 ST FUNCIONES a a eee mee eT ene ae ee rey ene ee me eee ee 8 1 92 MONIO F UNCHO eissii ee a a a a ha use Oa nindes death ces 8 2 6 2 1 Monitonng
312. e trigger SM815 Program trace completion When ready for program trace SM810 is automatically turns ON 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION e With trace suspension Trigger SM811 SM811 Trigger Trace execution OFF ON execution end l t l l Trace count Trace count cleared i Trace count after trigger after trigger lt lt l I l l i l l l l i l l SM810 S O A S Program trace preparation l 1 I l l i i l 1 l i 1 l l l SM814 Start program trace l l l l l l I i i t SM812 Program trace execution under way SMB13 Program trace trigger 1 I l l l l l l l SM814 After program trace trigger I i 1 l 1 i l 1 l 1 l 1 l l l i l l l l SM815 f 7 Program trace completion When the trace is suspended from a peripheral device capable of GPP functions SM810 is turned OFF The following shows an operation at error occurrence When an error occurs during program trace SM828 program trace error comes ON and at the same time SM811 program trace start goes OFF To turn SM828 OFF either turn SM811 ON or execute the PTRA instruction 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures to perform program trace These operations are performed on the Program Trace screen of the trace menu in the online mode Perform these operations with the CPU module setting to the STEP RUN Refer to section 8 7
313. e unit specifications Table 17 1 Main base unit specifications A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B A1S38HB I O module 2 modules can be 3 modules can be 5 modules can be 8 modules can be 8 modules can be Extension Installation hole Sz 6 bell shaped holes for M5 screws Extendable S 220mm 3 3inch 255mm 3 3inch 325mm 3 3inch 430 3 3inch x 130 9 Minch 3 x A Aea x130mm 2 1inch x130mm 2 1inch x130mm 2 1inch ENS NCH ee a eee dimensions x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch Weight 0 52kg 0 65kg 0 75kg 0 97kg 1 0kg Attaching screws M5 x25 4 screws 2 Extension base unit specifications Table 17 2 Extension base unit specifications Item aisess F aiseag 1S68B Aisso A125 wisssp ATF aigsap 1S58B S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 I O module 5 modules can be 8 modules can be 2 modules can be 5 modules can be 8 modules can be installation range installed installed installed installed installed Power supply module loading Power supply module required Unnecessary Refer to POINT below necessity Installation hole 6 bell shaped holes for M5 screws ee E E S solderless terminal Applicable tightening torque 78 to 118N cm 315mm 3 3inch 420mm 3 3inch 135mm 3 3inch 260mm 3 3inch 365mm 3 3inch x 130mm 2 1inch x 130mm 2 1inch x 130mm 2 1inch x 130mm 2 1inch x 130mm 2 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1inch x 28mm 0 1
314. ecified program when the input condition is not met Program name e Executes link refresh and general data processing e Indexes each of the devices used in the device qualification ladder Ladder indexing e Stores the qualification value for indexing at to IXEND to the devices starting from the one specified at D Jha ser eo Designation of qualification value App 24 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 7 Table operation instructions D Pointer Pointer 1 O FiewP S oH Pointer 1 device S Pointer 1 D So gt me o Table processing FPOR P S D S Pointer 1 D aaa id Designated by n 8 Buffer memory access instructions FROM n1 n2 D n3H Reads data in 16 bit units from special function modules Data read DFRO nt n2 D n3 e Reads data in 32 bit units from special function modules ntinz S n3i Writes data in 16 bit units to special function modules Data write pro P nt in2 S n3 4 Writes data in 32 bit units to special function modules App 25 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 9 Display instructions When SM701 is OFF e Outputs ASCII codes in the 8 points of devices 16 characters PR SUD starting from the one specified at S to an output module When SM701 is ON e Outputs ASCII codes in the devices starting from the one specified at ASCII print 7 S and ending at 00H to an output module e Converts
315. ect switch of the memory card is ON The designated device memory cannot be accessed Data cannot be written to the designated file because its attribute is read only An error occurred when writing data to the designated drive memory An error occurred when deleting data from the designated drive memory Message Displayed at Peripheral Device The unit does not exist The of devices is too large The corresponding unit is faulty The unit does not exist The corresponding unit is faulty Data error Device No is not in 16 units Cannot execute as the memory protect switch is ON Wrong ROM Write is prohibited Cannot write correctly in ROM Cannot erase ROM correctly App 135 MELSEC QnA Corrective Action Do not make requests which caused an error to the designated special function module Check the head address and number of accessed points and access within the actual ranges at the special function module Check if the designated special function module normally operates Check the head I O No of the designated special function module Check if there is a fault in the hardware of the special function module or other modules Make settings for the simulation Check the head number and number of device points and then modify them to 16 point units Turn the write protect switch of the memory card OFF Check the following and take corrective action e
316. ected at the parameters or by the S Status SD650 Comment drive number QCDSET instruction change e Stores the comment file name with extension selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code SD656 SD666 Comment file name Boot operation designation file Comment file name Boot designation file drive number File name of boot designation file SD651 SD652 SD653 SD654 SD655 SD656 e Stores the drive number where the boot designation file stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 8th character 1st character of the extension 5th character 7th character 2EH 3rd character of the extension 2nd character of the extension e Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT SD661 SD662 SD663 SD664 SD665 SD666 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2nd character 4th character 6th character 1st character 3rd character 5th character 8th character 7th character 1st character of the extension 2EH 3rd character of the extension 2nd character of the extension App 89 S Status change QBT is being S Initial i APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 6 Instruction Related Registers Table App 3 8 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e During bloc
317. ectrostatic discharge immunity 1 EN61000 4 3 Radiated radio frequency electromagnetic field immunity a EN61000 4 4 Electrical fast transient burst immunity A EN61000 4 5 Surge immunity a EN61000 4 6 Immunity to conducted disturbances induced by radio frequency fields a EN61000 4 8 Power frequency magnetic field immunity a EN61000 4 11 Voltage dips and interruption immunity k Immunity test in which electrostatic is applied to the cabinet of the equipment Immunity test in which electric fields are irradiated to the product Immunity test in which burst noise is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which lightning surge is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which high frequency noise is applied to the power line and signal line Immunity test in which the product is installed in inductive magnetic field Immunity test in which power supply voltage is momentarily interrupted MELSEC QnA e 8kV Air discharge e 4kV Contact discharge 80 AM modulation 1kHz e 80M 1000MHz 10V m e 1 4G 2 0GHz 3V m e 2 0G 2 7GHz 1V m e AC DC main power I O power AC I O unshielded 2kV e DC I O analog communication 1kV e AC power line AC I O power AC O unshielded 2kV CM 1kV DM e DC power line DC I O power 0 5kV CM DM e DC I O AC I O shielded analog communication 1kV CM 0 15M 80MHz 80 AM modulation 1kHz
318. ed number of bytes in no protocol mode Data send up to the OOH code in no protocol mode App 42 APPENDICES AJ71PT32 S3 control instruction Key input from operation box Data send for the specified number of bytes in PRN no protocol mode Data send up to the OOH code in no protocol mode Data receive in no protocol mode INPUT Communications with remote terminal MINI MINIEND modules Error reset for remote terminal module MINIERR Communications status read SPBUSY Communication processing forced interruption SPCLR App 43 APPENDICES Display mode setting CMODE Cursor display CON1 CON2 Cursor erase COFF Cursor position setting LOCATE Forward reverse rotation specification for CNOR CREV characters Forward reverse rotation switching for CRDSP SRDSPV characters Character display color specification COLOR Character color change CCDSP CCDSPV ASCII character display PR PRN AD75 control instruction ASCII character write to VRAM PRV PRNV Character display EPR EPRN Character write to VRAM EPRV EPRNV Concatenated display of same character CR1 CR2 CC1 CC2 minus display CINMP hyphen display CINHP period decimal point display CINPT Numeric character display CINO to CIN9 Alphabet character display CINA to CINZ Space display CINSP Specified column clear display CINCLR ASCII code conversion of specified character INPUT strings VRAM data read
319. ed to QnA serial communication modules have been realised processing speed up by six times compared to AnNUCPU The processing speed of the existing special function modules for ACPU use is about the same as that when using AnUCPU d A high speed access base unit A1S38HB A1S38HBEV is available to speed up the processing time for accessing special function modules such as network modules and serial communication modules that handle large quantities of data Simply by mounting the special function module on the high speed access base unit the access processing speed is increased when the Q2ASCPU accesses the special function module 2 OVERVIEW 3 Selection of program execution type that is appropriate for the control has been realised There are four program execution types to be selected as follows a Initial execution type This program type is executed once only when the Q2ASCPU is set to RUN b Scan execution type This program type is run continually while the Q2ASCPU is in the RUN status This is equivalent to a conventional program that runs from step 0 to END instruction It is possible to create subroutine programs and interrupt programs for this type of program c Low speed execution type This is a program type which is executed only during the surplus constant scan time process to preset the program execution time for constant scan time or during the set execution time of the low speed execution program d Stand
320. eds the file range The same file has already existed The capacity of the designated file is not secured The designated cluster No does not exist The request contents cannot be performed with the designated drive memory The request contents cannot be currently performed The designated device name cannot be handled The designated device No is out of range A mistake in the designated device qualification The designated device is for system use and cannot be written to Message Displayed at Peripheral Device The target dirve contains a fault The file name does not exist Cannot access files This file cannot be handled Alert 1 is displayed Keyword doesn t match File capacity is not enough Alert 2 is displayed File capacity is not enough Cannot access files Cannot access files Cannot access files Device is invalid Device No is out of range Device is invalid Device is invalid App 134 MELSEC QnA Corrective Action Check the status of the designated drive memory Check the designated file name and file No Delete the file and create a new one Do not access the designated file Forcibly perform the request Or perform the request again after other processing has completed Access by designating the keyword set for the target drive memory Check the designated range and access within the permissible range Forcibl
321. eeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeess 20 11 20 1 8 Power line for external power Supply terminal ccccccsecceseeeeeeeceeeeaeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeees 20 12 A 14 20 1 9 Installation environment of the CC Link LT module and the AS i module 20 12 20 2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives ccccceccceeceseeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeseees 20 13 20 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC QnA series programmable controller c 0cceeeeee 20 13 20 2 2 Precautions when using the QnA series programmable controller cccccccseeeeeeeees 20 13 202o TOWER SUD IV cirein te cian tthe a betas as Lelie tal So ie gee ketal tte 20 14 20 2A COMMON DANG cies alec R leeks ast a ascii e eran ala a a ails A a stan 20 15 20 2 9 Mod le IMSCANAU ON eeu etreicasioeterauioeuelrne iulaee ae ea 20 16 ZV GrOUNdN O ae eena a cece ect scenes ee eee Gee ae ee 20 16 ZOZeT EXENA os ces alin ate cadence idtle Hat allan uate hades E eaten 20 16 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 21 1to21 16 ZiT MD A MSS CUOM pees eee ste ate ate eae die ein end eat oc eae ape EE A ted tae a ett alata 21 1 21 2 TH CHOGICMAS DC CUO Meg nino e E EE E 21 2 213 BeN IRCDIACEIMCIN iieri nA a a a A e a 21 3 21s9A1 Bane Gasaren a T a aauieaias 21 5 21 3 2 Battery replacement procedure ccccecccceccceeecesecceeceueceusecaeeceueceueesauessueseueesaeessueseaeess 21 11 21 4 When Reoperating a programmable contr
322. efer to the following manuals e Networks Manual of the corresponding network module e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC App 72 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 1 Diagnostic Information Table App 3 2 Special register Corres Explanation Set by ponding Corresponding When Set ACPU CPU D9000 D9008 S Error format QnA Diagnostic Diagnosis error e Error codes for errors found by diagnosis are stored as BIN data errors code e Contents identical to latest fault history information change e Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code o b15 to b8b7 to bO Example October 1995 QnA Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 H9510 e Thed dh that SDO dated is stored as BCD 2 digit code Clock time for Clock time for e day and hour tha was up i igi SD2 diagnosis error diagnosis error b15 to b8b7 to bO Example 10 a m on 25th S Error New QnA OCCUENCE OCCUMENCE Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 H2510 e The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code SDa b15 to b8 b7 to bO Example 35 min 48 sec QnA Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 H3548 Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here The category code for judging the the er
323. emory Card BCROM gt Cance lt N Space zSelect EscezCiose The following shows an explanation of each item in the screen a Password When a password is registered in the CPU module input the registered password so that file operations are executed When an incorrect password is input file operations are not performed b Operation 1 Change Register a new password in the CPU module Or if the password matches change the password a Read Write and Display Protect File names in the designated memory cannot be displayed or written to b Write Protect Files in the designated memory cannot be written to Read is possible 2 Cancel Password If the password matches the registered password is deleted from the CPU module 3 None The current password is recorded in the GPP function only and is not registered at the CPU module 4 Change Attribute File read write display or write can be prohibited in file units Operation possible even if no entry code is registered c Memory Designate the memory for which the password is to be registered 9 12 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 1 Password registration is valid for parameter files and program files only Invalid for other file types Other file types can be protected by changing attributes for each file 2 The keyword registered in the CPU module cannot be read from the CPU module If you forget the password CPU module file
324. en The following shows a setting example for 1 Execute Trace amp Display Status Execute Trace amp Display Status 1 vperat on r SmpIr state gt egister Start 2 gt Suspension Total i i Displayed only 3 AftTrig OTi GTi when Display 4 gt Trigger Execution Status is Trace Not Execute selected Sampling Trace Data i File to Saue 1 gt Select From List 2 gt File Shown Right Drive 1 File Name SAMPLEVB Trace Condition 1 gt Quverwrite Conditions onto CPU s 2 Use Condition in GPU Execute cY gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close The following shows an explanation of the screen above The following settings can be made for Execute Trace amp Display Status 1 Operation 2 Sampling Trace Data and 3 Trace Condition a Operation Select one of the following 1 Register Start The trace is registered and started The trace count is started 2 Suspension The trace is suspended The trace count and the count are cleared after the trigger To restart the trace select Register Start again 3 Display Status The trace statuses are displayed on the same screen 4 Trigger Execution The count is started after the trigger The trace is ended on reaching the designated count after the trigger b Sampling Trace Data Select one of the following 1 Select From List Data from among the sampling trace files in the memo
325. ension 3 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Pattern 4 SD12 Block No SD13 Step No transition condition SD14 Sequence step No L SD9 SD15 Sequence step No H 4 Contents of pattern data 15 14 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number o o to o o E g Not used SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SD10 Error common Error common SFC step designation present information information 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 5 Reason s for system switching SD11 Number Meaning _ System switching condition SD5 0 automatic system switching 1 manual system switching System switching direction O standby system to control system SD12 1 control system to standby system Tracking flag 5 SD14 5 Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number ojo to o o x Not used i ps Initial work data invalid 0 valid 1 System data aR SFC active step information invalid 0 valid 1 System switching condition invalid 0 valid 1 App 75 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 2 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e Individual information corresponding to error codes SDO is stored here e There are the following seven different types of information are
326. ent consumption _ Points points Product Name Model Name Description lio Wesionment an Remark Module Type A1SY10 16 output relay contact output module 2A 16 16 outputs crs A1SY10EU 16 output relay contact output module 2A 16 outputs CAA A1SY14EU 12 output relay contact output module 2A 16 outputs ts Rel tact output le 2A f A1SY18A T PONESE O E OIN ACE P E ER 16 outputs 0 24 0 075 independent contact ints Rel tact output module 2A f Mave T OE ee ere 16 outputs 0 24 0 075 independent contact 200VAC A1SY22 16 points triac output module 0 6A 16 outputs 0 27 0 002 ints tri tput module 1A A1SY28A POUN AE CARA 16 outputs 0 13 all points independent 16 output 12 24VDC transistor output module A1SY4 16 output 0 27 0 008 16 output 12 24VDC transistor output module A1SY40P 16 output 0 08 0 011 32 output 12 24VDC transistor output module A1SY41 32 output 0 50 0 008 2 output 12 24VDC t ist tput modul A1SY41P SO ee eee a Hi UCane 32 outputs 014 0 012 Output module 0 1A sink type 64 output 12 24VDC transistor output module A1SY42 64 output 0 93 0 008 16 output 12 24VDC transistor output module A1SY50 16 outputs 0 12 1 ints 24VDC t ist tput modul A1SY60 Ral A a TOEO 16 outputs 0 12 0 015 2A sink type 1 ints 5 12 24VDC t ist tput A1SY60E 6 points 5 12 C transistor output module 16 outputs 0 20 0 01 2A source type 8 points 5 12 24 48VDC A1SY68A transistor output module sink source type 16 o
327. er 13 Section 14 3 Section 15 1 Section 15 3 Section 16 1 Section 16 2 Section 17 2 Section 17 3 Section 19 1 Section 22 3 2 Appendix 3 Dec 2003 SH NA 3599 D Additional model A1SY42P Addition Appendix 9 9 1 9 2 Partial correction Section 3 3 1 Section 14 3 Section 18 3 Section 19 4 1 Section 19 8 Section 20 1 4 Section 21 3 Oct 2006 SH NA 3599 E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 1 Section 1 2 Section 2 1 3 1 1 Section 3 1 2 Section 3 3 1 Section 3 3 2 Chapter 4 Section 5 3 Section 7 1 Section 7 2 Section 8 1 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 3 Section 8 4 3 Section 8 6 Section 8 8 Section 8 9 Section 8 10 1 Section 9 3 Section 9 4 Section 10 1 Section 10 5 Section 10 6 3 Section 10 8 Section 12 1 Section 12 1 3 Section 12 1 5 Section 12 4 Chapter 13 Section 14 2 Section 15 1 Section 15 3 Section 16 1 1 Section 16 2 Section 16 3 Section 17 1 Section 17 2 Section 17 3 Section 17 5 Section 18 1 Section 18 2 Section 18 3 Section 19 1 Section 19 4 1 Section 19 4 2 Section 19 5 Section 19 6 Section 19 7 Section 19 7 1 Section 19 7 2 20 Section 20 2 4 Section 20 2 6 Section 21 2 Section 21 3 Section 21 4 Section 21 5 Section 22 2 5 Section 22 2 6 Section 22 2 8 Section 22 3 3 Section 22 5 2 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1 6 Appendix 2 Appendix 3 Appendix 4 1 Appendix 4 2 Appendix 5 1 Appendix 5 2 Section 14 2 Section 14 3 Section 14 2 Print Date Menuai Number Apr 200
328. er and lower limits set at S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 and stores it to the word device specified at D 1 D When S3 1 S3 lt S1 1 S1 _DLIMIT P S1 S2 S3 D The value at S1 1 S1 is stored to D 1 D When 1 1 S1 lt S3 1 S3 lt S2 1 S2 The value at S3 1 S3 is stored to D 1 D When S2 S2 1 lt S3 S3 1 The value at S2 1 S2 is stored to D 1 D Upper lower limit control e Taking the area set by S1 and S2 as the dead band if the input value specified at S3 is within the dead band 0 is stored to the word device specified at D and if it is outside the dead band the BAND P S1 S2 S3 D value obtained by subtracting the dead band upper lower limit value from the input value is stored to the word device specified at D When 1 lt S3 lt S2 0 D When 3 lt S1 When S3 gt S2 e Taking the area set by S1 1 S1 and S2 1 S2 as the dead band if the input value specified at S3 1 S3 is within the dead band 0 is stored to the word device specified at D and if it is outside the dead band the value obtained by subtracting the dead band upper lower limit value from the input value is stored to the word device DBAND P S1 S2 53 D specified at D When S1 1 S1 lt S3 1 S3 lt S2 1 S2 Dead zone control When S3 1 3 lt S1 1 S1 S3 1 S3 S1 1 1 D 1 D When S3 1 3 gt S2 1 S2 S3 1 S3 S2 1 2 D 1 D App
329. er supply for output load is turned off or disconnected Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No For Remote I O network Network No Station No e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e Always I O INT ERROR An interruption has occurred although there is no interrupt module Collateral informationnmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e During interrupt SP UNIT DOWN When PLC parameter I O allocation was being made there was no return signal from the special function module during initial processing stage When error is generated the head I O number of the special function module that corresponds to the common information is stored Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative e Check ERR LED of the output modules and replace the fuse of the module whose LED is lit Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 When a GOT is bus connected to the main base unit or exten
330. er to facilitate program reading Line statement 6 4 0 7 Y11 Upper limit error ON at ag a he VEVE a tl tl al tag a Na Lower limit error Pointer statement 3 1 Statements or notes are set on the Pointer statement Statement or Note screen displayed from the edit menu in the documentation mode of GPP function 1 File 2 PC 3 Find S Edit Window 8 Option Alt Menu Fi2 Help Document Statemnt CPU Q3A G S s AMP Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Level 1234567890123456 7896123456 78 9412345 6 7896123456 7890123456 78761234 i 2 The details of each comment are as follows a Statement Line statement A comment can be appended to a ladder block provided for individual function to explain the meaning and usage of the function b Pointer statement A comment can be appended to a pointer placed in the head of a subroutine or interrupt program to explain the meanng and usage of each program c Note A comment can be appended to individual ladder blocks to explain the meaning and usage of the function 11 7 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 11 7 Initial Device Value Comment Initial device value comments are assigned to initial device value files so that individual file contents can be figured out Initial device value comments are stored in an initial device value file They are set on the Device Initial Value Range screen displayed from the edit menu in
331. ered END 0 END END The programmable controller suspends the operation 2 gt Bas Fig 12 1 Operation Processing for Instantaneous Power Failure 2 When power failure longer than the allowable momentary power failure period occurred The Q2ASCPU starts from the first The operation processing is the same as that performed at programmable controller power up or at CPU module reset by the RUN STOP key switch 12 26 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 4 Data Clear Processing The Q2ASCPU clears data other than the following by turning the RUN STOP key switch to RESET or by resetting the programmable controller power ON OFF and ON a Data in the built in RAM except data specified for memory clear in the boot specification Local device data Fault history data For the boot specification refer to the QnNACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals h N b Data in the memory card c Data of latch specified devices Latch clear key enabled d Data of latch specified devices Latch clear key disabled e File register data Q Ner Data given in c and g are cleared by latch clear operation using the RUN STOP key switch Refer to Section 15 3 or by remote latch clear operation from GPP function Refer to Section 10 6 5 The latch range is specified for each device on the Device screen in the parameter mode of GPP function There are the following two latch rang
332. ered it is 3 2 Device ranges represents the number of registered range settings 3 These files can be transferred from the memory card to the built in RAM in the boot operation 4 The total number of setting ranges is the total number of types of the devices that are set as local devices 5 Decimal fraction of number of bit device points 16 is rounded up 14 3 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS MELSEC QnA Note that the capacity may be rounded up as follws depending on the memory area used for storage Built in RAM 4096 bytes 1k step units Memory card 512 bytes units Note that when a file is transferred from the memory card to the built in RAM in boot operation the reserved capacity is changed after transfer 14 4 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES 15 1 SPECIFICATIONS The general specification common to various modules is shown Specifications Operating ambient 0 to 55 C temperature Storage ambient 20 to 75 C temperature Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH No condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH No condensing Under 10 to 57Hz eon 10 times each intermittent denny in X Y Z Conforming to i a Vibration resistance JIS B 3502 eee 8710 150H2 sems aieeNone IEC 61131 2 vibration 57 to 8710 150H2 4 Aom 0 035mm Under 10 to 57Hz lt a 001inch continuous Shock resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61
333. erent from that of the actually mounted I O unit e The network class specified by a network parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network e The network refresh parameter of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 is out of the specified area Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR e The network module detected a network parameter error Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN e Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check the parameter item corresponding to the numerical value parameter No and correct it e If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings the possible cause is the memory errorm of the CPU module s built in RAM or program memory or the memory card Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Check whether the parameter file version is x QPA and check the file contents to be sure they are parameters e Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative e Check the network parameters and mounting status and if they differ match
334. erials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is noted at the lower left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Sep 1996 SH NA 3599 A First printing Feb 1999 SH NA 3599 B Additional model SW 1501 GPPW GPP Function Software Package for Windows Addition The contents of the function version B has been added Section 2 2 Section 7 2 Sections 8 2 1 8 2 2 Section 19 8 Appendix 7 8 Partial correction Safety Precautions Contents Section 1 2 Section 3 3 1 Chapter 4 Section 5 3 Section 6 1 Section 8 10 1 Section 15 2 Section 16 1 Section 19 7 1 Section 21 3 1 Appendix 1 6 Appendix 2 Dec 2002 SH NA 3599 C Equivalent to Japanese version D Partial correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 3 1 2 Section 3 3 1 Section 3 3 2 Section 3 3 3 Section 8 2 1 Section 8 5 Section 12 1 5 Section 12 1 6 Chapt
335. erminal 2 colors EL 640 x 400 dots A960GOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots A956GOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 256 colors TFT color 480 x 234 dots A956WGOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots A953GOT Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots When bus connected A951GOT 32 Special 32 points 0 22 Medium size graphic operation terminal 8 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome 320 x 240 dots 256 colors STN color 320 x 240 dots For RS 422 connected only A950GOT Large size graphic operation terminal 8 4 256 65536 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots When installing a multi color display board 65536 colors can be displayed GT1565 VTBA When bus 32 Special 32 points 0 12 RE ponis connected Large size graphic operation terminal 10 4 256 65536 colors TFT color 640 x 480 dots When installing a multi color display board 65536 colors can be displayed A1S32B 2 1 O modules can be installed Main Base Unit A1S33B 3 I O modules can be installed A1S35B 5 I O modules can be installed A1S38B 8 I O modules can be installed GT1575
336. erwise it may cause electric shocks fires malfunctions product deterioration or damage Install the module after inserting the pegs on the bottom of the module securely into the base unit peg holes Not doing so could cause a malfunction failure or fall Tightening the screw excessively may damage the screw and or the module resulting in a drop of the module a short circuit or malfunctions Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and or outputs Insert the memory card and fully press it to the memory card connector Check for incomplete connection after installing it Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions Be sure to shut off all the phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may damage the module Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage of the product Before energizing and operating the system after wiring be sure to attach the terminal cover supplied with the product Failure to do so may cause an electric shock
337. es Set by ponding Corresponding i i When Set ACPU SD340 No ot modules Indicates the number of mounted Ethernet module installed SD341 I O No e Indicates I O No of mounted Ethernet module SD342 eal Indicates network No of mounted Ethernet module SD343 e Indicates group No of mounted Ethernet module SD344 Station No e Indicates station No of mounted Ethernet module SD345 to IP address Indicates IP address of mounted Ethernet module SD346 Saw S Initial New QnA SD347 e Indicates error code of mounted Ethernet module Sere Information from to e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 3rd module SD361 Information of 1st module RAG Information from to Aid module e Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD354 SDan Information from to dhrmodae e Configuration is identical to that for the first module SD368 b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1b0 Instruction reception status of channel 1 Instruction reception status of channel 2 Instruction reception status of channel 3 Instruction reception status of channel 4 Instruction reception status of channel 5 Instruction reception status of channel 6 Instruction reception status of channel 7 Instruction reception status of channel 8 ON Received Channel is being used OFF Not received Channel is not used Ethernet Instruction SD380 instruction reception status of reception status 1st module QnA S I
338. es e Mode in which programmable controller operation is stopped When an error is detected operation is stopped immediately and all outputs Y are turned OFF e Mode in which programmable controller operation is continued When an error is detected only the program part affected by the error is not executed the rest of the program is executed In addition settings can be made in PC RAS setting in the parameter mode to continue operation or stop operation when the following errors occur 1 Calculation including SFC programs 2 Extended Ins 3 Fuse Blown 4 I O Unit Compare 5 Sp Unit Access 6 IC Card Access 7 IC Card Operate The default for all of these in the parameters is Pause Example If Resume is set for I O module verify error operation is continued using I O address before error occurrence When an error is detected a record of the error occurrence is stored in the special relays SMO SM1 and the error contents are stored in a special register SDO Use these special relays and this special register in the sequence program to establish programmable controller or mechanical system interlocks 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 5 It is possible to select whether or not the following checks are performed by setting Yes No for error check in PC RAS setting in the parameter mode 1 Battery Check 2 Fuse Blown Check 3 The default for all of these in the parameter settings is Yes If No is
339. es Drive L Drive 3 Use the Following Files Pile I Drive J File Execute c gt Gance L ND Space Select Esc Close The setting details are as follows 1 Not Used No setting is made for the comment file to be used To use the comment file use the QCDSET instruction For details on the QCDSET instruction refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions 2 Program Name is Used Use the comment file with the same file name as the program that exists in the specified drive and is currently being executed When the program is changed the comment file is also changed 3 Using the designated device comment file Use the name of the file that is stored in the drive specified by the parameter POINT 1 When using the QCDSET instruction note the following points a When the above 1 or 2 has been set the file set with the QCDSET instruction is valid for all program files b When 3 is set the file set with the QCDSET instruction is valid only for the program file for which the QCDSET instruction is executed 2 Even if the file set with the parameter does not exist in the specified drive no CPU module error is generated Since no file exists however the CPU module does not display any comments 11 6 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU MELSEC QnA 11 6 Statements Notes Statements and notes are assigned to each program step or to P or pointers in ord
340. es a transient request interval such as a monitor a test and a program read write The access interval via cyclic communication from a network module or a data link module is not stored 10 24 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU 11 1 Function List The Q2ASCPU can store various types of comments This has improved the CPU module operability allowing users other than programmers to read programs easily The types of comments that can be stored in the Q2ASCPU are listed in the table below Device comment Section 11 5 Assigning comments to each program step number or P or Statements notes panier Section 11 6 i Initial device value NEIN Pe Assigning a comment to the initial device value file Section 11 7 comment For details on the setting method for each function refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or SWLIIVD GPPQ Operating Manual Offline 11 1 11 COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 11 2 PLC name PLC name appends a comment to a CPU module to make it easier to confirm the CPU module when accessing the Q2ASCPU by GPP function Two types of PLC names can be set labels and comments The settings are made on the Define PC name screen in the parameter mode of GPP function Define PC Name 1 Label SYSTEM 2 Comment SYSTEM No 1 Execute c gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close The setting details are in
341. es the number of points currently set for M devices assigned for M Number of points e Stores the number of points currently set for L devices assigned for L Number of points l e Stores the number of points currently set for B devices assigned for B SD295 SD296 Number otpoinis e Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices Device assigned for SB p y S Initial e Stores the number of points currently set Mumbar or poini e Stores the number of points currently set for F devices assigned for F assigninent Number of points SD297 Same as P e Stores the number of points currently set for V devices assigned for V parameter SD298 contents RUMORE on ponis e Stores the number of points currently set for S devices assigned for S SD299 SD300 SD301 SD302 SD303 SD304 ates or e Stores the number of points currently set for T device assigned for T Number of points l e Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices assigned for ST Number of points l e Stores the number of points currently set for C devices assigned for C Number of points e Stores the number of points currently set for D devices assigned for D Number of points l e Stores the number of points currently set for W devices assigned for W Number of points i Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices assigned for SW App 83 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 4 Special register Corr
342. escribed in Section 8 2 Monitor condition setup in Monitor Function Device Current Value 1 gt Word Device 2 Bit Device 2 amp 2 Trigger Pt Setting 2 Step I lt Always gt Executec gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close 4 Added Trace Information Set information to be added at each trace Select one or multiple item s of the following Making no selection is possible a Time The time at which the trace was executed Is stored b Step No The step number at which the trace was executed is stored Cc Program Name The program name for which the trace was executed is stored 2 Write the set trace device and trace condition to the memory card a Set the trace file and storage destination Set the drive number and file name at 1 Execute Trace amp Display Status on the Sampling Trace screen Execute Trace amp Displa 2 Sampling Trace Data File to Save 1 gt Select From List 2 gt File Shown Right Drive 1 as File Name SAMPLES b Write the trace file to the memory card Write the trace file to the memory card by using 9 Write to PC Condition on the Sampling Trace screen Since file names are used when writing to the memory card multiple trace files can be written 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 3 Execute the sampling trace Execute the sampling trace by using 1 Execute Trace amp Display Status on Sampling Trace scre
343. esolve the cause of the error then execute the LEDR instruction Eliminate the cause of the error then reset the error using special relay SM50 and special register SD50 Restricted to error which do not stop operation Operate the special relay SM202 and special register SD202 to turn off the LED Valid x Not valid Explanation of special relays and special registers SM50 When turning OFF ON resets the error corresponding to the error code stored in SD50 SD50 Stores the error code of the error to be reset For details on error codes refer to Section 22 3 3 SM202 When turning OFF gt ON turns OFF the LEDs corresponding to each of the bits of SD202 SD202 Designates the LED to be turned OFF The LEDs that can be turned OFF are the USER LED and the BOOT LED only 15 bit 8 4 O bit so r ide Ll ft BOOT LED USER LED A bit setting of 1 indicates that the bit is to be turned OFF 0 indicates that it is not to be turned OFF The following shows the setting possibilities all hexadecimal notation To turn both LEDs OFF SD202 1104 To turn only the BOOT LED OFF SD202 100H To turn only the USER LED OFF SD202 10H Method for stopping ERROR LED USER LED and BAT ALARM LED indications ERROR LED USER LED and BAT ALARM LED have the same priority order as described for LED indications in Section 9 8 2 If an error item number is deleted f
344. et with parameters in the program setting 12 21 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 12 1 5 Initial processing Initial processing is the pre processing for executing sequence operations The QnACPU executes it only once in the case of the CPU module status described in the following table Once the initial processing is completed the CPU module is placed into the operation status set by the RUN STOP switch Satusofthe CPU modue of the CPU module erm STOP RUN At Power ON At RESET Status 1 Initialization tization of VO module I O module Initialization ieee devices outside latched range Bit device OFF Word device 0 Setting MELSECNET 10 network info and MELSECNET II B x data link info Executed x Not executed Indicates the case that the CPU enters RUN status without being reset after changing a parameter or program in STOP status The RUN STOP key switch is operated as follows STOP RUN gt RUN LED is flickering STOP RUN Note that the instructions for conversion into pulse PLS OP may not function properly since the previous information may not be retained depending on the program change write during RUN in STOP status or write to PLC 12 1 6 Refresh processing of I O module Refresh processing of I O modules is executed Refer to the QnNACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 12 22 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU
345. evices refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions The instructions devices and comments etc indicated below may require modification in each mode after conversion Appendix 4 1 Instructions Instruction after A QnA An OCPU Instruction l Corrective Action Conversion Modify the instruction to a BMOV instruction BMOVR instruction Program example LEDA BMOVR OUT SM1255 LEDC D10 LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDC D100 SUB K10 OUT SM1255 LEDR LEDR BMOV ZR100 ZR1000 K10 Modify the instruction to a BXCH instruction BXCHR instruction Program example LEDA BXCHR OUT SM1255 LEDC D10 LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDC D100 SUB K10 OUT SM1255 LEDR LEDR BXCH ZR100 ZR1000 K10 Since the Q2ASCPU does not have the main subsequence program system it has no CHG instructions Delete OUT SM1255 CHG instruction OUT SM1255 as it is not necessary Modify the main subsequence program after conversion and set new parameters Refer to Appendix 4 5 CHK instruction Program example Refer to Appendix 4 12 CHK M10 X100 CLC instruction Modify the instruction to SM700 Program example special relay for carry flag CLC RST SM1012 RST SM700 App 110 APPENDICES Instruction after A gt QnA AnCLICPU Instruction Corrective Action Conversion AnA AnUCPU dedicated instruction Refer to Appendix 4 12 IX instruction OUT SM1255 LEDA instruction Modify the instruction to an LED excluding dedicated instruct
346. execution time for low speed execution type programs is displayed here 4 Wait for Con When constant scan is set the constant scan waiting time is displayed here However if an execution time for low speed execution type programs is also set 0 000 ms is displayed 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION c Program Status The times set in 9 Auxilliary Setting in the parameter mode are displayed here 1 Program The program names are displayed here in the order that the parameters are set 2 Exec The types of the programs set in the parameters are displayed here 3 Scan Time The actual scan times current values are displayed here In the program stop stand by status 0 000ms is displayed as the scan time 4 Ex Times The number of execution times is displayed here taking the point at which measurement was started to be 0 in the count When reaching the maximum times of 65536 the count returns to 0 The number of execution times is retained even when program execution is stopped When the subroutine program interrupt program of the stand by program is performed in the subroutine call interrupt request the number of the stand by program is not counted 3 Both start _F1 and stop F2 of the program can be performed on Program monitor list screen a Start of program F1 Either Scan execution or Low speed execution can be set for the stand by program When the key is pressed the window below is disp
347. explain the symbol mark in the manuals of the products 1 Printing the symbol mark To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shownon the previous page on the batteries devices or their packaging 2 Explaining the symbol mark in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU countries on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol mark If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol mark are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol mark to each manual of the devices e The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive App 165 MELSEC QnA INDEX A Circuit Accessing File Register R with Instructions Fail Safe Circuit cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 19 4 19 5 EE PPI E AE A E ntemieeels App 131 System design circuit example 19 2 Accuracy of scan time 12 6 12 8 12 14 Clearing file register ccccseecsseeeeeeeeees 12 27 Additional Functions of Q2ASCPU 2 5 Clock data read ccccceceeecceeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeaees 10 10 Allowable period of momentary power failure 4 3 Glock FUN CU GIN s
348. external power supply prior to the programmable controller may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction For the operation status of each station at a communication error in data link refer to the respective data link manual Otherwise incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident When controlling a running programmable controller data modification by connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or a PC to a special function module create an interlock circuit on sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time Also before performing any other controls e g program modification operating status change status control read the manual carefully and ensure the safety In these controls especially the one from an external device to a programmable controller in a remote location some programmable controller side problem may not be resolved immediately due to failure of data communications To prevent this create an interlock circuit on sequence programs and establish corrective procedures for communication failure between the external device and the programmable controller CPU When setting up the system do not allow any empty slot on the base unit If any slot is left empty be sure to use a blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 for it When using the extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 attach the included dustproof cover to the module in slot
349. f predetermined User timing clock Scan M9021 SM1021 h e When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock n2 scan n2 scan starts with off M9022 SM1022 po ee nming clock erara Set the intervals of on off by DUTY instruction User timing clock MARGAM DUTY SM1020 M9023 SM1023 No 3 a n1 ON scan interval M9024 SM1024 po User timing clock n2 OFF scan interval No 4 Cock dase OFF Ignored e Writes the clock data stored in SD1025 to SD1028 to the M9025 SM1025 nee ON _ Set request present CPU module after the END instruction is executed in the Q used scan in which SM1025 turned from OFF to ON FF N M9026 SM1026 pe Clock data error et Switched on by clock data SD1025 to D1028 error OFF lanored e Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month Q3A M9027 SM1027 Clock data display ON i Ey day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU Q4A Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when M902 M102 module front LED display Q4AR e The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests accepted Batch processing OFF Batch processing not during one scan in the END processing of that scan M9029 SM1029 x of data E conducted e The batch processing of the data communication requests communications ON _ Batch processing can be turned on and off during running requests conducted e The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END p
350. f the CPU module goes off and the ERROR LED flickers c SM1 turns ON and the error code is stored in SDO REMARK The watchdog timer can be reset by a WDT instruction in the sequence program However the scan time value is not reset and scan time is measured up to the END instruction An error occurs within Oms to 10ms in the measured time for watchdog timer 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 9 3 Self diagnostics Function The self diagnosis function is a function whereby the Q2ASCPU diagnoses its own errors 1 The self diagnosis function serves to prevent malfunctions of the programmable controller and to facilitate preventive maintenance Self diagnositics processing is executed if an error occurs at QnACPU power ON or while the programmable controller is in the RUN status and it involves the display of the error detected by the self diagnostics function stopping of programmable controller operation etc The Q2ASCPU stores the error code of the error in the special register SDO and turns on the ERROR LED and displays a message lf several errors occur the error code of the latest error is stored in SDO Even if the programmable controller power is turned OFF the latest 16 errors are recorded with the battery backup Refer to 9 467 The PLC diagnostics mode of the GPP function can check error histories When an error is detected by self diagnosis CPU module operation complies with one of the following two mod
351. fault is 16 points Example When the points occupied by empty slot is set to 0 points Assign 0 point to three vacant slots A1S35B 4 De eee worth 48 points of A1S35B 2 2 2 2 i o E E E E oi a 3 055 SB e i i 50 a a ajl a a EIE n Dd o o ro Oo 04 D D A TS k TS aQ oN i Q l ee me 5l ae ae 5l es ee O A Q es 2 2 I oy O sS s 5 5 I I O O l I tents Lael X010 X020 X030 X040 to to to to X01F X02F X03F X04F A1S65B 8 gt amp a O fa 2o 2 a 275l 0 o sels s zE 8 8 aE AET X050 X060 to to O number continue from the last XOSF X06F main base s I O number b I O assignment settings Set the I O assignment per slot of main base unit or extenstion base unit to each module type Make this setting in the I O Assign screen in the parameter mode I O allocation Label Basic Power Supply Extension cable Y A A AA AAAA AAA A A AAA A VVVV VV VV VYY YYVWVV VV Extention 1 f Power Supply Extension Cable Y YV V VV VV V WV lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt kd PgUp Prev PgDn Next Esc Close 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC QnA The setting details are as follows Setting Setting range Default value Set data for each slot Not necessary to set all dat
352. fer to the User s Manual of the CPU module used App 76 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 Extensions are shown below Table App 3 3 Extension name File Type e Sequence program Tm am ae ow ere sin m oD Device comment C sm m a Tina device value sin m s oR Fereg OOOO O App 77 APPENDICES Battery low latch Battery low AC DC DOWN detection MINI link errors Number of module with blown fuse I O module verify error number Error number that performs error rese Bit pattern indicating where battery voltage drop occurred Bit pattern indicating where battery voltage drop occurred Number of times for AC DC DOWN detection Error detection state Number of module with blown fuse I O module verify error module number Table App 3 2 Special register Corres ponding ACPU Set by Explanati xplanation When Set e Stores error number that performs error reset e All corresponding bits go 1 ON when battery voltage drops e Subsequently these remain 1 ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 gt CPU error gt Memory card A alarm gt Memory card A error Memory card B alarm
353. fferent from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first I O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in IO mod le jO moduieventy hexadecimal Storing method is the same as that of SD1000 D9002 SD1002 To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor QnA verify error error module number operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 I O module verify check is executed also to the modules of remote I O terminals Corresponding Special CPU e When fuse blown modules are detected the first I O number of the lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations Number of module Pase bawn with blown fuse e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow occurred AJ02 I O module Extension base unit Base unit Stored slot No data 0 1 Number of module PURDON with blown fuse 2 QnA 3 b15 to b8 b7 to 8th 7th 6th Sth 1st at Tin th oth 4th 3rdi2nd
354. fied Time 16I ms Interrupt Status lt Inhibit gt Refresh lt Successively gt Execute CY Cance 1 N gt Space Select FEsc Glose Grd C a 1 The following shows the devices that can be set 1 Bit device X FX DX Y FY DY M L F SM V B SB T Contact T Coil ST Contact ST Coil C Contact C Coil JO X JO Y JO B JO SB BLO S 2 Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JOW JO SW 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A c Setting the execution operation Set the scan time interrupt status and refresh at 3 Option on Partial Run screen l Scan Time 1 gt Real time 2 gt Specified Time 18lms Interrupt Status lt Inhibit gt Refresh lt Successively gt Multiple setting can be made The following shows all settings Description Designates whether QnACPU executes the scan time by the actual time or by Scan time the designated time Default designated time 10ms Designates whether or not interrupts are prohibited during execution Interrupt status Default Inhibit Designates whether QnACPU executes I O refresh whenever program Refresh execution is stopped due to satisfaction of a condition or executes only at END processing Default Successively 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 7 3 Skip function Skip execution or partial execution of a program whereby the program
355. fuses have blown Timer setting valve and the F number at time out App Corresponding CPU QnA e Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 e Setting range 1 s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 e Setting unit 1 s e Default value 10 s If O has been set default 10 s is applied e For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package e Stores the first two digits of the head I O number of the I O module which will be dismounted mounted online with power on in BIN value Example Input module X2F0 H2F e Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output module numbers when parameter setting has been performed b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b Indicates fuse blow For a module whose number of output points exceeds 16 points all bits corresponding to output module numbers within the number of output points occupied by the module in increments of 16 points turn on Example When a 64 point module is mounted on the slot 0 bO to b3 turn on when the fuse has blown Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module of remote O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program Set the value of the step transition monitoring timer and the annu
356. g shows setting examples Status Latch Device First Device Last Device Applicable devices 1 Bit device X Y M L F SM V B SB T Contact T Coil C Contact C Coil ST Contact ST Coil JO X JONY JO B JO SB BLO S 2 Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD W SW R ZR UO G JOW JO SW REMARK Up to 1000 device ranges can be set including both bit devices and word devices The devices listed above cannot be qualified 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION b Trigger Point Set the condition to execute the status latch Select one of the following 1 At Instruction Execution When executing SLT instruction 2 At Request of PDT When operating trigger using the peripheral devices capable of GPP function 3 Specify Detail Condition Set a device and step number The following shows setting examples The details on how to make the settings and trigger execution timing are the same as described in Section 8 2 1 Monitor condition setting in Monitor function Data collection timing In the case that only Device is specified data are collected when the trigger condition is satisfied In the case that Step No only is set data is collected with the END processing when the trigger condition is satisfied Trigger Pt Setting Device Current Value 1 Device 1 gt Word Device 2 gt Bit Device KG I lt t gt 2 Step L l lt Always Can
357. gnment error Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O assignment error Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O assignment error Local station and remote O station initial communications underway Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Local station and remote O station initial communications underway Local station and remote O station initial communications underway Local station and remote I O station error Local station and remote I O station error Local station and remote I O station error Local station and remote I O station error Table App 3 12 Special register Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 App Stores the local station numbers which contain mismatched MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU parameters or of remote station numbers for which incorrect I O a
358. graph the PID control status of the loop with the number specified at S1 on the display for the AD57 specified at n At the start of execution of PID control monitor static image elements of other than the bar graph and numerical data are displayed PID control status monitor by issuing the initial screen display request specified at S2 Specified loop l PIDSTOP Stops operation for the loop whose number is specified at n operation stop pe ey p p Specified loop l B PIDRUN Starts operation for the loop whose number is specified at n operation start PIDRUN n p p p Changes the operation parameters of the loop whose number is Specified loo i P specified at n to the data set in the devices starting from the one whose arameter change number is specified at S App 41 APPENDICES Appendix 1 6 1 Special Function Module Instructions Instructions compatible with all versions The following instructions can be used for modules with all versions AD61 S1 control instruction AD59 S1 control instruction AJ71C24 S3 S6 S8 control instruction AJ71021 S1 control instruction Preset data setting RVWR1 PVWR2 Set value data setting for larger smaller SVWR1 SVWR2 matched judgments PVRD1 PVRD2 Present value read Character outputting for the intended number to a printer Character outputting up to the OOH code to a printer Data write to memory card Data send for the specifi
359. he built in RAM In the monitor for other stations 15k steps maximum can be set in the system area and the corresponding file space for the user is reduced e Only one person can set the detailed conditions for monitoring 8 The detailed conditions for monitoring can only be set in ladder monitoring 9 If the same device is designated for both a monitor condition and monitor stop condition also designate the ON or OFF status 10 When the step number is specified for the monitor condition monitor conditions are not satisfied for no execution of the applicable step instruction as shown below e Applicable step instructions are skipped by CJ SCJ and JMP instructions e The applicable instruction is the END instruction and the FEND instruction exists in the program 11 Do not reset the CPU module while the monitor condition is registered 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 2 2 Monitor test of local device function version B or later With the parameter device setting the device set in the local device can be monitored and tested in the peripheral device This function allows debugging while checking details of the local device by peripheral devices To monitor the local device set the peripheral device to local device monitor The following fig is an example that monitoring the local device of program B with the CPU module which is executing programs A B and C CPU module Execution of program A gt B
360. he capacity of file register R is set by parameter It is therefore necessary to check the capacities of file registers before executing instructions that access file registers such as the MOV instruction and instruction App 131 APPENDICES APPENDIX 5 ERROR CODES RETURNED TO THE REQUEST SOURCE IN GENERAL DATA PROCESSING With the Q2ASCPU when an error occurs while general data processing is requested from a peripheral device a special function module or a network system the error code is returned to the source of the general data processing request Since this error code is not an error detected by the Q2ASCPU self diagnostics function it is not stored to special relay SDO If the request source is a peripheral device the message or the error code is displayed If the request source is a special function module or a network system the error code corresponding to the requested processing is returned Appendix 5 1 Error Codes The error code s numbers depends on the location where the error has been detected The correspondences between the locations where errors are detected and the error codes are indicated in the table below Location Where an Error is Error Code Reference for Error Contents Detected CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH App Appendix5 2 Appendix 5 2 Serial communication module e a Communication Module User s Manual 70004 to 7FFFH Control amp Communication Link System Master CC Link module BOOOH to B
361. he guaranteed value shown in the above table and SM951 is on 1 Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life 2 If the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed time perform ROM operation to protect data in case that the battery will be exhausted during power off of the programmable controller Or after SM51 turns on back up data within the backup power time 3 When the battery AGBAT is not connected to the CPU module its service life is five years 4 When the battery low special relay SM51 turns on immediately change the battery Even if an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating condition 21 6 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION VIF SEC QnA b Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 1 Table 21 4 shows battery lives when the Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU S1 of hardware version G or eariler are used For hardware versions refer to Section 15 2 Table 21 4 Battery lives when the Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU S1 of hardware version G or earlier are used Battery life EEEE nie Actual service value Reference After SM51 SM52 turns CPU module model value ON ratio 9 Guaranteed value Backup power time after ambient ambient 4 temperature 40 C temperature 25 C ata Q2ASHCPU 100 Q2ASHCPU S1 100 1 050 hours 0 1 years 1 500 hours 0 2 years 2 100 hours 0 2 years 43 800 hours 5 years 860 hours 0 1
362. hem B Bl rote pe2ee bxoar zor vase vase yore vere together 9 T m m E T E DII This also applies to output modules A1SX41 Basic A1SX41 A1S38B A1SX41 Power Supply A15X41 A1S61P A1SY41 Extension Cable A1iS 41 A1SY41 A1SY41 Extention 1 Power Supply Extension Cable i 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES This chapter explains the methods for reading data from a special function module and writing data to a special function module with the Q2ASCPU The special function module is a module that allows analog quantity high speed pulse etc which cannot be processed with I O module alone to be handled by the Q2ASCPU For example analog quantity is converted to a digital value by an analog digital converter module which is a special function module so that they can be used by the Q2ASCPU The special function module has buffer memory in which data input from external sources and data to be output to external destinations are stored The folloiwng two methods are available for reading data from a special function module and writing data to a special function module with the Q2ASCPU 1 Using the FROM TO instruction 2 Using special direct devices These methods are explained in the following sections 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES 6 1 Reading Writing Data from to the Q2ASCPU Using the FROM T
363. hen The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead wire is broken 5 The battery duration maximum life is 5 years 43 800 hours Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows 1 Replace the battery in four to five years even when it has not been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table 2 Replace the battery when it has been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table and SM51 is on 21 7 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC QnA 1 Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life 2 If the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed time perform ROM operation to protect data in case that the battery will be exhausted during power off of the programmable controller Or after SM51 turns on back up data within the backup power time 3 When the battery AGBAT is not connected to the CPU module its service life is five years 4 When the battery low special relay SM51 turns on immediately change the battery Even if an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the operating condition 2 Table 21 5 shows battery lives when the Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU S1 of hardware version H or later are used For hardware versions refer to Section 15 2 Table 21 5 Battery lives when the Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU S1 of hardware version H or later are used Battery life SB Weront
364. hen the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN position e Turned on when status latch is completed QnA Turned off by reset instruction OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P l set being requested OFF Other than when P set being requested ON P l set being requested e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete e Turned ON once when the P I set has been completed and then turned OFF again Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Other than when P set being requested P set being requested e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU App 61 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Corresponding CPU OFF Divided processing Relay Conversion Modification not underway ON During divided M9065 SM1065 SM711 Divided transfer status processing Transfer OFF Batch transfer e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 mone SMIOR SMTA ON _ Divided transfer A
365. hows an example of execution of the program list monitor when a constant scan time of 120ms is set Program List Monitor a lt Total Scan Time gt lt Program Status gt Pon time max scan Progran Exec Scan Tine Ex Tines 1 Scan 2hHms 126 006ms Init Slow b lt Time Details Sean gt Program END Proc Time Slow Prog Wait for Con ms 6 266ms 4 1806ms 6 16 ms 1466 1400 1466 57221 B s 126 006ms 4 366ms 119 76 ms 6 664ms 116 666ms 4 66Hims 112 266ms i 6 660ns i 0 666ns nD GO J OPT de Gao a al AKRRKRKRAKAAKKRAAR The following shows an explanation of the screen above a Total Scan Time The times set in 5 PC RAS Setting for monitor time and scan time total are displayed here for each program type 1 Mon Time The monitor times for scan execution type programs initial execution type programs and low speed execution type programs are displayed here If the scan time exceeds the time displayed here a watchdog timer error occurs at the CPU module 2 Max Scan The total time for the items listed under Time Details Scan is displayed here Time Details Scan The scan time details are displayed here 1 Program The total execution time of scan execution type programs is displayed here 2 END Proc Time The END processing time is displayed here 3 Slow Prog When an execution time for low speed execution type programs is set the total
366. ial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case e In the self loopback test of the serial communication module the serial communication module writes reads data automatically to make communication checks e Stores the number of empty blocks in the communication request registration area to the remote terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 master unit A2CCPU or A52GCPU QnA App 98 APPENDICES ACPU Special Register o o B D9091 SD1091 x Peon pel clagnoels e Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error code detailed error code D9094 SD1094 D251 D9100 D9101 D9102 D9103 D9104 D9105 D9106 D9107 D9108 D9109 D9110 D9111 D9112 D9113 D9114 Special Register after Conversion SD1100 SD1101 SD1102 SD1103 SD1104 SD1105 SD1106 SD1107 SD1108 SD1109 SD1110 SD1111 SD1112 SD1113 D1114 Special Register for Modification Register for setting time check value Number of special functions modules over Head I O number of I O module to be replaced Fuse blown module Step transfer monitoring timer setting MELSEC QnA Table App 3 11 Special register 1s to 65535 s Number of special functions modules over Head I O number of O module to be replaced Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules whose
367. ication is also conducted for remote I O station modules Instructi SM62 Annunciator detection H D e Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON a M9009 Detected pire e Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction SM80 CHK detection OFE 7 Mor deleeieg e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal SACHON ON Detected ihersaf r E SM51 Battery low latch SM53 S Error M9005 SM54 SM56 SM60 SM61 wn ol App 49 APPENDICES ee cee _ SM94 Startup of monitoring timer for step transition Enabled only when SM95 SFC program exists SM96 SM97 SM98 SM99 Table App 2 2 Special relay Corres Set by ponding When Set ACPU M90 00 Corresponds to SD90 Corresponds to SD91 Corresponds to SD92 Corresponds to SD93 Not started monitoring Corresponds ole WEN measuremem of timer reset to SD94 step transition monitoring timer is Started monitoring commenced e Resets step transition monitoring to SD95 timer when it goes OFF Corresponds to SD96 Corresponds to SD97 Corresponds to SD98 Corresponds to SD99 timer started App 50 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 2 System information Table App 2 3 Special relay Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 SS eee a sot feao ea res Nat PAUSE sinus Sse wo ona OFF PAUSE disabled e PAUSE status is entered if this relay is
368. idual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP gt RUN At writing to progurammable controller PARAMETER ERROR When Use the following file is selected for the file register in the PLC file setting of the PLC parameter dialog box the specified file does not exist although the file register capacity has been set Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset STOP RUN At writing to progurammable controller e Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check the parameter item corresponding to the numerical value parameter No and correct it Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU module reload the CPU power supply and or reset the module If the same error occurs it is thought to be a RUN hardware error Contact your local Mitsubishi Off representative ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check the parameter item corresponding to the numerical value parameter No and correct it Rewrite corrected parameters to the CPU module reload the CPU power supply and or reset the module If the same error occurs it is thought to be a hardware error Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 22 28 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED S
369. if the battery voltage returns to ON _ Battery low normal thereafter e Synchronizes with the BAT ALARM BAT LED Battery low battery voltage retums to normal e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module OFF AC DC DOWN not Reset when the power supply is switched OFF then AC DC DOWN detected ON detection ON AC DC DOWN e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within detected 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module QnA Reset when the power supply is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even Normal one of the installed AJ71PT32 S3 modules PINS inie ernan Error e Remains ON even if the condition is restored to Emon M3094 normal thereafter Normal e ON when operation error is generated Operation error i i e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal S Error M9011 QnA Operation error fi create e Turns ON if there is at least one output module whose fuse has blown Normal e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal Blown fuse detection Module with blown S Error M9000 QnA fas thereafter e Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I O station output modules e Turns ON if the I O module differs from the status registered at power on I O module verify error Normal e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal S Error M9002 QnA ON Error thereafter e I O module verif
370. ime taken eh No E M10 to establish the Start Program DC input signal T Sji ic switch oo MC Stop An switch Input unit MC RA2 XM Stop Voltage relay H switch recommended O Input unit y Output unit o Output for warning RAZ l XM Ym pN lamp or buzzer co a Turned ON in RUN _ 4 status by M9039 Output unit Output for warning p E lamp or buzzer MC L Turned ON in RUN I vp status by SM403 MC Switches the power at supply to output devices OFF when the system 0 stops Output unit At emergency stops eein MC MC at stops on reaching a i limit Switches the power supply to output devices OFF when the system stops Interlock circuit Constructs external interlock circuits for opposing operations such as forward and reverse rotation and parts that could cause machine At emergency stops at stops on reaching a limit 19 2 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms EL Si 7 The procedures used to switch on the power supply are indicated below AC system AC DC system 1 Switch the power supply ON 1 Switch the power supply ON 2 Set the CPU module to RUN 2 Set the CPU module to RUN 3 Switch the start switch ON 3 Switch RA2 ON when the DC power supply starts 4 The output devices are driven in accordance with the 4 Set the timer TM to ON upon 100 establishment of DC program when the magnetic contactor MC comes ON power supply The set value for TM shall be the
371. in a memory card b The devices that can be traced are listed below 1 Bit device X FX DX Y FY DY M L F SM V B SB T Contact T Coil ST Contact ST Coil C Contact C Coil JOI X JO Y JO B JO SB BLOUIAS 0 Max 50 points 2 Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JOW JO SW E E she cease cheetsasauatoetas Max 50 points 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A c The sampling trace file stores the trace condition data and trace execution data required to execute the sampling trace Once a GPP function starts tracing the number of set tracing times are executed CPU module Peripheral device capable Memory card of GPP functions F Data of Sampling trace area Sampling trace area designated Device device rae evice Reading to designated area peripheral number of device traces is Monitoring of File a displayed sampling trace register data area 6th data n 1 th data nth data When n data has been stored the existing data is overwritten starting When the trigger point is executed sampling is performed for the designated number of times and then the data of the sampling trace area is latched Fig 8 1 Sampling trace operation d The trace results show the ON OFF statuses of bit devices and current values of word devices for each sampling cycle Trace Results Sampling period 3 i 2 3 4 5
372. inch 0 71kg 0 95kg 0 38kg 0 61kg 0 87kg Dust f for le 1 pc Accessory Attaching screws M5x 25 4 screws ten ee for I O module 1 pc Attaching screws M5x 25 4 screws External dimensions 1 For the attachment of the dustproof cover refer to Section 19 6 1 5VDC power for the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 is supplied from the power supply module mounted to the main base unit 2 Refer to Section 16 1 2 Selecting the Power Supply Module or Section 17 3 Application Standards of Extension Base Unit when using A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 and A1S58B 1 17 1 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE nme ELS EC A 17 1 1 Main base unit for high speed access A1S38HB A1S38HBEU The main base units A1S38HB A1S38HBEU for high speed access have been improved in the speed of access to the buffer memory of the special function module mounted on A1S38HB A1S38HBEU POINT 1 The A1S38HB A1S38HBEU can perform high speed access to the buffer memories of special function modules only I O devices of I O modules are not accessed at high speed but at the same access speed as that of a conventional main base unit 2 When an extension base unit is connected to the A1S38HB A1S38HBEU the buffer memories of the special function modules on the extension base unit are not accessed at high speed The access speed is the same as the one in the case of connecting to a conventional main base unit REMARK 1 The A1S38
373. ine Actual service value Reference After SM51 SM52 turns CPU module model value ON ratio G bedvaue AATA E Oe Backup power time after ambient ambient 4 temperature 40 C temperature 25 C amalar Q2ASHCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU 1 050 hours 0 1 years 1 500 hours 0 2 years 2 100 hours 0 2 years 43 800 hours 5 years 860 hours 0 1 years 1 220 hours 0 1 years 1 720 hours 0 2 years 43 800 hours 5 years 3 400 hours 0 4 years 4 800 hours 0 5 years 6 800 hours 0 8 years 43 800 hours 5 years 3 400 hours 0 4 years 4 800 hours 0 5 years 6 800 hours 0 8 years 43 800 hours 5 years 21 8 4 000 hours 0 5 years 5 700 hours 0 7 years 8 000 hours 0 9 years 43 800 hours 5 years 4 000 hours 0 5 years 5 700 hours 0 7 years 8 000 hours 0 9 years 43 800 hours 5 years 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 24 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 19 hours 1 0 days 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION The power time ratio indicates the percentage of power on time per day 24 hours The power on time ratio is 50 when the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours 2 The guaranteed value represents a battery life at 70 C which is calculated based on characteristic values of manufacturer supplied memories SRAM and on the assumption of storage within the ambie
374. ine program H 10 IRET interrupt program H 12 16 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU MELSEC QnA 1 Timers are not to be used in standby type programs because they update present values and turn ON OFF the contacts when the OUT TU instruction is executed 2 When setting a subroutine program as a standby type program use a common pointer Standby type programs that use local pointers are not executable For details on common and local pointers refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals b When grouping several subroutine programs into one 1 Create subroutine programs in order starting from step O in the standby type program An END instruction is required at the end of the subroutine programs 2 Since there are no restrictions on the order of creation of subroutine programs there is no need to arrange pointers in ascending order of pointer numbers when creating multiple subroutine programs 3 Use common pointers Subroutine programs using common pointers can be called from all the programs that are being executed by the Q2ZASCPU Program A Q2ASCPU Memory card internal RAM Main routine program Write Program A Program B standby type program Program B Write Use a common pointer Pointers do not have to be set in ascending order REMARK For details on common pointers refer to the QNACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 12 17 12 OV
375. ing clock data The section explains the special relays and special registers used for setting data and reading clock data for clock operation a Special relays used for the clock function e Writes clock data to the special registers SD210 to SD213 and performs clock operation Clock data set request Writes the clock data stored in SD210 to SD213 to the clock elements after execution of the END instruction in the scan in which SM210 turns from OFF to ON e Used to determine whether or not there are any errors Clock data error when the clock data is set e Turns ON if any data is not a BCD cord e Reads the clock data stored in special registers SD210 to SD213 e When SM213 is ON the clock data is read to SD210 to D213 after execution of the END instruction Clock data read request 10 10 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA b Special registers used for clock data e The year and month are recorded as follows The year data is the last two digits of the year Clock data b15 to b8 b7 to bO year month Sy ane gt Month stores 01 to 12 in BCD Year stores 00 to 99 in BCD e The day and hour are recorded as follows Clock data b15 to b8b7 to bO day hour Mar er pel z Hour stores 00 fo 23 in BCD Day stores 01 to 31 in BCD e The minute and second are recorded as follows Clock data b15 to b8 b7 to bO minute second i Seconds stores 00 to 59 in BCD Min
376. ing contents of the microcomputer programs to sequence programs using operation instructions added for Q2ASCPU When using a utility software package of the following convert processing contents of the utility software package to a sequence program using operation instructions added for Q2ASCPU e sSw0OO0OGO AD57P Refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual AD57 Instructions e SWOOO UTLP FNO Refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions e SWOOO UTLP FN1 Refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions e SWOOO UTLP PID Refer to the QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions e SWOUOL SIMA e SWOOU UTLP FD1 Unusable e SWOLILI SAPA App 124 APPENDICES Appendix 4 7 Comments Conversions are made for the device range of Q2ASCPU Devices outside the range are not converted App 125 APPENDICES Appendix 4 8 Constant Scan Function Error Check Function When using the constant scan function or error check function for ACPUs special registers or special relays are set In contrast for Q2ASCPUs these functions are set with parameters To use these functions after conversion make settings in PLC RAS in the parameter mode App 126 APPENDICES Appendix 4 9 I O control mode The I O control mode for Q2ASCPU is refresh mode direct I O is enabled depending on the device e As the I O control mode for A2US i
377. ink refresh for the network module corresponding to the specified network No in network n Specified network refresh e Refreshes the network module corresponding to the specified I O G P ZCOM number in network n App 38 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 2 QnA link dedicated instructions vfeecao Jn si s201 02 e Reads data from word devices of another station cereo va S1 s2 ou o2 Data read write from to other stations e Writes data to word devices of another station Paina oo er pe Terse ee e Sends data message to another station Bee on e Data send receive to from other stations e Receives data message from another station Tene p e Processing request to Executes remote RUN STOP for another station other stations J P ZNFR fun S1 S2 D Reads data from a special function module installed at a remote station in the MELSECNET 10 network Data read write G P ZNFR Un S1 S2 D from to a special function module at a remote I O station u P ZNTO Jn S1 S2 D Writes data to a special function module at a remote I O station in the MELSECNET 10 network Seano uns lsa The GP instructions can also be used for the AJ71QC24N App 39 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 A series link instructions Word device read are RETA e Reads the data of T C D and W devices of other stations in the from specified station MELSECNET II or MELSECNET 10 syste
378. instantaneous power failure longer than the allowable time occurs 2 Devices that can be latched a The following devices can be latched 1 Latch relay 2 Link relay 3 Annunciator 4 Edge relay 5 Timer 6 Retentive timer 7 Counter 8 9 Data register Link register Even if a latch designation is set for a device the device will not be latched if a local device designation or device initial value designation is made b The latch range is set on the Device in the parameter mode of GPP function In latch range setting it is possible to set a range within which the latch clear key is effective Latch 1 Start and a range within which the key is not effective Latch 2 Start For details on device latch ranges for each device refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals The devices data in the latch range are retained by the battery A6BAT installed in the CPU module 1 Even if a sequence program is written to a memory card and ROM operation is performed the battery is required for the latch function 2 If the battery connector is disconnected from the CPU module connector while the programmable controller power is OFF the devices data in the latch range is lost 10 5 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Clearing the device data in the latch range a To clear the devices data in a latch range and set the default values instead perform Latch clear When the latch clear is performed the devices dat
379. instruction 2 Step execution with designated loop count Program execution is repeated for the designated loop count range 1 to 32767 beginning with step 0 or the step where program operation was last stopped and is stopped at the designated step break point Sequence program example Execution from step 0 Execution stopped at step 8 o H KX vale j 7 Executed forthe AIRE xao designated num 1 010 2 vov Y020 00 2 ber of scans 2 I i l l l x002 g LD X2 g a H H RST DO I LD x2 10 RST DO 10 RST DO Fig 8 3 Step execution with designated loop count 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures to perform step execution All operations are performed on Monitor test screen in the ladder mode debugging 1 Select B Step Run 1 Step Run ron Current Step tart Step Pointer 2 Option of Retries i JT imes epeating Interval 18000 reak Point Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Step Pointer Execute C gt Cance LCN gt Space Select Esc Close k med i bd d eee ee Lee 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 7 2 Partial execution The sequence program is executed from the start step or the step where operation is currently stopped to a designated step break point Sequence program example xoo0 LD XO 0 a 010 OUT Y10 x001 Ka MOV K4Y20 DO
380. int 48 point 64 point selectabl Specified points Dummy module A1SG62 6 point 32 point 48 poin point selectable module Input Setaumber of points Pulse catch Pulse input module with short pulse duration A1SP60 16 16 outputs module moo minimum pulse duration 0 5 ms Input 16 points tee Allows for different set timer value 0 1 to 1 0 s 1 to Analog timer A u A1ST60 10 s 10 to 60 s 60 to 600 s depending on volume 16 outputs Analog timer 8 points For interrupt program execution Interrupt module A1S161 S 32 t ms Interrupt input 16 points ppeele pon 32 bit signed binary A1SD61 50 KPPS 1 channel Special 32 points 0 35 24 bit signed binary 2 channels A1SD62 100 KPPS Special 32 points Transistor output sink type 24 bit signed binary 2 channels High speed A1SD62D 200 KPPS Special 32 points 0 25 counter module Transistor output sink type 24 bit signed binary 2 channels A1SD62D S1_ 200 KPPS Special 32 points 0 27 Transistor output sink type 24 bit signed binary 2 channels A1SD62E 100 KPPS Special 32 points Transistor output Source type 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V A1S64AD 4 i a 7 j i Special 32 points A D converter i a module 4 to 20mA 0 to 10V A1S68AD se Special 32 points 8 analog channels 0 055 0 055 0 057 0 e O 2 P P 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Number of Occupied POR Points points Product Name Model Name Description iO Assignment 5VDC 2
381. int at which the trace is to be executed Select one or multiple item s of the following a Branch Instruction Executed at each CALL JMP or other instructions b Every Interruption Executed at each interrupt program Cc Upon execution of Executed at each PTRAEXE instruction each instruction 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 3 Trigger Point Set the point at which the trigger is executed Select one of the following a Upon execution of When executing PTRA instruction each instruction b At Request of PDI When operating trigger using the peripheral devices capable of GPP function Specify Detail Set a device and step number Condition The following shows setting examples The details on how to make the settings and trigger execution timing are the same as described in Section 8 2 Monitor condition setup in Monitor function Trigger Pt Setting Device Current Ualue 1 Device 1 gt Word Device L 2 4 Bit Device R2 lt T gt J gt 2 BlocklI 11 gt Step Wequence Step L 1 lt Always gt 2 4 gt TR Wequence Step L J lt fllways gt Cance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Glose The following shows the setting device under the detailed condition Bit device X FX Y FY M L F SM V B SB T Contact ST Contact C Contact JO X JO Y JO B JO SB BLO S Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UDG JO W JO SW Th
382. ion MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed INST FORMAT ERR The number of IX and IXEND instructions is not equal Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed INST FORMAT ERR The configuration of the check conditions for the CHK instruction is incorrect Alternatively a CHK instruction has been used in a low speed execution type program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed EXTEND INST ERR The designation of aMELSECNET MINI S3 master module control instruction was wrong Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 36 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue
383. ion base unit is connected its assignment starts from the number immediately after the number assigned to a main base unit 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT mms ELS EC A 5 I O numbers are assigned assuming that every base unit has 8 slots If a 5 slot type base unit is used an I O number obtained by adding points equivalent to 3 slots 48 points to the final I O number of the 5 slot base unit is assigned to the next extension base unit Main base Allocate numbers for 8 slots Occupies three slots slots 5 to 7 as vacant slots power supply module CPU module Extension cable I O numbering direction Extension base 13 14 15 1 O numbers are allocated in the order of M Q B Example above shows a case where all slots are 16 points modules 5 VO NUMBER ASSIGNMENT 5 3 I O Assignment with GPP Function When using the Q2ASCPU I O modules and a special function module can be controlled even if I O assignment with GPP function is not performed I O assignment with GPP function are valid in the following cases 1 The purpose of I O assignment with GPP function a When using a base unit for 5 slots set 0 point for 3 slots for efficient use of number of I O points b Reserve the points when changing a module to other than a 16 point module for future system extension c The I O assignment prevents the I O numbers from changing if an I O module or speci
384. ion is stopped with the RUN STOP key switch in the STOP PAUSE or STEP RUN position RUN pliexerna An error that stops operation has been detected The RUN STOP key switch has been turned from STOP to RUN after writing a program in the STOP status To light either turn the RUN STOP key switch RUN gt STOP gt RUN or reset operation using the RUN STOP key switch Indicates the CPU module error detection status ON A self diagnostics error that does not stop operation other than a battery error has been detected The ERROR operation mode at error occurrence has been set to Resume in PC RAS setting in the parameter mode OFF Normal Flickering An error that stops operation has been detected Indicates the CHK instruction detection status and annunciator F statuses USER ON An error has been detected by the CHK instruction or an annunciator F has come ON OFF Normal Flickering Executing latch clear Indicates the battery statuses of the CPU module itself and the memory card EAN ON A battery error has occurred due to low battery voltage OFF Normal Indicates status of the boot operation execution BOOT ON Execution has been completed OFF The boot operation has not been executed 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 2 3 MELSEC QnA The following shows how to turn OFF an LED that is currently ON Excluding the reset operation LED Name Method for Turning OFF the LED BAT ERROR USER l BOOT ALARM R
385. ion to reset ZNWR instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device LWTP instruction sNokcomnieten write instruction execution is complete M9203 SM1203 for ACPU i End P Used as a condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203 QnA completion for f after the ZNWR instruction is complete master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction a M9204 SM1204 for ACPU Not completed On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the QnA End local station reception for local station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction de PRE e t lete at th M9205 SM1205 for ACPU recep Not completed On indicates thatthe ZNWR instruction is complete at the QnA l ON End local station tion for local station M9206 SM1206 Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid e Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of M9207 SM1207 Link parameter OFF Match the master station a tier two matches that of the master check results ON Mismatch station in tier three in a three tier system Valid for only the master station in a three tier system e Depends on whether or not the B and W data controlled by Sets master i ar station B and W higher link master station host station is sent to lower faci esich GaHGe OFF Transmits to tier2 and link local stations tertiary stations M9208 SM1208 g
386. ions for instruction AnACPU AnUCPU Program example MOV ABCDEFGH DO LEDA ABCDEFGH OUT SM1255 MOV IJKLMNOP D10 DOD10D20 LEDB instruction LED D20 excluding dedicated instructions for AnACPU AnUCPU LED display is performed after Program example adding the right 8 characters and LEDB IJKLMNOP OUT SM1255 the left 8 characters Modify the instruction to a ZNRD LRDP instruction instruction Program example LRDP K3 D10 D100 K10 OUT SM1255 J ZNRD JO K3 D10 D100 K10 MO Modify the instruction to a ZNWR LWTP instruction instruction Program example LWTP K3 D10 D100 K10 OUT SM1255 J ZNWR JO K3 D10 D100 K10 MO OUT instruction Program example The number of counter points or the device by which the set value is used After conversion the parameters is set by parameter will be set as defaults so they Number of counter points 512 Setting val stored dev start D3000 must be set again if using an interrupt counter OUT CO K10 OUT C256 D3000 OUT CO K10 OUT C256 D3000 Modify the instruction to an RFRP RFRP instruction instruction for QnACPU Program example RFRP H100 K10 W100 K10 OUT SM1255 U RFRP U10 K10 W100 K10 MO Modify the instruction to an RTOP RTOP instruction instruction for Q2ASCPU Program example RTOP H100 K10 W100 K10 OUT SM1255 U RTOP U10 K10 W100 K10 MO SCMP instruction Modify the instruction to an Program example instruction using AND and OUT LEDA SCAP OUT SM1255 instruction
387. is OFF when the coil outputs are OFF and ON when the coil outputs are held e All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF e Coil outputs are preserved when this relay is ON Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists e Select the device status at the time of switching from STOP to program write to RUN All devices except the step relay Select whether the low speed execution type program will be executed in the asynchronous mode or in the synchronous mode e Asynchronous mode this relay is turned OFF Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is performed continuously within the excess time Synchronous mode this relay is turned ON Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is not performed continuously and operation is performed from the next scan if there is excess time App 52 M9101form at change M9102form Initial at change B pra E S Initial U S Status change APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 System clocks counters Table App 2 4 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanation p When Set ACPU CPU M9000 OFF processing ON S Every END e After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only e When an initial execution type program is used this After RUN ON for
388. is executed with the designated step s skipped Sequence program example xO00 p o xo T E g e woo OUT Y10 x001 K4 A Mov Yo20 wo H 2 LD X1 Head step 3 MOV K4Y20 DO Skip execution Yo11 gt g OUT Y11 Final step xB02 X 9 H RT 00 3 10 RST DO s o Fig 8 5 Skip execution Operation Procedures The following shows the procedures to perform skip execution All operations are performed on Monitor test screen in the ladder mode debugging 1 Setthe program range to be skipped using GPP function Designate the step number s to be skipped on D Skip Run screen Skip Run 2468 bomi jal ee dd d koad m rm m e r m m m Execute CY gt Cance 1 N gt 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 8 Program Trace Function This function collects program execution statuses When executing the program trace function a memory card is required This function is used to check the execution status of any step of any program during debugging This enables debugging time to shorten Function Description 1 Function a The program trace function collects the execution status of the designated step of the designated program and stores it in a program trace file in the memory card b The devices that can be traced are listed below 1 Bit device X FX DX Y FY DY M L F SM V B SB T Contact T Coil ST Contact ST Coil C Contact C Coil JO X
389. is not performed the default parameter Without The Q2ASCPU does not show an error but communication with external device is not performed e Set the Ethernet module and MELSECNET 10 not to overlap their Network No s each other Same network No cannot be set for them The following shows the number of the Ethernet modules and the MELSECNET 10 II modules that can be mounted on one Q2ASCPU e Ethernet module lt 4 e MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II lt 4 f When the Ethernet parameters are set for the Ethernet module without function version B error code 3103 No Ethernet module in the I O number set with the parameter appears and the system stops due to an error App 157 APPENDICES APPENDIX 9 Q2AS H CPU S1 PROCESSING TIME The Q2AS H CPU S1 processing time is explained below Appendix 9 1 Overview of the Q2AS H CPU S1 Scan Time The Q2AS H CPU S1 scan time comes to the total of the following values e I O refresh processing e Total values of instruction execution time e END processing 1 I O refresh time a I O data refresh time between the following modules which is mounted in the Q2AS H CPU S1 main base unit extension base unit e Input module e Output module e Special function module b I O refresh time can be calculated in the following formula I O refresh time I O points 16 x N1 Output points 16 x N2 For N1 and N2 refer to the following table CPU module a 2
390. is performed by executing Newly from PLC When the buffer memory of a peripheral device is read by designating a direct device FFFFH is monitored if the peripheral device is faulty or not connected When monitoring file registers FFFFH is monitored if no file register designation is made Before monitoring make sure that the device assignment of the CPU and GPP function agree For the local device monitor in each program file the monitor operation varies depending on presence of the CPU module function version B and the GPP function model Without function version B e Detailed conditions step number and device condition are set for each program file to perform monitoring With function version B e When the GX Developer and the SW2IVD GPPQ are used the local device can be monitored in each program file by setting compatibility with local device Refer to Section 8 2 2 e When SWOIVD GPPQ and SW1IVD GPPQ are used the local device can be monitored with the same operation as the operation without function version B When monitoring the buffer memory of a special function module the scan time is prolonged in the same way as it is when a FROM TO instruction is executed Several people can perform monitoring at the same time The following considerations apply when executing this e High speed monitoring can be made possible by increasing the system area by 1k steps for each monitor for other station use when formatting t
391. is specified 1 Module starting I O No 4 Auxiliary setting the CC Link module Refer to 1 2 Module type 1 M Master station 5 Station information Type setting of 2 L Local station setting the CC Link module Ea atch refresh device a Remote input RX Device Setting of each remote Remote output RY Device station Refer to 2 Remote register RWr Device Remote register RWw Device Device settings Special link relay SB Device for the Q2ASCPU Special link register SW Device to be used Cancel N Spase Select Esc Close When pressing the Execute Y or the key the screen returns to the screen of CC Link setting list T AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION Set the number of remote stations connected to the CC Link module Set the number of stations specified in 2 1 When selecting the 4 Auxiliary setting appears MELSEC QnA the Auxiliary setting screen When pressing the key the screen returns to the CC Link setting screen of c Auxiliary setting stations 64 2 Delay timer 0 X0 05ms 3 Standby station specification 0 4 Number of retries 3 1 Total number of connected 5 Number of automatic return stations 1 6 Operation specified for CPU fault 7 Scan mode specification Spase Select Esc Close Label name 1 Continue 2 Stop 1 Synchronous 2 Asynchronous 2 When selecting the
392. ition of I O number set by the parameter e 1 O number designation is overlapping e Numbers of the network parameter and loaded AJ71QE71 are different e Ethernet parameter dedicated instruction is set to more than five Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR nN e The Ethernet and MELSECNET 10 use the same network number aie e The network number station number or group POCE nn number set in the network parameter is out of range CPU Status e The specified I O number is outside the range of stop 3104 the used CPU module e The Ethernet specific parameter setting is not normal WECollateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number WEDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR The contents of the Ethernet parameter are incorrect Collateral informationmmon 3105 Common Information File name Drive name Write after correcting parameters e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR e The CC Link parameter setting is incorrect The set mode is not allowed for the version of the mounted CC Link module 3107 Collateral informationmmon Check the parameter setting e Common Information File name e Individual Inform
393. k effectively e Ferrite core Type ZCAT3035 1330 ZCAT2032 0930 Contact TDK Corporation Type RFC H13 Contact Kitagawa Industries Company LTD 20 10 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 20 1 7 Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is effective for suppressing conduction noise It is not required to attach a noise filter to the power supply line except for some models however attaching it can suppress more noise The noise filter has the effect on reducing conduction noise of 10MHz or less Use any of the following noise filters double ytype filters or equivalent FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 11 SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER Rated voltage 250V The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below 1 Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which noise has been filtered out Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Introduction Introduction Output side device side Output side device side a The noise will be induced when the input and output b Separate the input wires from the output wires wires are installed together 2 Ground the noise filter ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest wire possible approx 10cm 3 94in 20 11 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTI
394. k operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD705 and SD706 if double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with the masked values AN pattern Mask pattern Number of empty communication e Stores the number of empty blocks in the communications request area S During request for remote terminal modules connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 execution registration areas e Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the following manner IMASK b15 instruction mask Mask pattern SD715 115 pattern SD716 131 to S During execution SD717 147 to Accumulator Accumulator e For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs No of empty areas for CC Link communication reguest register area SD736 PKEY input PKEY input e Special register that temporarily stores keyboard data input by means of S During the PKEY instruction execution e Stores the number of empty registration area for the request for communication with the intelligent device station connected to A 1S J61QBT61 S During execution App 90 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 8 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding APRON When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction b15 to b8 b7 to bO Message storage Remaining No of simultaneous execution of
395. l that can cover 5VDC current consumed by modules mounted on the A1 52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B and or A58B Example When the 5 VDC current consumption on the main base module is 3A and the 5 VDC current consumption on A1S55B is 1A the power supply module that is loaded into the main base module must be A1S61PN DCS5V 5A b Since power to the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B is supplied via an extension cable a voltage drop occurs through the cable It is necessary to select a power supply module and cables with proper length so that 4 75VDC or more is available on the receiving end Refer to the usage standard of the Extension Base Module in Section 17 3 for details on voltage drops etc 16 3 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms SECOLO 16 2 Precautions for Handling The following explains the handling precautions for unpacking to mounting of the power supply module 1 Do not drop the power supply module or give it hard shock since its case terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of resin 2 Tighten the module mounting screws unnecessary in normal operating status terminal screws etc in the following ranges Power supply module terminal ee block terminal screw M3 screw R em Power supply module terminal 98 to 137N block terminal screw M4 screw bi Module mounting screws 78 to 118N Optional M4 screw a 3 When installing the module to the base u
396. l device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 38 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E Content dC tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4601 4602 4610 4611 4620 4621 SFCP OPE ERROR Exceeds device range that can be designated by the SFC program WCollateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed SFCP OPE ERROR The START instruction in an SFC program is preceded by an END instruction Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed SFCP EXE ERROR The active step information at presumptive start of the SFC program is incorrect Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP EXE ERROR Key switch was reset during RUN when presumptive start was designated for SFC program Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error loca
397. lative value Stored as cumulative value Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 App e Loopback in forward loop only Forward loopback e Loopback in reverse loop only Reverse loopback Stores the local or remote I O station number at which loopback is being executed Forward loopback Reverse loopback In the above example 1 is stored into D9205 and 3 into D9206 If data link returns to normal status data link in forward loop values in D9205 and D9206 remain 1 and 3 To return them to 0 therefore use a sequence program or perform reset operation Stores the number of retry times due to transmission error Count stops at maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation Stores the number of times the loop line has been switched to reverse loop or loopback Count stops at maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or PAUSE mode Bit b8 L9 L39 L38 L37 L55 L54 L53 Device number D1212 D1213 D1214 D1215
398. layed Enter the program name for start with keys Program start 1 Program name 2 Start mode 1 Scan execution 2 Low speed execution Execution Y Select either scan execution or low speed execution b Stop of program F2 Enter the program name for stop with keys Program stop 1 Program name J 2 Stop mode 1 Output stop after stop 2 Output retention after stop Execution Y Cancel N Select either output stop after stop or output retention after stop 1 When the stop mode is set to Output stop after stop and stop is executed the program stops after execution of 1 scan off The operation is the same as the POFF instruction execution When the above stop opearation is made in the stand by program the program stops after 1 scan off execution Therefore the execution count is added by one 2 If an error occurs with the RET IRET instruction during 1 scan OFF execution in the stand by program the execution count is added by one In this case the execution type becomes Scan execution 8 21 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 4 2 Interrupt program monitor list This function displays the number of executions of interrupt programs This is used to check the execution status of interrupt programs Function Description This function allows display of the execution counts of interrupt programs All operations are performed using th
399. le above have the following meanings Description Control ketudi CPU module operation instruction by remote operation Remote RUN Remote STOP etc instruction Read write Operations of program read write display Operations that involve write processing such as program write and test 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 6 Password Registration Passwords serve to prohibit reading and overwriting of data such as programs comments etc in the Q2ASCPU from a peripheral device In password registration the parameter files and program files of a designated memory built in RAM memory card are made the target of the entry code There are two types of registration as follows e File names are not displayed and read write are prohibited e File write is prohibited Read is possible When a password is registered file operations from a peripheral device are not possible without inputting the entry code registered in the CPU module 1 Register Password Entry codes are registered using the entry code registration function in the PLC menu of the online mode of GPP function ERE ES eee Eee Current l how n tion 1 gt Change J 2 Opora i 1 lt gt Read Write and Display Protect 2 gt Write Protect 2 gt Cancel Password 3 gt None 4 gt Change Attribute 3 Memory 1 Internal RAM s 2 1 IC Memory Card ACRAM J IC Memory Card AC CROM 4 0 7 IC Memory Card BCRAMD S J IC M
400. le connector extension base module Base cover Protective cover for the extension cable connector To expand it the area surrounded by grooves located below the word OUT on the base cover should be removed with a nipper etc Module connector Connector to load the power supply module CPU module I O module and specialfunction module To prevent dust accumulation load the attached connector cover blank cover A1SG60 or a dummy module A1SG62 to reserved space connector not loaded a module KJ Module mounting screw Screws to attach the module to the bases Screw size for M4 screw Base mounting hole Mounting hole to attach the base module to the panel of the control panels etc For M5 screw 6 DIN rail hook Attachment hook for DIN rail One piece each for A1S32B and A1S33B Two pieces each for A1S35B A1S38B A1S38HB and A1S38HBEU IMPORTANT Only one extension base module can be connected to a main base module Connecting two extension connectors of the main base module to extension base modules may result in input and or output errors 17 7 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC QnA 2 Extension base module A1S52B A1S55B A1S58B A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A1S65B A1S68B A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S65B A1S68B A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 wao Ws 1 Fe 2 u Wks 4 We s We s M7 POWER INSEE A1S52B A1S55B A1S58B A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 Fo We 1 We 2 We 3 We 4 We 5
401. le for the LED on the switch to go OFF 3 Installing or removing a memory card with the memory card in out switch set ON while the power is ON will destroy the contents of the memory card 18 8 18 MEMORY CARDS AND BATTERIES mms ELS EC A 3 Memory card remove insert prohibit flag special relays SM605 Instead of operating the memory card in out switch turning ON OFF special relays SM605 memory card can be also used as the card remove insert prohibit flag Once removal insertion is prohibited with the remove install prohibit flag it is still disabled even if the memory card in out switch is set to ON The relationship between the memory card in out switch and the memory card remove insert prohibit flag is shown in the table below Memory card in out switch Memory card remove insert prohibit flag ON OFF Removal Insertion Prohibited Removal Insertion Permitted ON removal insertion prohibited Removal insertion prohibited Removal insertion prohibited OFF removal insertion permitted Removal insertion prohibited Removal insertion permitted 18 9 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms EL Si 7 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION This chapter describes the loading and installation procedures and precautions to obtain the maximum system reliability and performance 19 1 Fail Safe Circuit Concept When the programmable controller is powered ON or OFF improper outputs may be generated temporarily depending on the delay tim
402. lects the data of devices in Section 8 5 Ape ERON accordance with a timing set at the CPU module l ag Function that collects the device data at the moment to Status latch function Section 8 6 designate Functions that runs one step or one part of a program Step operation Section 8 7 runs a program with a part skipped Step execution Function that runs a program step by step Section 8 7 1 Partial execution Function that executes a designated part of a program Section 8 7 2 Function that executes a program with a designated part Skip execution Section 8 7 3 skipped Program trace function Function that collects the program execution status Section 8 8 7 Function that simulats execution in isolation from the I O Simulation function 2 Section 8 9 modules and special function modules Function that simultaneously debuggs from several Debugging by several people Section 8 10 peripheral devices capable of GPP functions Function that collects device data at a peripheral device Monitoring trace function capable of GPP functions in accordance with the designated timing For details on the operation for each function refer to the GPP function Operating Manual When executing this function a memory card is required 2 When executing part of this function a memory card is required 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 2 Monitor Function This function reads CPU module programs and device statuses to a peripheral device capable
403. ler system use an online UPS or line interactive UPS with a voltage distortion rate of 5 or less When connecting a standby UPS use a Mitsubishi FREQUPS FW F series UPS hereinafter FW F series UPS Example FW F10 0 3K 0 5K Do not use any standby UPS other than the FW F series UPS 4 The FW F series UPS whose serial number starts with the letter P or later or ends with the letters HE is applicable SERIAL Q00000000 Starts with P or later SERIAL B00000000 HE t_ Ends with HE 19 19 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES The products sold in the European countries have been required by law to comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives of the EU Directives since 1996 and 1997 respectively The manufacturers must confirm by self declaration that their products meet the requirements of these directives and put the CE mark on the products 1 Authorized representative in Europe Authorized representative in Europe is shown below Name Mitsubishi Electric Europe BV Address Gothaer Strase 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 20 1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC Directives The EMC Directives specifies emission and immunity criteria and requires the products to meet both of them i e not to emit excessive electromagnetic interference emission to be immune to electromagnetic interference outside immunity Guidelines for complying the machinery inc
404. les made in the control panel must be 10 cm 3 94 inch diameter or less If the diameter is more than 10cm 3 94 inch radio waves can be leaked Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquiredenough knowledge of electric facilities can open the control panel Connection of power cable and ground wires Handle the power cables and ground wires as described below a Provide a grounding point near the power supply module Ground the power supply module s LG and FG terminals LG Line Ground FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30 cm 11 18 inch or shorter As the LG and FG terminals release the noise generated in the programmable controller to the ground the lowest possible impedance must be ensured The ground wires also need to be short as they are used to release noise Because the wire itself carries large noise short wiring prevents it from acting as an antenna Twist the ground wire led from the grounding point with the power cable By doing this noise from the power cable can be released to the ground If a filter is attached to the power cable however this twisting may not be needed 20 3 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 20 1 3 Cables The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise To pre
405. llation category Il power supply to the programmable controller The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt Category has the lowest durability and category IV has the highest durability V Q CO a 4 gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Category IV Category Ill Category II Category Figure 20 1 Installation Category Category Il indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution 20 14 20 EMC DIRECTIVES AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 1 20 2 4 Control panel Because the programmable controller is an open type device a device designed to be stored within another device be sure to use it inside the control panel Also each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel However the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel 1 Shock protection To prevent personnel such as operators who are not familiar with electricity from electric shocks the control panel must be handled as follows a Lock the control panel so that only the qualified personnel can open it b Provide a mechanism so that opening the control panel will automatically stop the power supply c For electric shock protection use IP20 or greater control panel 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control pa
406. lowing applications 1 Program library Subroutine programs and interrupt programs are set as standby type programs and controlled separately from the main program 2 Set up of programs The main routine program is registered to the standby type program and programs required for control are changed to the scan execution type programs Programs not used for control are changed to the standby type programs 2 Program library a Library creation of program 1 Program library is used to control subroutine programs and interrupt programs separately from the main routine program It is possible to create multiple subroutine programs and interrupt programs as one standby type program Scan execution type program Scan execution type program 7 D program Main routine Main routine program Me program e eee ee ee eee P100 Subroutine program f Standby type program l M ee c a MM 7 E Nj o subroutine E ___ program program On iO Interrupt Eae a _ 2 When a standby type program execution is completed control returns to the program that was being executed before execution of the standby type program The following shows the operation performed when a subroutine program and an interrupt program in a standby type program are executed CALL P100 instruction executed i Wad END END nterrupt request receive END processing processing processing Scan execution type program i t S Subrout
407. luding MELSEC QnA series programmable controller with the EMC Directives are provided in Section 20 1 1 to Section 20 1 9 below The guidelines are created based on the requirements of the regulations and relevant standards however they do not guarantee that the machinery constructed according to them will comply with the Directives Therefore manufacturers must finally determine how to make it comply and how it is compliant with the EMC Directives 20 1 1 EMC Directive related standards 1 Regulations regarding emission Standard Test description Value specified in standard e 30M 230MHz QP 40dB 4 V m 10m in CISPR16 2 3 Radio waves from the product are measurement range 1 Radiated emission 7 measured 230M 1000MHz QP 47dBHV m 10m in measurement range e 150k 500kHz EN61131 2 2007 CISPR16 2 1 CISPR16 1 2 Noise from the product to the power QP 79dB Mean 66cB Conducted emission 2 line is measured e 500k 30MHz QP 73dB Mean 60dB 1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 2 Programmable controllers are open type devices devices designed to be housed inside other equipment and must be installed inside a conductive control panel The corresponding tests were conducted with the programmable controller installed inside a control panel 20 1 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES EN61131 2 2007 2 Regulations regarding immunity Standard Test description Value specified in standard EN61000 4 2 El
408. ly and module power supply terminal in the control panel where the module is installed e AJ65BT 64RD3 e AJ65BT 64RD4 e AJ65BT 68TD For the cable connected to the power supply terminal of the AJ65SBT RPS or AJ65BT 68TD attach a ferrite core with an attenuation characteristic equivalent to that of the ZCAT3035 1330 from TDK Corporation Twist the cable around the ferrite core by one as shown below 20 8 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 7 7 CC Link LT module To supply the CL2DA2 B and CL2AD4 B with 24VDC power using the CL1PAD1 keep the length of the power cable from the CL1PAD1 to the 24VDC power supply to 30m or less 8 Measures against static electricity When using an insulation displacement connector without connector cover a connected cable for the connector is thin in applicable wire size and coating Therefore note that the module may cause an electric discharge failure As measures against the failure using pressure displacement type connector whose applicable wire size is thick or soldering type connector is recommended 20 1 4 Power supply module 20 1 5 Base unit The precautions required for each power supply module are described below Always observe the items noted as precautions Model Name Precautions 2 Make sure to short the LG and FG terminals with a cable of 6 to 7cm and A1S61PN A1S62PN ground the cable A1S63P Use a CE compliant 24VDC power supply in the control panel
409. m Word device write e Reads the data of T C D and W devices of other stations on the S n2 D2 to specified station s P 2NWR Jn nt D1 n202 MELSECNET II or MELSECNET 10 network e Reads data from the special function module installed at a remote I O 2 Data read write station in the MELSECNET II system from a special function module e Writes data to the special function module installed at a remote I O at a remote I O station P RTOP Jun nt s n2 D station in the MELSECNET II system 4 Routing parameter instructions e Reads the data of the transfer destination network with the number Routing information Z P RTREAD n D specified by n in the routing parameters and stores the data to the read devices starting from D e Registers the routing data in the devices starting from S to the area Routing information i zp atwerine a S for the transfer destination network with the number specified by n in registration the parameters App 40 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Appendix 1 5 PID Control Instructions Registers the PID control data in the devices starting from the one PID control data set front sH p Performs PID operation on the basis of the set value SV and process PID control execution value PV set in the devices starting from the one specified at S and stores the operation result in the manipulated value MV area Displays in the form of a bar
410. m in the monitored section the processing is added to the total measurement time Measuring range Main program Subroutine program Measuring range All operations are performed using Monitor test menu in the ladder mode 1 Select Measure Scan 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 2 Designate the scan time measurement range The designated part is highlighted 3 The scan time measurement results are displayed 1 166ms 1 16ms 1 264ms 1 46ms NOTE 1 Make sure that the start step is lower than the end step in the setting 2 Times that span different program files cannot be measured 3 If the measured time is less than 0 100ms 0 000ms is displayed 4 END processing time is not included in the measuring time being included in the measurement range 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 5 Sampling Trace Function The function that collects devices continuously on the CPU module with the specified timing When executing the sampling trace function a memory card is required Application This allows checking the changes in the contents of the devices used in a program in accordance with a designated timing during debugging This enables debugging time to be shortened Function Description 1 Function a The sampling trace function samples the contents of a designated device in a constant time interval the sampling cycle and stores the trace results in a sampling trace file
411. m memory standard Collateral informationmmon RAM or for the back up power function install a e Common Information Drive Name lead connector e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e Always BATTERY ERROR 2 CPU Status Voltage of the battery on memory card 1 has Continue dropped below stipulated level QnA 1601 Collateral informationmmon Change the battery Common Information Drive Name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e Always BATTERY ERROR Voltage of the battery on memory card 2 has dropped below stipulated level 1602 Collateral informationmmon Change the battery Common Information Drive Name Shalini aaa CPU Status iagnostic Timing Continua e Always 2 The BAT ALM LED turns on at BATTERY ERROR 22 21 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 22 3 4 Error code list 2000 to 2999 2000 2100 2101 2102 2103 MELSEC QnA The following shows the error messages from the error code 2000 to 2999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding tive Act Code Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status UNIT VERIFY ERR I O module information power ON is changed e O module or special function module not installed properly or installed on the base unit Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No For Remote I O network Network No Station No e Individual Information
412. m or 6101 slaneby LAN or no recunigant system Check the condition of the other stations Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed CONTROL EXE The standby system in a redundant system is switched to the control system This can be detected from the standby system of the redundant system 6200 Collateral informationmmon Check the control system condition e Common Information Reason s for system switching CPU Status e Individual Information Continue MDiagnostic Timing e Always 22 42 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status CONTROL WAIT The control system in a redundant system is switched to the standby system This can be detected from the standby system of On the redundant system 6210 Collateral informationmmon Check the control system condition Off e Common Information Reason s for system switching CPU Status e Individual Information Continue MDiagnostic Timing e Always CAN T EXE CHANGE e Since the standby system is in an error or similar status in the redundant system the control system cannot be switched to the standby system e When an attempt was made to execute system switching the control system could not be switched to the standby system due to a network 6220 error of the c
413. mable controller is powered ON when a CPU module is reset or when the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN Refer to Section 12 1 1 Scan execution type Program that is executed once per scan starting from the next scan after execution of the initial execution type program Refer to Section 12 1 2 12 1 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A Low speed execution type Standby type Program that is executed only in the surplus scan time after execution of a scan execution type program in the constant scan setting or only when the low speed type program execution time is set Refer to Section 12 1 3 Program that is only executed when an execution request is made for it Refer to Section 12 1 4 12 2 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU The following shows the flow of operation processing when a programmable controller is powered ON when a CPU module is reset or when the RUN STOP key switch of a CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN Power ON RESET RUN CPU module STOP gt RUN Initial processing I O module refresh processing z Executed only once when the Initial execution PLC power is turned ON or type program when the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module is changed from STOP to RUN I O module refresh processing END processing ell Executed only in response t
414. matically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Mat
415. ment failure due to lightning Grounding a Carry out the independent grounding if possible b Programmax K device EEES Best 2 Shared grounding Good 3 Common grounding Not allowed c Use the cable of 2mm 0 0031in or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the programmable controller to make the grounding cable short as possible d If any malfunction occurs due to grounding disconnect either or both of the LG and FG terminals of the base unit from the ground 19 17 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms E SECO ONA 19 7 2 Wiring to module terminals This section provides an example for wiring power cables and ground wires to the main and extension bases Main base unit A1S38B Main base unit A1S38B 100 110VAC 100 110VAC 200 240VAC CPU 200 240VAC A1S62PN CPU 5 SCR ae lg Sco AN ri x Q x X 3 gt use 6 O NC r Fuse F O O 24V O NC i ok a 24G r oe a Eo an ee y ACT A FG aC f x 0 6 A FG rt OG Fi O Lo l O IH l 2 Y 24VDC EF avoe B HH 5 Gis ara 6 OLO 1 COP O7 INPUT PL ee SS TOJ O7 INPUT _ O 100 240VAC i as og 100 240VAC Connect to the 24VDC Connect a o terminals of an I O terminals of an gt module that requires Extension base unit A1S58B Oe eee s Extension base unit A1S68B 24VDC internally 24VDC internally x I O I O H A1S62PN I O Extension cable Extension cable K l
416. method monitoring method printout method and error messages 133923 Included with product Type SW2IVD GPPQ GPP Software package OPERATING MANUAL Q6TEL l i l l IB 66777 Describes Q6TEL system configuration operating methods etc 13924 Included with product USER PRECAUTONS PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE QNA SERIES When using a CPU module format the memory using a peripheral device For details of memory format refer to the following manuals e GX Developer Operating Manual e SWLIIVD GPPQ Software package Operating Manual Online PRECAUTIONS FOR BATTERY 1 The operation after removal of a battery After removing a battery of the CPU module format the memory using a peripheral device to start next operation Refer to Section 21 4 2 The operation after excess of a battery life After removing a battery of the CPU module due to its excess life format the memory using a peripheral device to start next operation Refer to Section 21 5 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 1 1 About this Manual This manual serves to explain the specifications and functions of the Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ZASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU S1 abbreviated as Q2ASCPU hereafter the specifications of other modules and the maintenance required for smooth system operation to users of MELSEC QnA series programmable controllers It is divided into the following three main parts 1 Sections 2 and 3 These sections give the general des
417. minals 19 18 Write Simultaneous execution of write during RUN by Several people ccsccceeccseeceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 63 Write during RUN cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 15 Writing clock data to the clock devices 10 9 Write during RUN cccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 8 15 Numerics 5VDC internal power consumption 4 3 Troubleshooting flowchart Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ON flaShINg ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 6 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution peri
418. mode and check if there has been a voltage drop at either of the battery fora CPU module or a memory card After monitoring and replacing the battery by a new one the BAT ALM LED can be turned OFF by resetting the RUN STOP key switch or performing the LEDR instruction 22 7 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 8 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON The flow when the output load of the output module is not turned ON during operation is described Output iload does not turn ON Is the indicato LED of the output module ON NO Check the output status ata peripheral device in the monitor mode YES Is the indicator OFF Measure the voltage across LED of the I O the module input and COM module ON terminals OV ON S D Is the a NO Check that the input signal voltage of the power is OFF at a peripheral de a supply for the load vice in the monitor mode T a applied LL O o z YES D 0 O Check the voltage between OV Check the wiring for the load each output terminal power supply then and COM terminal of restore the power Check the external wiring the output module and external input devices Correct voltage is supplied Failure of the output module Replace the output module Check the toad wiring and the load and power on Consult Mitsubishi represen Change the output relay num tative
419. mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until I O module change is complete Presence absence OPE er gt programe Nor Turned on if the SFC program is registered M39 IOG SAEN of SFC program elie Turned off if the SFC program is not registered one ON SFC programs used i The value in SM320 is set as the initial value The relay automatically turns ON when the SFC program is present M9101 SM1101 SM321 ASOD SFE A a oR When this relay turns from ON to OFF execution of the QnA program ON SFC programs start SFC program stops When this relay turns from OFF to ON execution of the SFC program resumes The SFC program start mode in the SFC setting of the SFC program start OFF Initial start PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value ete SM TIQ anaes status ON Resume start At initial start OFF QnA At continue start ON 2 The ASUPU A8PU4J is not available for the QnACPU e Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at QnA completion of divided processing App 62 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification Continuous transition ee f Presence absence nol pi e Set whether continuous transition will be performed for the SM1103 SM323 of continuous n block where the continuous transition bit of the SFC Q
420. module on the A62B A65B and AG8B Therefore if a voltage drop occurs on an extension cable the specified voltage may not supplied to the receiving end resulting in erroneous inputs and outputs It is recommended to connect the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B and or A58B after a main base unit to minimize a voltage drop Determine applicability of the A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B and ADS8B by the following calculation method 1 Selection condition The voltage received by the module installed in the last slot of an extension base unit A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B must be 4 75 V or above Since the output voltage of the power supply module is set at 5 1 V or above the voltage drop must be 0 35 V or less 2 Classification of voltage drop Voltage drop is classified into a b and c as follows according to the connecting method and type of extension base units a Voltage drop of a main base unit b Voltage drop of an extension base unit c Voltage drop over an extension cable A1S 52B S1 A1S55B S1 or A1S58B S1 extension base A1S30B unit is used A1S50B S1 b Voltage drop of the main base unit can be ignored 17 4 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEG QnA Extension cable connected to the left Extension cable connected to the right side of main Extension base unit used base unit Parallel side of main base unit serial A5
421. mory cards do not back up the built in RAM of the CPU module imate eee Meee ee noe CPU module batt module aia memory Memory Back up is possible x Back up is not possible The battery life guideline and the replacement procedures are explained on the following pages 21 4 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 21 3 1 Battery life CPU module model Q2ASCPU 100 Q2ASCPU S1 100 1 Battery life of CPU module The CPU module battery life differs depending on the CPU module model a Q2ZASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Table 21 3 shows the battery lives when the Q2ASCPU and Q2ASCPU S1 are used Power on time ratio 1 4 2 3 4 5 Table 21 3 CPU module battery life Battery life nearer Weare After SM51 SM52 turns Referencevalue ON 2 Guaranteed value Backup power time after ambient ambient an alarm temperature 40 C temperature 25 C 1 800 hours 0 2 years 2 570 hours 0 3 years 3 600 hours 0 4 years 43 800 hours 5 years 1 150 hours 0 1 years 1 640 hours 0 2 years 2 300 hours 0 3 years 43 800 hours 5 years 22 000 hours 2 5 years 31 400 hours 3 6 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 22 000 hours 2 5 years 31 400 hours 3 6 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years 43 800 hours 5 years
422. mpletion ON Latch completed O U U ew e W SM809 Status latch clear FF ON Clear Enable next status latch a U e W ew W e Program trace OFF Not ready SM810 preparato ON Ready Goes ON when program trace is ready S Status change Ne e O 5 gt WwW WwW 5 gt OFF Suspend e Program trace started when this goes ON omen ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF A Change Program trace OFF Suspend a SM812 execution under way ON Start ON when program trace execution is underway pu N e Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF to ON Identical to PTRA instruction execution S Status change SM813 Program trace trigger OFF gt ON Start status After program trace OFF Not after trigger i SM814 ON After trigger Goes ON after program trace trigger S Status change Program trace OFF Not completed f SM815 ON End Goes ON at completion of program trace S Status change SM820 Step trace preparation a i a e Goes ON after program trace registration at ready S Status change U e Select whether execution of step trace is started or OFF Suspend suspended M9182form Stop trace Stale ON Start e When this goes ON step trace is started at change enn e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF Step trace execution OFF Suspend e Goes ON when step trace execution is underway Meee ON _ Start e Goes OFF at completion or suspension a mene QnA OF
423. ms Note that even if a watchdog timer WDT reset instruction is executed in the sequence program measurement of the initial scan time is continued 5 Initial execution monitoring time This is a timer for monitoring the execution time of initial execution type programs no default value is set To monitor the execution time of an initial execution type program a value can be set within the range of 10ms to 2000ms in PLC RAS in the parameter mode Unit 10 ms If the initial scan time exceeds the set initial execution monitoring time a WDT ERROR occurs and the Q2ASCPU stops its operation An error may be generated in the range of 0 to 10ms in measurement of the initial execution monitoring time Because of this if the initial execution monitoring time t is set as 10ms a WDT ERROR will occur when the initial scan time exceeds the limit within the range of 10msSt lt 20ms 12 6 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 1 2 Scan execution type program 1 Definition a The scan execution type program is a program that is executed once for every scan starting from the next scan after execution of the initial execution type program b The execution type is set to Scan in program setting in the parameter mode of GPP function 2 Execution of multiple scan execution type programs If there are more than one scan execution type program they are executed in ascending order of the program numbers set in the
424. n When executing each instruction configuration error CALL RET instruction When executing each instruction configuration error Stop Continue Interrupt program error When executing each instruction Unable to execute instruction When executing each instruction Extended instruction error Default When executing each instruction stop Stop Continue figurati SFG program configuration When switching from STOP to RUN error SFC block configuration error When switching from STOP to RUN SFC step configuration error When switching from STOP to RUN SFC syntax error When switching from STOP to RUN SFC operation check error When executing each instruction Default stop Stop Continue SFC program execution error When switching from STOP to RUN SFC block execution error When executing each instruction SFC step execution error When executing each instruction Watchdog error supervision Program timeout Annunciator check When executing each instruction CHK instruction check When executing each instruction MELSEC QnA OFF ON Flickering ON OFF Flickers OFF Flickers Flickers Flickers Flickering ON OFF ON Flickers Flickers Flickers Flickers Flickering ON OFF ON O zZ Flickers Flickers Flickers O Z OFF OFF 1 Can be changed to operation continues by GPP function parameter setting 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
425. n QnA result relevant station Corresponding station errorOne of the stations is not LWTP for Relevant communicating ACPU station ZNWR e ZNWR cannot be executed in the corresponding station execution The specified station is a remote I O station disabled Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET Il D9202 D1202 Local station link type D9203 D1203 e If the host master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET II stations become 1 Stores the present path status of the data link e Data link in forward loop Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link Loopback Forward loop Reverse loop implemented in ae ey e Data link in reverse loop reverse Master D9204 D1204 Link status Loopback No 1 No 2 QnA implemented only in forward direction i t Foopuank Forward loop Reverse loop implemented only in reverse Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions direction Data link disabled Station Station No 1 Fal Forward loopback Reverse loopback e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected App 101 CPU Stores conditions for become 0 up to numbers 1 to 16 QnA Device number b11 b10 b9 D1202 L12 L11 L10 D1203 L28 L27 L26 SD1241 L44 L43 L42 SD1242 L60 L59 L58 If a local station goes down during the
426. n Q2ZASCPU I O assignment set with the parameter cannot be valid for MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET B When setting the I O assignment for a remote I O station build the remote I O network with MELSECNET 10 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 Software package The following shows the system start up software packages to create programs for Q2ASCPU l l Software Package for System Start up Peripheral Device Capable of GPP Functions Personal computer GX Developer SWOIVD GPPQ Set to the following PC CPU type using peripheral device PC CPU model PC CPU model Apart from the above the following software packages can be used e CAD interface package swgIVD CADQ e Data conversion package swgIVD CNVQ e Macro library package SWOIIVD MSDQ swg IVD MSPQ e Ladder sequence linking package swgIVD LNKQ REMARK The following shows the peripheral devices and software packages that cannot be used with Q2ASCPU e ACLJPUProgramming unit e A6WU ROM writer unit e A6DU B Data access unit e AGTEL Modem interface unit e A6GPP Intelligent GPP e A6HGP Hand held graphic programmer e A6PHP Plasma hand held graphic programmer e System start up software package for ACPU SWOO0 GPPA SWOOO SAP2 Utility software package for ACPU SWOHOO GPPATEL SWOOO CADIF SWOOO DRWA SWOOO FUNP SWOOO TSAP2 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 3 3 Q2ASCPU memory block diagram The following block diagram shows the Q2ASCPU memory configuration CPU m
427. n between Q2ASCPU and function version version of special function module SWOIVD GPPQ SW2IVD A1SJ71QE7 A1SD75P A1SJ71 A1SJ61QBT A1SJ71QC2 M k N ACP Oa haa ae SMACPH Syne GPPQ 1 B2 B5 S3 IDO R4 4 N R2 GPPQ 9707B and OLIES 9707B and 9707B and Function version NuNu later Condition Version No No bl BC and later restriction restriction restriction No restriction Local device monitor test Local device switching of subroutine interrupt program Auto refresh function of CC Link A1SJ61QBT11 control instructions ID interface module instructions Compatibility with A1SJ71QC24N commands MELSECNET 10 relay communication from Ethernet REMARK 1 Marks A and x in Table 2 1 indicate as follows Essential for use of function and instruction Irrelevant to function and instruction A Required in the case of access to the QnACPU in other stations from the peripheral device via Ethernet x Not available on peripheral devices 2 GX Developer supports functions of function version B 2 OVERVIEW 2 2 1 Overview of added functions This section shows an overview of the added functions 1 Variety of local device a The device set as the local device at Device in Parameter can be monitored and tested with a peripheral device This function allows checking and debug of the local device in the program monitored with a peripheral device b The local device of the file where the subrouti
428. n cable to 6m 236inch or shorter 4 When using the extension cable do not install it with the main circuit cables which has high voltage large current or install them close together 1 Assign I O numbers to the main base unit first then to the extension base unit 2 Assign I O numbers as if both main base unit and extension base unit have 8 slots each When the A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B for 2 3 5 slots are used as the main base unit add 6 5 3 slots 96 points 80 points 48 points and assign the extension base unit I O numbers 3 16 points are assigned to an empty slot 4 When A6 O B or A5 O B is used be sure to set to a single extension level If it is set to the number of skipped stages 16 points slot are assigned to all of skipped stages x 8 slots and thus it does not work 5 Items 2 to 3 can be changed by the I O assignment Refer to Section 5 3 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms E Si 3 3 System Equipment 3 3 1 System equipment list The following shows the system equipment modules and peripheral devices that can be used in a Q 2ASCPU system 1 For QnA module Number of Occupied Current consumption _ Points points Product Name Model Name Description IO Assignment 5VDC 24VDC Remark Module Type A A e Q2ASCPU Number of I O points 512 built in RAM 28k steps p03 Memory card Q2ASHCPU Number of I O points 512 built in RAM 28k steps CPU module q 2ascPu S1 Number of I O points 1024 built in R
429. n error Offline but does not communicate with the remote station g Auto refresh setting to the CC Link is performed using the following peripheral devices e Personal computer GX Developer SW2IVD GPPQ type GPP function software package 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION 3 Setting method Auto refresh setting to the CC Link is set with the following procedures a When the CC Link is selected in the Parameter the CC Link setting screen appears CC Link setting Set the number of the CC Link modules 1 to 8 1 Number of modules fj Cancel N Esc Close b Set the number of the CC Link modules loaded on the main base unit and extension base unit for the Q2ASCPU and selct Execute then the screen of CC Link setting list appears Module number setting for refresh setting j Link eee Batch p Batch refresndevicg O OOOO O OO device a P B a ut E ae aa we faa aa sar Si PR register Fsc Finished Confirmation of settings Press key for setting Pressing the key registers the set data 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA c Move the cursor to the module number position for auto refresh setting and press the key Detail The CC Link setting screen appears Select 4 Auxiliary setting and 5 Station information setting to set detailed data I O number setting of the CC Link module whose number CC Link setting Label name Setting of remote station connected to
430. n for 9th CC Link modules and more can be performed with the CC Link module using the FROM TO instruction The following GPP function software packages are required to perform the auto refresh setting of the CC Link e Personal computer GX Developer SWO IVD GPPQ type GPP function software package It is necessary to upgrade the master station local station module of CC Link to function version B or later 2 OVERVIEW 3 Netwotk relay from Ethernet module a In the network system with mixture of Ethernet and MELSECNET 10 data can be communicated with the Q2ASCPU of other stations via multiple Ethernets or MELSECNET 10 modules b For the network relay from the Ethernet module the function version of the Ethernet module should be upgraded to B or later 4 A1SJ71QC24N compatible commands are possible a The following A1SJ71QC24N commands are available e Multiple blocks batch read Command 0406 e Multiple blocks batch write Command 1406 b Multiple blocks batch read batch write is available with A1SJ71QC24N R2 R4 Multiple blocks batch read batch write is not available with A1SJ71QC24 R2 R4 For commands of multiple blocks batch read batch write refer to the following manual e Corresponding Additional Explanation for A1SJ71QC24N R2 R4 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms ELS EC A 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This section describes the system configurations that can be used for a system centered on a Q2ASCPU cautions on co
431. n from host Write iis Execution Time Sampling Trace Step Monitor Status Latch Simulation Measurement Program Trace Operation Execution time x x measurement pore fe f fe fete e pees fe f fe fefele mew fe f fe fe fele mom fe f fe e e e ome fe f fe fe fete l Simultaneous execution possible However the detailed condition setting at only one peripheral device capable of GPP functions is valid detailed conditions cannot be set at the other peripheral devices capable of GPP functions x Can only be executed from one peripheral device capable of GPP functions 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 8 10 1 Simultaneous monitoring by several people The Q2ASCPU allows monitoring for several people Setting of other station monitor file in the built in RAM system area allows monitoring at a high speed from other stations Monitor file setting for the host is not required Operation Procedures The operation for simultaneous monitoring by several people is described below 1 Select 5 Format with Option for B PC Memory Batch Processing in the 2 PC menu in the online mode and set a monitor file for another station The following shows setting examples PC Memory Batch Processing 15 K Steps Execute c gt Gance 1 N gt Space Select Esc Close Up to 15k steps in 1k step units can be set as the system area The area corresponding to one monitor file for another station is
432. n set at the PLC parameter program settings Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset CAN T EXE PRG The program file is incorrect Alternatively the file contents are not those of a sequence program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset CAN T EXE PRG There are no program files at all Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset CAN T EXE PRG Two or more SFC normal programs or control programs have been designated Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter device allocation setting and the program file device allocation correspond to the numerical values there file name and correct if necessary e If PLC parameter device setting is changed batch write the parameter and program file into the PLC Edit the PLC parameter program setting to yes Alternatively delete unneeded programs Check whether the program version is x x PG and check the file contents to be sure they are for a sequenc
433. n synchronization 1 to 100 0 is invalid Remote I O station Remote device station Intelligent device station 1 station 2 station 3 station 4 station Specification of reserved station Specification of invalid station N and M indicate the following N Number of the module counted from the first M Network type M Network type Network type Network type Master station MELSECNET Master station Local station MELSECNET II mixed Master station Standby master station MELSECNET II Master station 3H MELSECNET 10 Remote master station 13 10 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS Since the Q2ASCPU has a built in RAM as a standard feature to store parameters and programs programs can be executed without installing a memory card Each CPU model has a built in RAM of the following program capacity ZA SOP rice ccncndiweccnmes 28k steps 112k bytes Q2ASCPU S1 60k steps 240k bytes QZASHGPU sivcssscnsciesceee 28k steps 112k bytes Q2ASHCPU S1 60k steps 240k bytes 14 1 14 SELECTING MEMORY CARD MODELS 14 1 Applications of Memory Cards A memory card is required in the following cases 1 To perform a boot operation Parameters programs initial device values comments and boot files are stored ina memory card and they are loaded to the built inRAM at the time of program execution To use file registers To use local devices 2
434. n the sequence program from the 9th module Since auto refresh is not possible with send received data for the separate refresh I O modules and for the remote terminal units No 1 to No 14 use them by the FROM TO instructions However the remote terminal units shown below are subject of auto refresh in the limited area AJ35PTF R2 RS 232C interface module AJ35PT OPB M1 S3 mount type tool box AJ35PT OPB P1 S3 portable type tool box For the master modules set up for auto refresh since the Q2ASCPU automatically turns ON the link communication start signal Y n 18 or Y n 28 it is not necessary to turn it on from the sequence program Auto refresh of I O data is performed by the batch after the Q2ASCPU performs the END instruction Auto refresh processing is performed when the CPU module is in the RUN PAUSE STEP RUN status The master module may perform the processing while the link communication start signal Y n 18 or Y n 28 is OFF depending on the remote terminal units connected For instance if the AJ35PTF R2 RS 232C interface unit is used without protocol it is necessary to write parameters to the parameter area buffer memory address 860 to 929 while the link communication start signal is OFF Since the link communication start signal becomes ON after the CPU module enters the RUN status and one scan is performed write the parameters during the first 1 scan ON Link communication start signal OFF Y n 28 SM402 ON
435. n the Q2ASCPU the scan time varies since the processing time differs depend on the execution status of the instructions used in the sequence program Constant scan is a function whereby the sequence program is repeatedly performed while maintaining constant scan time Scan time when the constant scan is not used Sequence program END processing END 0 END D END 0 END 0 lt 50 ms 50 ms 50 ms Scan time when the constant scan time is set to 7Oms Sequence program END processing Scan time when the constant scan time is set to 100ms while performing multiple programs Sequence program A Sequence program Bo Sequence program C END processing Wait time a i BO ms k ms 100 ma Fig 10 1 Constant scan operation When the low speed execution type program is used either this constant scan function or a low speed program execution time has to be set For details refer to the QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 10 2 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 2 Setting the constant scan time a The setting is made in PC RAS in the parameter mode of GPP function e When performing the constant scan set the constant scan time e When not performing the constant scan leave the field blank Example When setting 100ms to Constant scan PC RAS Setting 4 Constant Scan L 166 ms b Set constant scan time that is longer than the maximum scan time of the sequence program If the scan
436. n type program they are executed in ascending order of the program numbers set in the parameter mode 12 4 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 3 END processing When execution of all initial execution type programs is completed END processing is performed and a scan execution type program is executed from the next scan Power ON RESET RUN CPU module STOP RUN lt _ a a Initial execution type program A l 1 scan Executed in ascending order of numbers in program setting t l x Scan execution type program 1 L cme mmm Instructions that contain a completion device cannot be used in initial execution type programs 12 5 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 4 Initial scan time a This is the execution time of an initial execution type program If multiple initial execution type programs are to be executed it is the time required to complete execution of all these programs b The Q2ASCPU measures the initial scan time and stores it in special registers SD522 and SD523 The initial scan time can be checked by monitoring SD522 and SD523 a an Stores initial scan time values of 1ms or less us units Stores initial scan time values in 1ms units Example If 3 and 400 are stored in SD522 and SD523 respectively the initial scan time is 3 4ms The accuracy of each scan time stored in the special registers is 0 1
437. n type program is executed the execution time of the scan execution type program is the time required for completing execution of all these programs 1 Refer to Section 12 1 3 e The Q2ASCPU measures the present minimum and maximum values for the scan time and stores them in special registers SD520 SD521 and SD524 to SD527 7 The scan time can be checked by monitoring these special registers Present value Minimum value Maximum value Stores scan time values of 1ms or less us units Stores scan time values in 1ms units Example If 3 and 400 are stored in SD520 and SD521 respectively the scan time is 3 4ms 2 The accuracy of each scan time stored in the special registers is 0 1ms Note that even if the watchdog timer WDT reset instruction is executed in the sequence program measurement of each scan time is continued 6 WDT watchdog timer This is a timer that monitors the scan time and 200ms is set as a default value WDT is set within the range of 10ms to 2000ms in PLC RAS in the parameter mode Unit 10ms When using a low speed execution type program s make sure that the specified WDT value is greater than the sum of the scan time and the low speed execution type program execution time If the scan time total of execution times for scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs END processing time and low speed END processing time exceeds the time set for WDT a
438. nA 2 I O numbers after performing I O assignment using GPP function and replacing the module A1S38B module Input 16 points Input 32 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points Output 16 points a 2 n D z a CPU module X00 X80 X20 X30 Y40 Y50 Y60 Y70 to to to to to to to to XOF X9F X2F X3F Y4F Y5F Y6F Y7F When the I O number set for Start XY in the I OAssign is changed also set the Start XY for the next module to avoid changing the I O numbers of the module for which the change was made and the subsequent modules In the example above since 20 is set for the Start XY for the second slot consecutive I O numbers starting from X30 are set for slot 3 and later 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT mms ELS EC A 3 When combining an input module and output module having non consecutive I O numbers on a base unit When controlling the machine I O numbers XO to X3F Y40 to Y7F and machine I O numbers X200 to X23F and Y240 to X27F with a single programmable controller it is desired to combine input modules and output modules on the base unit To achieve this operation perform I O assignment as follows a Loading status and I O numbers to be set Input modules _ meet moches Cutout modules j modules amp xo00 x200 xo20 x220 oa y240 oso 260 eo Mount input modules of machines a E and alternately to mount t
439. nA Continuous transition Corresponding CPU M9103 transition information device is not set effective e OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or Continuous When transition is during continuous transition and ON when continuous M9104 SM1104 SM324 transition completed transition is not executed QnA suspension flag When no transition e Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode Step transition SM1108 SM90 monitoring timer start equivalent of SD90 Step transition SM1109 SM91 monitoring timer start equivalent of SD91 Step transition SM1110 SM92 monitoring timer start equivalent of SD92 M9108 M9109 M9110 Step transition og otic a e Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition monitoring timer Qe E MONNOMO IMEN FRAAI monitoring timer is started M9111 SM1111 SM93 g ON Monitoring timer reset g l 7 QnA start equivalent of Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition start oe SD93 monitoring timer M9112 Step transition SM1112 SM94 monitoring timer start equivalent of SD94 Step transition SM1113 SM95 manan timer start equivalent of SD95 Step transition SM1114 SM96 monitoring timer start equivalent of SD96 Active step igs SM1180 SM825 sampling trace Trace started Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is QnA Trace completed completed Reset when sampling trace is started completion flag Trace n
440. nciator number F number that will be turned ON when the monitoring timer times out b15 to b8 b7 to bO i i F number setting Timer time limit setting 02 to 255 1 to 255 s 1 s units e By turning ON any of SM1108 to SM1114 the monitoring timer starts If the transition condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is turned on 99 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 11 Special register Special ACPU Special Register Special Register for Modification Register after Conversion Corresponding CPU When I O modules of which data are different from those entered D9116 D9117 D9118 D9119 D9120 D9121 D9122 D9123 D9124 D9125 D9126 D9127 D9128 D9129 D9130 D9131 D9132 SD1116 SD1117 SD1118 SD1119 SD1120 SD1121 SD1122 SD1123 SD1124 SD1125 SD1126 SD1127 SD1128 SD1129 SD1130 SD1131 SD1132 SD63 SD71 I O module verification error Number of annuciator detections Annunciator detection number Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules with verification errors Number of annuciator detections Annunciator detection number SD1116 O SD1117 0 at power ON have been detected the I O module numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O module numbers
441. nd processing An attempt was made to perform a request during step forced end processing An attempt was made to perform a request during holding step reset processing A block No with no created block or out of range block No has been designated A step No for which no step has been created was designated The designated number of cycles is out of range Setting is out of range Check and correct the set number Setting is out of range Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Unable to execute due to on going process Setting is incorrect Setting is incorrect Setting is out of range App 138 Check and correct the set number Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Reissue the req
442. nd power failure compensation function drops Even though programs and contents of power failure compensation function are not erased immediately when these special relays become ON the contents could be erased if the ON status of the special relay fails to be recognized Replace the battery before the total latch time after special relay SM51 turns ON reaches the stipulated time SM51 is a battery voltage drop alarm and it remains ON once turning it ON even if the battery voltage returns to normal SM52 is a battery voltage drop alarm and after turning ON it goes OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal After SM51 and SM52 have turned ON immediately replace the battery SM51 is a battery voltage drop alarm and it remains ON once turning it ON even if the battery voltage returns to normal In order to determine which of these memory s battery has sustained the voltage drop check the contents of special relay SD51 and SD52 When the voltage of any memory s battery drops the bit in SD51 and SD52 that corresponds to each memory turns ON SD51 SD52 bit No Corresponding memory 21 3 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC QnA The relationship of back up between the status of the batteries installed in the CPU module and memory cards is explained below The following two points are applied The battery installed in the CPU module does not back up the RAM memories of the memory cards The batteries installed in the me
443. nd then start the system When the current has reached the normal value the system will start from the first 2 Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protector shuts off the 5VDC circuit and stops the system if overvoltage of 5 5 to 6 5V is applied to the circuit The power supply module LED turns OFF When restarting the system switch the input power OFF then back ON The system is started up with an initial start If the system is not booted and the LED remains off this means that the power supply module has to be replaced 3 Allowable momentary power failure period The allowable momentary power failure period of programmable controller CPUs varies depending on the power supply module used In the system using the A1S63P it is the time from when the primary side of the stabilized power supply supplying 24VDC to the A1S63P turns OFF until the voltage Secondary side has dropped from 24VDC to the specified value 15 6VDC or less 4 Inrush current If power is reapplied immediately after power OFF within 5 seconds an inrush current exceeding the specified value may flow for 2ms or less Therefore before reapplying power make sure that 5 seconds have elapsed after power off When selecting a fuse or breaker for an external circuit consider the above as well as meltdown and detection characteristics 16 2 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 16 1 2 Power supply module selection A power supply module is selected based on t
444. ne program interrupt program is stored has made it possible to be used during execution of the subroutine program interrupt program For this function even if an operation using the local device of the subroutine program is carried out the original local device cannot be overwritten In addition even if an operation using the local device of the interrupt program the local device which is executed before starting up the interrupt program cannot be overwritten c The following GPP function software packages are required to perform the monitor test of the local device e Personal computer GX Developer SWO IVD GPPQ type GPP function software package 2 Auto Refresh Setting of CC Link a When setting auto refresh of the CC Link on the peripheral function cyclic communication with other stations connected to the CC Link can be automatically performed according to the set auto refresh data e Remote I O station Communication in ON OFF data e Remote device station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data e Intelligent device station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data e Local station master station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data The auto refresh setting of the CC Link allows communication with other stations using the FROM TO instruction without communicating with the master station of the CC Link b Auto refresh is available for up to 8 CC Link modules for each unit of Q2ASCPU c Communicatio
445. ne the causes of faults during debugging Function Description This function can only be used when the CPU module is set to STEP RUN The step operation function provides the following three functions For explanations of each function refer to Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 3 e Step execution e Partial execution e Skip execution 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 8 7 1 Step execution Step execution is a sequence program execution that performs by one step at a time starting from the designated step It allows a sequence program execution while checking an execution status of the sequence program and the contents of each device during debugging There are two types of step execution as described below 1 Step execution for one instruction Instructions are executed one for each step starting from the step where program operation is stopped Program operation is stopped again after execution of each instruction This method is used to confirm the status of each devices after execution of one instruction Sequence program example Execution from step 0 c Yolo rir 1 OUT Y10 vov Yoo 0 J JCE 3 WOW r200 L ian a OUT Y o H A H RST 00 H 10 RST DO sf lt a nN Oe eet ee eit The execution command 4 from a peripheral device stops operation after exe cution of each instruction ee eel to Oo a mt go t e G Oo tH Fie ote EE oe cae a eee ere Fig 8 2 Step execution for each
446. nel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction As our programmable controllers are designed assuming the pollution level 2 use them in an environment of pollustion level 2 or lower Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist however temporary conductivity may occasionally occur due to accumulated dust Generally this is the level for the inside of the IP54 equivalent control panel in a control room or on a shop floor Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment As shown above the programmable controller can meet pollution level 2 when stored in a control panel equivalent to IP54 20 15 20 EMC DIRECTIVES AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms E Si 7 20 2 5 Module installation 1 Installing modules contiguously The left side face of each QnA series I O module is open When installing I O modules to the base do not allow any empty slots between modules If a slot to the left of a 100 200VAC module is left empty the circuit board containing the hazardous voltage
447. nfiguring the system and the system equipment 3 1 System Configuration The following shows the configuration of equipment and peripheral device when a Q2ASCPU is used in a stand alone system 3 1 1 Equipment configuration in a stand alone system 4 Q1MEM LLL A6BAT Memory card Q2ASCPU Battery optional A1S6LIP N power supply A1SCLLILINB module Extension cable ere A1SXLLiinput module building block type A1SYLL output module Special function module A6LIB extension base with power supply module ASCO B A5LIB extension base Extension cable without power supply module A1S6L B S1 extension base A1S6LIP N power supply A6LIP power supply module AXLL input module AYLL output module Special function module with power supply module module A1S5LIB S1 extension base without power supply module A1SXLLI input module A1SYLILJ output module Special function module Upto one memory card can be installed if required SRAM and EPROM memory cards allow file read write when mounted on the CPU module 2 When using an A1S50B S1 A50B extension base unit pay particular attention to the power supply capacity of the main base unit In the case of I O modules and the special function module with a high internal current consumption mounting on an A1S60B S1 AGL extension base unit is recommended Refer to Section 16 1 and Section 17 3 for details 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA
448. ng Run Setting Write into PC during Run state lt 4 gt Write into PC in Stop state lt C 3 Don t Write into PC Gd Dd e 7 Write Method at Write During Run 1 Normal 2 gt Relatively using Pointer a Set 1 Write into PC during Run state for 4 Write During Run Setting b Select 1 Normal or 2 Relatively using Pointer for 7 Write Method at Write During Run If more than one person is to perform a write during RUN operation with respect to the same file set a write during RUN pointer in advance and select 2 Relatively using Pointer 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA The example below shows a case where peripheral device capable of GPP functions A performs write during RUN from PO and peripheral device capable of GPP functions B performs write during RUN from P1 The program enclosed in the frame is the program subject to write during RUN Writes PO or later in the machining program in RUN Writes P1 or later in the machining program in RUN XO X2 Peripheral device A Peripheral device B capable of GPP capable of GPP functions functions NOTE Refer to Section 8 3 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 1 Function List The following shows the functions for maintenance Function that monitors watchdog errors due to CPU module Watchdog timer Section 9 2 hardware or program errors Function whereby the Q2ASCP
449. ng as follows RUN LED Flickers 4 After this occurs the CPU can be placed into RUN state by setting the RUN STOP key switch to RESET In this case internal CPU module data such device data are cleared To prevent the internal CPU module information from being cleared switch the RUN STOP key switch STOP RUN again without resetting Q9 Ner 1 If Remote STOP gt RUN is performed for the CPU module the CPU will be in RUN status not in PROG CHECK status 15 4 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES 2 3 Performing latch clear To perform latch clear operate the RUN STOP key switch as follows 1 Move the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module from the STOP to the L CLR position several times to flicker the USER LED on the CPU module front Normally the LED flickers after the switch is moved several three or four times When the USER LED flickers it indicates that latch clear is ready 2 After the USER LED has flickered moving the key switch from the STOP to the L CLR position again executes latch clear and lights up the USER LED When the USER LED is lit for 2 seconds and then goes off it indicates normal completion of latch clear 3 To cancel latch clear midway move the key switch to the RUN position to put the CPU module in a RUN status or to the RESET position to reset 1 The latch clear operation can be set enabled or disabled for each device in the device set
450. ng is an explanation of the screen above The following settings can be made for Exec Status Latch amp Disp Status 1 Operation 2 Status Latch and 3 Trace Condition a Operation Select one of the following 1 Register Start The status latch is registered and started Device data collection is started 2 Suspension The status latch statuses are cleared 3 Display Status The status latch statuses are displayed on the same screen 4 Trigger execution The trigger is executed Refer to Precaution 6 b Status Latch Select one of the following 1 Select From List Data from among the status latch files in the memory card are selected 2 File Shown Right The drive number and status latch file name are set c Trace Condition Select one of the following 1 Overwrite Conditions onto CPU s The status latch condition in an existing status latch file is overwritten 2 Use Condition in CPU Status latch under the condition in the status latch file designated in 2 Status Latch is executed 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 4 Retrieve the status latch results from the CPU module and display them a Read the status latch results from the CPU module by using 8 Read from PC Results on Status Latch screen b Display the read trace results by setting 1 Monitor Target on the Monitor Target Setting screen of Option menu in the ladder mode to 3 Status Latch
451. nications local or remote I O station and the master station underway Parameter communication etc Local station OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I O remote I O station Abnormal station Local station remote I O station forward or reverse loop error Online f ON Offline station to Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or is Link status i stationtest or self in station to station test or self loopback test mode loopback test Forward loopline rr seme Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse Abnormal loop lines of a local or a remote I O station M9246 SM1246 Daana an OFF Reception Depends on whether or not data has been received from the ON No reception master station M9247 SM1247 Bata neneccice OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has received ON No reception data from its master station in a three tier system Parameters not OFF Reception Depends on whether or not link parameters have been M9250 SM1250 i received ON No reception received from the master station OFF Normal 7 m Link relay ON Abnormal Depands on the data link condition at the local station OFF Not being executed ON Forward or reverse Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a loop test execution forward or
452. nimum bending radius of the cables If any device is installed in front of the programmable controller i e installed in the back of the door position it to secure at least 100mm 3 94inch of distance to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat Also place the base unit at least 50mm 1 97inch away from any other equipment on the right or left When installing the base unit to DIN rail in an environment with large vibration use a vibration proofing bracket A1S PLT D Mounting the vibration proofing bracket A1S PLT D enhances the resistance to vibration Depending on the environment to set up the base unit it is also recommended to fix the base unit to the control panel directly 19 9 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA 19 4 2 Installation Installation location of the main base unit and the extension base unit is shown below Indicates the location of ceiling of the panel wiring duct or other part 30mm 1 18in ch Main base unit Extension base unit or more O O 30mm 1 18inch or more Fig19 1 Parallel Installation Indicates the location of ceiling of the panel wiring duct or other part a At least 30mm Basic base A1S3_ B A1S38HB A38HBEU 1 18 inch Basic base A1S3L B A1S38HB A38HBEU At least 30mm 1 18 inch At least 30mm 1 18 inch At least 30mm 7 1 18 inch Extension
453. nit press the module completely so that its hook is locked into the base When dismounting the module press the hooks until they come off the base completely and then pull the module toward you See section 19 5 16 4 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms i St i7 16 3 Part Names The following gives the names and description of the parts of the power supply modules 1 A1S61PN 2 A1S62PN MELSE CAIS61PN MELS E CAis 2PN INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC 5VDC JA 105VA 24VDC0 6A Hz l Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of A1S61P or A1S62P terminal 4 LG terminal l is 1 2 of the input voltage 16 5 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE mms E St 17 3 A1S63P DCI 6 31 2V ew The protective cover of the terminal block D Used to fix the module to the base unit Module mounting screw M4 screw tightening torque 59 to 88 N cm 1 Do not cable to the unused terminals such as FG and LG on the terminal block terminals whose name is not printed on the terminal cover 2 Be sure to ground the terminal LG to the protective ground conductor 16 6 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE mms EL Si 1 17 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE This section explains the specifications of the base units the main and extension base units and extension cables available for the systems and the application standards for use of extension base units 17 1 Base Unit Specifications 1 Main bas
454. nitial e Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code Stored into lower Higher byte Lower byte vioh tored into higher spaa ONS mernalksystem i byte S Initial D9060 QnA version software version ee i see For version A for example 41H is stored Note The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case App 84 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 3 System clocks counters Table App 3 5 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanat xplalarlon When Set ACPU CPU D9000 e Sanani programmable controller CPU module RUN 1 is added each S Status SOUNE it secang unis e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 enange SD414 2n second clock 2n second clock e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 U Nen setting units Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 QnA 1 second Number of counts D9022 QnA e Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to SD420 Coemi Number of counts RUN E S Every PND in each scan Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program processing e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 e Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module is set to Low speed scan Number of counts RUN S Every END counter in each scan e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 processing e Used only for low speed e
455. nment is performed using GPP function 1 When changing the assignment for an empty slot from 16 points to 0 or 32 points When the A1S35B is used there are three empty slots When setting the assignment for these to 0 points in order to increase the number of I O points that can be used by the CPU module When reserving 32 I O points for a current empty slot to which a 32 point input module is loaded later in order to prevent the I O number assignment change To achieve these operations perform O assignment as follows a Loading status and I O numbers A1S35B base unit CPU module Input 16 points power supply module Input 32 points Input 32 points Output 16 points Output 16 points S 48 points occupied A1S65B base unit power supply module Output 16 points Output 32 points Output 32 points Y O O N ioe O AO CO DO EO 100 to to to to to BF CF DF FF 11F b I O numbers when I O assignment is performed using GPP function 1 I O assignment example A1SX41 A1SX40 A1835B A18X41 Power Supply A15X40 A1S61P Extension Cable A18C12B8 A1SY41 Extention 1 A1SX41 A1S65B A18S 40 Power Supply A1S61P A1SY 44 Extension Cable Pap sree PolDin Mexi The example of I O assignment with GPP function 5 9 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNMENT MELSEC QnA 2 I O numbers after performing I O assignment using GPP functon A1S35B base unit 0 5 6 7 l
456. notice SH NA 3599 K Model Q2AS H CPU 1 User s Manual MODEL Q2ASCPU U E 134858 SH NA 3599 K 1101 MEE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
457. nput is being conducted reception enabled S Instruction reception flag for Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the QnA Keyboard input execution n PKEY instruction CPU reception disabled l Instruction not o eer executed Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed penne ton QnA reception flag f execution Instruction execution PID bumpless processing Matched Specifies whether to match the set value SV with QnA for complete Not matched the process value PV or not in the manual mode derivative Selection of refresh Select whether link refresh processing will be Performs link refresh eee processing during S Peroimandink performed or not when only communication with the U New QnA COM instruction ereh CPU module is made at the execution of the COM execution instruction Enable disable local Local device disabled A Oca ae dis So program called at execution of the CALL instruction U New QnA device at CALL Local device enabled f is valid or invalid a leer ocal Local device disabled Set whether the local device at execution of the device in interrupt i U New QnA Local device enabled interrupt program is valid or invalid program i a Switches ON when the number of the CC Link CC Link dedicated ON CC Link dedicated dedicated instructions that can be executed U New QnA instruction executable simultaneously reaches 32 Switches OFF when the instruc
458. nresnrnnrrrnrnrernrrnrrnrrnernresrrnnernerenrene 19 9 1942 MStalatiOm ise S 19 10 19 5 Installation and Removal of Modules ccccceccccccceeeceeeeceeeceeeeee esse eeseeeeaeeeseeesenesseeeseeeseneesanss 19 11 19 6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof COVED cece ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeseeeeeeeeseeesaees 19 13 ERE WNI a A ee A N T A ET tT 19 15 TO WINN TNS UU CTIOIN S aisa E a aO 19 15 19 7 2 Wiring to module terminals arican ara e elas choc inch dae eae ede 19 18 19 8 Precautions When Connecting Uninterruptible Power Supply Module UPS cee 19 19 20 1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC DIrectives ccceccceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeseeeseeees 20 1 20 1 1 EMC Directive related standards cccccccccseccesceceeeceeeceueeceeeceueceueeceeeceuecsueeseeessueseaeenes 20 1 20 1 2 Installation inside the Control panel ccc cceecesececeeceeeeee cess eeseeeseeeseeeseueeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeees 20 3 ZOE CALE S cee castes eek ets es ed ogra tad se legate ele Aodeed an Sicaans ee cee eeeaiceea ted ue eda 20 4 20 1 4 Power supply MOCUIE cccccecccececeeeceeeecacecaueceueecaeceueceacecseeceueesueesaeessusesueessusssaessaeeenes 20 9 20 19 72 F a GR re reece er ee a ee eres ene eee eee eer 20 9 ZO AMO FENE CONC ers ht ss tae a det odaee eustd sare eceeeeseeeaeae 20 10 20 1 7 Noise filter power supply line filter 20 0 cece ceccc cece eeeceeeeseeeseeeseeees
459. nt temperature range of 20 to 75 C operating ambient temperature of O to 55 C 3 The actual service value reference value represents a battery life that is calculated based on the values measured at storage ambient temperatures of 40 C and 25 C This value is intended for refe rence only as it varies with characteristics of the memory 4 The guaranteed time after power off is 10 minutes when The battery connector is disconnected The battery lead wire is broken 5 The battery duration maximum life is 5 years 43 800 hours Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows 1 Replace the battery in four to five years even when it has not been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table 2 Replace the battery when it has been used exceeding the guaranteed value shown in the above table and SM51 is on 1 Use the battery within the time shown by the guaranteed value of the battery life 2 If the battery may be used exceeding the guaranteed time perform ROM operation to protect data in case that the battery will be exhausted during power off of the programmable controller Or after SM51 turns on back up data within the backup power time 3 When the battery A6BAT is not connected to the CPU module its service life is five years 4 When the battery low special relay SM51 turns on immediately change the battery Even if an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the
460. ntrast the Q2ASCPU turns timer coils ON OFF updates current values and turns contacts ON OFF on execution of the OUT instruction Note that after conversion the turning of contacts ON OFF may be up to one scan faster Example Timing for turning contact ON a With ACPU b With Q2ASCPU l o a Coil ON Coil ON contact ON TO a Program flow ssa Bla Contact in Contact in i program ON program ON B l Contact in device memory ON END processing EE EESE pe se ke da al In the case of ACPU a timer contact will turn ON quickly if it is located in the first step In the case of Q2ASCPU it will turn ON quickly if it is located in the step following OUT T b Note that processing differs as follows when the set value of a timer is set to KO e For ACPU count is in infinite units timer does not count up e For Q2ASCPU the timer counts up instantaneously Interrupt counter Interrupt counters for Q2ASCPU count the number of interrupt occurrences However the counter contact does not turn ON even when the count has reached the set value The operation of interrupt counters for ACPU differs according to the CPU type a Interrupt counters for ASHCPU AnACPU or AnUCPU count the number of interrupts occurrences When the count reaches the set value the counter contact turns ON In order to achieve the same operation as with interrupt counters for ASHCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU when using a Q2ASC
461. nts independent dual axis simultaneous linear interpolation circular interpolation Used for positioning control Digital output For MR H B MR J B MR J2 B A1SD75M ial 32 point opine independent triple axis simultaneous dual axis peciass ponts linear interpolation dual axis circular interpolation ID interface module ID ASDASD Connectable reader writer unit one paca de ponts interface ID interface module maag A1SD35ID2 l Special 32 points Connectable reader writer units two For MELSECNET II data link system master station A1SJ71AP21 2 Special 32 points and local station Maximum 2 dul b For MELSECNET II data link system master station modules can be used for one and local station Special 32 points CPU module for G1 type optical fiber cable aire o For MELSECNET I data link system master station Special 32 points Section 3 3 2 PASU TATE and local station for coaxial cable p P MELSECNET II data link module A1SJ71AP21 S32 3 Product Name MELSECNET B data link module B NET interface module MELSECNET 10 data link module CC Link system master module MELSECNET MI NI S3 master module MELSEC I O LINK master module S LINK interface module AS I interface module Position detection module PLC easier monitoring module SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Model Name Description A1SJ71AT21B For MELSECNET B data link sy
462. nual 1996 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable logic controller MELSEC QnA series Before using your new PLC please read this manual thoroughly to gain an understanding of its functions so that you can use it properly Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user Table of Contents ki ENO OUTS Manua h 5 cet teed acre heted ett ote deta dlict a eilass ines please uacdebhd diet Mtude a 1 1 1 2 Abbreviations and Generic Terms Used in this Manual cccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeaues 1 2 2 OVERVIEW 2 1to2 8 DNS WANS AEE AE A EEE AEAEE O NE EE EES E E I IEE EEE AEE E EEA E 2 1 22 Additional Funcions OF QZ2ASCPU snese aaaea nE a aa E aA E N 2 5 2 2 1 Overview OF added TUMCHOMGS saisrnsiissisistn ee aa aaa a e Aaa a a sence iad 2 7 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 1to3 23 Sal so VSlCM COMMOUNAUOM irino a a e a a EA 3 1 3 1 1 Equipment configuration in a stand alone system cccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeaeeseeeeaees 3 1 3 1 2 Configuration of peripheral devices capable of QZASCPU ccc ccccecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaees 3 2 3 2 System Configuration Overview ccccccccscccseccceeccsecceecccueccseeceeeceuecegeeceeeceueesueesaeeseusesueeseeessusseas 3 3 29 ASVSICMMEGUIDIMGMI 2c ssi toaeses cereale et agate a a cae ta N Soon cieas aec uh ceuaddaedesacdanticke 3 5 S 3 1 System CQUIDIMENU NSE serrera a a a a a tse caedeketbanteade tanc
463. nunciator number MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed lt CHK gt ERR Error detected by the CHK instruction Collateral informationmmon 9010 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Failure No HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value annunciator number Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value error number there CPU Status Continue RUN USER LED On ERR USER LED On CPU Status ii Continue QnA CPU Status Continue RUN USER LED On ERR USER LED On CPU Status Continue 2 For the Basic model QCPU the special register SD207 to DS209 for LED indication priority can turn off the indication The LED indication is always OFF for the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU 22 44 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 22 3 10 Canceling of Errors Q series CPU module can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the errors allow the CPU module to continue its operation To cancel the errors follow the steps shown below 1 2 3 4 Eliminate the cause of the error Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50 Energize the special relay SM50 OFF gt ON Th
464. nunciators execution SD64 When F goes ON due to OUT F or SET F the F numbers which go D9125 progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered poe The F numbers turned OFF by RSTF are deleted from SD64 SD79 Daag and the F numbers stored after the deleted F numbers are shifted to the SD66 preceding registers D9127 SD67 Execution of the LEDR instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 D9128 up by one SD68 This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on the of D9129 the Q3A Q4ACPU After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will not be SDD stored from SD64 through SD79 D3130 SD70 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET D9131 F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38F110F151F210 LEDR Ai wi i A A A m a aa SD71 sD62 _0_ 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 e D9132 Table of etecte SD72 Saren idee soes 0 1121312131415 1617181918 Number of S Instruction New QnA annunciator detection number annunciators execution SD73 numbers detected New SD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 SD74 soes 0 0 a5 90 90 CA Naw 1511511570 cee 65 65 65 38 38 38 38 11 eh ad o 151 151 Number ani o o 210 0 detected HEN EE Go o an etetett tetetete S ojlojojojojojo o o o o o o e Set the annunciator number F number that will D9108 SM90 be turned ON when the step transition monitoring timer setting or monitoring timeout SM91 o
465. o an execution request Scan execution Standby type type program program SSeS E See ee SSeS Executed only if Constant scanning or Low speed program execution time is set Low speed execution type program For the Q2ASCPU all execution types need not be set Use initial execution type low speed execution type and standby type programs marked with asterisks if required 12 3 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU mms ELS EC A 12 1 1 Initial execution type programs 1 Definition a The initial execution type program is a program executed only once when a programmable controller is powered ON when a CPU module is reset or when the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN b The execution type is set to Init in program setting in the parameter mode of GPP function c Initial execution type programs can be used for applications such as the initial processing for a special function module where once the program has been executed it need not be executed from the next scan When initial execution Control by a single program type program is used Program A Initial execution y type programs Divided into initial execution type pro gram and scan exe cution type program Program B i Program executed Scan execution oneveryscan type program 2 Execution of multiple initial execution type programs If there are more than one initial executio
466. o the total current consumption of I O modules special function modules and peripheral devices to which power is supplied by the power supply module Remember that when an extension base module such as A1S52B 1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B or A58B are used power is supplied by the main base For 5VDC current consumption of I O modules special function modules and peripheral devices refer to Section 3 3 CPU module I O module such as A1SX10 and A1SY10 Special module such as A1SD61 and A1SD71 S2 Peripheral devices Power supp ec eure Q6PU converter cable for connection of module CPU module and personal computer etc Peripheral device AD71TU Select the module in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral device that will be connected to the special function module For example when AD71TU is connected to A1SD 71 S2 the current consumption of AD71TU must also be considered 2 Selection of power supply module when extension base modules such as A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A52B A55B and A58B are used When extension base modules such as A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A1S58B S 1 A52B A55B and A58B are used the 5 VDC power supply is supplied through the extension cable from the power supply module of the main base module Thus when one of these units is used pay attantion to the following a When mounting a power supply module on the main base unit select a mode
467. od shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unp
468. ode QnACPU Programming Manual Manual SFC SFC GX Developer Operating Manual SW O IVD GPPQ Software Package Operating Manual Offline 13 8 13 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC QnA Network parametars Setting the CC Link _ Make the settings for automatic refresh of the CC Link system Number of CC Link COOOH Set the number of CC Link master modules to be used Master module head CNM2H I O No Module type Receiving data batch refresh bit device Input data Transmission data batch refresh bit device Output data Receiving data batch refresh word device CNM 1H Remote device RWr CC Link Transmission data batch detailed refresh device settings Remote device RWw Batch refresh device for Make the detailed setting required for automatic refresh of special relay the CC Linkl system Batch refresh device for special register Number of retries Number of automatic return stations Station type Station Number of occupied stations information setting Specification of reserved station Specification of invalid station 13 9 13 PARAMETER LIST Setting Default value Setting range OOOOH to OFEOH M Master station L Local station T Stand by station Reference Section Reference Manual X M L B T ST C D W R ZR Y M L B T ST C D W R ZR M L B T ST C D W R ZR M L B T ST C D W R ZR Chapter 7 M L B T ST C D W R ZR T ST C D W R ZR Synchronization No
469. odule s LED status CPU module LED Shows 0 when turned off 1 when turned on and 2 when flicking aipa CEE SINS status e Refer to SD201 for the storage status SEAM END SD1651 SD201 CPU modul CPU modul e Stores the CPU module operation status D1653 k fais pa ae 3 iar oe e Refer to SD203 for the storage status S Each END i SD1653 SD203 1 Stores other system CPU module diagnostics information and system information 2 Shows the special register SDL L for the host system CPU module App 108 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 16 For redundant systems Trucking SD1700 to SD1779 is valid only for redundant systems These are all O for stand alone systems Table App 3 18 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanat APranason When Set ACPU CPU D9000 Tracki Tracki SD1700 m us a Fa ii A e When the tracking error is detected count is added by one S Error New Q4AR detection count detection count App 109 APPENDICES APPENDIX 4 PRECAUTIONS FOR UTILIZING THE EXISTING MELSEC A SERIES PROGRAM FOR Q2ASCPU To utilize a Sequence program created for ANNCPU AnACPU or AnUCPU for Q2ASCPU convert it using the A QnA Conversion option of the Option menu in the file maintenance mode of the GPP function For details on the GPP function operations refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual or SWO IVD GPPQ Operating Manual Offline For details on instructions and d
470. of the CPU module which is latched b In the case of storing more than 16 errors they can be stored to files in a memory card by making the appropriate setting in the PC RAS settings in the GPP function parameter mode c If a discrepancy arises between the parameters and memory card error history when executing 1 or 2 below the contents of the error history files are cleared first and the 16 point data of the fault history storage memory of the CPU is transferred to the history file 1 The number of error records in the history file as set in the parameters is changed part way through 2 A memory card whose capacity does not match the number of error records set in the parameters is installed d The following shows the storage area for the error history file Storage area File in set memory card Number of storable error records Max 100 can be changed q When the number of errors that can be stored is exceeded the oldest error record is cleared and the newest one stored in the same place Even if the error history file set in the parameters does not exist in the memory card no CPU module error occurs The CPU module performs only the processing that stores errors in the error history storage file 2 Clearing the error history The error history is cleared by using the error history clear function in the PLC menu in the PLC diagnosis mode of GPP function The error history clear function erases all details in
471. of the LED display 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 3 3 Resetting error Q2ASCPU allows error resetting only for the errors that does not block the CPU module operation The procedure for resetting an error is as follows 1 Eliminate the cause of the error 2 Store the error code to be reset in special register SD50 3 Turn on special register SM50 4 The error is reset When the CPU module is recovered from canceling the error the special relay special register and LED affected by the error are set to the state before the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the error reset it is recorded in the error history again To reset multiple detected annunciators only the first detected F number is reset When an error is reset by storing its error code in SD50 the last two digits of the error code are ignored Example lf errors with error codes 2100 and 2111 have occurred and error code 2100 is reset error code 2111 is also reset 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 9 4 Error History Q2ASCPU can record the results detected by the self diagnostics function with the detection time in memory as an error history POINT Since the internal clock of the Q2ASCPU is used for setting the detection time be sure to set the correct time before using the CPU module Refer to Section 10 5 for setting method of the clock 1 Storage area a The latest 16 errors are stored in the error history storage memory
472. of the program or ON Replacement peripheral device for an I O module change during RUN or in the test mode of the peripheral device for an I O change during STOP e Do not execute a RUN STOP mode change until I O module change is finished U M9094 OFF Replacement prohibited e Goes ON when I O replacement is OK S END New ON _ Replacement enabled e Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is S Initial New assumed OFF Operative network ON Standby network n Reads e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc U New QnA Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module Be Writes e For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc U New Does not write designate whether to write to the link module OFF Operative network Gogs oe z ANAY NNO i If no designation has been made concerning active S Initial New ON Standby network aa or standby active is assumed ni Reads e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc U New QnA Does not read indicate whether to read from the link module A Writes e For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc U New Does not write designate whether to write to the link module e OFF Operative network RoS Ator a saws EMOT If no designation has been made concerning active S Initial New ON Standby network ee or standby active is assumed OFF Reads e For refresh
473. oller After Storing it with a Battery Unconnected 21 15 21 5 When a programmable controller is Reoperated After Stored with the Battery Over the Battery Life teehee ease arn al ae Sola ian ie a a E E 21 16 22 1 Fundamentals Or Troubleshooting dis eisai eaters Gest aa Medes hee es ed Me aces 22 1 22 2 SN VOUDICSMOOUING ensertir neat Ride oleace e a ea 22 2 22 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart 22 o c0tbocet cece eee anacces sit totect ot alsa ol aeneeeuscanectuc tonics Ga cddes Gudea 22 2 22 2 2 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is turned OFF ccc cceccccccceeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaees 22 3 22 2 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFF ccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaees 22 4 2224 Whe n the RUN LED IS flashig eves Seien a evi cae edad na 22 5 22 2 5 Flow for actions when the ERROR LED is turned ON flashing c ccccceeeeseeeeeeeaees 22 6 22 2 6 When the USER LED Is turned ON ccc ccccecceececeeeseeecceeeceeecaeeccaeeseeeseeseueeseeesaeesaaes 22 7 22 2 Flow for actions when the BAT ARM LED is turned ON cccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaees 22 7 22 2 8 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON eee ee 22 8 22 2 9 Flow for actions when the program Cannot be WYIitteNn cc ccceeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaees 22 9 22 2 10 Flow for actions when booting from a memory card is not possible
474. omments QCD SFC trace QTS S Status PAA use conditions use conditions a change Q4A Device initial value QDI Local device QDL Q4AR File register QDR Local device QDL Sampling trace QTD Not used Status latch QTL Not used 7 Program trace QTP Not used SD640 File register Drive number e Stores drive number being used by file register RE New QnA drive change 10 App 88 APPENDICES SD645 File register file name File register file name Table App 3 7 Special register el ell eel _ e Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code SD641 SD642 SD643 SD644 SD645 SD646 b15 to b8 b7 to bO 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 1st character of extension 7th character 2EH 3rd character of the extension 2nd character of the extension MELSEC QnA Corres ponding ACPU D9000 Set by When Set Corresponding CPU S Status change SD647 File register File register e Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k word S Status New QnA capacity capacity units change SD648 Pieregisier Pe register BIGER iy Stores the currently selected file register block number block number number change l Comment drive e Stores the comment drive number sel
475. on Guidelines 0008 App 163 TROUBLESHOOTING cceceeeeeeeee eens 22 2 Troubleshooting flowchart When the RUN LED is flashing 22 5 Flow for actions when booting from a memory Card iS not possible cccceccseeeeeeeeeees 22 11 Flow for actions when the CPU module is not stared UDe svicrceccdisinanoteeastevedecedceiuaedecesadeeeness 22 13 Flow for actions when the output module s output load does not turn ON cecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 22 8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written cect a seeie cncten a ecencses ad amnd sacieetaceacaelsdeaun seen bce 22 9 Flow for actions when the BAT ARM LED is tumed ON 5 csvindsdiiesnwnrs dddaceetetaadiswennandiastuinadannet 22 Flow for actions when the POWER LED is tumed OFF sncossrcanacanssinasnns esaionadianeidisedansatads 22 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned a E AIE E E E E AN S 22 4 When the USER LED is ON 22 7 W Watchdog timer WDT cccscceeeeeseeeeeneeeeees 9 2 WDT Watchdog Timer cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 2 AC 6 eee eee ar ee eee 4 3 Extension Cable cccccceccceeceseeeseeeeaeeeaes 17 3 Memory Cald ccccccceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 18 1 18 2 Wiring Wiring I O EquIPMeENT cceceeeeee eee ees 19 17 Wiring to the module terminals 19 18 Wiring I O equipment cccceceeeeeeeeeee ees 19 17 Wiring to the module ter
476. on module special function module CPU CPU Status e At power ON At reset module or base unit is faulty Contact your local Stop CONTROL BUS ERR Mitsubishi representative The FROM TO instruction is not executable due to a control bus error with the intelligent function module special function module On error occurring the program error location is 1412 stored in the individual information Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e During execution of FROM TO instruction set SYS UNIT DOWN Hardware fault at the system management module ae lint ti This suggests a system management module 1421 ee a ee AS92R hardware fault Q4AR Common Information a as Contact your local Mitsubishi representative e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e Always AC DC DOWN e A momentary power supply interruption has occurred e The power supply went off i 1500 Collateral informationnmon Check the power supply QnA e Common Information e Individual Information CPU Status MDiagnostic Timing Continue e Always 22 20 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status DUAL DC DOWN 5V The power supply voltage 100 to 240VAC of either of the two power supply modules on the power supply duplexing extension base unit o
477. ontrol system Check the standby system condition This can be detected from the control system of the redundant system Collateral informationmnmon Common Information Reason s for system Q4AR switching e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing l e At switching request CAN T EXE CHANGE E Switching is disabled because of a bus switching moguls error CPU Status This can be detected from the control system of P nedanieuel Continue KA a Sys em This is a bus switching module hardware fault 6221 Collateral informationnmon N BEE Contact your local Mitsubishi representative e Common Information Reason s for system switching e Individual Information WEDiagnostic Timing e At switching request DUAL SYS ERROR The link module mounted on the standby system CPU module is the remote master station 6230 mC olataral A TAON Check the system configuration status Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e Always 22 43 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING 22 3 9 Error code list 7000 to 10000 MELSEC QnA The following shows the error messages from the error code 7000 to 10000 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act RUN On ERR On Off 2 Fe Annunciator F was set ON WCollateral informationmmon 9000 e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information An
478. osis S Each END l e Stores the latest error currently occurring SD1601 e SD1600 stores the updated date and time Diagnosis error Diagnosis error e Stores each of the BCD two digits sents occurrence time occurrence time e Refer to SD1 to SD3 for the storage status a Bach END SD1603 SD1 SD1601 SD2 gt SD1602 SD3 gt SD1603 Error Erarmomaidn e Stores the error comment information individual information SD1604 information alassilicaiion classification code S Each END classification e Refer to SD4 for the storage status e Stores the common information for the error code e Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status E N a SD5 SD1605 SD6 SD1606 SD7 gt SD1607 SD8 gt SD1608 S Each END SD9 SD1609 SD10 SD1610 SD11 SD1611 SD12 gt SD1612 D13 SD1613 SD14 SD1614 SD15 SD1615 SD1616 SD1617 SD1618 oe e Stores the individual information for the error code SD1620 z individual E jnaideal e Refer to SD16 to SD26 for the storage status SD16t Set i ie SD16 D1616 SD17 D1617 SD18 SD1618 S Each END i information information SD26 SD1622 SD19 SD1619 SD20 SD1620 SD21 SD1621 SD22 SD1622 SD1623 SD23 SD1623 SD24 SD1624 SD25 SD1625 SD26 SD1626 CPU modul e Stores the CPU module switch status SD1650 Switch status erao e Refer to SD200 for the storage status S Each END switch status SD1650 SD200 e Stores the CPU m
479. ostic Timing e At power ON At reset RAM ERROR The address RAM in the CPU module is faulty Collateral informationmmon Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset e Take noise reduction measures e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures When indexing is performed check the value of index register to see if it is within the device range Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a
480. ot being pele Sop executed e Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when SM1181 SM822 sampling trace es g i QnA Trace execution under sampling trace is completed or suspended execution flag way l e Selects sampling trace execution enable disable Active step Trace disable ahr l ON Sampling trace execution is enabled SM1182 SM821 sampling trace suspend f Baia tik QnA ee OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled If turned off permission Trace enable during sampling trace execution trace is suspended e Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used by f i i the st i t t block Operation output Coil output OFF using operation output of the step being executed at bloc SM1196 SM325 stop QnA at block stop Coil output ON i i OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status M9113 M9114 M9180 M9181 M9182 M9196 of M9196 SM SM I O a 1197 1198 displayed M9197 SM1197 x OFF XIY0 to 7FO Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage Switch between blown Tuseand NO ON OFF X Y800 to registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error ceanieardisnls FFO storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the Pay XIV 1000 to combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198 OFF ON 17F0 M9198 SM1198 x NIOO o OFF Data recovery e Reco
481. ot exist in the block of the SFC program Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP FORMAT ERR The structure of the SFC program is illegal e The step specified in the TSET instruction does not exist e In jump transition the host step number was specified as the destination step number Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP FORMAT ERR The structure of the SFC program is illegal e The step specified in the TAND instruction does not exist Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN SFCP OPE ERROR The SFC program contains data that cannot be processed Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Write the program to the CPU module again using the peripheral device e Write the program to the CPU module again using GX Developer e Read the common information of the error using GX Developer and check and correct the error step corresponding to that value program error location Write the program to the CPU module again using GX Developer Read common information of the error using the periphera
482. ote I O station is odd add 1 to the station number to obtain the occupied storage devices When the master module number setting column is made blank in parameter setting auto refresh can be used without this setting However model name registration is required in the I O Assign MINI mode AJ71PT32 MINI S3 mode AJ71PT32 S3 When the input X is specified in the received data storage device use the I O number later than the number used for the module loaded on the main base unit and the extension base unit When the I O number usage range for the module loaded on the main base and the extension base is used for input output of the received data storage device the CPU module imports both the input ON OFF data from the input module and the ON OFF data from auto refresh of MELSECNET MINI S3 Therefore input X of the CPU module is not operated as desired 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 2 Setting of the send received data storage devices is explained using the system example shown below Example When the device X Y400 and later are used as the remote I O stations AX41C Station No 1 XO t o A ambara occupied stations 4 aster module AJ35TB1 16D Station number 5 MELSECNET MINI First I O No 40 MINI MINI S3 model name setting MINI Total number of I O stations 11 stations AJ35TJ 8R Station No 11 AX40Y50C Station No 7 number of occupied stations 1 number of occupied stations 4
483. oug No Slot No CPU Status e Individual Information T Stop EDiagnostic Timing ag e At power ON At reset Continue SP UNIT ERROR e The location designated by the FROM TO instruction set is not the special function module e The module that does not include buffer memory has been specified by the FROM TO instruction e The special function module Network module being accessed is faulty 2110 e Station not loaded was specified using the instruction whose target was the CPU share oe mentors e Read the individual information of the error using the GX Developer check the FROM TO Collateral informationnmon Common Information Module No Slot No instruction that corresponds to that numerical e Individual Information Program error location voue program Emor OC eteh And Comech WHEN WEDiagnostic Timing ERRA 4 When instruction executed The special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your local Mitsubishi representative RUN Off On ERR Flicker On QnA SP UNIT ERROR e The location designated by a link direct device JO O is not a network module e The I O module special function module was nearly removed completely removed or 2111 mounted during running Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed SP
484. peration cccccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 14 2 22 11 Data register D ccccssccceeecseceseeseeeeeees 4 2 Edge relay V erisera 4 2 C File register R ZR cc ccccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Calculation of Heat cc cceeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 19 7 Function input FX aaea 4 2 Category Wisicdncnceduancacnierataniontitudinmesdvelonicadiate 20 14 Function output FY eenean nennen 4 2 Causes of Increasing Scan Time App 159 Function register FD 4 2 CHK Instruction IX Instruction 00 App 130 Index register Z 0 2 cc ccccsceeeceevereeseesseeneeeeeee 4 2 Internal relay M cccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Interrupt pointer I ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Latch relay L Sniwxstutnsactamanedanmacnubnetwndeuouedenats 4 2 Link direct device cccecceeceeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Link register W cccsccsseccseeceeeceeeeseeesees 4 2 Link relay B cccsecceecsseeseeceeeseeeseeeaeees 4 2 Pointer F oscessenscacoeercuressoncsesctiessesucceentereseuecds 4 2 Retentive timer ST ccccccsseceeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Special function module direct device 4 3 Special link register SW cccceeeeeee ees 4 2 Special link relay SB ccceccseeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Special register SD cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Special relay SM ccccceccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees
485. peration of the PLC menu in any mode e The control using a serial communication module is performed with the commands in the dedicated protocol For details on serial communication module control refer to the Serial Communication Module User s Manual According to the device latch ranges set in Device in parameter mode there are ranges within which latch clear is valid and ranges within which it is not valid Remote latch clear is only valid for devices set in the range for which Latch clear valid is set When remote latch clear is performed devices that are not latched are also cleared 10 19 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA 10 6 6 Relationship between remote operation and CPU module RUN STOP key switch Using the combination of the remote operation and the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module explained in Section 10 6 1 through Section 10 6 5 the operating status of the Q2ASCPU is determined as follows Remote Operation STEP RUN STOP PAUSE 2 RESET Latch Clear Operation is not Operation is not STEP RUN STOP PAUSE seu a ana HA possible possible STOP STOP STOP RESET Latch Clear If performed using a remote RUN contact beforehand set RUN PAUSE contacts in the PLC system in parameter mode 2 If performed using a remote PAUSE contact beforehand set RUN PAUSE contacts in the PLC system in parameter mode Furthermore the remote PAUSE enable coil SM206 has to be turned ON in advance
486. period from turning ON RAZ2 to 100 establishment of DC power supply Set 0 5 seconds for it 5 Switch the start switch ON 6 The output devices are driven in accordance with the program when the magnetic contactor MC comes ON When a voltage relay is used for RA2 the timer in the program TM is not necessary 19 3 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION mms E Si 2 Fail safe measures for programmable controller failure While failure of a CPU module and its memory can be detected by the self diagnostics function an error occurred in I O control area may not be detected by the CPU module In such a case depending on the condition of the failure all device points could turn ON or OFF resulting in a situation where normal operations of the control target and safety cannot be ensured Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality control create a fail safe circuit outside the programmable controller to prevent mechanical damage and accidents in the case of a programmable controller failure occurred due to any cause Examples of a system and its fail safe circuitry are described below lt System example gt Power Output Output Output Output module for fail safe purpose The output module for fail safe purpose should be mounted on the last slot of the system YBO to YBF in the above system lt Fail safe circuit example gt On delay timer Internal program
487. pheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common information of the error using peripheral device and check and correct the program corresponding to that value program error location Set the numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction to 32 or less Execute the CC Link instruction after setting the CC Link parameter Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 34 RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop QnA Q4AR QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status FOR NEXT ERROR A NEXT instruction was executed although no FOR instruction has been executed Alternatively there are more NEXT instructions 4201 than FOR instructions Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FOR NEXT ERROR More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Collateral informationmmon 4202 e Common Information Program error location e In
488. power distribution secondary surge protection rated voltage 300V or less Zone A Local power distribution protected from dedicated power distribution by AC DC converter and insulation transformer rated voltage 120V or less 20 12 20 EMC DIRECTIVES AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 1 20 2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives The Low Voltage Directives apply to the electrical equipment operating from 50 to 1000VAC or 75 to 1500VDC the manufacturer must ensure the safety of the equipment Sections 20 2 1 to Section 20 2 7 provide precautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC QnA series programmable controller to conform to The Low Voltage Directives The descriptions are made based on the requirements and standards of the latest regulation However they do not guarantee that any machinery produced according to the contents of this manual is compliant with the above directives Therefore manufacturers must finally determine how to make it comply it and how it is compliant with the low voltage directives 20 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC QnA series programmable controller The standard applied for MELSEC QnA series programmable controller is EN61010 1 Safety of devices used in measurement control or laboratories For the modules which operate with the rated voltage of 50 VAC 75 VDC or above we have developed new models that conform to the above standard For the modules which operate
489. r error SFCP OPE ERROR SFC instruction operation error SFCP EXE ERROR SFC program execution error ICM OPE ERROR Memory card operation error FILE OPE ERROR File access error EXTEND INST ERROR Extended instruction error Constant scan setting time over error PRG TIME OVER PO a Low speed execution monitoring timeout BATTERY ERR A Clock data 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 1 When LED indicator is left OFF for the error occurrence above set the factor number area to 0 which stores the applicable factor numbers from SD207 to SD209 Example To set the ERROR LED to remain OFF when a fuse blown error occurs set 0 in the item number setting area whose item number is 2 k SD209 SD208 SD207 4 pofofaAtotet7ists s sfojr Since the item number 2 is not set the ERROR LED remains OFF even if a fuse blown error is detected The ERROR LED remains OFF even if another error whose error item number is 2 is detected I O module verify error Special function module verify error 2 Even if the LED is set to remain OFF SMO the diagnostics error flag is still turned ON SM1 the self diagnostics error flag is still turned ON and the error code is stored in SDO CPU diagnosis error register 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS mms ELS EC A 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS 10 1 Function List The following list shows the rest of the functions Performs a program at fixed intervals regardless of the Constant scan i Section
490. r using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Check to ensure that the designated file has not been write protected CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 26 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue 1 QnA Q4AR QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 2500 2501 2502 2503 2504 CAN T EXE PRG e There is a program file that uses a device that is out of the range set in the PLC parameter device setting e After the PLC parameter setting is changed only the parameter is written into the PLC Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset CAN T EXE PRG There are multiple program files although none has bee
491. ration error OFF ON Flickering ON Flickering ON When executing each instruction Stop Continue OFF ON Flickering ON Handling error When memory card is inserted removed Stop Continue OFF ON Default stop File setting error When power is ON or RESET File access error Default stop Unable to execute instruction When power is ON or RESET Stop Flickers e When power is ON or RESET P t tt heck St OFF Flick e When power is ON or RESET Link t St OFF Flick Can be changed to operation continues by GPP function parameter setting GPP function parameters can be set so that no check is performed Also checking is not performed when SM251 is on 3 GPP function parameters can be set so that no check is performed i pos O 6b p oO eb ia A 9 6 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION Self diagnostics list Continued Diagnosis item Diagnosis timing Status of the CPU module CPU error Program error e When power is ON or RESET Instruction code check een e When switching from STOP to RUN e When power is ON or RESET No END instructi O Sees e When switching from STOP to RUN e When power is ON or RESET Pointer setti SIME TOE e When switching from STOP to RUN e When power is ON or RESET Pointer setti Cinter SAINYO e When switching from STOP to RUN Operation error Default When executing each instruction e au one stop FOR NEXT instructio
492. rd input modules and output modules 2 Special function module Special function modules that perform processing in accordance with FROM TO instructions from the Q2ASCPU for example A1S64AD A1S62DA etc 3 Intelligent special function Special function modules that can process not only module by executing FROM TO instruction of Q2ASCPU but also by accessing Q2ASCPU from special function module Example A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71QC24N etc 4 Interrupt module Modules that issue interrupts to the Q2ASCPU A1S161 5 Link module Special function modules for MELSECNET Il B data links and MELSECNET 10 networks Example A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71QLP21 etc 6 Ethernet module Dedicated Ethernet interface modules for Q2ASCPU A1SJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N B5 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION b The following shows special function modules that cannot be used with Q2ASCPU e AJ71C23 Host controller high speed link module e AD57 S2 AGMD controller module e AJ71C24 Computer link module Manufactured through February 1987 Products manufactured in March 1987 or later and products marked H corresponding to A3H can be used e AD51 Intelligent communication module Manufactured thorugh March 1987 Products manufactured in April 1987 or later and products marked H corresponding to A3H can be used e A GT BUS Bus connection interface module for A77GOT and A870GOT Manufactured through January 1996 Products manufactured
493. recautions relating to write during RUN 1 The only memory that can be used for write during RUN is the built in RAM If write during RUN is performed during a boot operation also write the program to the memory card at STOP When the boot operation is started again without write on the memory card the program before write during RUN is transferred from the memory card to the built in RAM for execution 2 The maximum number of steps that can be handled in one write during RUN operation is 512 The number can be changed according to how many steps of write during RUN saved using a peripheral device capable of GPP function The saved steps of write during RUN can be set during the CPU module OFF Note that the saved steps of write during RUN decrease every time write during RUN is performed 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 3 During low speed program execution write during RUN is started when execution of all low speed programs is completed Also execution of low speed programs is suspended during write during RUN 1 2 3 4 Scan execution Scan execution Scan execution Scan execution type program type program type program type program step 0 to END step 0 to END step 0 to END step 0 to END Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution Low speed execution type program type program type program type program step 0 to 200 step 201 to 320 step 321 to END step 0 to 120 1 scan 1 scan 1 scan 1 scan 1
494. redictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior
495. relay communication from the Ethernet module Network relay c cccccssseeeeeeeeeees Refer to Section 2 2 1 3 Appendix 8 Addition of AJ71QC24N compatible commands ssi E EAA A soos A EE E E E Section 2 2 1 4 Added instructions for special function module The following instructions have been added for function version B of the Q2ASCPU A1SJ61QBT11 control instructions cceeeeeeeeee teens 13 A1SD75 control instructions ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 A1SJ71IDE R4 control instructions o n 12 A1SJ71QE71 control instructions cceeeeeeeeeeees 10 Additional function special function module instructions can be used for the Q2ASCPU described function version B in the date column of the rating plate Check that function version B is described on the Q2ASCPU rating plate before using the additional function special function module instructions If your Q2ASCPU does not have indication of function version B skip this item and the description of additional functions MEUSEC ce PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B GORPORATION JAPAN g0992B013H01 Date of manufacture Function version When using additional function special function module instructions of the Q2ASCPU it is necessary to match the GPP function model and the function version version of the applicable special function module Refer to Table 2 1 2 OVERVIEW MELSEC QnA Table 2 1 List of combinatio
496. rent capacity and reduce the amount of overcurrent 2 Turn the input power supply off and then immediately turn it on Is overcurrent protection and overvoltage protection working NO Can POWER LED be turned Contact the nearest service center dealer or our office End and explain the error 22 3 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 22 2 3 Flow for actions when the RUN LED is turned OFF The flow when the POWER LED of the CPU module turns OFF during operation is described RUN LED turns OFF Is the ERROR YES Go to Section 22 2 5 Flow chart LED ON or used when ERROR LED is ON flickering or flicker NO RUN LED Reset the CPU module turns ON 1 Due to defective PLC part or with the RUN STOP key contact switch 2 Due to excessive noise RUN LED turns OFF In case of 1 _ In case of 2 Consult Mitsubishi repre Set the RUN STOP key sentative switch of the CPU module to STOP and write the END instruction to ad dress 0 using a peripheral device Set the RUN STOP key switch of the CPU module to RUN and perform opera tion with the peripheral de vice set to the monitor mode RUN LED turns ON RUN LED does not turn ON This suggests faulty of the sequence program Connect a surge suppressor Check H Pe and circuit such as CR to the noise correct the taulit source 22 4 22
497. rocessing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted M9030 SM1030 a 0 1 second clock e 0 1 second 0 2 second 1 second and 2 second clocks M9031 SM1031 0 2 second clock i are generated l Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even ee tee QnA during scan if corresponding time has elapsed M9032 SM1032 1 second clock f e Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA QnA nA M9033 SM1033 2 second clock e Alternates between ON and OFF according to the seconds specified at SD414 Default n 30 M9034 SM1034 m minute clock 1 e Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even minute clock during scan if corresponding time has elapsed e Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed poss fon enon e Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without regard M9037 SM1037 Always OFF to position of key switch on CPU module front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as RUN status QnA except when the key switch is at STOP position and pow amo f ON for 1 scan only turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP after RUN RUN flag After M9039 SM1039 RUN OFF for 1 scan only position SM1038 is on for one scan only and SM1039 is off for one scan only if the key s
498. rom interrupt program to main sequence program The index registers in the interrupt program are cleared and the saved main sequence program contents are written to them MOV K5 Z No instruction for D writing toZ i420 Main sequence program Interrupt i interrupt v p occurrence ia occurrence fe Interrupt MOVKiOZ j __ __ 2 y Z 5 i MOVK10Z _ ____ 2 yZ 0 program 3 Z 10 l 3 Z 10 For ACPU processing differs according to the CPU module type e The processing for AZUSCPU is the same as for Q2ASCPU and no program modification is required after conversion e In the case of A1SCPU and A2SCPU when program processing is transferred from an interrupt program to the main program the data updated in the interrupt program are passed on to the main program When passing a value written to the index register in an interrupt program on to the main sequence program for example modify the program so that the value is passed on via a data register App 129 APPENDICES Appendix 4 12 CHK Instruction IX Instruction 1 CHK instruction The CHK instruction operates as a fault check instruction for Q2ASCPU For ACPU there are two types of processing depending on the CPU type e Fault check cceeeeeeeee ee AnCPU AnNCPU direct I O control mode A3HCPU AnACPU AnUCPU e Bit device output inversion ANNCPU refresh I O control mode After conversion program modification i
499. rom the one specified at D l Decimal ASCII e Converts the 2 word BIN data specified at S into 10 digit decimal DBINDA P S D ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting from the one specified at D e Converts the 1 word BIN data specified at S into 4 digit BINHA P S D hexadecimal ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting from the one specified at D l Hexadecimal ASCII e Converts the 2 word BIN data specified at S into 8 digit OBINHA P S D hexadecimal ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting from the one specified at D e Converts the 1 word BCD value specified at S into 4 digit decimal BCDDA P S D ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting from the one specified at D e Converts the 2 word BCD value specified at S into 8 digit decimal DBCDDA P 5 D ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting from the one specified at D roasin e s 0 e Converts the 5 digit decimal ASCII value specified at S to a 1 word pecmalneot BIN value and stores this to the word device specified at D l e Converts the 10 digit decimal ASCII values specified at S to a 2 IN P S DDABIN P 5 D word BIN value and stores this to the word device specified at D e Converts the 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII values specified at S to a 1 ABIN P S word BIN value and stores
500. rom this order of priority the LED does not light even if the error corresponding to that error item number occurs For details on the setting method refer to the POINT in Section 9 8 2 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 9 8 2 Priority setting If several errors occurred at a time the indication conforms to the following conditions 1 Stop error is indicated unconditionally 2 Operation continue error are indicated in accordance with error item numbers in an order of priority set by default Priorities can be changed set with special registers SD207 to SD209 3 If several errors with the same priority occur a first detected error is indicated The following shows how to set priorities in special registers SD207 to SD209 Factor number defauit value Hexadecimal 15 to 12 11 to 8 7 to 43 to O bit t5 to Obit soar Fiona Penya roa Pom som a a Stl a 9 Sn SEAS SS Factor number setting area s0208 soe e 7 e E Factor number setting area eee ignore Factor number setting area 9 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION The following shows the details of the error item numbers and default for priorities which is set in special registers SD207 to SD209 Error Item Order of Ea Eaa Description Remark priority AC DOWN AC power DC power OFF UNIT VERIFY ERR I O module verification FUSE BREAK OFF Fuse blown SP UNIT ERROR Special function module access error OPERATION ERROR Operation error LINK PARA ERROR Link paramete
501. ror location and correct the problem Keep nesting levels at 16 or under RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Read the common information of the error using SOP the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Keep nesting levels at 16 or under 22 35 QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error f LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 4235 4300 CAN T EXECUTE I Though an interrupt input occurred the corresponding interrupt pointer does not exist Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE I An IRET instruction does not exist in the executed interrupt program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed CAN T EXECUTE I The IRET instruction exists before the FEND instruction of the main routine program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed INST FORMAT ERR The number of CHK and CHKEND instructions is not equal Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Informat
502. ror information type is stored b15 to b8 b7 to bO Individual information Common information category codes category codes e The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No File name Drive name Time value set 1 Error 2 3 4 Program error location 5 6 SD4 information categories Error information category code LENON SN ae System switching cause for Q4ARCPU only Power supply No The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Empty 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 CHK instruction failure No App 73 APPENDICES Table App 3 2 Special register Corres Explanation Set by ponding When Set ACPU D9000 e Common information corresponding to the error codes SDO is stored here e The following five types of information are stored here e The error common information type can be judged by the common information category code in SD4 The values of the common information category code stored in SD4 correspond to following 1 to 5 1 Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No 1 SD6 I O No 2 SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Definitions of slot No lt Slot No gt Value used to identify the slot of each base unit and the module mounted
503. rred in the process control instruction App 106 MELSEC QnA Corresponding CPU Corresponding CPU APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 14 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 SD1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems They are all set to 0 for stand alone systems Table App 3 16 Special register Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Explanati xplaliarlen When Set ACPU CPU D9000 Operation mode SD1512 during CPU Hot start switch e Shows the power out time S during the automatic switch from hot start S Initial New Q4AR power out time to initial start in the operation mode when the CPU module is started up module start up SD1590 Swich PqUSSE REqueST SOUE e Stores the request source at work No when the SM1590 is turned on S Error New Q4AR network No network No App 107 APPENDICES 15 For redundant systems Other system CPU information 1 SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for redundant systems and refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode SD1651 to SD1699 are valid in either the backup mode or separate mode When a stand alone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0 Table App 3 17 Special register Corres f Set b ondin Correspondin Explanation y j a p g When Set ACPU CPU SDO 0 2 e Stores as BIN code the error No of the error that occurred during the Diagnosis error SD1600 Diagnosis error No other system CPU module diagn
504. ruction is executed Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FILE OPE ERROR The SFC program file is one that cannot be designated by the sequence program Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Program error location HDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed FILE OPE ERROR No data has been written to the file designated by the sequence program Collateral informationmmon Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Program error location MDiagnostic Timing e When instruction executed e Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter number and correct e Check the space remaining in the memory card Confirm the file register and parameter e Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module e In case a specified file does not exist write the file to a target memory and or check the file specified with the instruction again Read the individual information of the erro
505. ry card are selected 2 File Shown Right The drive number and sampling trace file name are set 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION c Trace Condition Select one of the following 1 Overwrite Conditions onto CPU s The trace condition in an existing trace file is overwritten 2 Use Condition in CPU Sampling trace under the condition in the trace file designated in 2 Sampling Trace Data is executed 4 Retrieve the trace results from the CPU module and display them 1 Read the trace results from the CPU module by using 4 Read from PC Results on the Sampling Trace screen 2 Display the trace results by using 4 Trace Results Display on the Sampling Trace screen Once the sampling trace has been executed the second is not executed To execute the trace again execute the STRAR instruction to reset sampling trace NOTE 1 Set sampling trace files in the RAM area of the memory card 2 It is possible to execute sampling trace from another station in the network or from a serial communication module However sampling trace cannot be executed from more than one site at the same time With the Q2ASCPU sampling trace can be executed from only one site at a time 3 Since the trace condition registered in the CPU module is latched the condition data is retained even when the programmable controller power is turned OFF The data can be cleared by performing a latch clear operation using the RUN STOP key switch on the
506. s us units Stores scan time values in 1ms units Example If 3 and 400 are stored in SD528 and SD529 respectively the scan time is 3 4ms The accuracy of each scan time stored in the special registers is 0 1ms Note that even if a watchdog timer WDT reset instruction is executed in the sequence program measurement of each scan time is continued 12 14 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 6 Low speed execution monitoring time This is a timer for monitoring the execution time of low speed execution type programs no default value is set To monitor the execution time of an low speed execution type program a value can be set within the range of 10ms to 2000ms in PLC RAS in the parameter mode Setting units 10ms If the low speed scan time exceeds the set low speed execution monitoring time a PRG TIME OVER error occurs The Q2ASCPU however continues its operation The low speed execution monitoring time is measured in low speed END processing Because of this when the low speed execution monitoring time t is set to 100ms a PRG TIME OVER error occurs if the low speed scan time measured in low speed END processing exceeds 100ms 12 15 12 OVERVIEW OF PROCESSING PERFORMED BY THE Q2ASCPU 12 1 4 Standby type program 1 Definition a The standby type program is a program that is executed only in response to an execution request b The standby type program has the fol
507. s LEDC D10 LEDC D10 LEDC D100 LEDC D100 LEDC MO LEDC MO LEDR AND DO D100 OUT MO App 111 APPENDICES Instruction after A gt QnA An OCPU Instruction Corrective Action Conversion SEG instruction Modify the instruction to an RFS When used as a partial refresh instruction instruction Program example SET M9052 SET SM1052 RFS Y10 H8 SEG K4Y10 K4B1 SEG K4Y10 K4B1 STC instruction Modify the instruction to SM700 Program example special relay for carry flag STC SET SM1012 SET SM700 As the Q2ASCPU cannot store any microcomputer program it has no SUB instructions Delete OUT SM1255 as it is not necessary SUB instruction OUT SM1255 Change the microcomputer program for the AnNCPU or A3HCPU to the sequence program using Q2ASCPU instructions Refer to Appendix 4 6 Modify the instruction to an MOV ZRRD instruction instruction Program example DMOV K8000 D9036 DMOV K8000 SD1036 MOV ZR8000 SD718 LEDA ZRRD OUT SM1255 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO Modify the instruction to an MOV ZRWR instruction instruction Program example DMOV K8000 D9036 DMOV K8000 SD1036 MOV SD718 ZR8000 LEDA ZRWR OUT SM1255 SD718 is the device resulting from converting accumulator AO App 112 APPENDICES a Instructions for which program modification is unnecessary after conversion AnLICPU Instruction Instruction after A QnA Conversion ASC instruction Program example AS
508. s on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks Manual of the corresponding network module e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC App 48 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 1 Diagnostic Information Table App 2 2 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding eels When Set ACPU M9000 e Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis Includes when an annunciator is ON and when an error is detected with CHK instruction e Remains ON even if the condition is restored to normal thereafter e Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis No self diagnosis Does not include when an annunciator is ON or SM1 Self diagnostic error errors when an error is detected by the CHK instruction S M9008 Self diagnosis e Remains ON even if the condition is restored to No error New Error SMO Diagnostic errors normal thereafter No error common Error common information e When SMO is ON turns ON if there is error common information Error common information information i No error individual Error individual information e When SMO is ON turns ON if there is error individual Gear S New information Error individual information information SM16 SM50 OFF ON Error reset e Conducts error reset operation pF U Nw e Turns ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value OFF Normal e Remains ON even
509. s required for each processing For fault check Modify the CJ instruction in the step before the CHK instruction to a CHKST instruction The CHK instruction pointer P254 and the CJ instruction destination pointer are converted to pointers with the same number As the above pointers are not used for Q2ASCPU delete them Before change After conversion Fault detection condition Fault detection condition CHKST _ mme M10 oOo Check condition eae CHK Check condition P254 TE H CHK M10 ixioo H mgr mi P100 P254 not required For bit device output inversion The Q2ASCPU has the FF instruction for inverting bit device outputs Modify the CHK instruction to the FF instruction Before change After conversion Output inversion command Output inversion command H om eH H 2 IX instruction The IX instruction is converted but not executed Modify the program so that all the devices that are objects of the IX instruction are subject to indexing App 130 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A Appendix 4 13 Accessing File Register R with Instructions For Q2ASCPU no error will occur even if an instruction for accessing file registers outside the setting range is executed When reading data FFFFH is stored to the storage device When writing data the instruction is executed but no data is stored in the file register For ACPU execution of such an instruction causes an error T
510. s the refresh mode as with Q2ASCPU there are no problems with the input timing of inputs X or the output timing of outputs Y e In the case of A1SCPU and A2SCPU I O control mode is fixed or selected to direct mode and the input timing for inputs X and output timing for outputs Y differs from that for the refresh mode Modifying programs that generate pulses from SET RST instructions by using direct devices Modify programs which in the direct mode output pulse output to the external using SET RST instructions to programs that use direct output devices for Q2ASCPU App 127 APPENDICES Appendix 4 10 Data Link System e AnUCPU data link systems The network settings in the AnUCPU parameters can be converted by A QnA conversion Parameter modifications after conversion are not needed e CPU modules other than AnUCPU The link settings in the CPU module parameters cannot be converted by A QnA conversion Link settings must be made in the parameters after conversion App 128 APPENDICES Appendix 4 11 Index Register Processing For Q2ASCPU the contents of index registers change when program processing transfers between the main sequence program and interrupt programs e Transfer of program processing from main sequence program to interrupt program The contents of the index registers of the main sequence program are saved and then these contents are passed to the interrupt program e Transfer of program processing f
511. scan time is stored in BIN code and always 1 ms units rewritten e When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second D9022 SD1022 SD412 D9025 SD1025 a Clock data D9026 SD1026 pe Clock data D9027 SD1027 E Clock data D9028 SD1028 B Clock data 1 second counter Count in units of 1s Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week e It starts counting up from 0 to 32767 then down to 32768 and then again up to 0 Counting repeats this routine e The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b0 Example T 1987 July H8707 e The day and hour are stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b T 1 l Minute Second 4b3 to b0 Example 31st 10 a m H3110 e The day of the week is stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 b0 Example Friday H0005 Day of the week Sunday Always set 0 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday D9035 SD1035 SD648 Extension file Usetiock Na e Stores the block No of the extension file register being used in regis
512. sdwewelnd App 165 INDEX Index 1 to Index 5 ABOUT THIS MANUAL The following are manuals related to this product Request for the manuals as needed according to the chart below RELATED MANUALS Manual Name QnACPU GUIDEBOOK For the first time user of QnACPU describes steps on creating a program writing the program in the CPU module and debugging Describes usage of QnACPU features Sold separately QnACPU PROGRAMMING MANUAL Fundamentals Describes programming methods device names and program types that are necessary in program creation Sold separately QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions Describes how to use sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions Sold separately QnACPU PROGRAMMING MANUAL Special Functions Describes dedicated instructions used in special function modules Sold separately QnACPU PROGRAMMING MANUAL AD57 Instructions Describes dedicated instructions used to control theA D57 S1 type CRT controller module Sold separately QCPU Q mode QnACPU PROGRAMMLNG MANUAL PID Control Instructions Describes dedicated instructions used for PID control in Q2ACPU S1 Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU Sold separately QCPU Q mode QnACPU PROGRAMMING MANUAL SFC Describes system components performance specifications functions programming debug going and error codes of MELSAP Sold separately AnS Module Type I O User s Manual Describes specification of AnS module as I O module
513. se Uniit cccceeeeeeees App 145 Extension Cable Specification List 17 3 External DIMENSIONS ccccceeeee sees App 141 CPU module ccsiccceetvintiteccuedcetesesadsctensbew App 141 Extension Base Unit ccceeeeee es App 145 Main Base Unit cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees App 143 POWER SUPPLY MODULE EAE A A E App 141 App 142 F Fail Safe Fail Safe Circuit sivcccoadsansteacvaioivareanttnenadervenss 19 4 Fail safe measures ccceceeeceeeceeeeeeeaees 19 4 Fault Examples with I O Modules 22 47 Faults in the output Circuit eee ees 22 49 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective PIC TONING sande sewer n E 22 47 FC CUPS S oa taeteccececsucededeotusciesdestusceestoussieenteceuseteeedee 2 1 Ferrite CONC is csccinsdnicncinvatiin on wedieanmenuandeanensvaearaeent 20 10 File register R ccccsccssecsseceeeseeseseseeeseees 4 2 US Gs i san eaenadseeicatdnadeaivnseinenteutacretecsien 11 4 For MELSECNET MINI SS cc ceeceeeeeeeeeeee 7 1 OI EE E E E EA A E E 18 3 Function List COMMENTS THAT CAN BE STORED IN IMAC P U en A E S 11 1 List of other fUNCTIONS ccccceeeseeeeeeeeees 10 1 MAINTENANCE FUNCTION 00008 9 1 List of debugging fUNCTION ccecceeeeee ees 8 1 Function version 55 8 12 App 151 App 155 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting 22 1 G
514. set in parmeters when parameter setting has been performed b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b t Indicates an I O module verify error For a module whose number of I O points exceeds 16 points all bits corresponding to I O module numbers within the number of I O points occupied by the module in increments of 16 points turn on Example When a 64 point module is mounted on the slot 0 bO to b3 turn on when an error is detected I O module verify check is executed also to remote I O station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047 for AuA and AnU is turned on by SET F 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When RST F or LEDR instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63 If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU module pressing the switch can execute the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by SET F is stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 When any of FO to 2047 is turned on by SET F the annunciator numbers F numbers that are turned on in order are registered into D9125 to D9132 The F number turned off by RST F is erased from any of D9125 to D9132 and the F numbers stored after the erased F number are shifted to the preceding registerers By executing instruction the contents
515. sformer e Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power supply be sure to connect a breaker or an external fuse that have proper blown and detection When using a single programmable controller a 10A breaker or an external fuse are recommended for wiring protection Programmable Insulation Main controller Transformer power supply power supply To i 3 Programmable O o terminal block T1 controller I O power supply es OO VO equipment Main circuit power supply a OA gt Main circuit equipment On a control panel 19 15 19 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC QnA f Note on using 24VDC output of the A1S62PN power supply module If the 24VDC output power from a single power supply module is insufficient supply it from the external 24VDC power supply I O module I O module 24VDC External power supply g Twist the 100VAC 200VAC or 24VDC wires as tightly as possible and use the minimum length to make connection between modules Also use a thick wire max 2 mm to minimize voltage drop h Do not install 1OOVAC and 24VDC wires together with main circuit wires high voltage and large current or I O signal lines including common line Provide a distance of 100mm 3 94inch or more between them if possible i AS ameasure against lightning surges connect a lightning surge absorber as shown below Programm
516. signated time Setting range is 5 to 5000ms in 5ms units Specify Detail Condition Seta device and step number The following shows setting examples The details on how to make the settings and data collection timing are the same as described in section 8 2 1 Monitor condition setup in Monitor Function The following shows the setting device under the detailed condition a Bit device X FX Y FY M L F SM V B SB T Contact ST Contact C Contact JO X JO Y JO B JO SB BLO S b Word device T Current value ST Current value C Current value D SD FD W SW R Z ZR UO G JOW JO SW The following qualifications are possible with respect to the devices listed above e Digit designation for bit devices e Bit number designation for word devices Device Current Value 1 Trace Pt Setting 1 gt Word Device 2 6 Bit Device K lt t gt 2 Step 1l lt Always gt Execute CY gt Cance i lt N gt Space Select Esc Close 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION mms ELS EC A 3 Trigger Point The point at which the trigger is executed is set Select one of the following At Instruction Execution When executing STRA instruction b At Request of PDT When operating trigger using GPP functions Specify Detail Condition Set a device and step number The following shows setting examples The details on how to make the settings and trigger execution timing are the same as d
517. sion base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the grounding status of the GOT Check ERR LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 Check whether the external power supply for output load is ON or OFF When a GOT is bus connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the earth status of the GOT Any of the mounted modules is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore check the mounted modules and change the faulty module Contact your local Mitsubishi representative The CPU module base unit and or the special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Contact your local Mitsubishi representative 1 CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 2 The BAT ALM LED turns on at BATTERY ERROR 22 19 Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off On ERR Flicker On CPU Status Stop Continue RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop 2
518. sion stages Maximum number of 16 modules I O modules Maximum number of 512 points I O points Mai it AN DASE Um megs A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B A1S38HB A1S38HBEU name Extension base unit A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S52B S1 model name A62B A65B A68B A52B A55B A58B A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 Extension cable A1SC03B A1SC07B A1SC12B A1SC30B model name A1SCO01B right side installation A1SC60B A1SCOS5NBA1SCO7NBA1SC30NBA1SCS50NB 1 Only one A6 O B A5 O B extension base can be used The second extension module cannot be used 2 When the extension base A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A58B S1 or A52B A55B A58B are used the 5VDC power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit Before use refer to Section 17 3 and Precautions examine if it can be used 3 Limit the length of extension cable to 6m 236inch or shorter 4 When using the extension cable do not install it with the main circuit cables which has high voltage large current or install them close together 1 Assign I O numbers to the main base unit first then to the extension base unit 2 Assign I O numbers as if both main base unit and extension base unit have 8 slots each When the A1S32B I O number A1S33B A1S35B for 2 3 5 slots are used as the main base unit add 6 5 3 slots 96 points 80 points 48 assignment points and assign the extension base unit I O numbers When I O assignment is 3 16 points are assigned to an empt
519. so 01 D BIN 16 bit BIN 32768 to 327767 32 bit conversion 16 bit data conversion WORD P e 1 8 D BIN 32768 to 32767 Gray code conversion we To gt D e S BIN L BIN 32768 to 327767 gray code conversion Gray code conversion 1 DD PeRrY S D a BIN 32768 to 327767 App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Gray code conversion cene s e H Gray code 32768 to 327767 Gray code BIN conversion Gray code conversion Gray code 2147483648 to 2147483647 L BIN data e D 1 D gt D 1 D 2 s complement DNEG P D j i BIN data e D 1 D D 1 D Real number data e Converts n points of BIN data from S to BCD data in a batch and stores the result to devices starting from D BKBCD P A PD n S BCD D conversion LUE eg a E l Block conversion e Converts n points of BCD data from S to BIN data in a batch and stores the result to devices starting from D BKBIN P S Dj n S BiN D aa conversion i A ION App 13 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 4 Data transfer instructions 16 bit data transfer mov P S D 32 bit data transfer DMOV P S D Floating point EMOV P S data transfer 7 EG Character string e Transfers the character string specified at S to devices starting with data transfer svovP S 0 the device specifie
520. special function module or writes data to the buffer memory of a special function module Q2ASCPU Special function modules Writing in accordance with special direct device Reading in Bceor canes Buffer C External memory device with special direct aus _ Bi The special direct device represents the buffer memory in a special function module as the Q2ASCPU device Example U10 G10 U10 Indicates the head I O No 100 of the special function module Hexadecimal G10 Indicates the buffer memory address 10 Decimal REMARK For details on a special direct device refer to the QNACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals The special direct device differs from the FROM TO instruction in that the CPU module can handle the buffer memory of a special function module as a direct device This can reduce the total number of steps in the program However the instruction processing speed is the same with the FROM TO instruction Example Writing data to address 0 of the buffer memory in the special function module loaded at X YO and reading the data of address 1 a Using the FROM TO instruction b Using special direct device pov eo vowo 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES MELSEC QnA When reading data from the special function module frequently during the programming store the special direct device to a data register after reading in an area of the program by using
521. ssignment has been made Device Bit number D1220 D1221 D1222 D1223 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L55 L54 L53 QnA If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a parameter error or a remote I O station whose I O assignment is abnormal the bit of the device number corresponding to the station number of that local station or remote I O station turns to 1 Example When local station 5 and remote I O station 14 detect an error b4 and b13 in SD1220 become 1 and when D1220 is monitored its value is 8208 2010H Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are communicating the initial data with their relevant master station number b15 L R SD1224 YR L R SD1225 UF L R SD1226 YF L R SD1227 UR The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently communicating the initial settings becomes 1 Example When stations 23 and 45 are communicating b6 of D1225 and b12 of SD1226 become 1 and when D1225 is monitored its value is 64 40H and when D1226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000H Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error Device QnA number p15 L R p1228 UE L R SD1229 UF L R SD1230 YE
522. stem master station 2 and local station A1SJ72T25B A1SJ71B62 S3 A1SJ71QLP21 For MELSECNET B data link system remote I O station Master module for B NET For control station master station and local station of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For SI type optical fiber cable double loop For control station master station and local station of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For GI type optical fiber cable double loop A1SJ71QLP21 GE A1SJ71QLP21 S A1SJ71QBR11 A1SJ71QLR21 A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ71PT32 S31 A1SJ51T64 A1SJ71SL92N MS iansos MOSM eE AS total I O 496 points A1S62LS Absolute detection system A1SS91 For control station master station and local station of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system With external power supply function For SI type optical fiber cable double loop For control station master station and local station of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the single bus coaxial cable For control station master station and local station of the MELSECNET 10 data link module system For the coaxial cable dual loop For the master and local stations of the CC Link data link system For the twisted pair shield cable only For MELSECNET MINI S3 master station 64 stations maximum Controls remote I O with a total of 512 I O points and remote terminal For MELSECNET I O master station 16 stations maximum Controls I O
523. sters Special relay When this relay turns from OFF to ON the module access interval time for the special function module specified in special register SD550 is read into special Read module service registers SD551 to SD552 interval ON Read OFF Ignored 2 Special register Set the I O number of the module whose access interval time is to be measured Service interval Set the I O number of the peripheral device connected to the RS 422 interface of measurement module the CPU module to FFFFH Also set the I O number of the upper 2 digits in the 3 digit representation When SM551 is turned ON it stores the interval time for access from the module specified at SD550 SD551 1ms units Range 0 to 65535 SD551 to SD552 Service interval time SD552 1s units Range 0 to 900 stored every 100 4s Example When the module access interval time is 123 4ms D551 123 SD552 400 Program example Program for reading the module access interval time of the special function module at X Y 160 Read start signal Sets the O number 16 in hexadecimal in SD550 Starts module access interval time read Stores the module access interval time in D551 and D552 To read the access interval time for access from GPP function at another station in the network set the I O number of the network module 10 23 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA REMARK e The module access interval includ
524. sured e Read the individual information of the error from the peripheral device check its value time and shorten the scan time e Change the initial execution monitoring time or the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter e Resolve the endless loop caused by jump RUN transition Off Diagnostic Timing ERR e Always e Read the individual information of the error from JERE Lied mia the peripheral device check its value time and e The scan time of the program exceeded the CPU Status ata shorten the scan time WDT value specified in the PLC RAS setting of e a ee Stop the PLC t e Change the initial execution monitoring time or PA the WDT value in the PLC RAS setting of the 5001 Collateral informationmmon PLC parameter e Common Information Time value set oe Oe di di e Individual Information Time value actually a a acai ll measured transition e Check the number of interrupt program executions with the peripheral device and reduce the number of interrupts EDiagnostic Timing e Always PRG TIME OVER The program scan time exceeded the constant scan setting time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter WECollateral informationmmon QnA e Common Information Time value set e Individual Information Time value actually measured WEDiagnostic Timing e Always e Review the constant scan setting time e Review the constant scan setting time and low 5010 speed program exe
525. t Slot number Se i ae E E LS ee A AANA l l l I ro N N N x oOo 2 0 I 24 5 elEeElE ELE 1 EiS sleg glg 8a8 8 8 8 oh E N N o co co l co l O l co I See Oe ie ee a Number of I O points in Q i 2 1 E813 3 535 2 2 6 amp g actual mounting status Q Q Q Og 61 D J J3 O mi OO A Fe g ih Se OT ea L Sa r i A l I l l I 32X 16X 32X 16Y 16S OS OS OS 4 Number of I O points allocated points points points points points points Points points using GPP function X00 X20 X30 X50 60 to to to to to X1F X2F X4F Y5F OF 4 H 2 3 A1S65B base unit 8 9 10 11 Output 32 points Output 16 points Output 32 points Output 32 points Oo O a 2 D 0b z O A 32Y 32X 16Y 48Y 32Y points points points points points X70 90 YBO YCO YFO to to to to to Y8F AF YBF YEF Y10F 5 6 1 Since 16 points is set the latter 16 points of inputs cannot be used 2 Since 32 points is set the points from 40 to 4F is occupied with dummy points 3 Since Empty S 16 points is set the points cannot be used for outputs 4 Since Empty S 0 points is set the number of I O points for the three slots are not lost 5 Since input S 32 points is set there are 32 input points 6 Since 48 points are set EO to EF is occupied with dummy points 5 I O NUMBER ASSIGNM
526. t SP UNIT LAY ERR There are too many special function modules that can use dedicated instructions allocated number of modules installed The total of the figures indicated below is above 1344 AD59 modules installed x 5 AD57 S1 AD58 modules installed x 8 AJ71024 S3 S6 S8 modules installed x 10 AJ71UC24 modules installed x 10 AJ71C21 S1 modules installed x 29 Reduce the number of special function modules 2105 AJ71PT32 S3 AJ71T32 S3 modules installed x125 installed AJ71QC24 R2 R4 modules installed x 29 AJ711D1 2 R4 modules installed x 8 AD75 modules installed x 12 total gt 1344 When the expansion mode is used Collateral informationmmon RUN Common Information Module No Slot No Of e TOMAN APON ERR EDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset PIEKEN GNA SP UNIT LAY ERR e Five or more AJ71QLP21 amp AJ71QBR11 modules are installed e Three or more AJ71AP21 R21 amp AJ71AT21B modules are installed 2104 CPU Status Stop The total number of installed AJ71QLP21 Reduce the AJ71QLP21 and AJ71QBR11 AJ71QBR11 AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules to four or less modules exceeds five e Reduce the AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B e The same network numbers or identical station modules to two or less 2106 numbers exist in the MELSECNET 10 network e Reduce the AJ71QLP21 AJ71QBR11 system AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules to a e Two or more master or load stations exist to
527. t Space gt Select Esc Close The following shows an explanation of the screen above Either 1 Without Monitor Stop or 2 Condition can be set for the monitor stop condition a When 1 Without Monitor Stop is set Monitoring is stopped when key is pressed b When 2 Condition is set 1 Device and 2 Calculation State can be set 1 When 2 Calculation State is set The monitor stop timing is such that monitoring stops when the execution condition of the step designated for the monitor condition attains the designated status The following shows the possible designations for execution status When switching from OFF to ON lt t gt When switching from ON to OFF lt gt All the time only during ON gt lt lt ON gt All the time only during OFF lt LOFF gt All the time in any statuses lt Always gt If 2 Calculation State isn t set the timing for monitor stop is such that monitoring is stopped after CPU module END processing 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION 2 When 1 Device is set Either 1 Word Device or 2 Bit Device can be set When 1 Word Device is set The monitor stop timing is such that monitoring stops when the present value of the designated word device attains the designated value The following shows the method for designating the current value For decimal word designation K Decimal number For hexadecimal word
528. t S Instruction Keyboard input e OFF if keyboard input is not registered execution registered RKEY registration flag ON App 58 APPENDICES 9 Ato QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to QnA conversion These special relays are all set by the system and cannot be set by the user program To turn them ON OFF by the user program change the special relays in the program into those of QnACPU However some of SM1084 and SM1200 to SM1255 corresponding to M9084 and M9200 to M9255 before conversion can be turned ON OFF by the user program if they could be turned ON OFF by the user program before conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to the provided QnACPU special relay D When is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When is provided the device number does not work with QnACPU Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special i f Corresponding Special Relay after Relay for Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output modules of Namal whi
529. ta to to to to to 8F 9F AF BFICF DF EF FF i 80 90 Ao BO CO DO Eo Fo Extension cable 2st extension stage UNIT 1 0 oH 1 E o oj Slot No Extension base module A1S55B S1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Tst extension i stage 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ID 100 110 UNITS to to r 4 roel te a loom l 130 140 1501160 170 to te itt 13F 14F 15Fl16F117 Fl wet ee OE _ e module Power supply Extension base module A1 68B 1 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 module 180 190 1A0 1B0 1C01 Dot EO 1FO Je to to to to ta to to 18F 19F 1AF1BF1CROFIEFIFF Extension base unit for AON ADA Power supply 3rd extension stage 1st extension stage 16 modules 1024 points A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B A1S38HB A1S38HBEU A1S65B S1 A1S68B S1 A1S52B S1 A62B A65B A68B A52B A55B A58B A1S55B S1 A1S58B S1 A1SC03B A1SC07B A1SC12B A1SC30B A1SC01B right side installation A1SC60B A1SCOS5NBA1SCO7NBA1SC30NBA1SC50NB 1 Only one A6 O B A5 0O B extension base can be used The second extension module cannot be used 2 When the extension base A1S52B S1 A1S55B S1 A58B S1 or A52B A55B A58B are used the 5VDC power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit Before use refer to Section 17 3 and examine if it can be used 3 Limit the length of extensio
530. tal of four or less simultaneously at the MELSECNET II or e Check the network Nos and station Nos MELSECNET B data link system e Check the station Nos Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Module No Slot No e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR The start X Y set in the PLC parameter s I O assignment settings is overlapped with the one for another module Make the PLC parameter s I O assignment setting 2107 Collateral informationmmon again so it is consistent with the actual status of the e Common Information Module No Slot No special function modules e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset 22 23 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA Error LED Status Corresponding Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status SP UNIT LAY ERR A 1S J71LP21 or A 1S J71BR11 for use with the ip AnUCPU network module has been installed ERR 2108 WECollateral informationmmon Replace the network module to A 1S J71QLP21 or Flicker QnA e Common Information Module No Slot No A 1S J71QBR11 e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing coro At power ON At reset NOR SP UNIT LAY ERR RUN The control system and standby system module off configurations are different when a redundant ERR emo ine peeKup maag Check the module configuration of the standby Flicker 2109 WECollateral informationmmon sytem Q4AR e common aforan M
531. tart up e When this relay is turned OFF the start of tracking is delayed until it is executable if the tracking memory SM1518 Tracking execution Batch transfer mode is being used at END mode Carryover mode e When this relay is turned ON the start of tracking is e Turns on when the CPU module is started up by the operation system switch e Reset using the user program SM1517 carried over to next END if the tracking memory is being used at END SM1524 Block 5 SM1525 Block 6 SM1526 Block 7 SM1527 Block 8 SM1528 Block 9 SM1529 Block 10 SM1530 Block 11 SM1531 Block 12 SM1532 Block 13 SM1533 SM1533 Block 14 When data is transferred by Data tracking transfer OFF No trigger the data tracking instruction SM1934 trigger specification ON Trigger SM19934 Block IS s TRUCK the target block SM1535 Block 16 _ is specified as trigger SM1536 Block 17 SM1537 Block 18 SM1538 Block 19 SM1539 Block 20 SM1540 Block 21 SM1541 Block 22 SM1542 Block 23 SM1543 Block 24 SM1544 Block 25 SM1545 Block 26 SM1546 Block 27 SM1547 Block 28 App 67 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 12 Special relay Corres Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 a OFF No trigger ee eae an ON ae S TRUCK the nee block SSW MRAR apeciipanon is specified as trigger e Turns ON when switching could not be executed Switching status from a normally
532. tatus Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status 3003 3004 3100 3101 3102 PARAMETER ERROR Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number Diagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed PARAMETER ERROR The number of devices set at the PLC parameter device settings exceeds the possible CPU module range Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number MDiagnostic Timing e At power On At reset STOP gt RUN At writing to progurammable controller PARAMETER ERROR The parameter file is incorrect Alternatively the contents of the file are not parameters Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing e At power On At reset STOP gt RUN At writing to progurammable controller LINK PARA ERROR Although the QnACPU is a control station or master station the network parameters have not been written Collateral informationmmon e Common Information File name Drive name e Individual Information Parameter number HDiagnostic Timing At power ON At reset STOP RUN LINK PARA ERROR e The network No specified by a network parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network e The head I O No specified by a network parameter is diff
533. ten the screw For CPU I O or Test by moving the Must be installed Loosening backlash power supply if module solidly Ambient environment loosened secure it with screws Adhesion of dirt or Visual inspection No adhesion Remove and clean foreign matters Loosening of terminal Retighten with a No loosening Retighten screw screwdriver Proximity of There is an Visual inspection Correct the distance solderless terminals appropriate distance Retighten the Loosening of a Visual inspection No loosening connector fixing connector screw Confirm SM51 or SM52 Even when there is no is OFF with a peripheral Preventive low battery display device in the monitoring maintenance replace if specified life Installation condition N Cc Q O Cc O O c Ke O eb Cc Cc O O Battery mode is exceeded G Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Failure to do so may result in an electric shock If they are too loose it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions If too tight it may cause damage to the screws and or module resulting in an accidental drop of the module short circuit or malfunctions 21 2 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION IF SEC QnA 21 3 Battery Replacement Special relay SM51 or SM52 is turned ON when voltage of the battery for backing up programs a
534. tent tive Act Bate rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status MAIN CPU DOWN Runaway or failure of CPU module or failure of main CPU e Malfunctioning due to noise or other reason Hardware fault Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e Always END NOT EXECUTE Entire program was executed without the execution of an END instruction e When the END instruction is executed it is read as another instruction code e g due to noise e The END instruction has been changed to another instruction code somehow Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e When an END instruction executed RAM ERROR The sequence program storing built in RAM program memory in the CPU module is faulty Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset When an END instruction executed RAM ERROR e The work area RAM in the CPU module is faulty The standard RAM and extended RAM in the CPU module are faulty Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information HDiagnostic Timing e At power ON At reset When an END instruction executed RAM ERROR The device memory in the CPU module is faulty Collateral informationmmon e Common Information e Individual Information HDiagn
535. tents of SD1224 to D1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed Stores conditions for 64 If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid e If the host master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Station number Stores station information for Allows a local station to confirm its own station number QnA number 0 to 64 host station Number of link Stores number of Indicates the number of slave stations in one loop QnA device stations slave stations Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have Receive error Stores cumulative been detected CRC OVER AB IF detection count total of receive errors Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation QnA App 104 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 3 12 Special register Special S ial Registar Re a for after g Register Modification Conversion D9248 D1248 ACPU C di Special orresponding CPU Local station Stores conditions for operation status up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE mode Device number b11 b10 b9 Localstation Stores conditions for Spade ERENT operation status 1S MUMbe rssh SD1249 L28 L27 L26 D1250 L44 L43 L42 SD1251 L60IL59 L58 QnA Stores conditions for up to num
536. ter BCD code E i 7 Extension file registerfor designation of device number Device number when individual devices e Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers from extension file register are directly accessed D1037 SD1036 Device No BIN data App 97 The minute and second are stored as BCD code as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b0 Example T T P 35 min 48 sec QnA H3548 Extension file register Block No 1 area Block No 2 area APPENDICES ACPU Special Register D9038 D9039 D9044 D9049 D9050 D9051 D9052 D9053 D9054 D9055 D9060 D9072 D9081 Special Register after Conversion D1038 SD1039 SD1044 SD1049 SD1050 SD1051 SD1052 SD1053 SD1054 SD1055 SD1060 SD1072 SD1081 Special Register for Modification SD207 SD208 SD812 SD392 SD714 LED display priority ranking For sampling trace Work area for SFC SFC program error number Error block Error step Error transition Error sequence step Status latch execution step number Software version PLC communication check Number of empty blocks in communications request registrtion area MELSEC QnA Table App 3 1
537. tery within 3 minutes saanen Al Date for next change Y M D JHE VGA 4ALYY F areal re FH S fin ate MEO ARZE CARD ON Pull out O prohibited HEFa FF Pull out permited BD990C973H01 Memory card battery replacement procedure Replace the memory card battery according to the following procedure when the life is over Even if the battery is removed the memory card memory is backed up by a capacitor so that the battery can be replaced while the memory card is out of the CPU module However if the time taken to replace the battery exceeds the guaranteed value indicated in Table 21 6 below the contents of the memory may be lost Therefore change the battery as quickly as possible While the programmable controller power is ON the battery can be replaced without removing the memory card in the CPU module In this case the memory contents are backed up by the power supply voltage from the power supply module 21 13 21 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Table 21 8 Period backed up by the capacitor Replacing batteries Replacing batteries Period backed up by the capacitor min locking switch from the LOCK position with a flat blade screwdriver Set the new battery into the battery holder in the correct orientation Insert the battery holder fully home into the memory card Set the battery holder locking switch to the LOCK position using a flat bl
538. tery Replacement ccccccseeeneeeees 21 3 Data Clear Processing cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 27 Battery replacement procedure 21 11 Data link instructions ccceeceeeeee scenes App 38 Battery replacement timing 21 3 21 5 Data Link Systems cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeees App 128 Battery Specifications CPU Module and Memory Data register D ariennir oniinn 4 2 Card BatterieS cccccccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaes 18 4 Debugging by several people ccceee 8 61 Installing Batteries CPU Module and Memory DEBUGGING FUNCTION Card BatterieS ccccccssccceeecseeeeeesseeeees 18 7 Debugging by several people 00 8 61 Battery MICs cidsrceunssaneviewassidinQindentiacweiednderwians 21 5 Simultaneous execution of write during RUN by When a PLC is Reoperated After Stored with the Several people ccsccceeecceseceeeceeeseeeeees 8 63 Battery Over the Battery Life 21 16 Simultaneous monitoring by several people When Reoperating a PLC After Storing it With Qe eeecceeecceecccecccaeeeseeeeeeeeee sees eeseeeseeeeaeeeseeesaeeenees 8 62 Battery Unconnected ccccceeeseeeee ees 21 15 Device Battery transportation cccceceeeeeeeees App 162 Annunciator F cccccceecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 4 2 Boot file setting ccccccsececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaees 13 7 Counter C creenin 4 2 Boot o
539. tes the number of mounted MELSECNET 10 modules modules installed I O No Indicates I O number of mounted MELSECNET 10 module Indicates network No of mounted MELSECNET 10 module Standby Initial SD258 MELSECNET SD259 10 information SD260 to SD264 SD265 to SD269 SD270 to SD274 SD280 CC Link error D255 Group Indicates group No of mounted MELSECNET 10 module e In the case of standby stations the module number of the standby informa Table App 3 4 Special register number tion Information from 1st module station is stored 1 to 4 Information from 2nd module e Configuration is identical to that for the first module Information from e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 3rd module Information from e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module S e When Xn0 of the mounted CC Link module turns ON the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC Link module turns OFF the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON e Turns to 1 ON when communication between the mounted CC Link module and CPU module cannot be made S Error New QnA b15 to b9 b8 to bO 8th module Information of 2 Information of 1 Number of points for X devices assigned for X Number of points l e Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices assigned for Y Number of points e Stor
540. the USER LED is turned ON monitor SM62 and SM80 of the special relay in the peripheral device monitor mode After monitoring and removing the cause the USER LED can be turned OFF by resetting the RUN STOP key switch or performing the LEDR instruction e When SM62 is ON With the annunciator F ON the USER LED is ON Check the error cause with SD62 to SD79Y e When SM80 is ON With execution of the CHK instruction the USER LED is ON Check the error cause with SD80 After checking the error cause remove the cause The USER LED can be turned OFF by either of the following operations e Resetting the system with the RUN STOP key switch e Execution of the LEDR instruction with the sequence program REMARK When the RUN STOP key switch is turned to L CLR several times in a latch clear operation the USER LED flashes to indicate that latch clear processing is in progress When the RUN STOP key switch is turned once more to L CLR while the USER LED is flashing the USER LED goes OFF and latch clear processing is ended 22 2 7 Flow for actions when the BAT ARM LED is turned ON This section describes the case when the BAT ARM LED of CPU module is turned on With the Q2ASCPU the BAT ARM LED turns ON when the voltage of the battery for a CPU module or a memory card drops When the BAT ARM LED turns ON monitor the special relays SM51 and SM52 and special registers SD51 and SD52 in the peripheral device monitor
541. the CPU module The order of the programs is A B C END processing A B Table 8 1 Operation for CPU module and GPPQ function versions GPPQ Model Name With Function Version B Without Function Version B D100 after execution of _ D100 after execution of SWOLI GPPQ DO of program C is DO of program C is program C is program C is SW101 GPPQ monitored monitored monitored monitored When local D100 after execution of D100 after execution of Ea DO of program C is i DO of program C is device is not program C is program C is monitored monitored set monitored monitored SWwW2L GPPQ When local DO of the displayed device is set program is set D100 after execution of the displayed program is An error error code 4001 occurs set REMARK GX Developer supports functions of function version B 4 Precautions a The local device that can perform the monitor test in one peripheral device is only one program Monitor test for multiple program local devices from one peripheral device is not allowed b The number of programs that allows simultaneous monitor test from multiple peripheral devices is up to 16 When the local device of the stand by type program is monitored the local device data is read escape The scan time is extended as follows Q2ASCPU S1 560 1 3x Number of words in the local device us Q2ASHCPU S1 220 0 8x Number of words in the local device
542. the FROM instruction rather than by using them at each instruction This is because programming scan interval is added due to an access processing to the special function module for each instruction When executing the instruction using a special direct device for the special function module frequently in short scan time it may cause the target special function module operation error When performing the instruction using a special direct device match the processing time and conversion time of the special function module using timer or constant scanning 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS WITH SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULES mms ELS EC A 6 3 Processing for Data Communication Requests from a Special Function Module When a data communication request is received from a special function module such as a serial communication module the Q2ASCPU performs the processing for the data communication request at the END processing The Q2ASCPU can process all the data communication requests received in one scan with one END processing according to the parameter settings In this case the data lag to each module is eliminated but the END processing is extended by the data communications request processing Data communications request batch processing is set in the 6 General Data Processing on the PC system screen in the GPP function parameter mode The setting range is 1 to 6 modules and the processsing can be set per module PC System Setting Label 1
543. the device comment specified at S to ASCII codes and outputs the result to an output module e Displays ASCII codes in the 8 points of devices corresponding to 16 characters starting from the one specified at S on the LED indicator e Displays the comment of the device specified at S on the LED E indicator Display App 26 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 10 Debugging and fault diagnostics instructions e Executes the CHK instruction when it is executed e Causes a jump to the step following the step of the CHK instruction when it is not executed _ L 4 CHK e When normal SM80 OFF SD80 0 e aes in e When abnormal SM80 ON SD80 fault No Error check e Indicates the start of ladder pattern change for the ladders to be checked with the CHK instruction e Indicates the end of ladder pattern change for the ladders to be checked with the CHK instruction Status latch e Resets the status latch to enable re execution of status latch Triggers sampling trace Sampling trace Resets the sampling trace to enable re execution of sampling trace Program trace PTRAR e Resets the program trace to enable re execution of program trace PTRAEXE e Executes program trace App 27 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 11 Text string processing instructions e Converts the 1 word BIN data specified at S into 5 digit decimal BINDA P S D ASCII values and stores them to the word devices starting f
544. the following manual e MELSECNET MINI S3 Master Module User s Manual CC Link auto refresh Refresh time between the Q2AS H CPU S1 and CC Link master local module For the auto refesh processing time of CC Link refer to the following manual e Control amp Communication Link System Master Local Module type AJ61QBT11 A1SJ61QBT11 User s Manual Sampling trace a Processing time in the case of sampling trace execution Sampling trace data are set using GX Developer and the processing time is added when the sampling trace is executed b The following table shows the processing time when internal relay 50 points as a bit device data register 50 points as a word device are set for sampling trace data CPU module Processing Time Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU S1 App 159 APPENDICES 5 Monitor using GX Developer Processing time in the case of monitoring by GX Developer The processing time is added when monitoring by GX Developer a The following table shows the processing time when data register 64 points are set for registration monitor Q2ASHCPU S1 The following shows the processing time when monitor conditions are set ProcessingTime Time CPN modue a in Agreement in Designated Step Designated Device 6 Local device Processing time when the local device is used The processing time is added when the local device is used CPU module Processing Time Q2ASCPU S1 3 0x n 1 2 8ms Q2ASHCPU S1 1
545. the sequence program 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION MELSEC QnA b Send data storage device Address 19 bB b7 bO Station No 2 Station No 1 Y40F Y42F po 7428 427 _ Y420 tation No ation No as a v Station No 8 Station No 7 Station No 10 Station No 9 pear Sy es ves Fr Used by the system Station No 11 Output area 1 Set the device number Y400 for bO of the station 1 as a send data storage device 2 The send data storage device occupies from Y400 to Y45F For the present system example since the total number of stations is odd it is occupied for one extra station 3 The device numbers of output modules connected are as follows Station 9 to 10 AX40Y50C gt Y440 to Y44F Station 11 AJ35TJ 8R gt Y450 to Y457 With respect to Y400 to Y43F and Y458 to Y45F they are simultaneously refreshed but are not output 1 If the same device type is used for the send data storage devices and received data storage devices make sure that there is no duplication of device numbers When the received data storage device is set to BO in the system configuration example it occupies BO to BSF as the device range Set the send data storage device to B60 or later When the send data storage device is set to B60 the device range will be B60 to BBF If a bit device is specified as the send received data storage device the device number set must be a m
546. this to the word device specified at D Hexadecimal ASCII l e Converts the 8 digit decimal ASCII values designated at S to a 2 DHABIN P 5 D word BIN value and stores this at the word device number designated at D e Converts the 4 digit decimal ASCII values specified at S to a 1 word BCD value and stores this to the word device specified at D e Converts the 8 digit decimal ASCII values specified at S to a 2 word BCD value and stores this to the word devices specified at D poscos 0 Device comment e Stores the comment data of the device specified at S to the device COMRD P S read Ceen specified at D e Stores the length of the character string data number of characters Text string length T that is stored in the device specified at S to the device specified at D detection App 28 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA e Converts the 1 word BIN value specified at S2 into a decimal PSTR P 451 521 D character string with the total number of digits and number of fraction part digits specified at S1 and stores it in the device specified at D l Decimal text string e Converts the 2 word BIN value specified at S2 into a decimal OSTR P 51 52 D character string with the total number of digits and number of fraction part digits specified at S1 and stores it in the device specified at D e Converts the character string that includes a decimal point specifie
547. tier 3 When SM1208 is OFFB and W of host station is sent to for lower link eee ae ON Transmits to tier2 only tertiary stations When SM1208 is ONB and W of host station is not sent to only tertiary stations e Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower Link parameter links ai C ons mae Eee e When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the higher M9209 SM1209 for lower link function master stations ON Check non execution ee a renee f e When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher only and lower link are checked Link card error for OFF Normal Control is performed depending on whether the link card M9210 SM1210 master station ON Abnormal hardware is faulty or not Link module error M9211 SM1211 for local station use OFF Online M9224 SM1224 inkstas ON Offline station to Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or station test or self is in station to station test or self loopback test mode loopback test M9225 SM1225 Forward loop error Ore Nemnel Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line QnA ON Abnormal M9226 SM1226 Reverse loop error Ope ehennel Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line QnA ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed M9227 SM1227 Loop test status ON Forward or REVEISe Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a QnA loop test execution forward or a reverse loop test underway OFF RUN or ST
548. ting in the parameter mode 2 Remote latch clear executed by the GPP function is an alternative method other than using the RUN STOP key switch Refer to Section 10 6 5 Removing a memory card while the programmable controller power is ON When removing a memory card with the programmable controller power ON operate the memory card in out switch as follows 1 In out switch ON LED in the switch N EA ere tes Memory card removal prohibited 2 In out switch OFF LED in the switch OR cedecsevsin seem ea Memory card removal permitted Removal of memory card 1 The LED in the in out switch may not come OFF if the memory card is being used for a CPU module system function sampling trace status latch etc or by a program In such a case stop the function or program using the memory card After aborting it confirm that the LED in the in out switch has gone OFF then remove the memory card 2 When a file register local device or breakdown history set with parameters is present the memory card cannot be removed Even if the memory card in out switch is turned OFF its built in LED does not turn OFF When the file register is set to Not used with the QDRSET P instruction the memory card can be removed 3 After removing the memory card do not turn on the memory card insertion disconnection switch for preventing an error 15 5 15 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS OF CPU MODULES mms ELS EC A 4 Installing a memory card
549. tion e Individual Information MDiagnostic Timing e STOP RUN BLOCK EXE ERROR Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was already started up Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed BLOCK EXE ERROR Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in the SFC program Collateral informationmmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Read common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem The program is automatically subjected to an initial start Read common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem e Read the common information of the error using GX Developer and check and correct the error step corresponding to that value program error location e Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF CPU operation can be set in the parameters at error occurrence LED indication varies 22 39 RUN
550. tion 22 3 3 1000 to 1999 to Section 22 3 9 7000 to 10000 a Error code common information and individual information Alphanumeric characters in the parentheses of the titles indicate the special register numbers where the individual information is stored b Compatible CPUs O QCPU Q00J Q00 Q01 Qn H QnPH QnPRH QnA Rem Each CPU module Compatible with all the QnACPU and QCPU Compatible with all the Q series CPU module Compatible with the Basic model QCPU Compatible with the High Performance model QCPU Compatible with the process CPU Compatible with the redundant CPU Compatible with the QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Compatible with the MELSECNET H remote I O module Compatible with the listed CPU module Example Q4AR Q2AS 22 15 22 TROUBLESHOOTING mms ELS EC A 22 3 1 Error Codes There are errors that is detected by the self diagnostics function of the CPU module and that is detected while communicating with the CPU module The table below shows the link between the type of error detection the point of error detection and the error codes Error Detection Type Error Detection Point Reference for Error Contents Detection by the self diagnostics function of CPU module 1000 to 10000 1 Section 22 3 3 to Section 22 3 9 the CPU module CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Appendix 5 7000H to 7FFFH Serial Communication Module User s Manual Detection while CC Link module BOOO
551. tion is performed at the local device of i the file executed before execution of the the call source file of the subroutine program interrupt program Operation is performed at the local device of o Operation is performed at the local device of the file where the subroutine program is l d the file where the interrupt program is stored App 151 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA a Operation for subroutine program SM776 operation OFF without function version B or with function version B File name ABC File name DEF stand by program Execution of subroutine program Subroutine program File name Locai device of ABC PE of local File name Local device of DEF SM776 operation ON with function version B File name ABC File name DEF stand by program Execution of subroutine program CALL P100 eau Pree Subroutine Read write of program local device L _____ _ _ File name Local device of ABC File name Local device of DEF App 152 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA b Operation for interrupt program SM776 operation OFF without function version B or with function version B File name ABC File name DEF stand by program Interrupt ch gree occurrence Execution of interrupt program Interrupt program File name Local device of ABC Read write of File name Local device of DEF local device SM776 operation ON
552. tion not number goes below 32 executable App 56 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 7 Debug Table App 2 8 Special relay Corres f Set by ponding Corresponding Expl xplanation When Set ACPU CPU M9000 i OFF Not read SM800 Samp TORG e Goes ON when sampling trace is ready S Status change preparation ON Ready OFF Suspend e Sampling trace started when this goes ON PGR samping tace sian ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF i hiii HNA Sampling trace OFF Suspend SM802 execution in progress ON Start Goes ON during execution of sampling trace S Status change M9046 e Sampling trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF to ON Identical to STRA instruction execution New QnA status S Sampling trace trigger SM803 OFF ON Start QnA Aft ling t OFF Not after trigger SM804 ARA e Goes ON after sampling trace trigger Status change N trigger ON After trigger Sampling trace OFF Not completed SM805 completed ON End Goes ON at completion of sampling trace S Status change M9043 QnA tatus latch FF Not SM806 aa P c gt i ready e Goes ON when status latch is ready S Status change N preparation ON Ready N O 5 gt N SM807 Status latch command OFF ON Latch e Runs status latch command CO O eG U U tatus latch FF Latch not let SM808 a E i i ay ne CO DAIRE e Comes ON when status latch is completed S Status change M9055 QnA co
553. tions acct toci ce tein cee ces coos Slee iedda ener asc aeteeeteldeesielatde App 5 Appendix 1 3 Application Instructions ccccccccccceeceeeeeceeeceeeeseeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeseeesanes App 17 Appendix 1 4 Datta Link Instructions ccccccccsecceeecceeeceeceeeeeeeeceecaeecauescaeeseeesaeeesaeeseeesaees App 38 Appendix 1 5 PID Control Instructions sssrinin a eee ie ek App 41 Appendix 1 6 Special Function Module Instructions ccccccccceecseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaues App 42 APPENDIX 2 Special Relay LISt 2chncsomdectss isn a a a e EA EAEE App 48 APPENDIX 3 Special Register LIST 5 3323 202 sie ieese rn e A r ete santanedocoeals App 72 APPENDIX 4 PRECAUTIONS FOR UTILIZING THE EXISTING MELSEC A SERIES PROGRAM FOR ZA SG PU ere ote pec dociees ee weeeaaele ee ena ba Gone aun eseetteeeee tt xenstn cet eece Seta Seees App 110 ADDENGDGAT NNSIRUCIONS csak e a a a ah App 110 APPENdIX AZ DEVICE siii a aa a ae e App 118 APPENdIX A S Paramete Secr a na a a App 120 Appendix 4 4 Timer and Interrupt Counter Operations ccccccccceeeceeeeseeseeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeees App 121 Appendix 4 5 Sequence Programs Statements Notes cccccccsececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees App 122 Appendix 4 6 Microcomputer Programs ccccseccseecceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeaueesaeeseeseeeseeeeaeeeees App 124 Appendix 4 7 COMME acep a aA aaa aa aaa Ea a e a aait App 125
554. trol the CPU module and remote I O modules The heading descriptions in the following special relay lists are shown in Table App 2 1 Table App 2 1 Explanation of special relay list em Frmatfon ote e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only for registers set by system Set by Each END Set during each END processing When set Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc System switching Set when system switching is executed Corresponding e Indicates the corresponding special relay M90 O00 of the ACPU When the contents are changed the special relay is represented M9O O O format change ACPU M90 0 0O e New indicates the special relay newly added to the QnACPU Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name QnA Indicates the QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Each CPU module model name Indicates the relevant specific CPU module Example Q4AR Q2AS Corresponding CPU For detail
555. tting in positioning create it outside the programmable controller Install the emergency stop switch outsid the controlpanel so that workers can operate it easily 2 When the programmable controller detects the following error conditions it stops the operation and turn off all the outputs e The overcurrent or overvoltage protector of the power supply module is activated e The programmable controller CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error by the self diagnostics function In the case of an error undetectable by the programmable controller CPU such as an I O control part error all the outputs may turn on In order to make all machines operate safely in such a case set up a fail safe circuit or a specific mechanism outside the programmable controller For fail safe circuit example refer to OADING AND INSTALLATION of this manual Depending on the failure of the output module s relay or transistor the output status may remain ON or OFF incorrectly For output signals that may lead to a serious accident create an external monitoring circuit IDESIGN PRECAUTIONS A WARNING If load current more than the rating or overcurrent due to a short circuit in the load has flowed in the output module for a long time it may cause a fire and smoke Provide an external safety device such as a fuse Design a circuit so that the external power will be supplied after power up of the programmable controller Activating the
556. tting is incorrect Setting is out of range Setting is incorrect Setting is incorrect The file name does not exist This file cannot be handled Setting is incorrect Routing parameter does not exist The network I O does not exist Link unit error The corresponding unit is faulty 139 MELSEC QnA Corrective Action Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set number Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set number Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set number Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the designated file name Check and correct the designated file name Check and correct the set contents Set the routing parameters for accessing to the designated station in the relevant station Check and correct the routing parameters set at the relevant station Check if an error has occurred at the network module link module or if the online state has not been established Check and correct the error at the designated access target station or the relay station for the access station APPENDICES MELSEC QnA REMARK 1 Message 1 Cannot communicate with PC Error i m An error code is displayed in 2 Alert 1 Execution was initiated from other station Essentially cannot initiate execution Do you want to initiate
557. tus 2 Power supply ON OFF 3 I O equipment status 4 5 Wiring status I O wires and cable Display status of each display indicator POWER LED RUN LED ERROR LED I O LED etc 6 Status of each setting switch extension base power failure compensation etc After confirming 1 to 6 connect a peripheral device and observe the operation status of the programmable controller and program contents Error confirmation Observe how the error changes by performing the following operations 1 Set the RUN STOP key switch to STOP 2 Reset using the RUN STOP key switch 3 Turn ON OFF the power supply Narrow down the range By performing the 1 and 2 above assume the faulty area in the following 1 Programmable controller or external 2 I O module or others 3 Sequence program 22 1 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 2 Troubleshooting The error definition determination method error definition corresponding to the error code and corrective actions are described 22 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart The error definitions are described by events Symptom of error occurrence POWER LED is OFF RUN LED is OFF RUN LED is flickering ERROR LED is ON or flickering USER LED is ON BAT ARM LED is on I O module dose not operate normally Program cannot be written Boot operation from a memory card is not possible The CPU module is not started up 2
558. uest after the processing has been completed Reissue the request after the processing has been completed Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set contents Check and correct the set number APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 40B3H 4A00H 4A01H 4A02H 4B00H Error SFC device designation error SFC file related error Link related error Target related error Error Contents Out of range block No is designated Designation exceeds the range for the number of blocks Out of range step No is designated Designation exceeds the range for number of steps Out of range sequence step No is designated The designated device is out of range The block designation pattern or step designation pattern was incorrect The designated drive is incorrect The designated program does not exist The designated program was not an SFC program The SFC dedicated instruction exists in the write during RUN area The designated station cannot be accessed because no routing parameters have been set to the relevant station No network with the No set in the routing parameters exists Cannot access to the designated station An error occurred at the access target station or the relay station App Message Displayed at Peripheral Device Setting is incorrect Setting is out of range Setting is incorrect Setting is out of range Se
559. ultiple of 16 Example XO X10 MO M16 BO B10 3 Device range used is 8 points x Number of stations When the number of stations is an odd number extra 8 points are necessary 4 When specifying input X for the received data storage device specify the device number out of the actual input X range 7 AUTO REFRESH FUNCTION 7 2 Q2ASCPU Parameter p END END processing Auto Refresh Setting of CC Link Auto refresh of the CC Link designates automatic communications between the Q2ASCPU and the buffer memory for cyclic communication of CC Link master stations local stations Data for communication varies depending on the remote station connected e Remote I O station Communication in ON OFF data e Remote device station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data e Intelligent device station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data e Master station local station Communication in ON OFF data and Word data The auto refresh setting of the CC Link allows communication with other stations of CC Link using the FROM TO instruction without communicating with the master station of the CC Link Cyclic communication External device External device Remote device External station device Master station Auto refresh setting of CC Link Remote O station input Remote input ON OFF data Remote I O R t tout j emote outpu station output ON OFF data v Update the data
560. utes stores 00 to 59 in BCD e The day of the week is recorded as follows b15 to b4b3tob0 LEED aeneeet e Day stores 0 to 6 in BCD Stores 0 Clock data e The settings for the day of the week are as follows Day of Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat the week Storage 1 2 3 4 5 data day of the week 10 11 10 OTHER FUNCTIONS MELSEC QnA 10 6 Remote Operation With the Q2ASCPU the operating status of the CPU module can be controlled from external sources GPP function intelligent special function module remote contact etc REMARK In this chapter a serial communication module is used as an example of an intelligent special function module 10 6 1 Remote RUN STOP Remote RUN STOP refers to the function that sets the Q2ASCPU to RUN or STOP from an external source while the CPU module RUN STOP key switch is set to the RUN position 1 Application of remote RUN STOP Remote RUN STOP operation from remote location is useful in the following cases a When the CPU module is installed in an inaccessible location b When setting the CPU module in a control panel to RUN STOP from an external source Operation for remote RUN STOP The following shows the program operations to which remote RUN STOP is performed a Remote STOP The program is performed up to the END instruction then STOP state is established b Remote RUN When remote RUN is performed with the CPU in STO
561. utputs 0 11 all points independent 32 points 5 12VDC transistor output module A1SY71 32 outputs 0 40 0 15 16 output 12 24VDC t ist tput modul A1SY80 T A ca a 16 outputs 0 12 0 02 0 8A source type 2 output 12 24VDC t ist tput A1SY81 ee Ute eee wallele ter OUlPeUQeatie 32 outputs 0 50 0 008 0 1A source type 4 output 12 24VDC t ist tput modul A1SY82 p pe Ne ke fer ne a 64 outputs 0 93 0 008 0 1A source type 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC QnA Number of Occupied Current Current consumption NEN Points points Product Name Model Name Description iOAssignment 5VDC am Remark Module Type A 32 points 12 24VDC input module A1SH42 32 output 12 24VDC transistor output module 32 outputs 0 50 0 008 0 1A sink type 32 points 24VDC input module A1SH42 S1 32 output 12 24VDC transistor output module 32 outputs 0 50 0 008 I O module 0 1A sink type 8 points 24VDC input module A1SX48Y18 16 output 0 085 0 045 8 points Relay contact output module 2A Oo anew 8 points 24VDC input module A1SX48Y 16 output Panne 8 output 12 24VDC transistor output module 0 5A nina Dynamic input 44542 16 32 48 64 points Specified points ae module 12 24VDC dynamic input module Input Setnumber ofpoinis l i j Specified points Dynamic output A1S42Y 16 32 48 64 points 0 18 0 055 module 12 24VDC dynamic output module Output Setnumber of points A1SG60 Dust proof cover for unused slot Empty Ls 16 point 32 po
562. ve is supplied between the base B of Tr4 and emitter E which causes the base current c to flow Tr4 turns ON 5 The current in 4 causes the collector current d to flow and voltage Y1 drops to between 0 and 24V 22 51 e Use only one power supply e Connect a diode for a sneak path When a relay or similar load is used a free wheel diode must be connected across the load Shown by dotted line in the figure at left As shown above connect diode D2 of IF 1A class to output Y2 which is connected to an external switch This revents currents 3 and 4 from flowing However check the operation voltage of L3 as the amount of voltage drop of Y2 at power ON increases for 0 6 to 1V 22 TROUBLESHOOTING Table22 3 Faults in the output circuit MELSEC QnA a Situation Cause Countermeasure Incorrect output due to the floating capacitance C between the collector and emitter of the photocoupler This does not affect normal loads but in case of highly sensitive loads such as solid state relays incorrect outputs may occur Photocoupler Output module Combined module Photocoupler The load is momentarily turned ON when the Example external supply power is 8 started up 1 If the external supply power is suddenly Transistor output started up current Ic flows due to the floating capacitance C between the collector and emitter of the photocoupler 2 Current Ic flows to the
563. ve steps in all blocks that can be designated Collateral informationmnmon e Common Information Program error location e Individual Information Diagnostic Timing e When instruction executed Read common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and check and correct the error step corresponding to that value program error location e Turn ON if the special relay SM321 is OFF Read common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem 22 40 RUN Off ERR Flicker CPU Status Stop QnA 22 TROUBLE SHOOTING MELSEC QnA 22 3 7 Error code list 5000 to 5999 The following shows the error messages from the error code 5000 to 5999 the contents and causes of the errors and the corrective actions for the errors Error LED Status Corresponding E tent tive Act Code rror Contents and Cause Corrective Action CPU Status WDT ERROR The scan time of the initial execution type program exceeded the initial execution monitoring time specified in the PLC RAS setting of the PLC parameter 5000 Collateral informationnmon e Common Information Time value set e Individual Information Time value actually mea
564. vent noise emission use shielded cables for the cables which are connected to the I O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance The signal lines including common line of the programmable controller which are connected to I O modules intelligent function modules and or extension cables have noise durability in the condition of grounding their shields by using the shielded cables Ifa shielded cable is not used or not grounded correctly the noise resistance will not meet the specified requirements 1 Grounding of shielded cables a Shielding must be done close to the control panel Otherwise electromagnetic induction from the cable after the grounding point will generate high frequency noise b Partly remove the outer sheath of the shielded cable so that it can be contact with the widest possible area of the control panel A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case cover the control panel s inner surface which will come in contact with the clamp when painting Clamp fitting o section Paint mask Shielded cable Note Grounding a shield cable by soldering a wire to the shield section as illustrated below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Shielded cable Wire Solderless terminal 20 4 20 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE
565. vers the setting data stored in the CPU module at Data recovery of i M9199 SM1199 Anine samon disabled restart when sampling trace status latch is executed i ping ON _ Data recovery e SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary trace status latch a l enabled when writing the data again from peripheral devices App 63 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay ACPU Special Special Correspondin Special Relay after Relay for ponaing CPU Relay Conversion Modification ZNRD instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read LRDP instruction Not Aeeanied instruction has been received M9200 SM1200 for ACPU j p Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD QnA l Accepted i reception for instruction master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNRD instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read LRDP instruction instruction execution is complete Not completed ie M9201 SM1201 for ACPU End Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and QnA completion for M9201 after the ZNRD instruction is complete master station Use the RST instruction to reset ZNWR instruction Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device LWTP instruction cNetaceecien write instruction has been received M9202 SM1202 for ACPU i Rese i Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR QnA reception for P instruction master station Use the RST instruct
566. vice is designated The collection timing of the monitor data is the scan END processing when the execution status of the specified bit device becomes the specified status The following shows the possible designations for execution status At leading edge lt gt At trailing edge lt gt When 2 Step and 1 Device are designated The monitor data collection timing is such that data is collected when the status immediately before execution of the designated step or the execution status current value of the designated bit device word device attains the designated status 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA In the ladder block shown below assuming that the detailed condition is set as follows Step 100 lt T gt Word device D1 K5 XO 100th step _____ 20 NC DI The monitor timing is shown below However the monitoring interval at a peripheral device capable of GPP functions depends on the processing speed of that peripheral device Even if data changes occur faster than the monitor interval data can be collected only once during the interval Step No 100 l 2 MO XO D1 5 l Monitoring timing SOO ee ae ee ee CPU module 8 DEBUGGING FUNCTION MELSEC QnA 1 Assume that Step 2 lt ON gt is designated as the detailed condition in the case of the ladders shown below In this case the monitor execution differs for the two
567. when an annunciator comes Comment Comment display 3004H display mode ON Time occurrence Breakdown D kainin 3005H Set where the CPU module breakdown history is stored Set the time required for execution of low speed execution type Low speed program execution time 3006H programs 13 3 13 PARAMETER LIST MELSEC QnA Setting Reference Section Reference Manual Default value Setting range X 8k points Y 8k points M gt 8k points L 8k points B gt 8k points F 2k points Fixed to X 8k points Y 8k points S 8k points SB SB 2k points 2k points SW 2k points V gt 2k points Up to 32k points per device within a range of 28 8k QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals S 8k points words including the above points T 2k points However the total for bit devices is 64k points ST gt Ok point C gt 1k point D 12k points W 8k points SW gt 2k points No setting 1 range only for each device Section 10 3 No setting 1 range only for each device Section 10 3 No setting 1 range only for each device QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 10ms to 2000ms in 10ms units Section 9 2 No setting 10ms to 2000ms in 10ms units Section 12 1 1 No setting 10ms to 2000ms in 10ms units Section 12 1 3 Checked Error checked Section 9 3 Stop Continue Section 9 3 No setting 1ms to 2000ms in 1ms units QnACPU Programming Manual Fundamentals 13 4 13 PARAM
568. when resistor R is connected will be as follows 1 o1 1 1 5 kQ 3 3 kQ e This satisfies 4V or less OFF voltage of A1SX40 x 3 mA 3 09 V 22 48 22 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC QnA 22 5 2 Faults in the output circuit Faults concerning output circuits and the corrective actions are explained Table22 3 Faults in the output circuit a Situation Cause Countermeasure When the load is subjected to half wave rectification inside e Connect a resistor at several tens Q to Solenoids have these types several hundred of kQ to the both ends of the load A1SY22 with the output element but the diode built With this kind of usage there is no problem in to the load may deteriorate and burn out An excessive voltage is Example applied to the load when output is off Triac output e When the polarity of the power supply is 1 C is charged and when the polarity is 2 the voltage charged in C voltage of the power Load supply are applied to the both ends of D1 The maximum value of the voltage is about 2 2E e Connect a resistor to the both ends of the e Leak current caused by built in noise supressor load If the wire distance from the output module to the load is great then it may have leakage current by line capacity It is necessary to take precautions A1SY22 Example Load does not turn OFF Output module Triac output Resistance Leakage current 22 49 22 TROUBLE
569. where the programmable controller is stored must be kept 55 C or less For heat dissipation design of the panel it is necessary to know the average power consumption heat generation of the devices and machinery stored inside ln this section a method to obtain the average power consumption of the programmable controller system is explained Calculate the temperature rise inside the panel from the power consumption Average Power Consumption The power consuming parts of the programmable controller may be roughly classified into the following blocks AC power supply Power sup ply module Speci CPU Link Output Input a i module module module module module liN x E suppl Sens transistor pply I5v 5VDC line ee loay aha l Output current Input Vd power 2avDC eee eee supply ipower supply Output 1IN L power supply lout l l l l 1 l l IDC i DC DC i C H L 4 4 L 4 Paes 1 Power consumption by power supply module The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is about 70 and 30 is consumed as heat generated thus 3 7 of the output power is the power consumption Therefore the calculation formula is Wpw I5v x 5 l45V x 15 I24v x 24 W I5v Current consumption of 5VDC logic ladder circuit of each module l15Vv Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of special function module l24v Average current consumption of 24V
570. while the programmable controller power is ON When installing a memory card with the programmable controller power ON operate the memory card in out switch as follows 1 Install the memory card 2 In out switch ON LED in the switch SON E ET TT Memory card removal prohibited 1 After installing the memory card set the memory card in out switch to ON If it is not set to ON the memory card cannot be used 2 During one scan after the memory card installation mounting processing is performed again Note that the scan time may be increased by 10ms at maximum 15 6 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 16 POWER SUPPLY MODULE This section describes the specifications and selection of power supply modules 16 1 Specifications 16 1 1 Power supply module specifications 1 Standard power supply module Power supply module specifications Performance specifications A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P Slot position Power supply module slot Item 10 30 100 to 240VAC 450 24VDC 350 Input power supply 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VAC Input frequency 50 60Hz 5 Se Input voltage distortion Within 5 See Section 19 8 Max input apparent power 105VA Allowable momentary power 10ms or lower i 20ms or less failure period 24VDC or higher Between primary Dielectric l 500VAC OR and 5VDC AC across input LG and output FG withstan t Between primary 2830VAC rms 3 cycles altitude 2000m 6562ft voltage and 24VDC AC
571. witch is not in STOP position App 60 APPENDICES ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification Relay M9043 SM1043 SM805 PampiNg Hage completed Watchdog timer o o M9046 SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace M9047 SM1047 SM801 Sampling trace preparations Switching the M9049 SM1049 SM701 number of output characters i M9051 SM1051 7 CHG instruc ion execution disable M9052 SM1052 P SEG instruction switch M9054 SM1054 SM205 STEP RUN flag M9055 SM1055 SM808 Status latch completion flag ON o _ swt request i t o _ cust request Main side P I set M tarily ON at P I set M9058 SM1058 z ain side se omentarily O at P I se completion completion tarily ON at P I set M9059 SM1059 Sub program P Momentarily ON a se set completion completan M9060 SM1060 Sub program 2 P set request M9061 SM1061 Sub program 3 P set request MELSEC QnA Table App 2 10 Special relay Corresponding CPU OFF PAUSE disabled M9040 SM1040 SM206 PAUSE enable coil ON PAUSE enabled PAUSE status OFF PAUSE not in effect M9041 SM1041 SM204 ON PAUSE in effect M9042 SM1042 SM203 Spr siaus contact ON e When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or pause contact has turned on and if SM204 is on PAUSE mode is set and SM206 is turned on e Switched on when the RUN key switch or RUN STOP QnA switch is in STOP position e Turns on when sampling trace is performed b
572. witch the power supply module and confirm the LED lights Is CPU module started up NO Possible hardware errors are described below Hardware error of the power supply module 1 CPU module 2 Main base unit Extension base unit Completed 3 Extension cable 4 Network module Only when installed Is the extension cable connected to the incorrect direction Connected IN and IN or OUT and OUT Is the RUN STOP key For the malfunctioning module even after executed the serial operation check from the minimum system please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 22 13 22 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC QnA MEMO 22 14 22 TROUBLESHOOTING 22 3 Error Code List When an error occurs at PLC power ON on switching to the RUN status or during the RUN status the self diagnostics function displays the error content by LED indication or message display on an LED indicator and stores the error information at a special relay SM and special register SD lf an error occurs on a data communicaton request from peripheral devices a special function module and the network system to the CPU module error codes 4000H to 4FFFH are returned to the request source QnACPU errors and corrective actions are described in this section 1 How to read the error code lists The following shows the way of reading the error code lists from Sec
573. with function version B File name ABC File name DEF stand by program Interrupt 4 ss osfFeFeeses S lt CS S dtiS A G eae occurrence Execution of interrupt program interrupt program Read write of i ilocal device File name Local device of ABC File name Local device of DEF App 153 APPENDICES 2 Precautions a When the SM776 is ON the local device data can be read while the subroutine program is called Furthermore the data will be escaped after performing the RET instruction When the SM 777 is ON the local device data is read before performing the interrupt program The data will be escaped after performing the IRET instruction Therefore when SM776 and SM777 are ON the scan time is extended by the time below after the subroutine program interrupt program is executed once Q2ASCPU S1 F560 1 3 x Number of words in the local device 4 s Q2ZASHCPU S1 F220 0 8 x Number of words in the local device 4 s ON OFF of SM776 and SM777 is set for each CPU module It cannot be set for each file When ON OFF of SM776 and SM 77 is changed during execution of the sequence program the control is performed with the changed information App 154 APPENDICES mms ELS EC A APPENDIX 8 NETWORK RELAY FROM ETHERNET MODULE FUNCTION VERSION B OR LATER This is the network system that mixes Ethernet with MELSECNET 10 The network allows communicating data with the Q2ASCPU in
574. with spreadsheet software and text editors available on the market can be converted to files for GPP function use Conversely files created for GPP function use can be converted to data for spreadsheets or text editors Macro library package The basic programs for accessing special function modules and standard programs for error detection alarm processing etc have been brought together as a package of macro and library data Ladder sequence linking package This package is used to link multiple programs to make a single program This has an automatic allocation function that ensures that devices from each program without duplicating in the created program CAD interface program This package is used to handle sequence ladders instruction lists comment data and SFC diagrams as CAD data and communicate these data to CAD systems 2 OVERVIEW mms ELS EC A 2 2 Additional Functions of Q2ASCPU New functions and instructions for special function module are added to the Q2ASCPU Additional functions Variety of local GEVICES cccecccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeeaes Refer to Section 2 2 1 1 Monitor test of local GEVICE cccceccececeneuees Refer to Section 8 2 2 Use of local device at the subroutine interrupt program storage destination cccscceeeeeeeenees Refer to Appendix 7 Auto refresh setting of CC LINK ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees Refer to Section 2 2 1 2 section 7 2 MELSECNET 10
575. with the rated voltage less than 50 VAC or 75 VDC conventional models can be used because the low voltage directives do not apply to them 20 2 2 Precautions when using the QnA series programmable controller Module selection 1 POWER SUPPLY MODULE Since a power supply module with the rated input voltage of 100 200VAC has a potentially hazardous voltage area 42 4V or more at the peak select a model in which reinforced insulation is provided between the primary and secondary sides For those of 24VDC rated input conventional models can be used 2 I O module Since an I O module with the rated input voltage of 100 200VAC has a potentially hazardous voltage area select a model in which reinforced insulation is provided between the primary and secondary sides For those of 24VDC rated input conventional models can be used 3 CPU module memory card base unit Conventional models can be used for these modules because they only have a SVDC circuit inside 4 Special function module Conventional models can be used for the special function modules including analog modules network modules and positioning modules because their rated voltage is 24VDC or lower 5 Display Use the CE marked product 20 13 20 EMC DIRECTIVES AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES mms EL Si 5 7 20 2 3 Power supply The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category II Be sure to use the insta
576. xecution type programs App 85 APPENDICES MELSEC QnA 4 Scan information Table App 3 6 Special register Corres Explanation Set by ponding Corresponding When Set ACPU CPU D9000 SD500 Execution Program No in e Program number of program currently being executed is stored as BIN S Status New QnA program No execution value change Low speed Low speed ee e Program number of low speed excution type program No currently S Every END D510 excution type ae a being executed is stored as BIN value ates New QnA program No Sere e Enabled only when SM510 is ON P g e The current scan time is stored into SD520 and SD521 Current scan time S Every END SD520 in 1 ms units Measurement is made in 100 ys units prosari SD520 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 Current scan SD521 Stores the us place Storage range O to 900 QnA time Example When the current scan time is 23 6ms the following values are SD521 Current scan time stored S Every END in 100 us units SD520 23 processing SD521 600 SD522 Initial scan time e Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program into SD522 and in 1 ms units SD523 S First END Initial scan time p Measurement is made in 100 ys units rocessing QnA SD523 Initial scan time SD522 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 p g in 100 us units SD523 Stores the ys place Storage range 0 to 900 Minimum scan D9018 SD524 time
577. xecution type programs 40 ms to 50 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program A 10 ms Execution time for low speed execution type program B 30 ms END processing 0 ms assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy Low speed END processing 0 D assuming 0 ms here to make the explanation easy END END END END END processing processing processing processing processing i Low speed execution type program A o i BO 120 1B o 240 300 ms E E Pe ee i J I l l l J ms 5 ms ms m Scan execution type program poe i es a aaa ef ms TIE I 1 l I po A o 3 ms f ms 15 ms 3 ms 5 ms 20 ms 5 ms i L L I Low speed execution type program B Low speed scan time Low speed scan time 165 ms 130 ms l l l l J l l l l l l l mE 1 Pa j A Execution of low speed Execution of low speed END processing END processing 2 When a low speed program execution time is set The operation when a low speed execution program is executed under the following conditions is shown below Low speed scan time a scan time Low speed scan time 125ms 80ms 80ms Execution of low speed Execution of low speed Execution of low speed END processing END processing END processing e Low speed program execution time 30 ms e Total for scan execution type programs 40 ms to 50 ms e Execution time for low speed execution
578. y perform the request Or change the file name and then perform the request Review the capacity of the designated file Or sort the designated drive memory and re perform Check the designated cluster No and access by designating a cluster No within the number of clusters of the designated drive memory Do not make requests which caused an error to the designated drive memory Re perform after the elapse of an arbitrary time period Check the designated device name Check the designated device No Check the method for qualification of the designated device Do not write data to the designated device or turn it ON OFF APPENDICES Error Code Hexadecimal 4040H 4041H 4042H 4043H 4044H 4045H 4046H 4050H 4051H 4052H 4053H 4054H Special function module designation error Protect error Error Contents The designated special function module cannot perform the request contents Access range exceeds the buffer memory range of the designated special function module Access to the designated special function module is not possible The special function module is not at the designated position A control bus error has occurred Setting required for simulation has not been made The head number of the device or the number of device points designated for simulation is not in 16 point units Request contents cannot be performed because the write prot
579. y slot not performed 4 When A6 O B or A5 O B is used be sure to set to a single extension level f it is set to the number of skipped stages 16 points slot are assigned to all of skipped stages x 8 slots and thus it does not work 5 Items 2 to 3 can be changed by the I O assignment Refer to Section 5 3 3 3 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION mms EL SECON System configuration Maximum number of extension stages Maximum number of I O modules Maximum number of I O points Main base unit model name Extension base unit model name Extension cable model name Precautions I O number assignment When I O assignment is not performed b Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU S1 system When the A1S6 O B S1 A1S5 O B S1 extension base is used The following shows an example that the 16 point When the A6 O B A5 0O B extension base is used The following shows an example that the 64 point o module is installed to each slot module is installed to each slot Main base Slot No unit A1S38B 0 1 Main base module A1S38B Oo 1 3 4 5 6 7 SiotNo 2 3 4 Extension cable c 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 P to to te to to to to to U OF 1F 2F 3F14F SF 6F 7F stage UNIT Extension base module A1 58B 1 1 ER 11 2 o oM 2 8 amp 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Power supply module Power supply module CPU module to to
580. y the number of times set by the peripheral device after the S TRA instruction is executed This relay is reset by executing the STRAR instruction e The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when the ZCOM instruction and data communication request batch processing are executed used when the scan time exceeds 200 ms e Switched on during sampling trace pan OFF STOP not in effect STOP in effect OFF Sampling trace in progress Sampling trace completed ON OFF Does not reset WDT ON Resets WDT a Trace not in progress Trace in progress OFF Sampling trace suspended ON Sampling trace started e Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned ON Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF e When SM701 is OFF characters up to NULL 00H code are output e When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction e Switched ON when program transfer is requested Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete e When SM1052 is ON the SEG instruction is executed as an I O partial refresh instruction When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed as a 7 SEG display instruction Output until NULL code encountered 16 characters output Enabled Disable 7ZSEG segment display I O partial refresh STEP RUN not in effect ON STEP RUN in effect OFF Not completed Completed e Switched on w
581. ype Leakage current gt module to the load is great then it may Example timer the time limit have leakage current by line capacity It is necessary to take precautions Resistance 5 fluctuates Triac output The constant value of resistor should be calculated according to the load 22 50 22 TROUBLESHOOTING Table22 3 Faults in the output circuit MELSEC QnA a Situation Cause Countermeasure Load does not turn OFF Example Transistor 6 output with clamp diode When an external switch is connected in parallel between the output and common the voltage between Y1 and COM1 drops to between 0 and 24V even though the output Y1 which is not connected to the Example external switch is OFF 7 Especially when the load L2 is relatively small Load current of several mA only such as LED lamps and photocouplers the outputs drop A1SY40 A1SY41 A1SY42 e Sneak path due to the use of two power supplies A1SY40 41 42 Output module 12 24V Y2 can turn the load L3 on either from a PC or PB When PB is ON YO is ON with a PC and Y1 is OFF 1 L1 current a and L3 current b turn ON 2 A potential difference to COM1occurs in the emitter E of Tr1 to Tr3 since diode D1 is connected between COM1 and the emitter 3 The transistors A1SY40 to 42 etc are accompanied by a parasitic transistor Tr4 4 The potential difference described in 2 abo

Model Q2AS(H)CPU(S1)User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents